LABORATORY METHODS

OF

LNOKGANIC OHEMISTET

BY
HEINRICH BILTZ AND WILHELM BILTZ
UNIVERSITY KIEL UNIVERSITY GOTTINGEN

ADAPTED FROM THE GERMAN BY

WILLIAM T. HALL AND ARTHUR A. BLANCHARD
MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

SECOND EDITION

NEW YORK
JOHN WILEY & SONS
LOJTDON: CHAPMAN & HALL, LIMITED
1928
 COPYRIGHT, 1909, 1928,
BY
WILLIAM T. HALL AND ARTHUR A. BLANCHARD

Printed in U. S. A.
Printing Composition and Plates Binding
P. H . GILSOH CO. TECHNICAL COMPOSITION CO. STANHOPE B I N D E R ?
BOSTON CAMBRIDGE BOSTON
 AUTHORS' PREFACE.

THIS book outlines a course of laboratory work which is essen-

tially synthetic in nature and is designed to aid in acquiring a
more adequate knowledge of inorganic chemistry than is to be
obtained by practice in chemical analysis alone. The need of
supplementing the work of analytical chemistry in such a way
has indeed been recognized in most chemical laboratories of the
German technical schools and universities, in fact such instruction
still persists as a part of the classic method of teaching chemistry.
To-day a training according to these lines is considered de-
sirable even for those students with whom chemistry is a minor
subject. It has been the aim of the authors to enlarge the
choice of suitable experiments by publishing the procedures
which they have tested and found satisfactory in their own
laboratories in the course of a number of years' experience.
The experimental part of the book is given in relatively com-
plete detail, because in our opinion this does not materially
lessen the self-reliance of the student, who has, as a rule, but a
limited time at his disposal. The beginner obtains ample oppor-
tunity for acquiring manipulative skill and for exercising inge-
nuity, in the carrying out of the work and in modifying and
improving the directions to correspond to the facilities at hand;
others who need particular preparations as starting material for
further investigation can appreciate directions in which technical
difficulties are guarded against.
To aid in the study of the theoretical relations brief general
discussions are interspersed throughout the book as well as ref-
erences to the original literature and the text-books of inorganic
and theoretical chemistry which should be freely consulted.
As regards the arrangement of the material, we have departed
from the disposition which is common to-day of treating the
compounds in connection with the groups of elements. We have
chosen to base the classification upon the different types of
ui
IV AUTHORS' PREFACE.

combination, and thereby have returned to the older usage.

Among the early authors Thdnard in 1813 writes: "La methode,
que fai constamment suivie, consiste a proceder du simple au com-
pose, du connu a I'inconnu, a reunir dans un mime groupe tous les
corps analogues, et a les itudier d'abord d'une maniere generate et
ensuite d'une maniere particuliire." Gmelin in 1817, however,
took a different stand and in his "Handbuch" arranged the com-
pounds according to the elements, and thus introduced the sys-
tem of classification which has been followed by nearly all of his
successors. Even to-day Gmelin's reasons for departing from
the older method of treatment probably hold equally well as
regards elementary books for beginners; the older method scatters
the compounds of a single element in such a way that the student
fails to get a distinct, coherent picture. This book, however, is
intended primarily for those who have passed beyond the more
elementary stage in their study of chemistry, so that it does not
seem to us to be too daring to make the experiment as to how
well our modern, inorganic chemistry will fit into the older
framework. It seems as if thereby, aside from the old advan-
tage of a better comprehension of analogous methods of prep-
aration and analogous properties, there results a particularly
intimate amalgamation of experimental and theoretical chemistry,
for in this way we advance, as it were, from a "one compo-
nent system" to one of "several components." A similar return
to the older method of classification is to be found, for example,
in the second part of the Modern Chemistry by Sir W. Ramsey;
in the arrangement adopted by A. Werner and P. Pfeiffer in the
Inorganic Abstracts in R. Meyer's Jahrbuch der Chemie; and in
A. Werner's Neuere Anschauungen auf dem Gebiete der anor-
ganischen Chemie. This system was also outlined by one of us in
a lecture on Complex Compounds delivered in Gottingen in 1903-
1904.
The method of arrangement chosen often separates prepara-
tions which are closely related to one another, as for example
where one is used as starting material for the formation of the
other; to show these relations the "Dependent Preparation"
is noted at the end of many of the procedures. In the last
chapter, which treats of compounds of the rarer elements, we
have departed from our chosen system of classification because
 AUTHORS' PREFACE. V

in this case the question of raw material for the preparation of

the individual compounds is of chief importance, and here the
characterization of the element in question is at present of more
importance than the type of combination.
The instructor will at once notice on glancing through these
pages that for a rapid and successful carrying out of the pro-
cesses certain requirements are to be met as regards apparatus
and laboratory facilities; these should at all times be available
for the student's use.
The experiments necessary for working out and testing the
methods prescribed were carried out during the last eight years
with the aid of students at the University of Kiel, and to some
extent at the Universities of Gottingen and Clausthal. Published
processes have frequently been changed or improved according to
our experience, though no doubt it will still be found that the
directions and yields can be further improved.
 TRANSLATORS' PREFACE.

FOR some time previous to the appearance of the German

edition of this book, the translators had been convinced of the
value of laboratory work in Inorganic Preparations as a basis for
the teaching of the general principles of chemistry. In fact one
of the translators had just published a more elementary text of
this character which was designed especially for first-year stu-
dents at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.1
The German text has, in the main, been faithfully followed,
although a few minor changes have been made to adapt the
book for the use of English-speaking students. The German
authors have not only cooperated by carefully reading the
proof sheets but they have also furnished the revisions and
additions which they intend to incorporate in the Second Ger-
man Edition.
The book applies especially to the more advanced college or
university students who would broaden the scope of their train-
ing in inorganic chemistry beyond that obtained from courses in
qualitative and quantitative analysis. It might be studied with
equal advantage, simultaneously with, or following, the more
advanced work in analytical chemistry.
In addition to the usefulness of this book to students, it should
prove of value to manufacturing chemists, for although the
working directions in the book are given for preparations strictly
on the laboratory scale, still the direct bearing of the principles
and theories of physical chemistry upon the efficiency of the
chemical processes is brought out in a manner which would
apply on a large as well as on a small scale.
The second edition contains numerous changes that have been
made in the third and fourth editions of the German text as well
as some other improvements, including a discussion of the periodic
classification of the elements.
1
Blanchard and Phelan: Synthetic Inorganic Chemistry, Third Edition,
1924.
vii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE
INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON LABORATORY PRACTICE 1

CHAPTER I.
The Periodic Classification of the Elements 9
The Elements 14
REDUCTION OF OXIDES WITH CARBON 15
1. Lead from Lead Oxide 15
ALUMINOTHERMY 16
2. Manganese from Pyrolusite 17
3. Chromium from Chromic Oxide 18
4. Crystallized Silicon 19
5. "Crystallized Boron" 20
REDUCTION WITH POTASSIUM CYANIDE 20
6. Tin from Cassiterite; Melting-Point Determination 20
7. Pure Antimony from Basic Antimony Chloride 22
REDUCTION WITH AQUEOUS REDUCING AGENTS 23
8. Selenium Dioxide and Pure Selenium from Crude Selenium... 23
9. Extraction of Gold 23
DESULPHURIZATION OF SULPHIDES BY THE PRECIPITATION PROCESS. 25
10. Antimony from Stribnite 25
11. Mercury from Cinnabar; Sodium and Ammonium Amalgams. 25
ROASTING PROCESSES 26
12. Lead from Galena 26
CUPELLATION 26
13.. Pure Silver from Coin Metal 26
METALS BY ELECTROLYSIS 28
14. Lithium from Fused Lithium Chloride 28

CHAPTER II.
Changes of Condition 32
POLYMERIZATION AND DISSOCIATION 32
ALLOTROPY 33
15. Allotropy of Silver Sulphide ' 34
16. Allotropic Modifications of Sulphur 35
17. Transformation Point of Cuprous Mercuriiodide and of Silver
Mercuriiodide 37
ix
X TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE
THE PASSIVE CONDITION 38
18. Passive Iron 38
AMORPHOUS STATE 38
19. Amorphous Sulphur 39
COLLOIDAL STATE 39
ADSORPTION COMPOUNDS 41
20. Colloidal Platinum, according to Bredig 42
21. Colloidal Antimony Sulphide 43
22. Adsorption of Iodine by Charcoal; Adsorption Curve 44
23. Lanthanum Blue 45
24. Molybdenum Blue 46
25. Colloidal Gold Solutions; Precipitating Colloids and Protec-
tive Colloids 47
26. Hydrogels as Semipermeable Membranes 49

CHAPTER III.
Simple Compounds 51
OXIDES 56
27. Liquid Sulphur Dioxide 56
28. Sulphur Trioxide by the Contact Process 58
Oxidation of Naphthalin with Sulphuric Acid 59
29. Nitrogen Dioxide — Detection of its Association and Dis-
sociation 61
30. Chromic Oxide in the Dry Way from a Chromate 63
31. Cuprous Oxide 63
HYDRIDES 63
32. Cerium Hydride 64
33. Copper Hydride 65
ACIDS, BASES, AND SALTS 65
(a) Acids and Bases 69
34. Physico-chemical Detection of Electrolytic Dissociation 69
35. Hydrobromic Acid — Hydriodic Acid 70
36. Thallous and Thallic Hydroxides 72
(6) Halogen Compounds 73
37. Cupric and Cuprous Bromides 73
38. Cuprous Chloride 74
39. Potassium Iodide — Iodine from Iodide Residues 74
40. Barium Chloride from Witherite 77
41. Manganous Chloride from Waste Manganese Liquors 77
42. Anhydrous Ferric Chloride; Preparation of Chlorine 77A
43. Anhydrous Ferrous Chloride; Preparation of Hydrogen
Chloride 77C
44. Anhydrous Chromium Trichloride 77D
45. Sulphur Chloride, S2C12 77E
46. Chlorides of Phosphorus 77F
47. Chlorides of Antimony 77H
 TABLE OF CONTENTS XI
PAGE
48. Iodides of Bismuth 771
49. Bismuth Tribromide; Boiling-Point Determination 77J
50. Tin Tetraohloride 79
51. Silicon Tetrachloride 80
52. Titanium Tetrachloride from Rutile 81
53. Anhydrous Titanium Trichloride 84
(c) Sulphides 85
54. Phosphorus Pentasulphide; Thermoelectric Determination
of the Boiling-Point 85
55. Black Mercuric Sulphide; Transformation into Cinnabar 88
56. Sulphides of Tin 88
57. Green Manganese Sulphide 89
58. Titanium Disulphide 90
(d) Nitrides 91
59. Hydrogen Cyanide, Mercuric Cyanide, Cyanogen, and Dithio-
oxamide 91
60. Boron Nitride 94
61. Magnesium Nitride; Ammonia from the Atmosphere 94
62. Chromium Nitride 96
(e) Phosphides 96
63. Magnesium Phosphide 96
(/) Carbides 97
64. Calcium Carbide; Acetylene from Calcium Carbide; Benzene
from Acetylene 97

CHAPTER IV.
Compounds Containing a Complex Negative Component 99
COMPOUNDS WITH HOMOGENEOUS COMPLEXES 101
(o) Peroxides 101
65. Sodium Peroxide 101
66. Barium Peroxide 102
67. Hydrogen Peroxide 103
(b) .Polysulphides 106
68. Ammonium Pentasulphide 106
(c) Polyhalides 107
69. Ammonium Tribromide 107
70. Law of Distribution; Proof of the Existence of Potassium
Tribromide and Potassium Tri-iodide 108
71. Rubidium Iodine Tetrachloride; Rubidium Tri-iodide; Potas-
sium-iodine Tetrachloride Ill
(d) Polynitrides 112
72. Sodium Hydrazoate from Sodamide 112
OXYACIDS AND THEIR SALTS 113
(o) Cyanates 113
73. Potassium Cyanate; Urea from Ammonium Cyanate 113
XU TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
(b) Oxy-halogen Acids and their Salts 114
74. Electrolytic Production of Sodium Hypochlorite and Potas-
sium Chlorate 114
75. Potassium Perchlorate 118
76. Iodic Acid and Iodic Anhydride; "Time Reaction" 119
77. Potassium Iodate from Potassium Chlorate 120
78. Potassium Bromate and Potassium Bromide 121
(c) Nitrites and Nitrates 121
79. Sodium Nitrite from Sodium Nitrate 121
80. Potassium Nitrate from Sodium Nitrate 122
81. Silver Nitrate 123
82. Bismuth Nitrate and Basic Bismuth Nitrate 124
(d) Manganates and Ferrates 124
83. Potassium Permanganate by the Fusion Method 124
84. Electrolytic Preparation of Potassium Permanganate 125
85. Barium Ferrate 126
(e) Oxyacids of Sulphur and their Salts 126
86. Sulphuric Acid from Pyrite by the Chamber Process 128
87. Reduction of Barium Sulphate and Preparation of Barium
Nitrate 129
88. Antimony Sulphate 129
89. Alum from Kaolin 130
90. Sodium Thiosulphate 131
91. Barium Dithionate 131
92. Sodium Tetrathionate 132
93. Hyposulphurous Acid 132
94. Potassium Persulphate, Electrolytically 133
(f) Carbonates 134
95. Sodium Carbonate (Ammonia-Soda Process) 134
(g) Acids and Salts of Phosphorus 135
96. Barium Hypophosphite 135
97. Phosphorous Acid 136
THIOACIDS AND THEIE SALTS 137
98. Potassium Trithiocarbonate Solution (Reagent for N i c k e l ) . . . . 137
99. Barium Trithiocarbonate 137
100. Sodium Thioantimonate 138
101. Potassium Ferric Sulphide 139
102. Ammonium Copper Tetrasulphide 139
COMPLEX HALOGEN ACIDS AND THEIR SALTS. COMPLEX CYANOGEN
COMPOUNDS 140
103. Hydrofluosilicic Acid 142
104. Potassium Titanium Fluoride 143
105. Ammonium Plumbic Chloride. Lead Tetrachloride 143
106. Potassium Lead Iodide 144
107. Potassium Mercuric Iodide 145
108. Potassium Cobalticyanide 146
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xili
PAGE
109. Hydroferrocyanic Acid 146
110. Cobaltous Salt of Hydromercurithiocyanic Acid 147
111. Potassium Cobaltothiocyanate 147
112. Cadmium Iodide (Autocomplex Compound) 148
NITBITO ACIDS AND THEIB SALTS 149
113. Potassium Mercurinitrite 149
114. Sodium Cobaltinitrite; Potassium Cobaltmitrile 149
115. Potassium Tetranitrito-diammine-cobaltate 150
HETEBOPOLY ACIDS AND THEIB SALTS 151
116. Ammonium Phosphomolybdate 152
117. Silicotungstic Acid 152
OBGANOCOMPLEX C O M P O U N D S 153
118. Potassium Ferric Oxalate; Platinotypes 153
119. Optical Rotation of Uranyl Lsevo-malate 154

CHAPTER V.

Compounds Containing a Complex Positive Component 155

AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS AND SUBSTITUTED AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS . . 156
120. Dissociation of Ammonium Chloride 156
121. Hydroxylamine Sulphate; Hydroxylaminedisulphonate of
Potassium; Acetoneoxime 156
122. Hydrazine Sulphate; Monochloramine 158
123. Semicarbazide Hydrochloride 161
124. Millon's Base 162
METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS 163
125. Silver-ammonia Sulphate 169
126. Tetramminecupric Sulphate and Ammonium Cupric Sul-
phate 170
127. Tetramminecupric Chloride 170
128. Hexamminenickelous Bromide 171
129. Carbonatotetramminecobaltic Nitrate 172
130. Chloropentamminecobaltic Chloride from the preceding 172
131.. Chloropentamminecobaltic Chloride from Cobalt Carbonate.. 173
132. Sulphate and Nitrate of the Chloropentammine Series 174
133. Hexamminecobaltic Salts (Luteocobalt Salts) 175
134. Aquopentamminecobaltic Salts (Roseocobalt Salts) 177
135. Dibromotetramminecobaltic Bromide (Dibrompraseo Salt).. 179
136. Dinitritotetramminecobaltic Salts (Flavocobalt Salts) 179
137. Dinitritotetramminecobaltic Chloride (Croseocobalt Salt). . . 180
138. Comparison of the Isomeric Dinitritotetramminecobaltic
Salts 181
139. Trinitritotriammine Cobalt 183
140. Hexamminechromic Nitrate and Chloropentamminechromic
Chloride 184
141. Hexamminecobaltous Chloride 185
XIV TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE
142. a-Diamminedichlorocobalt 187
143. /3-Diamminedichlorocobalt 188
HYDRATES 188
144. Melting-Point Maximum for Magnesium Nitrate Hexahydrate;
Eutectic Mixture of Barium Chloride Dihydrate and Water 191
145. Calcium Sulphate Hemihydrate 195
146. Hydrates of Sodium Sulphate; Supersaturated Solutions.... 196
147. Transition Point of Sodium Sulphate 197
148. Isomeric Chromic Chloride Hydrates 199

CHAPTER VI.
Complex Non-Electrolytes 201
ACID CHLORIDES 201
149. Sulphuric Acid Dichloride and Sulphuric Acid Monochloride. 201
150. Pyrosulphuric Acid Chloride 204
151. Sulphurous Acid Chloride (Thionyl Chloride) 204
152. Nitrosylsulphuric Acid 206
ESTERS 207
153. Ethyl Nitrate 208
154. Amyl Nitrite and Methyl Nitrite 209
155. Symmetrical Diethyl Sulphite 209
156. Unsymmetrical Diethyl Sulphite 211
157. Triethyl Phosphate. 212
158. Tetraethyl Silicate 213
METAL-ORGANIC COMPOUNDS 213
159. Zinc Ethyl 214
160. Lead Tetraphenyl by Grignard's Reagent; Diphenyl-lead
Iodide 215
161. Nickel Carbonyl 217

CHAPTER VII.
Preparation of Compounds of the Rare Elements from Their
Minerals 219
162. Lithium Carbonate from Lepidolite, Petalite or Spodumene.
Spectroscopic Tests for Rubidium and Other Metals 219
163. Beryllium Hydroxide from Beryl 221
164. Basic Beryllium Acetate 222
165. Columbium and Tantalum Compounds from Columbite 223
166. Molybdenum Compounds from Molybdenite 224
167. Tungsten Compounds from Wolframite 229
168. Working up of Pitchblende and Testing for Radioactivity.... 231
169. Uranium Compounds 234
170. Thorium Compounds from Monazite 236
 TABLE OP CONTENTS. XV
PAGE
171. Separation of the Rare Earths 239
Cerium Compounds 242
Lanthanum Compounds 244
Didymium Compounds 246
INDEX 247
 LABOKATOBY METHODS
OF

INORGANIC CHEMISTRY.

INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON LABORATORY

PRACTICE.
1. Heating.
FOR heating and melting solid substances crucibles made of
porcelain, difficultly-fusible clay, or iron are used. Small cruciblea
may be heated with a Bunsen burner (700°) or, for higher tem-
peratures, with the Miincke, Meker or Teclu burner (800°) or over
a blast lamp; for long heating with the latter it is sometimes
convenient to have a water pump arranged to furnish an air blast.
In order to obtain a uniform temperature of about 1000° small

Kg. 1.

crucibles may be surrounded with a clay mantle or a gas muffle

furnace can be used. Larger crucibles can be placed inside a piece
of iron stovepipe or an inverted flowerpot with its hole enlarged.
Large crucibles may be heated reasonably hot with a Fletcher
burner by using such an insulating mantle to prevent some of the
loss of heat by radiation; or to about 1200° in a gas furnace.
1
 INTRODUCTORY.

If an abundant air blast is available at a fairly steady pressure,

the most convenient and useful form of furnace is the gas
furnace, Fig. 1, made of fire clay supported by a casing of
sheet iron, into which the flame from a large blast lamp is
admitted through a hole near the bottom. In the absence of an
air blast, gasolene blowpipes, similar to those commonly used by
plumbers, serve almost as well as the gas blast lamps. The use
of charcoal furnaces is inexpensive and to be recommended even
at the present day. Such a furnace is shown in Fig. 2, one-tenth
its natural size. It is made of sheet iron and is about 250 cm.
high and 280 cm. wide. Larger furnaces may be built of fire
brick and connected with the chimney of the building. The
fire in such a furnace can be started with some glowing charcoal
which has been heated before the blast lamp; the furnace is then
fed with layers of charcoal and coke and finally with coke alone.

Fig. 2. Fig. 3.

For heating substances in glass or porcelain tubes, a flame

spreader placed on an ordinary Bunsen burner is used when only
short lengths are to be heated; for longer stretches a row burner,
as shown in Fig. 3, is employed, and to retain the heat a cover of
asbestos board can be supported just above the tube by means of
wires. The three supports for the tube can be protected by
wrapping wet asbestos pulp about them, pressing it firmly into
position and allowing it to dry. For higher temperatures over a
considerable length of tube a combustion furnace, such as is used
 HEATING.

in organic ultimate analysis, is suitable. Very high temperatures

may be obtained with the blast lamp if the part of the tube to
be heated is surrounded by an asbestos chamber like that shown
in Fig. 4. The bottom of the chamber should measure about
10 X 16 cm. and the height about 13 cm. In the bottom is a
large hole for the flame of the blast lamp to enter; in the two
end walls are holes through which the tube to be heated just
fits. As a cover, a piece of asbestos board serves, which is
loosely laid on top of the box and is provided near the four
corners with round holes of 2 cm. diameter. The box is held
together by means of wire fastenings. For heating long tubes

Fig. 4. ;. 6.

to very high temperatures, a Mitscherlich tube furnace can be

used which is 50 cm. long and is made of sheet iron lined with
fire-clay.
For providing and maintaining constant temperatures, up to
1500°, the platinum electrical resistance furnace, and for tem-
peratures above 2000° the carbon resistance furnace, are invalu-
able. Although such furnaces would be very convenient for
some of the preparations described in the following pages, they
may be dispensed with on account of their high price.
Many different forms of apparatus have been devised for
uniformly heating flasks and similar vessels to moderate temper-
atures. Besides sand baths, Babo's boiling funnel (Fig. 5),
which is capable of wide application, and nickel air baths, are
particularly to be recommended.
When liquids are to be boiled for a considerable length of
time, the flask should be provided with a condenser or a wide
glass tube held either vertically or inclined so that vapors will
condense and the liquid run back into the flask. This is known
as heating with a reflux condenser.
4 INTRODUCTORY.

2. Evaporation.
Large quantities of solutions are concentrated in evaporating
dishes, which give a large surface for the escape of vapors from
the liquid. They should be heated, unless otherwise directed,
with a free flame without wire gauze or asbestos; but the flame
should never be allowed to come in contact with the dry upper
part of the dish, as in that case superheating would ensue which
might result in the breaking of the dish or in the decomposition
of the solid material that separates on the sides. Thus as the
concentration progresses the flame must be lowered or the evap-
oration finished on the water bath. Small quantities of liquid can
also be boiled down in beakers; but if this is done it is advisable
to avoid bumping by stirring or by adding to the liquid such
substances as small splinters of wood, bits of unglazed porcelain, or
of pumice, or, best of all, some of Siwoloboff's capillaries.1

3. Crystallization.
When crystals are to be obtained from a solution, it is often
necessary before the evaporation is finished to filter from impuri-
ties. For this purpose an ordinary plaited filter* is used
which is placed in a short-stemmed funnel. In case the crystals
separate rapidly, a Buchner funnel with suction is employed.
For strongly corrosive liquids, hardened filter paper must be
used or, often better still, a felt of asbestos fibers; the latter is
made by suspending the asbestos in water and pouring the sus-
pension on to the perforated bottom of a Buchner funnel, or
Gooch crucible, and drawing firmly in place by suction. Crys-
tallization will take place on cooling if the solubility of the
material decreases with sinking temperature, otherwise by
evaporation at a moderate heat, or at the room temperature in
a desiccator. Impure crusts tend to form around the sides of
the dish at the surface of the liquid; to prevent this as much as
possible, dishes with perpendicular walls (beakers or glass crystal-
lizing dishes) should be used. If this expedient is not success
ful, the crystals are collected by themselves and the crusts dis-

1 Chem.-Ztg. 19, 304 (1895).

2
Filters of hardened paper are more expensive and allow the filtrate to
flow more slowly than those of common paper, but they retain even the
finest precipitates and are thus at times indispensable.
 DISTILLATION. 5

solved again in the mother liquor. By slow crystallization,

especially with a deep body of solution, large crystals are
obtained; by more rapid cooling, as by shaking the solution in a
flask under running cold water, a crystalline meal is obtained
which, because it contains less mother liquor inclosed between
the crystal layers, is purer, although of less characteristic form (dis-
turbed crystallization).
4. Suction.
Coarse crystals can be separated from the mother liquor by
sucking the mass through an ordinary funnel in which is placed
a small glass marble. If a few small crystals should run through
at first, the liquor containing them is poured a second time
through the funnel. Even fine crystals and powdery precipi-
tates can be filtered clear if a thin cord of asbestos fibers is laid
around the marble. The suction funnels of R. Hirsch and of
Buchner are also much used, for all sizes of which hardened
filters, which do not, like common filter paper, lose their fibers,
are to be obtained in the market.
If the material on the filter dissolves but slowly, it can be
washed with water, or with the liquid used for the crystallizing
medium if it is other than water; substances that dissolve more
readily may be washed with suitably diluted solvents, for example,
with mixtures of alcohol and water and finally with pure alcohol.

5. Distillation.1
For distilling ordinary liquids, flasks are used; for substances
which solidify easily retorts are more suitable and these in the case
of high-boiling materials, may be covered with folded asbestos
paper in order to keep in the heat. The use of a condenser is
usually superfluous when distilling high-boiling substances from
retorts; in distilling low-boiling materials a condenser of suit-
able length should be joined to the distilling flask with a cork
stopper (Fig. 6), although sometimes the connection is left open;
or a short condenser may be slipped over the neck of the
distilling flask itself and made tight with corks or with pieces
of rubber tubing (Fig. 7). In the case of substances that boil
1
For fuller details regarding distillation, especially of organic liquids,
see text-books on Organic Chemical Preparations.
 INTRODUCTORY.

somewhat higher, a glass tube about the size of one's finger

simply slipped over the side arm of the distilling flask serves as
an ai* condenser (Fig. 8). If bad smelling or corrosive gases

Fig. 6.

Fig. 7.

are produced during the distillation, a suction bottle fitted to

the condenser tube is used as receiver and the side arm of the
bottle is connected to a tube which leads into the ventilating
flue of the hood.
 DISTILLATION. 7

If the vapors attack cork the apparatus can be made tight

with wads of asbestos fibers pressed into the joints, an expedient
which often yields excellent service.
For determining the boiling-point of the substance a ther-
mometer should be inserted in the neck of the distilling flask, or

Fig. 8.

in the tubulus of the retort, in such a way that its bulb will be
entirely surrounded by the vapors (Figs. 6 and 8); thus with a
distilling flask the bulb should reach to the lower part of the
neck. It is best to use thermometers so short that the mercury
column will remain entirely within the vapor. The thermome-
ter shows at the beginning a temperature somewhat too low
because some time is necessary to heat it to the temperature
of the vapor; toward the end the reading becomes a little too
high on account of the vapor in the nearly empty flask becoming
superheated. Both of these facts are to be borne in mind when
judging of the purity of a substance. Concerning fractional
distillation, which is seldom of importance in making inorganic
preparations, see the preparation of acid chlorides and esters,
Chap. VI.
For vacuum distillation, use an apparatus similar to that shown
in Fig. 6 on page 6. The rubber stopper of the distilling flask,
besides carrying the thermometer, should be provided with a
8 INTRODUCTORY.
narrow piece of glass tubing, open at the top where it rises above
the stopper, and at the bottom ending in a long capillary reaching
nearly to the bottom of the flask. During the distillation, tiny
bubbles of air enter the flask, pass through the liquid and prevent
bumping. The stream of air is regulated by means of a screw
clamp on a short piece of rubber tubing which is placed at the top
end of the open tube. The arm of the heavy suction flask which
is used as receiver should be connected with a manometer and with
a suction pump. In spite of the fact that a little air is constantly
entering the flask during the distillation, it is easy to get the
pressure reduced to 10-18 mm. by the use of a good water pump.
Very volatile substances, such as sulphur dioxide, can be con-
densed in common gas wash bottles, with ground-glass joints,
by means of a freezing mixture. When enough liquid has con-
densed in the wash bottle so that the entrance tube dips beneath
its surface, the further condensation takes place very readily. If
the preparation is to be preserved, it is distilled into a thick-walled
glass tube, of the shape of a test tube, which is drawn down at
its upper end so that when filled it can be sealed by the blast
flame (Fig. 12, p. 58). Or, the substance can be poured into a
sealing flask the neck of which is of about the thickness of a lead
pencil, and can be readily melted together.

6. Pulverizing.
Minerals that are to serve as the raw materials for the various
preparations should, if possible, be bought in powdered form,
since the crushing of large masses in the laboratory is extremely
laborious. If the pulverizing must be undertaken, the material
should be ground in small portions and from time to time the fine
powder should be sifted from the coarse by means of wire gauze or
a sieve.
7. Drying of Rinsed Vessels.
When directions call for a dry vessel, it is sometimes the practice
to rinse the vessel with water, then with alcohol and finally with
ether, assuming that the ether will evaporate quickly and leave
a dry vessel. This method is unsatisfactory. It is far better to
dry the vessel, after rinsing it with several small portions of al-
cohol, by moving it back and forth over a small flame while
applying suction through a tube reaching to the bottom of the
vessel. Instead of suction, a gentle air blast can be used.
 CHAPTER I.

THE ELEMENTS.

THE PERIODIC CLASSIFICATION OF THE ELEMENTS.

THE periodic recurrence of properties among the elements has
been of the greatest service to the practical chemist in classifying
the elements. From the very outset scientists recognized that
this periodicity indicated that all elements were built up according
to some definite plan out of some primordial material. Advances
in knowledge during the past few decades have not, it is true,
revealed the ultimate nature of this primordial material, but they
have indicated very clearly some features of the systematic scheme
according to which atoms of the different elements are built from
electrons and protons, the atoms of negative and positive electricity.
The periodic classification of the elements becomes much more
enlightening when it is arranged in accordance with our present
ideas of the structure of the atom. In the following chart the
number accompanying each element is the atomic number. This
is approximately the serial number when the elements are arranged
in the order of their atomic weights, but its deeper significance is
that it represents the number of unit positive charges of the
nucleus of the atom.
We will outline briefly the modern conception of the structure
of the atom: Electricity, like matter, is atomic in nature and
consists of two kinds of atoms, -protons which are probably identical
with the hydrogen ion (they have the mass of the hydrogen atom
and the unit positive charge of the hydrogen ion) and electrons which
are of insignificant mass f r^jc that of the hydrogen atom ) and
have an equal but opposite charge to that of the hydrogen ion.
The nuclei of atoms consist of aggregates of protons and elec-
trons (except the nucleus of hydrogen which consists of a single
proton), with the number of protons in excess of the number of
electrons so that the net charge is always positive and an even
9
ELECTRON GROUPS IN
PERIODS BUILT ON STABLE KERNELS.
STABLE KERNELS.
1 1 2
o H H He

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
He 2 He Li Be B C N 0 Ne
F
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Ne 2-8 Mg Al P Cl
Ne Na Si S A

Ni/3
2-8-8

2-8-18
18
A
28
19
K
29
20
Ca
30
21
Sc
31
22
Ti
32
23
V
33
24
Cr
34
25
Mn
35
26
Fe
36
27
Co
28
Ni 1
Ni/3 Cu Zn Ga Ge As Se Br Kr

Kr

Pd/3
2-8-18-8

2-8-18-18
36
Kr
46
37
Rb
47
38
Sr
48
39
Y
49
40
Zr
50
41
Cb
51
42
Mo
52
43

53
•44
Ru
54
45
Rh
46
Pd 1
Pd/3 Ag Cd In Sn Sb Te I Xe

54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 1
Xe 2-8-18-18-8
Xe Cs Ba La Ce Pr Nd Sa Eu Gd Tb Ho Dy Er Tm Yb
68 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
Er/3 2-8-18-32-8 Lu Hf Ta W Os Ir Pt
Er/3
78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
Pt/3 2-8-18-32-18 Pt0 Au Tl Pb Bi RaF
Hg Nt
86 87 88 89 90 91 92
Nt 2-8-18-32-18-8 Ra Ac Th Ux2 U
Nt

Symbol enclosed in heavy lines —the kernel never acquires the form of an inert gas or a beta kernel
Symbol enclosed in light double lines — the kernel sometimes acquires the form of an inert gas or a beta kernel
Symbol enclosed in a light single line — the kernel is usually or invariably of the form of an inert gas or a beta kernel
 PERIODIC CLASSIFICATION OP THE ELEMENTS. 11
multiple of the charge of the proton. Speculations regarding the
structure of the nucleus have been made in abundance but have
shed little light as to the nature of the incredible forces that hold
the nucleus together, — for the nuclei are almost immutable, or
at least just as immutable as the elements. The nucleus possesses
practically the entire mass of the atom but its bulk is excessively
minute. It occupies a space in the center of the atom much as
the sun does in the center of the solar system and the relative bulk
is comparable.
Surrounding the nucleus are "planetary" electrons, equal in
number in the neutral atom to the number of unit charges of the
nucleus. These electrons are relatively as far removed from the
nucleus as the planets are from the sun.
The properties of the elements, both physical and chemical, with
the exception of mass, are believed to depend entirely on the
arrangement of the electrons around the nucleus. Mass depends
on the number of protons in the nucleus.
The arrangement of the planetary electrons is restricted to
conditions imposed by the so-called "quantum" theory which
deals with the relation between the emission and absorption of
radiant energy and the structure of matter. There is no known
law of physics which would determine the radius of the orbit of a
planet. A planet might fall into any orbit whatever, depending
solely on the energy it might happen to possess. Apparently the
atom differs from the solar system in this respect; the quantum
requirements limit the number of orbits into which the electrons
may fall so that the radii (or major axes of elliptic orbits) of the
possible orbits are to each other in proportion to the squares of the
simple integral numbers, that is, 1 : 4 : 9 : 16 : 25 . . .
Although physicists today are rather strongly committed to the
orbital theory, it may still be better to refer to the possible positions
of the electrons as levels (i.e., measured out from the nucleus).
The number of electrons which can occupy each level is what
determines the configuration of the atom and this in turn deter-
mines all the physical and chemical properties of the atom.
The maximum number of electrons which can occupy the suc-
ceeding levels is twice the square of the successive whole numbers
or 2, 8, 18, 32, 50 . . . . The mutual repulsion of electrons, how-
ever, counteracts the tendency for the nucleus to pull the maximum
12 THE ELEMENTS.
number into the various levels. To take a concrete example:
Xenon has an atomic number of 54, that is, the nucleus has 54
unit charges and the number of planetary electrons in the neutral
atom is 54. If the attraction of the nucleus were unopposed the
first three levels would be filled to 2, 8 and 18 electrons respec-
tively and the fourth layer would hold 26. Actually the first
three layers are held by the strong nuclear charge, but a fourth
layer of 26 is unstable and eight are driven out into a fifth layer
so that the configuration becomes XeM 2-8-18-18-8.
Now there is something inherently stable in layers having the
numbers 2, 8, 18, 32 . . . and to acquire these numbers very con-
siderable counter forces can be overcome in atom and molecule
building. The Xenon atom with layers all containing the stable
numbers and with the nuclear charge to just neutralize the elec-
trons in these layers, is an extremely stable structure. This
accounts for the chemical inertness of Xenon. Likewise the in-
ertness of the other rare gases is accounted for.
Elements are known with practically all the atomic numbers
from 1 to 92. With elements other than the inert gases the tend-
ency is to acquire layers in conformity to the nearest inert gas
atom, thus upsetting the electrical neutrality of the atom and
giving us an "ion." Thus cesium, Cs66, loses an electron and
becomes a cesium ion Cs+ when some atom such as chlorine is at
hand to take on the electron.
Chlorine Cli7 by taking on the electron acquires the structure
of argon A« 2-8-8 and thus becomes a negative ion Cl~.
The tendency for atoms to acquire an outer layer of eight where
this is in any way possible is very strong. This is often accom-
plished as just indicated through the formation of ions, but there
is another way which was first recognized by G. N. Lewis in 1916,
and which in fact smooths out most of the previously irreconcilable
differences between the conceptions of valence held by inorganic
and organic chemists. This is that the two layers of eight may be
filled by a small number of electrons simultaneously holding posi-
tions in the outer layers, or "octets," of two atoms. For example,
in the chlorine molecule CU we have the two atoms Cln 2-8-7 with
only 14 electrons out of which to make two octets. If two elec-
trons are held jointly in the outer layer or "sheath" of each atom,
the two octets are completed.
 PERIODIC CLASSIFICATION OF THE ELEMENTS. 13
These electrons held in common occupy a position between the
"kernels" of the two atoms and by their joint attraction for the
kernels hold the molecule together.
The kernel of an atom consists of the nucleus and all of the
layers except the outer layer. Those electrons in the outer layer
which belong to the neutral atom itself are usually referred to as
the "valence electrons."
The periods of the Periodic Classification comprise the elements
coming between any two of the successive inert gases. The first
two periods are short periods and comprise 8 elements each. The
properties of all elements of these periods are clearly seen to be
due to the tendency to revert to the structure of one or the other
of the nearest inert gases. The kernels of these elements are
invariable.
The elements near the beginning and end of the long periods
show clearly marked similarity to elements in the similar positions
in the short periods, their properties being derived from the ability
of the atom to acquire the configuration of the inert gas atom. In
the middle of the long periods, however, the number of electrons
to be gained or lost to acquire the inert gas structure is too great.
The number of electrons in the valence layer usually drops to two
or three and the rest of the electrons enter some one of the kernel
layers. For example, praseodymium Pr69 might be expected to
revert to the form of Xe64 2-8-18-18-8 and become quinque-
valent. As a matter of fact two electrons pass into the fourth
kernel layer to give Pr69 2-8-18-20-8-3, the 3 electrons of the
outer layer determining the valence. The tervalent ion Pr+++
is formed when three electrons are given to an element like chlo-
rine. The elements praseodymium to lutecium, 59-71, constitute
the so-called rare earth series. All have the nearly invariable
valence of three. They differ from one another simply by one
additional electron in the fourth kernel layer for each successive
element. They constitute what is called a "transition series."
With lutecium, however, the transition is complete and we have
the structure LU71 2-8-18-32-8-3 with stable kernel layers. In
the next element hafnium Hf72, the additional electron has to
remain in the valence layer as it cannot get into the layers con-
taining the stable numbers of 32 or 8. Hafnium has an invariable
valence of 4. Within the long periods are clearly recognizable
14 THE ELEMENTS.
subordinate periods which are spaced from the elements Ni, Pd,
Er, Pt, in the same way that the two short periods are spaced
from He and Ne. The number of electrons in each of these
elements is such as might give the following structures:
Ni28 2-8-18
Pd46 2-8-18-18
Er68 2-8-18-32-8
Pt78 2-8-18-32-18
These structures possess layers of inherent stability but the nuclear
charge is not great enough to hold the large outer layer of 18 or
the next to last of 32 against the repulsive forces. Given the
greater nuclear charge of the following atoms and these structures
become stable and consequently the succeeding elements revert
to those forms which are known as the beta forms or Ni/3, Pd/3,
Er/3 and Pt/3, respectively, and the subordinate periods are based
on these beta atoms in the same way that the major periods are
based on the inert gases.
THE ELEMENTS.
OCCUBBENCE. The relative amounts of the more common elements which
occur in the earth's surface, including the oceans and the atmosphere, are
shown by the following table compiled from statistics by F. W. Clarke:

Oxygen 49.78 Magnesium 2.24 Barium 0.09

Silicon 26.08 Hydrogen 0.95 Manganese 0.07
Aluminum 7.34 Titanium 0.37 Strontium 0.03
Iron 4.11 Chlorine 0.21 Nitrogen 0.02
Calcium 3.19 Carbon 0.19 Fluorine 0.02
Sodium 2.33 Phosphorus 0.11 Other elements.. 0.48
Potassium 2.28 Sulphur 0.11

It is noteworthy that certain well-known elements, which are important

from a purely chemical as well as from a technical standpoint, are less abund-
ant than others that have been studied less and are regarded as "rare";
such as, for example, titanium, which is widely distributed but usually occurs
only in small amounts.
The elements, with the exception of those contained in the atmosphere,
sulphur, and the so-called "noble" metals, are not as a rule found in a free
or uncombined state. The most important natural compounds are the oxides
and sulphides (e.g., of silicon, iron, zinc, lead, antimony, mercury), the halides
(e.g., of sodium, potassium, magnesium), and the salts containing oxygen
(silicates, sulphates and carbonates).
EXTRACTION. The free elements may be separated from one another,
and from impurities, by distillation. In this way the constituents of the
 LEAD FROM LEAD OXIDE. 15

atmosphere have been isolated, and sulphur is obtained from the associated
minerals. In other cases, the elements are dissolved out from mixtures by
means of suitable solvents, e.g., gold and silver by mercury.
OXIDES ABB REDUCED. The usual reducing agents are hydrogen, car-
bon or carbon monoxide (No. 1), aluminium (Nos. 2 to 5), magnesium,
sodium, potassium cyanide (Nos. 6 and 7), substances in solution, such as
sulphurous acid (No. 8) and finally the cathodic action of the electric current,
an agent of very general application. Sulphides are either changed to oxides
by roasting, or they are smelted with iron whereby the metal is formed in
the presence of a slag consisting chiefly of ferrous sulphide (Nos. 10, 11).
Halides may be decomposed by metallic sodium or the fused salts may be
electrolyzed (No. 14).
From salts containing oxygen, the elements are usually obtained by an
indirect method, as for example by first forming the oxides. Examples
of direct reduction, however, are the deposition of copper from copper sul-
phate solution by means of iron, the corresponding precipitation of silver
by copper, and the preparation of phosphorus by the reduction of acid cal-
cium phosphate with carbon at a high temperature.

REDUCTION OF OXIDES BY CABBON.

Technically, carbon is the most important reducing agent; its first
product of combustion, carbon monoxide, also has a reducing power since
it is readily oxidized further to carbon dioxide; in fact this latter action is
often the most important, as for example in the blast-furnace process for the
reduction of iron from its ores. An example of the action of carbon mon-
oxide at lower temperatures is the reduction of gold chloride solutions
(cf. No. 25). The dissociation of carbon dioxide at high temperatures,
2 CO2 = 2 CO + O2, takes place in opposition to the combustion of carbon
monoxide, 2 CO + O2 = 2 CO2. Accurate experiments have recently shown
that this dissociation becomes appreciable at above 1500° and increases
rapidly with further rise of temperature, with the result that the combustion
of carbon monoxide, and consequently its reducing effect, becomes dimin-
ished. This contradicts the opinion which formerly prevailed to the effect
that increase of temperature always favors such technical reduction processes.

1. Lead from Lead Oxide.

Place a mixture of 50 g. litharge and 3 g. of very fine, sifted,
wood-charcoal in a porcelain crucible, which is from two-thirds
to three-fourths filled thereby, cover the mixture with 3 g. of
powdered borax glass and heat strongly over the blast lamp.
When, after about half an hour, the reduction is complete, pour
the reduced lead upon an inverted porcelain crucible cover which
has been previously heated so that the hot lead will not crack it.
16 THE ELEMENTS.
Yield 40 to 45 g.; theoretically 46.4 g. This process is used
technically for recovering lead from litharge formed in cupel-
lation.1
Density Determination. Fasten a clean piece of lead weighing
from 5 to 10 g. in the loop of a hair, or silk thread. Determine
the weight of the lead in air (m), and the loss in weight (w) when
it is entirely submerged in water; then if Q is the density of water
at the temperature of the experiment2 and X = 0.0012 the density
of air, then d, the density of the lead, is given by the following
equation:

The density should be computed to not more than five significant

figures. The observations should be checked with the same
piece of lead, or with different pieces from the same preparation.
The density of lead is about 11.351.
The density of an element varies somewhat with the method of
preparation. Thus with antimony distilled in vacuum, d = 6.62;
pressed antimony, d = 6.69; gold distilled, d = 18.88, pressed at
10,000 atmospheres, d = 19.27fr.

ALUMINOTHERMY.
Metallic aluminium resists the action of water and the atmosphere, not
because the metal is difficult to oxidize, but on account of the fact that its
surface becomes covered with a thin, coherent layer of oxide which protects
it from further attack. If the formation of this layer of oxide upon the
aluminium is prevented by amalgamation, then the aluminium is rapidly
attacked. Aluminium vessels disintegrate quickly if they are amalgamated
with even a trace of mercury.
Remove the oil from 2 to 5 g. of aluminium powder by boiling
it with a little alcohol; pour off the latter, and cover the alu-
minium with a | % solution of mercuric chloride. After a few
minutes decant off the liquid and wash the powder several times
with water. Then cover the amalgamated metal with water and
allow it to stand. Within a short time there is an evolution
of hydrogen, the mass becomes heated until finally vapors of
steam arise, and white hydrated aluminium oxide is formed.
1
Cf. No. 13.
4
Cf. Tables of specific gravity.
 MANGANESE FROM PYROLUSITE. 17
It is upon this strong tendency of aluminium to oxidize that the
processes of aluminothermy are based.
Mixtures of aluminium and oxides react together energetically, whereby
the aluminium is converted into oxide and the metal which originally was in
the form of the oxide is set free. Since one gram of aluminium on com-
bustion yields over 7000 calories, almost as much as carbon, and because
there are no gaseous products of combustion formed which would, carry
away heat from the reaction mixture, the temperature is raised to considerably
above 2000° C.
A mixture of ferric oxide and aluminium, the "thermite" of commerce,
is used for the rapid production of high temperatures in a small space, thus
in welding, riveting, etc., by the Goldschmidt process. The aluminium
oxide separates out from the reaction in the form of a very hard crystalline
substance which can be used as an abrasive; often well-formed needle-like
crystals are to be found in the hollow spaces of the slag. Metals like man-
ganese (No. 2), chromium (No. 3), molybdenum (No. 166) and vanadium,
which were formerly difficult to prepare, or could at best be obtained only in
an unfused state and very impure, can now be prepared without difficulty as
fused masses, free from carbon, by the reduction of their oxides with aluminium.
Even silicon and boron can be obtained by an alumino-thermic process,
if sulphur as well as an excess of aluminium powder is added to the oxides.
The sulphur unites with aluminium and forms a slag of aluminium sulphide,
by which reaction the high temperature required for the reduction of the
oxides is reached; under the slag a fused mass of metal is formed from which,
after dissolving away the excess of aluminium, crystals of silicon, or boron,
are obtained. Magnesium, if used in these reactions instead of aluminium,
produces similar results.

2. Manganese from Pyrolusite.

The reaction between aluminium powder and pyrolusite is so
violent as to be almost explosive; it is better therefore to trans-
form the pyrolusite first into a lower oxide before carrying out the
process. Place 500 g. of finely powdered and sifted pyrolusite
in a Hessian crucible and heat in a charcoal furnace. Mix the
mangano-manganic oxide, Mn3O,t, thus obtained (about 420 g.),
with one-third its weight of aluminium powder.1 Choose a
Hessian crucible, of such a size that it will be about three-fourths
filled by the mixture, and embed it in sand in a large, shallow
dish. At first add only three or four spoonfuls of the mixture
to the crucible; upon the middle of this shake about 2 g. of mag-
1
Use the coarser aluminium powder prepared especially for the ther-
mite process, and not the fine powder employed for aluminium paint.
18 THE ELEMENTS.
nesium powder and in the latter stick a strip of filter paper (10 X
2 cm.) which has been moistened with concentrated potassium
nitrate solution and dried. Set fire to the paper by touching it
with a torch made by fastening a wad of asbestos to the end of an
iron wire, wetting the asbestos with alcohol and setting fire to the
alcohol. The torch ignites the paper which has been impregnated
with potassium nitrate, the burning paper sets fire to the mag-
nesium and the burning magnesium ignites the thermite mixture.
As soon as the reaction has started add the remainder of the
charge from an iron spoon, not too much at one time, but still
rapidly enough so that the mass in the crucible is kept in a state
of brilliant incandescence until the reaction is ended. It is
advisable for the operator to wear blue glasses and a heavy glove
and the experiment should be performed in a place where no
danger can result from flying sparks.
After cooling, break the crucible and hammer away the slag
of fused aluminium oxide from the regulus of metallic manganese.
The slag is very hard and will scratch glass. Yield of man-
ganese, about 120 g. Dependent preparation, Potassium Per-
manganate, Electrolytically No. 84.
3. Chromium from Chromic Oxide.
Chromium cannot be prepared, at least not on a small scale, according to
the directions given for manganese, because the heat liberated in the reaction
between chromic oxide and aluminium is not sufficient of itself to melt the
aluminium oxide. It is, therefore, in this case necessary to heat the crucible
and its contents before starting the reaction, or to add to the mixture a little
chromate which, by reacting more violently with the aluminium, affords the
necessary heat.

1. Mix about 70 g. of chromic oxide (No. 30) with one or two

grams less than the calculated amount of aluminium powder; place
the mixture in a clay crucible, which should be about two-thirds
filled. Add to the above mixture 10 to 15 g. of ignition powder,1
and place the crucible in a glowing charcoal furnace whereby the
ignition powder ignites, and the mass enters into violent reaction.
Finally remove the crucible from the furnace, allow it to cool and
break it, together with the slag, away from the metallic chromium.
1
One part aluminium powder mixed with 10 parts of barium peroxide.
Such ignition powder can be purchased all prepared for thermite reactions.
 CRYSTALLIZED SILICON. 19
Yield, 30 to 33 g. With smaller amounts of the mixture, a por-
celain crucible (which is, however, very liable to break) may be
used and heated over the blast lamp.
2. Ignite an intimate mixture of 70 g. ignited chromic oxide,
Cr2O3, 20 g. of fused and powdered potassium dichromate, K2Cr207,
and 32 g. of aluminium powder in one portion with magnesium
powder and potassium nitrate paper exactly as described in the
preparation of manganese (No. 2). Yield, 30-35 g. of chromium
contained in one large regulus and several smaller globules.
Dependent preparation, Anhydrous Chromic Chloride, No. 44.
4. Crystallized Silicon.
Heat some pure, sifted sand in a small evaporating dish until
thoroughly dried. Mix together 90 g. of the dried sand, 100 g.
of aluminium powder, and 120 g. of flowers of sulphur in a clay
crucible which is half filled thereby. Cover the mixture with a
little magnesium powder and start the reaction by igniting the
latter. The experiment must be performed out of doors, or
under a hood with a good draft, as considerable sulphur dioxide is
evolved. After cooling, break the crucible and cover the fused
pieces with water in a dish also placed under the hood; hydrogen
sulphide is set free by the hydrolysis of aluminium sulphide.
The aluminium hydroxide and oxide are easily rinsed off from
the regulus of metal. Treat the grayish-black, glistening metallic
regulus, and any smaller globules of metal that can be extracted,
in a beaker with strong hydrochloric acid, keeping it in a warm
place for several days and renewing the hydrochloric acid from
time to time until finally all of the excess of metallic aluminium
has been dissolved away and a loose mass of silicon leaflets re-
mains. Finally boil the crystalline mass with concentrated
hydrochloric acid for some time, cool somewhat and transfer to
a platinum dish. Add hydrofluoric acid in small portions to react
with any silica present. This usually causes considerable evolu-
tion of heat. Heat on the water bath for 45 minutes to remove
the excess hydrofluoric acid, dilute with water and wash by
decantation. Drain the crystals by suction, wash them well with
water, and dry in the hot closet. A further treatment of the metal
with hydrochloric and hydrofluoric acids should have no effect.
Yield, 20 to 25 g. Dependent preparation, No. 51.
20 THE ELEMENTS.
5. " Crystallized Boron." 1
Mix 50 g. of anhydrous boron trioxide, 75 g. of sulphur, and
100 g. of granulated or powdered aluminium in a crucible and
bring the charge into reaction in the same manner as in No. 4.
After cooling break the crucible and the solidified melt, treat the
latter with water and rinse away the aluminium hydroxide, formed
by hydrolysis, as well as the microscopic, crystalline needles of
aluminium oxide. Pick out the lumps of regulus and free them
completely from the last traces of slag both mechanically and by
long continued boiling with water. Treat the 30 to 40 g. of
purified regulus particles thus obtained with concentrated hydro-
chloric acid, adding only a little at a time, and after the first
violent action is over let stand in a warm place several days
until all of the aluminium has dissolved away. A heavy, black,
shining mass of crystals is left. Remove the lighter impurities
by repeated decantation with water; boil with concentrated
hydrochloric acid, placing a round flask filled with cold water
over the beaker in order to condense the acid vapors; then warm
with hydrofluoric acid in a platinum dish for several hours, wash
again, and finally allow to stand in a warm place with dilute
hydrochloric acid until no more bubbles of gas are given off.
The last traces of aluminium dissolve very slowly.
About 7.5 g. of small, compact, mostly opaque, black crystals
are obtained which have a luster resembling that of hematite.
The thinnest crystals, which are most often six-sided, show a
deep dark-red color by transmitted light. The crystals scratch
glass. They were formerly taken to be pure crystallized boron;
their composition, however, corresponds to the formula A1B12.
REDUCTION WITH POTASSIUM CYANIDE.
6. Tin from Cassiterite; Melting-point Determination.
Native stannic oxide, SnC>2, in spite of the fact that tin is closely related
to the noble metals, can be reduced by carbon only at a very high heat.
The reduction takes place far more readily with potassium cyanide, the
latter being oxidized thereby to potassium cyanate :2
KCN + O = KCNO.
1
H. Biltz, Ber. 41, 2634 (1908). According to the advice of Dr. K. Schaefer
it is well to add a little ignition mixture (barium peroxide and aluminium) to
the charge.
2
Some samples of cassiterite are not reduced readily.
 TIN FROM CASSITERITE. 21

This method, on account of the relatively high cost oi potassium cyanide,

is used only in the laboratory or in the technical reduction of very valuable
metals from their oxides.
Heat a mixture of 20 g. of very finely-powdered cassiterite and
20 g. of potassium cyanide in a porcelain crucible, which should be
about three-quarters filled thereby, for half an hour over the
blast lamp. A clay mantle may be placed around the crucible
to lessen the amount of heat lost by radiation. After cooling,
wash the regulus of metallic tin (12 to 15 g.) with water. Express
the yield in per cent of the weight of mineral taken. Test the
tin qualitatively for iron, copper, and lead, and determine its
specific gravity. The specific gravity of pure tin (in the white
modification) is 7.287 at 15°.
Melting-point Determination.
The difference in the energy content of a substance in different states of
aggregation is a far more distinctive property than the mere outward char-
acteristics, — solid, liquid, and gaseous. Such energy differences can be meas-
ured in the heat of fusion or of vaporization.
The melting-point of a substance can, therefore, be determined very ac-
curately if it is uniformly heated and the changes of temperature, as
shown by an inserted thermometer, are observed. As soon as the melting-
point is reached, the mercury remains stationary until all of the metal is
melted even although the outer temperature is higher; the heat supplied to the
substance is all utilized in causing its fusion before any is available for produc-
ing a further rise of temperature. If the outer temperature is only a few
degrees higher than the melting-point, the temperature of the substance
remains constant for a considerable time, so that the thermometer may be
read accurately. On cooling a fused substance, the thermometer likewise
remains constant for some time at the solidification point, even when the outer
temperature is lower. With pure substances the melting-point and the
solidification-point are identical.

Cut the tin into a few small pieces and place it in a test tube
of 1 cm. diameter which dips 4 cm. into a small beaker filled with
sulphuric acid. Cover the beaker with a disk of asbestos board
provided with a hole into which the test tube fits. Heat the
sulphuric acid until the tin just melts; then heat a thermometer
cautiously over a flame to about 200° and dip it into the molten
metal. Lower the flame under the beaker so that the temperature
of the bath falls slowly, and, while stirring, observe the changes
of the thermometer reading. At the solidification point the tern-
22 THE ELEMENTS.
perature remains constant for from 10 to 20 minutes. In deter-
mining this temperature, a supercooling occurs regularly; i.e.,
the thermometer at first falls a few degrees below the solidification
point while the mass still remains perfectly liquid. Then, as the
crystals of the solid begin to separate, the temperature rises
rapidly to the solidification point, where it remains perfectly sta-
tionary while the mass is crystallizing. After this point is deter-
mined, increase the flame a little and find the melting-point in an
exactly corresponding manner. Tin melts at 232° C.
In using a long, ordinary thermometer the observed tempera-
ture is always a few degrees too low because the entire thread of
mercury is not at the desired temperature. Such an observed
reading gives the " unconnected melting-point." It may be cor-
rected by adding the value, 0.000,16 • a (t — t0), in which a is
the length in scale degrees of the exposed thread of mercury, t
is the observed reading, and U the average temperature of the
exposed mercury. This last value is obtained by a second ther-
mometer, the bulb of which is placed at about the middle of the
exposed mercury column. The correction is usually spoken of as
the "correction for stem exposure." Another method for applying
the correction for stem exposure has been proposed by E. Rim-
bach; 1 see also Preparation No. 49.

7. Pure Antimony from Basic Antimony Chloride.

Basic antimony chloride (antimony oxychloride) is a by-
product in the preparation of antimony trichloride (No. 47).
Grind the dry basic chloride with twice its weight of powdered
potassium cyanide, and heat the mixture in a porcelain crucible
over the blast lamp. To prevent loss of heat by radiation, sur-
round the crucible with a piece of iron stovepipe, a flowerpot,
or a larger graphite crucible, the bottom of which is cut off. After
cooling wash the metallic regulus with water until all the adhering
slag is removed. The antimony has a silver-white appearance
and shows a crystalline structure.
Regarding the density of antimony, see page 16. Dependent
preparation, No. 88.
1
Ber. 23, 3072 (1889).
 EXTRACTION OF GOLD. 23

REDUCTION WITH AQUEOUS REDUCING AGENTS.

8. Selenium Dioxide and Pure Selenium from Crude Selenium.
From a dilute aqueous solution of selenious acid, the element selenium is pre-
cipitated by soluble reducing agents, such as sulphurous acid or hydrazine salts:
SeO2 + 2 H2SO3 = 2 H2SO* + Se.
A suitable solution of selenious acid may be obtained by oxidizing the raw
material with nitric acid; seleme acid is not formed under these conditions
(difference from sulphur).
Place 20 g. of crude selenium in an evaporating dish, and
after covering the dish with an inverted funnel, oxidize by the
gradual addition of 50 g. of concentrated nitric acid. Evap-
orate the solution upon the water bath; and after drying the
residue at 110° to 130°, sublime it from wide test-tubes, or from
an evaporating dish, into a large inverted beaker. The subli-
mate is usually somewhat reddish in color, due to the presence
of a small amount of elementary selenium; therefore treat it
once more with nitric acid, evaporate the solution to dryness,
and take up the residue in water. Reduce the selenious acid,
at the room temperature, by passing into the solution sulphur
dioxide gas which has been washed with water. A red precipi-
tate of selenium is slowly formed; the precipitation takes place
more rapidly, however, in the presence of a little hydrochloric
acid. The red, amorphous product can be dried in vacuo over
Sulphuric acid without change, but by warming it in contact
with the solution from which it has been precipitated, it goes
over into gray selenium.1
Selenium imparts a blue tinge to the Bunsen flame. A porce-
lain dish held in this flame becomes coated with a brick-red
(reduction) spot which is surrounded by a white (oxidation) ring.
At the same time a characteristic, radish-like odor is noticed,
which can be obtained even more distinctly by heating selenium
on charcoal before the blowpipe.
9. Extraction of Gold.
Gold can be obtained mechanically by "panning" the stamped, or ground
ore, or, more advantageously, by treating the powdered ore with mercury
which dissolves out the gold. Ores with a small gold content, and those
1
Vessels stained with selenium can be cleaned with potassium cyanide
solution, whereby readily soluble KCNSe is formed.
24 THE ELEMENTS.
in which the gold is chemically united with some other element, are treated
either with chlorine water, whereby chlorauric acid H[AuCl4] is formed,
or with potassium cyanide solution, which, together with atmospheric oxygen,
converts the gold into potassium aurocyanide, K[Au(CN)2].
For the following experiments, employ a sand that is very poor in gold;
in case such is not at hand, mix sand with a little high-grade gold ore, or
moisten the sand with a gold solution and dry it by ignition.

Krohncke's Method of Preparing the Gold Solution. Mix 10

to 100 g. of ore intimately with one-fourth its weight of sodium
chloride (to form NaAgCl2 with the silver present) and a little
potassium chlorate; moisten the mixture well with concentrated
hydrochloric acid in a small flask, and allow it to stand for 12
to 24 hours at the room temperature with occasional shaking.
Then heat it on the water bath until the greater part of the free
chlorine has been expelled. Finally, dilute with water, whereby
any silver chloride is precipitated, and filter. Evaporate the
filtrate to a small volume on the water bath, and carry out with
this solution the two reactions given below.
Doring's Method of Preparing the Gold Solution. Place the
sample of ore in a glass-stoppered flask, add 1 cc. of bromine and
about the same amount of ether, and shake frequently. After
two hours — vapors of bromine must still be visible — add
50 cc. of water and allow the mixture to stand another two hours
in a warm place. Filter the solution and evaporate it to one-
fourth of its former volume.
Tests. To detect the presence of gold in either of the above
solutions, treat one part with freshly-prepared ferrous sulphate
solution, whereupon the liquid first assumes a reddish-violet
coloration, and then becomes turbid through separation of gold.
With the solution prepared by the Krohncke method a consider-
able quantity of the ferrous sulphate should be used. Treat a
second portion of the solution with a few drops of bromine water
and a little stannous chloride solution, whereby the solution
becomes colored at first blue, then brownish violet, and later red;
in this test an adsorption compound of gold and stannic hydroxide
is formed (Purple of Cassius); cf. No. 25.
According to the above directions, the presence of about 0.05
mg. of gold in the ore can be detected.
 MERCURY FROM CINNABAR. 25

DESULPHURIZATION OF SULPHIDES BY THE PRE-

CIPITATION PROCESS.
10. Antimony from Stibnite.
Sulphides containing lead and antimony are frequently treated metallur-
gically by the so-called "Precipitation Process." By this is understood the
fusion of the ore with iron and suitable substances to form a slag, whereby
the iron serves as a desulphurizing agent. The sulphide of iron formed dis-
solves in the slag, and the precipitated metals collect at the bottom of the
furnace.

Place a mixture of 100 g. powdered stibnite, 42 g. iron filings,

10 g. anhydrous sodium sulphate, and 2 g. wood-charcoal powder
in a Hessian crucible and heat in a charcoal furnace. The tem-
perature should not rise high enough to melt the iron sulphide
slag completely, but just sufficiently to soften it; this point is
determined by stirring the fusion with an iron rod. After cool-
ing and breaking the crucible a fused mass of antimony, weigh-
ing about 65 g., is found at the bottom. Test a sample of this
crude antimony qualitatively for the presence of arsenic, copper,
iron, and lead.
Purification I. Mix the finely-powdered, crude antimony with
one-fourth its weight of powdered stibnite and an equal amount of
anhydrous sodium carbonate, and melt over the blast lamp in a por-
celain crucible surrounded with a clay mantle. Yield, 60 to 65 g.
Purification II. To remove arsenic from the antimony puri-
fied according to I, pulverize the metal again, mix it with 4 g.
sodium carbonate and 0.2 g. potassium nitrate, and melt the
mixture in the manner just described. Yield, 50 to 55 g. of pure
antimony. Dependent experiment, No. 88.

11. Mercury from Cinnabar; Sodium and Ammonium

Amalgams.
Heat a mixture of 23 g. cinnabar and somewhat more than the
calculated amount of iron filings in a small retort of difncultly-
fusible glass. The mercury distils into a small flask which serves
as receiver. Yield, 16 to 18 g.
Sodium Amalgam. Pour the mercury so obtained into a test
tube and add clean, freshly cut pieces of sodium, about the size
of grains of wheat, waiting each time before adding a fresh piece
until the previous one has reacted; toward the end assist the
26 THE ELEMENTS.
reaction by heating. Use 1 g. of sodium in all. After cooling,
break the test tube and collect the amalgam, which will keep
indefinitely when preserved in well-stoppered vessels. A lump
of sodium amalgam placed in water gives a uniform evolution of
hydrogen.
Ammonium Amalgam. Introduce a few grams of sodium
amalgam into 20 to 30 c.c. of ice-cold, concentrated ammonium
chloride solution; the amalgam at once begins to swell, and is
changed to a gray spongy mass of extremely voluminous ammo-
nium amalgam. Ammonium amalgam decomposes completely,
within a short time, into hydrogen, ammonia, and mercury.

ROASTING PROCESSES.
12. Lead from Galena.
By the "roasting process" galena is first partly oxidized at a relatively
low temperature to lead oxide or lead sulphate; then without any intro-
duction of air the mass is heated more strongly, whereby the oxygen of the
lead oxide and lead sulphate accomplishes the oxidation of all the sulphur
present to sulphur dioxide. Only those ores are suitable for roasting which
contain but small amounts of silicates and of sulphides of other metals.
Silicates are harmful, since they give rise to the formation of lead silicate.
As it is difficult to conduct the partial roasting satisfactorily upon a small
scale, it is better in the following experiment to start with a mixture of galena
and litharge:
PbS + 2 PbO = 3 Pb + SO2,
PbS + PbSO4 = 2 Pb + 2 SO2.

Place an intimate mixture of 20 g. very finely-powdered and

sifted galena and 37 g. litharge in a small clay crucible, and heat
it in a furnace as quickly as possible to a bright red heat. After
about half an hour, allow the contents of the crucible to cool, and
hammer away the regulus of metallic lead from the broken crucible
to which it adheres because of a glassy film of lead silicate. To
purify the lead, melt it together with some borax in a porcelain
crucible. Calculate the yield in per cent of the theoretical.

CUPELLATION.
13. Pure Silver from Coin Metal.
If an alloy of impure precious metal, such as gold, silver or platinum, is
melted on a cupel in an oxidizing atmosphere, the lead and other base metals
present are oxidized and are absorbed by the porous material of which the
 PURE SILVER FROM COIN METAL. 27

cupel is made. This process is made use of technically for obtaining pure
silver from the impure metal, and for working up argentiferous lead which is
obtained in the metallurgy of certain lead ores; the process is likewise used
on a small scale in the rapid and accurate quantitative estimation of silver
and gold in ores or metallurgical products (fire-assay).

Melt together, by means of a slightly luminous flame from a

blast lamp, about 0.3 g. of silver coin and 1 g. of pure lead in a flat
cavity, made as smooth as possible, in a piece of blowpipe char-
coal. Press some bone-ash firmly into a small porcelain crucible
with a pestle so that at the top there is a slight hollow with a
coherent, perfectly smooth surface. Place the metallic button
by means of pincers upon the bone-ash which is to serve as a
cupel. Support the porcelain crucible on a clay triangle, or
embed it in sand, with its top slightly inclined towards the blast
lamp; and direct the point of the oxidizing flame toward the
vicinity of the button, and some of the time directly upon it.
At first keep the metal but barely melted, as otherwise it is likely
to spirt. The lead oxide, as fast as it is formed, runs off and
is absorbed by the bone-ash; in order that it may not all run
into the same place change the inclination of the crucible from
time to time. Continue the heating until the size of the button
no longer diminishes; towards the end apply a higher heat,
whereby films of metallic oxide run across the button in the
direction of the oxidizing draft, and lead oxide separates out on
the opposite side in the form of dark-brown crystals containing
copper. The end of the process is reached upon the disappear-
ance of the oxide film, which at the last shows for an instant a
rainbow-like play of colors. This is known as the "blick." After
this point is reached, further heating causes a loss of silver by
volatilization. During the process a part of the lead is vo-
latilized.
The metal still contains a small amount of copper. Melt it
again with 1 g. lead, and cupel the greater part of this lead away
as before, using a fresh cupel. Free the button from bone-ash
by hammering it into a cube (holding it in pincers), and remove
the last traces of lead by heating it on a third cupel. Weigh the
silver button that is finally obtained. Yield, 96 to 97% of the
actual silver content of the coin.
28 THE ELEMENTS.

METALS BY ELECTROLYSIS.
14. Lithium from Fused Lithium Chloride.
Fused lithium chloride, like the aqueous solution of this salt, is largely-
ionized and consequently can act as an electrolyte. According to the present
theory, the passage of an electric current represents a movement of tiny
particles of negative electricity called electrons (cf. p. 9). If an electric current
passes through an electrolyte there is always chemical decomposition at each
electrode, an oxidation at the anode and a reduction at the cathode. Thus
the electrolysis of fused lithium chloride results in the simultaneous formation
of metallic lithium at the cathode and chlorine gas at the anode. At the
cathode, where the negatively-charged electrons pass from the wire to the
electrolyte, the positively-charged lithium ions are neutralized and neutral,
or free, lithium is formed. At the anode, where electrons leave the fused salt
and pass to the anode and thence to the conducting wire, each negatively-
charged chloride ion gives up one electron and neutral, or free, chlorine results.
These reactions of reduction (lithium) and oxidation (chlorine) can be ex-
pressed by the following equations in which the symbol e is used to represent
the electron, or unit charge of negative electricity
2 Li+ + 2 e = 2 Li 2 Cl~ .= CI2 + 2 t.

The electron, therefore, represents one unit negative charge, such as is repre-
sented by the negative charge on one atom of chlorine in the chloride ion.
Although it seems probable from the results of several methods of experimen-
tation that there are about 6.1 X 1023 atoms of lithium in one gram atom, so
that we have a fairly good idea as to the actual magnitude of the unit charge
of electricity, it is more advantageous to think in terms of the gram atom
which, in the case of lithium or any other univalent ion, bears a charge of
6.1 X 1023 units of electricity. This larger value corresponds to 96,500
coulombs or 26.82 ampere hours and represents the quantity of electricity
required to set free 6.940 grams of lithium and 35.46 grams of chlorine when
all of the electrical current passing through fused lithium chloride is utilized
for producing lithium at the cathode and chlorine at the anode. Thus, with
100% current yield, a current of one ampere passing through lithium chloride
a 04.0 v QAOO
for one hour (3600 seconds) will set free *" * n = °- 2 5 8 9 S- o f lithium
y Oj ouu
35 4 6
and " - ,^-. 3 6 0 0 = 1.322 g. of chlorine. Or, since at 0° and 760 mm.
pressure, one molecule of chlorine or any other gas occupies a volume of about
22.4 liters, one can say that 96,500 coulombs will liberate 11.2 liters of chlorine
gas. This quantity of electricity, 96,500 coulombs, is called one Faraday,
because Michael Faraday recognized about the year 1835 that the quantities
of different elements liberated by a given quantity of electricity were propor-
tional to the atomic weights, or simple multiples of the atomic weights, of
the elements (Faraday's law).
 LITHIUM BY ELECTROLYSIS. 29
In carrying out electrolytic preparations, the apparatus is usu-
ally arranged in accordance with the following scheme (Fig. 9),
which is, in principle, identical with that employed in electro-
analysis. The decomposition cell, an ammeter, and a regulating-
resistance are introduced in series into an electric circuit. The
binding clamps of the cell may also be connected with wires from
a voltmeter in order to determine the difference in potential
between the two poles during the electrolysis. The ammeter
should remain in the circuit throughout the whole of the elec-
trolysis; the voltage is measured only from time to time, and
has less value for determining the course of the reaction when

h
Battery

Resistance

Decomposition Cell

Fia. 9.

one is working according to well-tested directions. A stor-

age battery may serve as the source of electricity; for measuring
the current and voltage the simpler and inexpensive instruments
suffice, and their reliability can be determined easily by comparison
with standard instruments.
In all cases where a metal which decomposes water is to be
prepared, a fused compound rather than its aqueous solution must
be used for the electrolyte. The melting-point of the salt may be
lowered by admixture with some other suitable salt.
Mix together 30 g. of dry lithium chloride and an equal weight
of dry potassium chloride in a porcelain crucible, 6 to 8 cm.
high and 9 cm. in diameter. Melt the mixture and then after
30 THE ELEMENTS.
starting the electrolysis maintain a sufficient flame to supplement
the heating effect of the current in keeping the mass just liquid.
For the anode, use a rod, 0.8 cm. in diameter, of arc-lamp car-
bon which is not attacked by the liberated chlorine; and for the
cathode use an iron rod 0.3 cm. thick. Insert the cathode through
a cork in the upper end of a glass tube, of 2 cm. diameter, and
place the whole in the fused electrolyte so that the glass tube dips
1 cm. below the surface and the iron rod 0.3 cm. deeper (Fig. 9).
The metallic lithium collects in the space between the iron wire
and the glass tube, and the glass mantle protects it from being
disseminated throughout the electrolyte. When all is ready close
the circuit, noting the time, and regulate the resistance so that a
current of between 6 and 10 amperes passes. In order to obtain
this current, the voltage of the storage battery, since it has the
resistance of the electrolyte to overcome, must not be too small;
it should be between 7 and 12 volts (3 to 6 accumulator cells
connected in series). During the electrolysis note frequently the
time and amperage, and from these readings compute the number
of ampere-seconds by multiplying the average reading of the
ammeter by the number of seconds which have elapsed.
When the reaction is progressing with moderate strength, but
without being disturbed by too vigorous an evolution of chlorine,
metallic lithium can be observed collecting at the cathode in the
space between the iron rod and the glass tube. From time to
time flashes of light occur at the anode which are probably due
to an insulating envelope of chlorine gas which is formed about
the carbon and causes a marked lessening of the current; this
difficulty is easily remedied by occasionally breaking the circuit
for a moment. At the end of twenty minutes a considerable
amount of lithium should have collected. Raise the cathode
from the fused salt, holding an iron spoon to prevent any lithium
from falling out of the glass tube, and dip the whole under petro-
leum. After cooling remove the lithium from the tube with a
knife and weigh it under petroleum. The current yield, i.e., the
yield reckoned on the amount which the current should theoretic-
ally produce, is about 70%.
The lithium thus prepared is contaminated with a little potas-
sium. Determine the density by means of a pycnometer, using
petroleum of known density. For this purpose weigh the pyc-
 LITHIUM BY ELECTROLYSIS. 31
nometer (1) empty, (2) filled with petroleum, (3) containing
the lithium alone, and (4) containing the lithium and enough
petroleum to fill the instrument completely. From these weigh-
ings and the known density of the petroleum, the density of the
lithium can be computed; it should be 0.534.
 CHAPTER II.

CHANGES OF CONDITION.
CHANGES in the state of aggregation of substances have already been men-
tioned in the preceding chapter; but under changes in condition are included
also polymerization and dissociation, as well as the formation of allotropic,
passive; amorphous, and colloidal modifications. These phenomena are, with
few exceptions, not confined to any particular class of substances.

POLYMERIZATION AND DISSOCIATION.

The phenomena of polymerization and dissociation, as far as they
occur with gaseous or dissolved bodies, are capable of a complete theoret-
ical interpretation. By polymerization is understood the adding together of
particles of material of the same kind to form larger aggregates; the opposite
of this process is dissociation. The occurrence of either may be demon-
strated by determining the molecular weight of the substance in the vaporized
or dissolved state. For example, the diatomic iodine molecules dissociate
at high temperatures into atoms; on cooling, the atoms again poly-
merize into molecules of the original sort:
Dissociation
I, = 2 1
Polymerization
In a similar way ferric chloride forms simple molecules at high temperatures,
and double molecules at lower temperatures:
Dissociation
Fe2Cl6 = 2 FeCl3
Polymerization
The enumeration of experiments illustrating these phenomena may be
dispensed with at this point; the conception of dissociation, however, is
developed more fully in the general section of Chapter III, and that of elec-
trolytic dissociation in the sections on acids, bases, and salts, and in No. 34.

32
 ALLOTROPY. 33

ALLOTROPY.1
Many solid substances appear, under different conditions, in two or more
distinct forms (known as allotropic modifications), which are distinguished
from one another by color, density, crystalline form, solubility, and other
physical properties. The best known instances of this are shown by carbon
and phosphorus.
In the same way that different states of aggregation are separated by a
temperature boundary which is dependent on the pressure, so also for the
mutual transformation of numerous allotropic forms, there is a definite tem-
perature, dependent only on the pressure, below which the one, above which
the other form is stable. This is known as the transition temperature.
In addition to this sort of allotropy, which, because the two forms can
change simultaneously into one another and can exist in equilibrium at the
transition temperature, is known as enantiotropy, there is also a second sort
known as monotropy. Two modifications of a substance are monotropic
when the one changes into the other, but the latter cannot change back
directly into the first. They possess no transition temperature; one form is
under all conditions less stable than the other, and therefore is only to be
observed in virtue of the extreme slowness with which the transformation
takes place. i
An example of enantiotropy is shown by sulphur, which above 96° is
monoclinic, below 96° rhombic. An example of monotropy is furnished by
iodine chloride, IC1, the labile form of which melts at 14° and the stable
form at 27°. (Cf. No. 55.)
The energy difference between allotropic modifications corresponds entirely
with that existing between the solid and the liquid states and, like the latter,
is measured by the heat of transformation.
For determining the transition point of allotropic forms, the following
methods are chiefly used:
(1) The THERMIC METHOD. The point on the heating or cooling curve is
determined at which, in consequence of the absorption or setting free of the
heat of transition, a retardation in the otherwise steady rise or fall of tem-
perature occurs; compare the determination of the melting-point of tin,
No. 6, alao Nos. 15 and 16.
(2) The DILATOMETRIC METHOD, which depends on a comparison of the
densities (or of the volumes) on both sides of the transition point.
(3) The OPTICAL METHODS, which frequently permit a very sharp observa-
tion of a change in crystalline form, or in color, at the transition point.
(No. 17.)
(4) ELECTRICAL METHODS, (a) The electrical conductivity of a substance
is plotted graphically against the temperature and the point of inflection of
the curve determined.
1
Concerning allotropy, see also B. Roozeboom, Heterogene Gleichge-
wichte, Vol. 1, p. 109 (1901).
34 CHANGES OF CONDITION.

(b) The temperature is found at which the difference of potential between

each of the two modifications and some common electrolyte is the same; in
other words, the electromotive force of an element constructed from the two
modifications and a common electrolyte is equal to zero.

15. Allotropy of Silver Sulphide.

Silver sulphide has a transition temperature of above 170°, which can be
determined both from the electrical resistance and from the cooling curve.
The phenomenon of supercooling not being very pronounced with this sub-
stance, a point of inflection is found on the cooling as well as on the heating
curve; on the former it lies naturally at a lower temperature than on the
latter.
In order to prepare silver sulphide, treat a hot solution of about
20 g. of silver nitrate in 300 to 400 c.c. of water with hydro-
gen sulphide, and wash the precipitate by decantation. After
250

240° 220°
S30° 210°

220° '• 200°

210° 190°

200° \ 180° / /

190° 170°

180° 160°

170° 160°

160° 140°
150° 130°
100 200 300 400 500 100 200 800 400 600 000
Seconds Seconds

FIG. 10. Cooling Curve. FIG. 11. Heating Curve.

removing the liquid by suction, dry the preparation in the hot

closet. Silver sulphide thus formed is not absolutely free from
uncombined sulphur.
Place about 8 g. of the silver sulphide in a test tube and insert a
thermometer. Heat the test tube to about 290° in an air bath,
consisting of a porcelain crucible covered with a piece of asbestos
board. Some sulphur sublimes, but this does not interfere with
the experiment. Then transfer the test tube quickly to a small
beaker containing sulphuric acid or paraffin at 145°, which tem-
perature must be kept constant to within a few degrees throughout
 ALLOTROPIC MODIFICATIONS OF SULPHUR. 35
the experiment. Read the temperature every 10 seconds and
plot the results (Fig. 10).
When the temperature has fallen to about 130°, proceed to
obtain the heating curve by warming the bath so that its tem-
perature keeps constantly 20° or 30° above that of the sulphide
(Fig. 11); the continuous curve gives the bath temperatures, the
dotted one the readings for the silver sulphide. The point at
which the transformation is finished, and the temperature begins
to rise-rapidly is particularly sharp.

16. Allotropic Modifications of Sulphur.

Monoclinic sulphur has a density of 1.96 and a melting-point of 119.25°;
rhombic sulphur a density of 2.06 and a melting-point of 112.8°. When sul-
phur crystallizes from a solution in carbon bisulphide, it is obtained in the
rhombic modification, which at room temperature can be preserved unchanged
for an indefinite time. If on the other hand melted sulphur is allowed to
solidify, the crystals which form are not of the rhombic, but are commonly of
the monoclinic, modification; this modification persists for some time, even
below the transition temperature, as an unstable form, for the reason that the
transition takes place slowly. In addition there have been six or seven other
allotropic forms of sulphur shown to exist by crystallographic optical methods.
Monoclinic Sulphur. Transformation into Rhombic Sulphur.
Heat about 7 g. of sulphur in a test tube until it has melted and
begun to turn dark-colored (140° to 150°); dip a thermometer
in the liquid and clamp it in position. Allow the melted sulphur
to cool in a sulphuric-acid bath at 80° to 90°, and when it is at
110° arrest the supercooling by dipping a glass thread into the
melt. The sulphur crystallizes to a wax-yellow mass of trans-
parent monoclinie needles, while the liberated heat of solidifica-
tion raises the temperature several degrees. By the next day,
or more quickly on moistening the mass with carbon disulphide,
the crystals become light-yellow and opaque, changing thereby
into an aggregate of rhombic crystals.
Transformation of Rhombic into Monoclinic Sulphur. Heat a
few clear crystals of rhombic sulphur for two or three hours in a
test tube which dips in a bath of a boiling, concentrated solution
of common salt (temperature 108° to 112°), replacing when neces-
sary the water evaporated from the bath. The sulphur crystals
gradually become clouded, and change finally to a friable, light-
yellow mass of monoclinic sulphur.
36 CHANGES OF CONDITION.

The Transition Temperature from the Heating Curve. The cool-

ing curve of sulphur does not, when determined in the simplest
manner, show an exact point of solidification, because this is
dependent on the temperature to which the material has pre-
viously been heated; nor does it indicate sharply the transition
temperature, on account of the ability already mentioned of
monoclinic sulphur to persist in the unstable condition. Both
values, however, can be established within 5° if the rate is
measured at which the temperature of rhombic sulphur rises with
a uniform application of heat.
Melt about 7 g. of sulphur in a test tube, place the bulb of
a thermometer in the liquid, let the latter solidify, and after
moistening it with a little carbon bisulphide allow it to stand until
the next day. It is well also to prepare one or two duplicate
tubes in the same manner. Heat one of the tubes in a sulphuric-
acid bath in such a manner that the temperature of the bath
keeps constantly about 15° in advance of that shown by the
thermometer in the tube, and never rises more rapidly than 1° in
10 seconds. Read the thermometer every 10 seconds between
60° and 120°, and plot the corresponding temperatures and times
on coordinate paper. The rise in temperature is retarded
between 95° and 100° (the transition point) in consequence of
the amount of heat absorbed in the transformation. In the
further course of the curve there is only a moderately rapid rise
in temperature, — partly because the transition is not completed,
partly because melting begins — until, above a point between
115° and 120° (the melting-point), the temperature again rises
rapidly.
Allow the melt to cool again, and induce crystallization
between 110° and 100° by means of a glass thread, or by seeding
with a minute monoclinic crystal; then allow to cool further to
60°, and repeat the experiment. This time, since only mono-
clinic sulphur is present, there is no indication of a transition
point; the melting-point, however, is shown, although, as in the
preceding experiment, it is not sharply defined.
According to recent investigations, it seems probable that the peculiar
changes in consistency and color which sulphur undergoes on further heating
are due to two different liquid modifications: sX the thin liquid and sn the
viscous form.1
1
Smith and Holmes, Z. physik. Chem. 43, 469 (1903); 53, 602 (1905);
 TRANSITION POINT. 37

When sulphur is heated in a test tube above 160° it becomes

dark and so viscous that the tube can be inverted without the
sulphur flowing out.
17. Transition Point of Cuprous Mercurilodide Cu2 [Hgl4] and of
Sliver Mercuriiodide Ag2 [HglJ .
First prepare mercuric iodide by precipitating a solution of
6.8 g. of mercuric chloride with a solution of 8.3 g. of potassium
iodide. Wash the precipitate once by decantation, and dissolve it
together with 8.3 g. of potassium iodide in 50 cc. of water. Mix
the filtered solution with another filtered, concentrated solution
containing 12 g. of blue vitriol, and pass sulphur dioxide into the
filtrate, in order to reduce the cupric salt. The sulphur dioxide
can be prepared from sodium sulphite and sulphuric acid (cf. foot-
note, page 71). A bright-red precipitate is produced of some-
what the appearance of mercuric iodide. Wash it thoroughly on
the suction filter and dry it in the hot closet. Yield, about 20 g.
Cuprous mercuriiodide is transformed at about 71° into a
black modification. The color change can be observed if a pinch
of the material is gently heated in a test tube over a free flame;
on cooling, the black color changes again to red. To determine
the transition temperature, a sample may be heated slowly in a
dry test tube which is immersed in a beaker of water containing
a thermometer that serves also as a stirrer. By means of several
repetitions, the transition temperature may be obtained in this
way with considerable accuracy.
The silver salt also of hydromercuriiodic acid, H2[Hg IJ, pos-
sesses a transition point between 40° and 50°, which is likewise
characterized by a change in color. Below this temperature the
salt is yellow; above, it is red.
Precipitate a few cubic centimeters of mercuric chloride solu-
tion with a solution of potassium iodide, and redissolve the pre-
cipitate in an excess of the precipitant. Then add a few drops of
silver nitrate solution and observe, without filtering, the change in
color of the precipitate on heating and cooling. This transition
point is less sharp than that of the copper salt.
64, 257 (1906). Hoffmann and Rothe, ibid. 55,113 (1906); Smith and Carson,
ibid. 63, 273 (1908). With respect to the influence of different forms of S on the
melting point, see Beckmann, Paul, and Liesch, Z. anorg. Chem, 103,189 (1917),
38 CHANGES OF CONDITION.

THE PASSIVE CONDITION.

The change of some metals, particularly chromium and iron, into the
passive condition is a phenomenon distinct from allotropy, and one of which
the significance is not yet fully understood. The surface of metals when
passive is more "noble" than when they exist in the ordinary state, as is
shown by the lesser tendency to react chemically, and by the electrochemical
behavior; in other respects there is no distinction between the ordinary and
the passive conditions.
Metals can be obtained in the passive state by treatment with nitric acid,
or other oxidizing agents, or by anodic oxidation.

18. Passive Iron.

Fill a small beaker with concentrated nitric acid, a large one
with water, and another small one with copper sulphate solution.
Suspend a piece of iron 4 to 5 cm. long (a thick iron screw will
answer) bv a platinum wire and submerge it completely in the
nitric acid, then lift it cautiously from the acid, rinse it in the
water, and finally dip it into the copper sulphate solution, using
care in each operation not to allow the iron to come in contact
with any solid object, nor to suffer any jar. When the iron is
taken from the copper sulphate solution it shows a gray color;
it has not reacted with the copper salt. The reaction takes place
immediately, however, when the passive condition is destroyed;
for example, by striking a sharp blow with a glass rod. Starting
from the point hit, a coating of copper, which precipitates from
the adhering film of copper salt solution, spreads over the sur-
face of the iron.
The experiment can be repeated immediately, for the coating
of copper is quickly dissolved in the nitric acid. When carried
out on a larger scale this experiment is well adapted for lecture
demonstration.

AMORPHOUS STATE.
As already stated, the phenomenon of supercooling is very generally observed
when melted substances solidify. This can often be obviated by means of
"seeding" with small fragments of the crystallized substance. In other
cases the supercooling persists far below the true temperature of crystalli-
zation, and a gradual changing into the crystalline form takes place only very
slowly, or perhaps not even to a detectable extent. Such strongly super-
cooled fluids are designated as amorphous substances when they, like glass
 AMORPHOUS SULPHUR. 39

or obsidian, possess such a viscosity that they appear to be solid bodies.

The amorphous solid condition is, therefore, not distinguished from the
fluid state by any discontinuity, but is so distinguished from the solid
crystalline condition. It is possible by certain expedients, for example by
continued heating at just below the melting-point, to hasten the rate of
crystallization, as in the devitrification of glass. With substances which are
capable of solidifying in either a crystalline or amorphous condition, the
quantity of crystals obtained is for this reason greater, the more slowly the
cooling takes place.

19. Amorphous Sulphur.

Distil 40 g. of sulphur from the bulb of a small retort and
allow half, as it condenses in the neck, to flow into a mixture of
ice and water, the other half into boiling water. Dry these two
preparations externally with filter paper, then leave them for
several hours at 50° to 60° to dry still further. The next day
extract 5 to 10 g. of each of the samples with carbon bisulphide
in a Soxhlet apparatus, using a weighed extraction-thimble.
Determine, by weighing again, the percentage of each sample of
sulphur which has been dissolved in the carbon bisulphide. The
sample which was slowly cooled dissolves almost completely,
since it has changed into the soluble rhombic form; the sud-
denly cooled sample leaves behind 30 to 50% of amorphous,
insoluble sulphur.
If a mixture of sulphur and ammonium carbonate is distilled,
and the sulphur, as in the first case above, is cooled suddenly in the
freezing mixture, a product is obtained which contains 90% of
the soluble rhombic form, since the presence of ammonia accel-
erates catalytically the transformation.

COLLOIDAL STATE.
A large number of substances are capable of apparently dissolving in water
to form what may be termed pseudo-solutions; such pseudo-solutions are
characterized by an extremely small diffusive power, a low osmotic pressure,
and an inability to undergo dialysis; in these respects they differ from true
solutions of crystalloids, and are thus called colloidal solutions (Graham, 1862).
Colloidal solutions are distinguished, according to the nature of the solvent,
as hydrosols, alcosols, etc. If the dissolved, or, more correctly, the pseudo-
dissolved substance is separated from the solvent, it is often found not to
have lost the power of again passing into colloidal solution (reversible colloids).
On the other hand, there are numerous substances, particularly inorganic ones,
40 CHANGES OF CONDITION.
which are unable of themselves to pass directly into colloidal solution, but
can by suitable means be brought into that state; if such substances are
separated from the solution, they do not possess the power of dissolving
again unaided (irreversible colloidals).
Solutions of irreversible colloids can be obtained by disintegrating the
substance in the electric arc under water (Bredig's method; see No. 20), by
forming the substance in aqueous solution by double decomposition and
preventing its precipitation by suitable means (Nos. 21; 24, Note on zircon
oxide hydrosol; No. 25), or by previously imparting to the solid the ability
to dissolve by treatment with small quantities of alkali or acid. The last
method was compared by Graham with the process of digestion and called
by him peptonization (No. 25, tin-oxide hydrosol).
By means of optical methods (ultramicroscopic investigation), it has been
proved that many of these colloidal solutions consist really of suspensions of
extremely small particles the size of which can be estimated down to a diam-
eter of about 6 MM- In this manner the formerly-very-puzzling fact of the
existence of solutions of substances that are ordinarily insoluble, such as gold,
platinum, and the sulphides of the heavy metals, finds its explanation.
Modern views concerning the nature of colloids indicate that any substance
under proper conditions can be obtained in the colloidal state. There is no
sharp distinction between mechanical suspensions of a finely powdered sub-
stance in a liquid, a colloidal solution and a true solution. It seems to be
merely a matter of size of the individual particles of the substance. By
employing micro-photographic methods and working with the short waves of
ultra-violet light, the limit of microscopic vision with an ordinary microscope
is reached at diameters of about 0.001 mm. or 1 micron (symbol M). The
pores of the best grades of hardened filter paper are about 1 M in diameter.
Clay and porcelain filters have pores about 0.2-0.4 M in diameter. The size
of the average molecule varies from 0.0001 to 0.001 M or, using the term
micro-micron or amicron to represent one-millionth of a millimeter (symbol MM),
the diameter is 0.1-1 nfx. A very large molecule such as starch has a diam-
eter of about 5 ij.fi..
On the basis of the size of the particles which a powdered substance assumes
when it is shaken with a liquid, it is possible to distinguish arbitrarily between
suspensions, colloidal solutions and true solutions. If the particles have diam-
eters of 0.1 M or more, so that they may be removed by filtration and can be
seen under the microscope, the solid substance is said to be in suspension. If
the diameters of the particles of solid lie between 0.1 M and 1 fn/j., the mixture of
solid and liquid is said to be a colloidal solution. If the substance dissolves,
as we say, in the liquid and assumes dimensions corresponding to those of
individual molecules, having diameters of 1 fj.fi. or less, we say that the sub-
stance is in a state of molecular dispersion, or true solution.
Colloidal solutions, as a rule, appear clear when viewed by transmitted
light, i.e., looking straight through the solution in a test tube, but appear
turbid when viewed by reflected light, i.e., with the test tube held above or
below the level of the eye. The particles can be seen with the aid of the ultra-
microscope and show a lively movement to and fro (Brownian movement).
 ADSORPTION COMPOUNDS. 41

The laws of their motion have been studied and found to correspond to that
expected from the kinetic molecular theory. Colloidal chemistry, therefore,
has served to bring the molecular hypothesis out of the realms of theory into
the field of positive fact.
Many irreversible colloids separate out from their solutions as volumi-
nous precipitates containing a large amount of water (hydrogels). Such
hydrogels as, for example, those of ferric oxide, aluminium oxide, and silicon
oxide, can also be obtained directly by chemical precipitation from solution.
These precipitates contain a great deal more water than would correspond to
their hydroxide formulas (Fe(OH)3, A1(OH)3, Si(OH)4, etc.), and since the
water thus contained does not show the characteristics of chemically com-
bined water (compare the theoretical section on Hydrates preceding No. 144),
these precipitates should be designated, according to van Bemmelen, as oxide
hydrogels, or by their old name of hydrated oxides.
The change from the hydrosol to the hydrogel state is most simply brought
about by the addition of an electrolyte. Many colloidal solutions are ex-
ceedingly sensitive to electrolytes (gold solution, No. 25); the most essential
condition for the preparation of the solution must therefore be the absence
of any unnecessary electrolyte. Even reversible colloids can be separated
from their solutions by the addition of large amounts of an electrolyte; the
process is termed "salting out," and is employed in the precipitation of pro-
teins and dyestuffs (No. 24).

ADSORPTION COMPOUNDS.
Adsorption is the phenomenon shown by certain substances having a
large surface (for example, wood-charcoal) of condensing gaseous or dis-
solved substances upon themselves. Adsorption is a special kind of natural
phenomenon which is quite distinct from the process of solution.
It has been shown, especially by van Bemmelen, that the typical col-
loids exhibit a particularly high power of adsorption; and also that organized
matter, such as plant fibers and decayed material like humus, possesses the
same power. The latter classes of substances are, therefore, included among
colloids, especially since in contrast to crystalloids they lack a definite form,
bounded by rigid surfaces.
Among other instances in which adsorption may occur, the following are
of especial importance. It may take place: (1) between liquids and solid
substances (as when moisture is retained by many solid substances and par-
ticularly by hydrogels); (2) between dissolved substances and solids (as in
the dragging down of dissolved salts by precipitates and in the adhering of
fertilizer salts in the soil; cf. Nos. 22 and 23); (3) between dissolved reversible
colloids and solid materials (as in numerous dyeing processes; No. 24).
The combinations so produced are known as adsorption compounds.
For many adsorption processes, definite relations exist between the con-
centration in the solution of the substance adsorbed and the composition of
the adsorption compound. Adsorption acts relatively more strongly the
less concentrated the solution (cf. No. 22). Many adsorption compounds
42 CHANGES OF CONDITION.

are of so specific a nature (for example, iodo-starch) that it has been only
after the investigation of the quantitative relations between their com-
position and the conditions under which they are formed that their
difference from true chemical compounds has been established. Such an
exhibition of adsorptive power as this has also been designated as affinity of
condition.
Different dissolved colloids can also mutually combine to form adsorption
compounds: gold hydrosol, which is so exceedingly sensitive toward elec-
trolytes, can, by the addition of a non-sensitive colloid such as gelatin, be
itself made stable toward electrolytes; this would tend to show that a com-
bination had taken place between the two kinds of dissolved colloids (cf.
No. 25). Substances which act as gelatin does in this case are known as
protective colloids.
Again, other colloids are capable of mutually precipitating one another
out of solution.1 Thus arsenic-sulphide-hydrosol and iron-oxide-hydrosol
when mixed in the right proportions are both precipitated as a common
adsorption compound (cf. No. 24, 4). This precipitating power arises from
the same cause as another characteristic property which pseudo-dissolved
substances have in common with suspensions', if suspensions or colloids are
subjected to the action of a strong electric potential, a passage of the suspended
material through the solution occurs, but this is of a very different nature
from ionic migration. (Convective transference.) While, with electrolytes, the
dissociated parts possess opposite electrical charges, here the opposite charges
reside upon the pseudo-dissolved material and the solvent itself, respectively.
It is a rule that two such colloids in order to precipitate each other must
have charges of opposite sign when referred to that of the common solvent.
(Example, zircon-gold-purple, No. 25.)
Finally, adsorption compounds can be produced by precipitating two col-
loids out of a common solution by the addition of an electrolyte. (Example,
Purple of Cassius, No. 25.)

20. Colloidal Platinum, according to Bredlg.

Connect two platinum wires of 1 mm. diameter, whose upper
ends are insulated by glass tubes, with the terminals of the 110-volt
lighting circuit, and insert an ammeter and a suitable resistance.
Clamp one electrode so that its lower end dips into 100 to 150 c.c.
of distilled water in a glass dish; hold the other electrode in
the hand, and while it is immersed in the water, touch it to the
first one and remove it to such a distance that a small arc can be
maintained. The resistance should be regulated so that a current
of 6 to 10 amperes will flow.2 From the cathode the disintegrated
> W. Biltz, Ber. 37, 1095 (1904).
2
A technical ammeter with large capacity is used here. Before begin-
ning the experiment, see that the wiring will safely bear the current required.
 COLLOIDAL ANTIMONY SULPHIDE. 43
platinum passes in grayish brown clouds into the liquid. It is not
usually possible to preserve the arc for more than a short time, but
it can be repeatedly started again by bringing the electrodes
together, and then separating them; the process may be thus con-
tinued until the platinum solution is so dark as to be nearly opaque,
or until it has become too hot. The platinum electrodes should
never be held except by the insulated glass ends. If the experiment
does not succeed well at first, add a trace of dilute alkali to the
water. Finally, filter off the coarser platinum powder, and employ
the solution in the following experiments:
1. To a few cubic centimeters add a drop of a dilute salt solu-
tion. After a short time the colloidal metal separates out in the
form of a powder (precipitation by an electrolyte).
2. Add some of the platinum solution to dilute hydrogen
peroxide. A reaction takes place with evolution of oxygen, while
a comparison sample of the hydrogen peroxide itself remains clear.
Concentrated 30 per cent hydrogen peroxide, when treated with
the platinum solution, decomposes at first slowly, then more rap-
idly, with rise of temperature, and finally with explosive violence.
This is an instance of catalysis; i.e., the acceleration by means of
a chemically indifferent substance (the platinum) of a reaction
(the decomposition of hydrogen peroxide) which would of itself
take place slowly.
3. To another portion of dilute hydrogen peroxide add a few
drops of hydrogen sulphide water and then some platinum solu-
tion. This time no decomposition occurs; the catalyzer has
temporarily lost its accelerating action in consequence of the
presence of a third, likewise indifferent substance which acts as
a poison. The catalytic property of the platinum depends upon
the condition of the surface of the finely divided material; the
action of the poison is due perhaps to an alteration in the con-
dition of the surface.

21. Colloidal Antimony Sulphide.

Allow a cold 1 per cent solution of tartar emetic to drop from a
dropping funnel into 200 c.c. of hydrogen sulphide water through
which a fairly strong stream of hydrogen sulphide is kept passing.
Antimony sulphide produced under these conditions does not form
a precipitate, but remains in colloidal suspension as a deep-orange-
44 CHANGES OF CONDITION.
colored pseudo-solution, that appears perfectly clear by trans-
mitted light. First remove the excess of hydrogen sulphide by a
stream of hydrogen, then place the solution in a dialyzing tube of
parchment paper, and suspend the latter in a vessel of distilled
water. If the tube is free from imperfections, almost none of the
yellow material passes into the outer solution, while the salts
present are gradually removed by diffusion. Replace the outside
water with fresh water, at first every six hours, later every twelve
hours, and continue the dialysis about four days.
Dilute a part of the antimony sulphide solution to ten times its
original volume, and carry out the following experiments:
1. Place roughly equivalent, normal solutions of potassium
chloride, barium chloride, and aluminium chloride in three burettes
and add each, drop by drop, to three separate portions of 20 c.c.
each of the colloidal antimony sulphide until the complete precipi-
tation of the latter is accomplished. It may be necessary to repeat
the experiment before the right end-point is obtained, noticing
carefully when the precipitant causes the supernatant solution to
change from yellow to colorless. It will be found that the largest
amount of precipitant is required in the case of potassium chloride,
the smallest in the case of aluminium chloride. The precipitating
power of equivalent amounts of salts for colloids of this class
increases with the valence of the cation.
2. Shake several portions of 10 c.c. each of the antimony sul-
phide for 1 minute with 2.0, 1.0, 0.5, 0.2, and 0.1 g. respectively of
powdered barium sulphate. The pseudo-dissolved material is
adsorbed by the solid. Determine what quantity of the barium
sulphate is just sufficient for complete adsorption.
Test also, for comparison, the precipitating power of wood
charcoal and animal charcoal.
22. Adsorption of Iodine by Charcoal. Adsorption Curve.
For a more accurate study of adsorption phenomena, charcoal
is particularly well suited, since under ordinary conditions it is
an indifferent substance, and has a constant surface. Place in
each of four 200 c.c. glass-stoppered bottles 2 g. of washed, dried,
and ignited animal charcoal and 50, 75, 90, and 95 c.c. of alcohol;
then add 50, 25, 10, and 5 c.c. respectively of a normal alcoholic
iodine solution, so that the volume in each bottle will be 100 c.c.
 LANTHANUM BLUB. 45

and the contents will differ only in the amount of iodine. After
24 hours, during which time the bottles should be frequently
shaken, take 10 c.c. of the clear solution from each and determine
the iodine content by titration with 0.1-normal sodium thio-
sulphate solution. The difference between the original weight
present and the amount of iodine thus determined gives the quan-
tity adsorbed by the charcoal. Arrange the results in a table and
plot them on coordinate paper with the adsorbed amounts as or-
dinates and the corresponding amounts left in solution as abscissas.
It is found that from dilute solutions relatively more iodine is
adsorbed than from concentrated ones. This relation is quite
general for adsorption equilibria, and can frequently be represented
by the equation — = k, in which ci is the concentration of the
adsorbed iodine, c2 that of the unadsorbed iodine, and n and k are
constants.1 Since in these experiments the same volume and the
same amount of charcoal are taken each time, the quantities of
iodine determined may be used directly in place of cx and c2 in the
equation. Find by trial what value of n makes the quotient
remain most nearly constant; n is greater than 1.

23. Lanthanum Blue.

The blue color which an iodine solution gives with starch depends on the
formation of an adsorption compound between the two substances. This
can be proved by a quantitative investigation of the adsorption curve. The
same conclusion can be reached from the fact that another substance, the
hydrogel of basic lanthanum acetate, which has no property in common with
starch except the colloidal condition, gives precisely the same color reaction.
The formation of lanthanum blue is made use of as a test for lanthanum.
(Cf. No. 171.)

To a dilute solution of lanthanum acetate, or of lanthanum

nitrate acidified with acetic acid, add a solution of iodine in potas-
sium iodide, and then introduce ammonia cautiously, so as to not
quite cause the yellowish-brown color of the iodine to disappear;
warm very gently, and a dark-blue precipitate gradually forms.
1
This equation was proposed by von Bemmelen and later used by Kiister
and Biltz as well as by others. Freundlich has made it known more widely.
Yet the equation itself is often over-emphasized; some reactions to which the
equation appears to apply are not really adsorption reactions at all.
46 CHANGES OF CONDITION.
If a very dilute solution of lanthanum acetate is used, a blue
colloidal solution is produced instead.
Prepare also a little iodo-starch from a very dilute starch
solution and a few drops of iodine solution, and compare the
colors.

24. Molybdenum Blue, Mo3Os.

Blue molybdenum oxide, Mo3O8, is soluble as a reversible colloid in water
and behaves in this respect, as well as in its behavior towards vegetable and
animal fibers, like many of the organic dyestuffs.
Dissolve 15 g. of commercial ammonium molybdate,
5 (NH4)2MoO4 • 7 MoO3 • 7 H2O, in 250 c.c. of water, add 35 to 40 c.c.
of 2-normal sulphuric acid, heat the solution to boiling, and keep
boiling gently for 30 minutes to an hour, meanwhile introducing a
stream of hydrogen sulphide. Reduction takes place, causing the
appearance in a few moments of a dark-blue color. With a smaller
amount of sulphuric acid a precipitation of molybdenum sulphide
takes place; with more acid the yield becomes poorer. Filter from
precipitated sulphur and subject the solution to dialysis for from
4 to 6 days (cf. No. 21), until the outside water is free from sul-
phuric acid, and is only faintly blue. Evaporate the contents of
the dialyzing tube in a porcelain dish, at first over a free flame and
finally on the water bath, until, after frequent stirring, the resinous,
deep-blue residue has become a dry powder. Yield, 5 to 7 g.
The preparation is soluble without residue in water. Use the
solution for the following experiments:
1. Boil a portion with a piece of undyed silk. The silk is col-
ored blue. This dyeing experiment can also be carried out with
the undialyzed solution.
2. Repeat Experiment 1 with the addition of a considerable
amount of sodium sulphate. More of the coloring matter is taken
up by the silk. This is due to the salting-out action of the elec-
trolyte.
3. Shake a little of the solution with some freshly-precipitated,
washed aluminium hydroxide. A mixture of molybdenum blue
and hydrated aluminium oxide is precipitated (a lake) and the
solution becomes lighter colored. Hydrogels can thus be dyed
!ike fabrics.
4. Mix a few cubic centimeters of dilute molybdenum blue solu-
 COLLOIDAL GOLD SOLUTIONS. 47

tion, drop by drop, with a colloidal solution of zirconium oxide.1

After enough of the former has been added, a molybdenum-blue-
zircon lake is precipitated. Regarding the mutual precipitation
of colloids, see p. 42.

25. Colloidal Gold Solutions; Precipitating Colloids and Protective

Colloids.
During recent years, gold solutions have been used with great success,
particularly by Zsigmondy, in making clear the nature of the various prop-
erties of colloidal suspensions. Red colloidal solutions of gold can be pre-
pared by electrical disintegration of the metal or by reduction of gold salts
in various ways. The red color of gold-ruby glass is likewise due to colloidal
gold. The adsorption compound of colloidal gold and tin oxide hydrogel,
called Purple of Cassius, serves for the qualitative detection of gold. (Cf.
No. 9.)

1. Colloidal Gold according to Zsigmondy.2 Mix together in a

round-bottomed, 300-400 c.c. flask of Jena glass, 120 c.c. of pure,
distilled water3 and 2.5 c.c. of chlorauric acid solution (prepared
by dissolving 0.6 g. of HAuCU • 3 H2O crystals in 100 c.c. of dis-
tilled water) and add 3.0 to 3.5 c.c. of 0.18 normal, pure potassium
carbonate solution. After this, add about 0.5 c.c. of an ethereal
phosphorus solution, prepared by saturating ether with phos-
phorus and finally diluting to five times the original volume with
ether. If the mixture is allowed to stand several hours, it will
gradually turn brown, often showing a blue or black color as well,
and finally turn red. After about 24 hours at room temperature,
a fairly homogeneous colloidal solution of gold will be obtained
with the particles of gold so small that they cannot be seen with
the ultra-microscope (amicrons). The reduction of the gold from
the tervalent state, in which it exists in chlorauric acid, takes place
more rapidly if the liquid is heated to boiling after the introduction
of the ethereal solution of phosphorus. Then, after the red colora-
1
Pseudo-solutions of zirconium oxide can be prepared by dialyzing a solu-
tion (about 16 per cent) of zircon nitrate for about 5 days with frequent
change of water.
2
R. Zsigmondy, Z. Anal. Chem. 40, 697 (1901). The most beautiful gold
solutions can be obtained by this classic but very difficult procedure.
3
This preparation is a difficult one. It is best to use distilled water which
has been redistilled, after adding some potassium permanganate, using a
silver condenser and a receiver of Jena glass.
48 CHANGES OF CONDITION.

tion has been obtained, the ether can be driven off completely and
air introduced to oxidize the excess phosphorus, without injury
to the gold colloid (hydrosol). This preparation of colloidal gold
solution is very sensitive to external conditions; it is not possible
to produce equally good solutions in all laboratories.
2. Colloidal Gold by Reduction with Carbon Monoxide. Prepare
carbon monoxide by heating oxalic acid crystals with concentrated
sulfuric acid, and passing the gas through sodium hydroxide solu-
tion to remove carbon dioxide. Pass a slow stream of the carbon
monoxide into 120 cc. of 0.03% chlorauric acid. There is pro-
duced a violet color which changes to violet-red and later to a dark
red. Do not carry the reduction too far, as the solution will then
assume a permanent violet color.
3. Colloidal Gold by Reduction with the Hydrogen Flame.1 I t is
easy to prepare a colloidal gold solution by merely directing a
pointed hydrogen flame, 1 to 2 cm. long, against a 0.03% solution
of chlorauric acid contained in a wide, porcelain dish. After
about five minutes the solution begins to be colored; soon a rich
red color is produced. Occasional stirring hastens the formation
of the colloidal gold.
Use a gold solution prepared by any one of these methods in the
following experiments.
I. Synthesis of Purple of Cassius. From a mixture of colloidal
stannic oxide and colloidal gold, the gold-stannic oxide adsorption
compound is precipitated on the addition of electrolytes. In order
to prepare the colloidal stannic acid solution, allow 5 cc. of tin
tetrachloride (No. 50) to become hydrolyzed by the addition of
150 to 200 cc. of water, and pour this solution into 500 cc. of
water to which a few drops of ammonia have been added. Dialyze
the clear mixture for five days (cf. No. 21), changing the outside
water two or three times daily, until it shows no test for chlorides.
If during this process a hydrogel separates in the dialyzing tube,
it may be peptonized (see p. 40) in a beaker by the addition of
about three drops of ammonia, whereupon, after a time, the jelly
will go over into a perfectly clear hydrosol. A mixture of this
hydrosol with an equal volume of gold solution remains unchanged,
but on addition of a salt (ammonium chloride) a beautiful deep-
1
J. Donau, Monatsh. 34, 949 (1913). Colloidal solutions of silver, platinum
and molybdenum blue can be prepared by this method.
 SEMIPERMEABLE MEMBRANES. 49
reddish-purple precipitate is formed which can be filtered off; the
compound is characterized by its solubility in ammonia.
II. Zircon-gold-purple. Treat 130 c.c. of a boiling colloidal gold
solution with 28 c.c. of a boiling colloidal zircon solution (see foot-
note to No. 24). A precipitation of zircon-gold-purple takes place
even without the addition of an electrolyte. In the cold the pre-
cipitate forms slowly. If the deposition is incomplete, preliminary
tests must be made with small portions to find the right propor-
tions in which to mix the above solution.
III. Gold Solution and Protective Colloids. Treat 10 c.c. of col-
loidal gold solution with a few drops of dilute hydrochloric acid; a
blue coloration is first produced, later sedimentation of the metal.
Repeat the experiment after first adding one drop of a dilute
gelatin solution (0.2 per cent) to the colloidal gold; no change
whatever in the color or the stability of the gold solution is observed.
26. Hydrogels as Semipermeable Membranes.
The separation of colloids and electrolytes by dialysis depends on the
colloidal nature of the parchment wall, which is impervious to other colloids.
Certain colloids are impervious even to truly dissolved substances but still
pervious to water. By means of membranes of such semipermeable material
a solute can be separated from its solvent, and thus the osmotic pressure of
the dissolved substance can be both demonstrated and measured. Cupric
ferrocyanide has been found especially suitable as a semipermeable colloid.
(Pfeffer, 1877.)

1. Cupric Ferrocyanide Membrane. Let a drop of a cold, satu-

rated potassium ferrocyanide solution run from a fine, glass
capillary into a 0.5-molal copper sulphate solution, and detach it
by means of a slight motion, so that it sinks to the bottom of the
vessel. • The drop has at the moment of its entrance into the solu-
tion become surrounded with a thin film of cupric ferrocyanide,
which keeps growing at the cost of the dissolved components.
Since, however, the concentration of the solute within the mem-
brane is greater than that of the copper sulphate outside, the mem-
brane expands in consequence of the pressure caused by the water
entering through the walls. The membrane is at first trans-
parent and traversed by brown veins. A uniform growth can be
brought about by occasional, gentle stirring of the copper sulphate
solution. As the cell keeps expanding a point is reached when
the specific gravity of its contents having grown less through
50 CHANGES OF CONDITION.

entrance of water, the cell rises to the surface of the solution, and
remains there until, after ten or fifteen minutes, the constant
thickening of its walls so increases its weight as to make it once
more sink, and this time permanently.
2. Membranes of Colloidal Silicates of the Heavy Metals. Dilute
some commercial water-glass solution until a specific gravity of 1.1
is obtained. Into about 100 c.c. of this solution in a narrow
beaker, drop small particles of various salts, such as copper sulphate,
aluminium sulphate, ferric chloride, nickel nitrate, cobalt nitrate,
manganous sulphate, lead nitrate, and uranyl nitrate. Within a
few minutes the particles begin to swell and to send out shoots
which branch and grow toward the surface of the liquid until the
whole beaker is filled with what appear to be bright colored algse
growths. The salt, on being thrown into the solution, begins at
once to dissolve, and at the surface of contact between this solu-
tion and the silicate solution, an insoluble semi-permeable film of
metal silicate is formed. The dissolved salt within exerts an
osmotic pressure against this film, and forces it to expand, while
the water which is thereby drawn in through the film dissolves
more of the salt. The osmotic pressure is thus maintained and
the film is continuously forced to expand until it bursts in places
and forms outgrowths and side-arms.
 CHAPTER III.

SIMPLE COMPOUNDS.
UNDER the designation simple compounds are included all compounds con-
taining but two elements, with the exception, however, of the persulphides,
peroxides, polyhalides, etc., which are considered to have complex cations
(Chap. IV). The metal hydroxides and cyanides, in which the radicals OH
and CN behave as single elements, are also classed as simple compounds.
METHODS OF PREPARATION. Simple compounds are prepared:
(1) Synthetically from the elements:
Br2 + H2 = 2 HBr (No. 35a).
Cf. also Cerium Hydride (No. 32); Fel 2 (No. 39); FeCl3 (No. 42); CrCl3 (No. 44);
S2C12 (No. 45); PC13 (No. 46); Bil 3 (No. 48); BiBr3 (No. 49); SnCl4 (No. 50);
SiCl4 (No. 51); PjS, (No. 54); HgS (No. 55); Mg3N2 (No. 61); Mg3P2 (No. 63).
Frequently the synthetic preparation of compounds between two elements
takes place in stages:
P + 3 Cl = PCI,,
PC13 + 2 Cl = PC15. (No. 46)
Cf. also SO3 (No. 28); SbCl5 (No. 47); SnS2 (No. 56).
(2) By the interaction of two substances, each containing one of the ele-
ments which are to be combined:
(a) By the action of an element upon a compound:
Fe + 2 HC1 = FeCl2 + H2. (No. 43)
Cf. also A1C1, (No. 43).
(6) By the chemical reaction between two compounds (double decomposi-
tion or metathesis), as, for example, in the precipitation of a sulphide from the
solution of a metallic salt by means of hydrogen sulphide:
CuCl2 + H ^ = CuS + 2 HC1.
Cf. MnS (No. 57); TiS2 (No. 58); CrN (No. 62); and BrH (No. 35b).
(3) By the breaking down of more complicated compounds:
2 HNO3 = H2O + N2O4 + O (No. 29)
Cf. also Cr2O3 (No. 30); Cu2O (No. 31); copper hydride (No. 33); cyanogen
(No. 59); BaS (No. 87).
Certain simple compounds which were formerly prepared by double decom-
position, or by the breaking down of more complicated compounds, are now
most advantageously obtained directly from the elements, even industrially;
both because the requisite conditions for their formation are now better
understood and because some elements are far more accessible than formerly.
51
52 SIMPLE COMPOUNDS.

Thus sulphuric acid anhydride is now prepared directly by the contact process
(No. 28), nitric oxide from the elements in the atmosphere (combustion of air),
ammonia from nitrogen and hydrogen, and aluminium chloride from the
metal (cf. No. 43.)
REACTIVITY AND DEGREE OP DISSOCIATION. It is a general principle that
the reactivity of a substance is determined by a previous breaking down
(dissociation), to a greater or less extent, in the same sense as that in which
the reaction in question takes place. Phosphorus pentachloride, for example,
has a chlorinating effect, and sulphur trioxide an oxidizing effect, only when
under the prevailing conditions the one is partly dissociated into free chlorine,
the other into free oxygen, even in the absence of any substance to be chlo-
rinated or oxidized. Conversely, a tendency shown by substances to enter
into reaction may be considered as an indication of the preexistence of a
corresponding dissociation. The dissociation of binary substances, which in
fact often takes place in stages, is essentially the reverse of their synthesis.
PC16 = PC13 + Cl2
PC13 = P + 3 Cl
2 SO3 = 2 SO2 + O2 (No. 28 )
DISSOCIATION AND STATE OF EQUILIBRIUM. If it is true that reactivity is
dependent upon a certain ability to dissociate, it becomes important to study
the conditions favoring the formation and those favoring the decomposition
of substances. To take a concrete example, — When does the reaction
2 SO2 + O3 = 2 SO3
take place, and when
2 SO3 = 2 SO2 + O2?
In this connection, another principle which is likewise of very general
importance has been established, — namely, that a reaction never takes place
completely in one direction; at most the chemical change may proceed chiefly
in a definite direction until when the reaction comes to a standstill (i.e., when
equilibrium is reached) the products of dissociation and the undissociated
compound exist together side by side, forming the so-called equilibrium-
mixture. The percentage composition of an equilibrium-mixture is charac-
terized by the fact that the same values are obtained irrespective of whether
at the start a mixture of the pure components or the pure compound itself is
present. Thus, for example, the same mixture of SO3, SO2, and O2 is obtained
whether equivalent amounts (e.g.! formula weights) of SO2 and O2 are allowed
to react, or an equivalent quantity of SO3 is allowed to decompose under the
same conditions of temperature and volume.
2 SO3 <=> 2 SO2 + 0 2
should be read: sulphur trioxide "in equilibrium with" sulphur dioxide and
oxygen.
Inasmuch as all reactions are, strictly speaking, reversible, it is theoretically
impossible to prepare perfectly pure compounds; for a compound can only
exist as a stable substance when it is in equilibrium with its products of disso-
ciation. For practical purposes, however, it is true that (1) in the equilibrium
mixture the percentage content of dissociation products, or in the other case
the fraction of undissociated substance, is frequently so extremely small that it
 SIMPLE COMPOUNDS. 53

becomes negligible, and that (2) the rate at which certain substances decom-
pose after they have once been prepared "pure" is often so extremely slow
that measurable quantities of the dissociation products are formed only after a
very long time.1
MASS-ACTION LAW. The state of equilibrium which combining or decom-
posing substances reach is dependent (1) upon the nature of the reacting
substances, (2) upon their masses, and (3) upon the temperature. The influ-
ence exerted by the masses upon the state of equilibrium can be expressed
mathematically by the so-called Law of Mass Action (Guldberg and Waage,
1867). According to this law, the product of the concentrations of the sub-
stances which are upon the right-hand side of the sign of equilibrium, divided
by the product of the concentrations of the substances on the left-hand side,
is a constant at a given temperature. The concentration is usually expressed
as the number of gram-molecules of substance which are contained in a unit
of volume. If A is the formula of a substance, it is customary to express the
concentration of A by inclosing it in brackets [A]; then if (A) represents the
actual amount of substance present expressed in gram-molecules, and v
the volume, we have c. \
[A] - £ >
If A and B are two substances which by reacting together form two new
substances C and D, with which they finally come to equilibrium,
A + B <=> C + D,
then the mass-action law is expressed as follows:
[C] [D] _ K
[A] [B] *•
If, however, two or more molecules (a, 6, etc., being the numbers) of any of
the substances enter into the reaction, then the concentration of these sub-
stances must be taken a, b, etc., times in the mass-action-law equation. Thus
if a molecules of A react with b molecules of B to form c molecules of C and d
molecules of D, the equation becomes:
[C]c [T>f R

[A]° [Bf
APPLICATION OP THE MASS-ACTION LAW. The value of the mass-action
law for the manufacturing chemist becomes apparent when with its aid the
yields are predicted that can be obtained in the preparation of a substance at
a given temperature but with varying proportions of the reacting materials.
This is particularly well illustrated by measurements of Bodenstein and Pohl
with regard to the contact-process for the manufacture of sulphuric acid.
Sulphur dioxide and oxygen react within a reasonable interval of time to form
sulphur trioxide only when in the presence of catalyzers; the presence of the
catalyzer, however, has no effect upon the equilibrium which is finally reached.
2 SO2 + 0 2 <=> 2 SO3.
1
In old collections of organic preparations, the amount of impurities which
have arisen from a self-decomposition of the material is often very considerable.
64 SIMPLE COMPOUNDS.

If, as before, i> represents the volume of the gas-mixture, and the formulas
inclosed in parentheses the number of gram-molecules of substance present
when equilibrium is reached, then for a given temperature the mass-action
law gives the relation:
(SO3)'

(SO2)2 (0,) "'

v1 v
and the "efficiency" of the reaction, i.e., the ratio of the trioxide formed to the
unchanged dioxide, is:
(SO,) <K(OJ
(SOa) \ v '
It is evident from this last expression, that it is favorable to the yield if as
pure oxygen as possible (small v, little diluent of indifferent gas) and as much
oxygen as possible (high concentration of O2) is present. That this conclusion
is correct is shown by the following table, in which the yield (i.e., the actual
quantity of SO3 obtained, compared with what would result if the entire
amount of the SO2 could be oxidized) is given in per cent by volume. In the
first case a mixture composed of the theoretically correct proportions of sul-
phur dioxide and oxygen was taken, in the second the same mixture diluted
with nitrogen, and in the third case sulphur dioxide together with an excess of
oxygen. The measurements were made at 500°.

Yield in per cerit

Per cent N 2 . Per cent SO 2 . Per cent O2.
SO 2 oxidized.

1 0. 66.67 33.33 91.3

2 89.50 7.00 3.5 81.2
3 0. 7.00 93.00 98.1

For the formation of ammonia from the elements:

N2 + 3 H 2 # 2 NH3
the mass-action law gives:
(NH3)2

V V3

The equilibrium quantity of ammonia is:

(NH3) =

The yield of ammonia, therefore, increases with decreasing volume,

 SIMPLE COMPOUNDS. 55
v, or, in other words, as Nernst predicted from the theory and
Haber has found in practice, the yield increases as the pressure
increases. This is shown very clearly by the values given for
the yields of ammonia obtained by Haber in experiments with the
equilibrium mixture of 3 vol. H2 to 1 vol. N2.

(. 1 Atm. 30 Atm. 100 Atm. 200 Atm.

400° 0.44% 10.7% 25.1% 36.3%

600 0.049 1.43 4.47 8.25

Further applications of the mass-action law are illustrated in the prepara-

tion of nitrogen peroxide (No. 29), hydrobromic and hydriodic acids from the
elements (No. 35), and phosphorus pentachloride and trichloride (No. 46);
cf. also, Dissociation of Electrolytes, p. 66.
DEPENDENCE OF EQUILIBRIUM CONSTANTS UPON THE TEMPERATURE. It is
also apparent from the above expression that the yield in the contact process
is dependent on the value of the constant, K; if K can be made greater, the
proportion of SO3 is increased. The value of K depends upon the temperature,
and its variation can be predicted with the aid of thermochemical data and
the principles of thermodynamics.
Chemical reactions are, from a thermochemical standpoint, divided into
two classes: those in which heat is evolved, or set free (exothermic reactions),
and those in which heat is absorbed, or used up (endothermic reactions).
Endothermic compounds, or, in other words, those in the formation of which
from their elements heat is absorbed, are far less common (cf. cyanogen,
No. 59, and hydrogen peroxide, No. 67). Experience has shown that the
conditions for the formation of endothermic compounds are more favorable
at high temperatures, while for exothermic compounds the reverse is true.
Since in the formation of a substance the size of the constant, K, is, under
otherwise equal conditions, a measure of the yield, it seems plausible that in
the case of exothermic reactions the value of K diminishes with rise of tem-
perature, whereas in endothermio reactions it increases.
According to van't Hoff, there exists between the heat of reaction Q, the
absolute temperatures Ti and T2, at which the reaction takes place, and the
corresponding equilibrium-constants Ki and K2, together with the gas con-
stant R, the exact relation:

from which it follows that when T2 > 7\, and the value of Q is positive (exo-
thermic reactions), Ki becomes smaller than K\, and for negative values of Q
(endothermic reactions) K% is greater than Ki. This is based upon the assump-
tion that Q is independent of the temperature at which the reaction takes
place. Whether this is true or not must be ascertained in the case of each
56 OXIDES.

reaction studied. In the synthesis of sulphuric anhydride this has been found
to be practically true; and it is therefore possible, when the analysis of the
equilibrium mixture at a given temperature is known, to compute the com-
position of the equilibrium mixture at any other temperature. The equi-
librium-constants, as above defined, for the sulphuric acid contact-process
have been found to be as follows:

(. K. t. K.

528° 645. X10 2 727 2.82 X10 2

579 131. X10 2 789 0.794X10 2
627 31.6 X10 2 832 0.357X10 2
J
680 8.93 X10 897 0.123X10 2

In accordance with the positive heat of reaction, Q = 21,700 calories, a

rapid diminution in the value of K is observed.
The practical application of the theory in the manufacture of sulphuric acid
is shown by the following yields calculated for various mixtures at different
temperatures:

Composition of Reacting Mixtures. Yield of SO3 at

SO, o3 400° 500° 700° 900°

66.67 33.33 98.1 91.3 51.5 16.0

14.00 86.00 99.8 97.9 69.8 24.4
2.00 98.00 99.8 98.2 VI.2 25.6

It is, therefore, more important that the process should be carried out at a
relatively low temperature than that an excess of oxygen should be employed.
On the other hand, the temperature cannot be made too low, as then the rate
at which the reaction takes place, even in the presence of a catalyzer, becomes
too small.
The so-called "blast-furnace equilibrium," 2 CO + 02 <=± 2 CO2, is displaced
with increase of temperature, and the reaction proceeds more in the direction
from right to left, because here again the heat of reaction is positive; cf. No. 1.

OXIDES.
27. Liquid Sulphur Dioxide.
Sulphur dioxide is prepared technically by burning either sulphur or
pyrite. On a small scale, it is obtained by the reduction of concentrated
sulphuric acid, or its anhydride, which when hot has a strong oxidizing power:
SO3 + Cu = SO2 + CuO.
The reduction with copper takes place also to a slight extent, according to the
equation:
SO3 + 4 Cu = CuS -I- 3 CuO.
 LIQUID SULPHUR DIOXIDE. 57

The copper oxide, as fast as it is formed, dissolves in the sulphuric acid,

forming copper sulphate. It is essential for the decomposition that the
sulphuric acid should be hot and that it should be concentrated, whereby its
content of SO3 is increased; the nature of the reducing agent is less important,
for the copper may be replaced by other metals or even by carbon.
Sulphur dioxide can be condensed to a liquid (boiling-point — 10°) by
cooling the gas in a mixture of ice and common salt.
Heat 50 g. of copper turnings in a round-bottomed flask with
200 g. of concentrated, commercial sulphuric acid until the boiling-
point of the latter is nearly reached. Lower the flame as soon
as gas is given off freely. Pass the gas through a wash bottle
containing concentrated sulphuric acid, and into a second empty
wash bottle which is surrounded with a mixture of three parts
of ice to one of salt, and in which the sulphur dioxide condenses
to a liquid.
When the evolution of the sulphur dioxide slackens, pour the
liquid from the evolution flask into an evaporating dish before
it has a chance to solidify, and allow it to cool by standing over
night. In the morning decant the liquor from the mass of crystals
which have separated, dissolve the crystals in as little boil-
ing water as possible, and filter off any insoluble black
powder on a large plaited filter. Copper vitriol, CuSC>4 • 5 H2O,
separates from the nitrate in well-defined crystals; collect them
in a filter funnel and evaporate the mother liquor to obtain a
second, and finally a third, crop of crystals. When the product
has been dried as much as possible by suction, place it in an
evaporating dish, which is covered with filter paper, and allow it
to dry for several days at the room temperature.
The sulphur dioxide, as prepared above, always contains some
sulphuric acid, fumes of which are carried over mechanically
by the gas from the evolution flask, and are not entirely kept
back by the first wash-bottle; immediately after being pre-
pared, therefore, the sulphur dioxide should be purified by distilla-
tion. Close one tube of the wash bottle which contains it, and
connect the other tube by means of a short piece of rubber with a
glass tube which is bent at right angles, and whose vertical arm is
drawn out to an internal diameter of about 0.2 cm. (Fig. 12). In-
troduce this narrow tube nearly to the bottom of a thick-walled
sealing tube, 0.4 to 0.5 cm. wide, which is sealed at the bottom,
and drawn out a little at a point about 18 cm. above the lower
58 OXIDES.

end. This tube is prepared, cleaned, and dried before beginning

the distillation; care must be taken to round the lower end and to
make the constriction without lessening
the thickness of the walls at any point.
In order to distil the sulphur dioxide,
transfer the wash bottle from the freezing
mixture to a bath of water at room tem-
perature, and place the thick-walled tube,
which now serves as the receiver, in the
freezing mixture. The sulphur dioxide
soon begins to distil. When the receiver
is about half filled, stop the distillation
and seal the tube at the constriction,
taking great care that the strength of the
walls is not lessened thereby. While the
tube is being sealed it must be kept in
FIG. 12. the freezing mixture; the tube and bath
together may be held by a second person at a proper distance
from the blast lamp. The tube must be allowed to cool while
resting in a perpendicular position so that the liquid sulphur diox-
ide does not come in contact with the hot parts of the glass.

28. Sulphur Trioxide by the Contact Process.

The fact that sulphur dioxide will combine with oxygen when in the presence
of finely divided platinum was known in the first half of the last century. Cl.
Winkler showed as early as 1875 that, by means of such a contact-process,
sulphuric acid could be made on an industrial scale from mixtures of sulphur
dioxide and oxygen. It was not until nearly the close of the century, how-
ever, that the doubts with regard to the feasibility of manufacturing sulphuric
anhydride on a large scale from the gases evolved in the roasting of pyrite
were overcome; then the Badische Aniline- und Sodafabrik made public the
most favorable temperature for this process and directed the attention of a
wide circle of chemists to the problem of freeing the gases from catalyzer
poisons (cf. No. 20), particularly arsenic compounds.
Sulphur trioxide exists in two allotropic modifications: as a mobile liquid
(boiling-point 46°) which forms crystals on being sufficiently cooled (freezing-
point 15°), and as a white asbestos-like mass which on warming volatilizes
without previously melting. The latter is the more stable modification;
liquid sulphur trioxide on standing goes over slowly of itself, or more rapidly
in the presence of a trace of sulphuric acid which acts as catalyzer, into this
asbestos-like condition.
The asbestos-like form when dissolved in phosphorus oxychloride is bi-
 SULPHUR TRIOXIDE. 59

molecular, whereas the liquid sulphur trioxide proves to be monomolecular

when studied in the same way. It seems probable, therefore, that the solid
form is a polymer of the liquid.

Make a slight bend in a 40 cm. long combustion tube at a

point about 6 cm. from one end, and insert the bent end in one
opening of a two-necked globular receiver (Fig. 16); to the other
neck connect a glass tube leading to the ventilating flue of the
hood under -which the apparatus is constructed. Make the
joints tight by means of asbestos cord. Close the front end of
the combustion tube with a cork through which one arm of a
T-tube is inserted in order that sulphur dioxide and oxygen may
be introduced at the same time. Fill a section of the combustion
tube, 12 to 15 cm. long, with loosely-packed, platinized asbestos
which is prepared by moistening the required amount of asbestos
with 5 c.c. of 10% chloroplatinic acid solution, drying and igniting
the mass. After the experiment the platinized asbestos can be
purified by washing and again igniting, and it is then ready for
use again. The whole apparatus must be perfectly dry; even
the asbestos cord with which the joints are made tight must be
previously ignited.
Place the combustion tube in an asbestos chamber (cf. Fig. 4),
whose edges measure 15, 4.5, and 4.5 cm. respectively. There
should be a wide slit in the bottom for the entrance of the flame,
and an opening in the cover to carry away the combustion products.
Place a wide burner at some distance below the combustion
tube, and regulate the flame to maintain the temperature of the
platinized asbestos at about 400°. This temperature may be
read with a mercury thermometer which has been filled under
pressure,- or it may be estimated quite closely with a 360° ther-
mometer if the latter, upon being placed inside the asbestos
chamber, shows but a slow rise of its thread above the 350° mark.
Pass oxygen from a steel cylinder or a gasometer through a
wash bottle containing concentrated sulphuric acid, which serves
to dry the gas and at the same time to show the speed with which
it is being drawn. Admit the oxygen through one arm of the
T-tube into the combustion tube, and through the other branch
of the T-tube introduce sulphur dioxide which is generated by
the action of 400 g. concentrated sulphuric acid upon 100 g.
copper. This gas must likewise be passed through sulphuric acid,
60 OXIDES.
and in addition through a tube loosely filled with glass wool in
order to free it from the spray mechanically carried along from the
generating flask. Regulate the flow of the two gases so that
a little more oxygen than sulphur dioxide passes into the con-
tact tube. Keep the receiver immersed in ice water; sulphur
trioxide collects abundantly either in the liquid modification or
in the asbestos-like form. The experiment takes about three hours.
For the following experiments use the liquid form. In case
the asbestos-like form has been obtained, loosen it with a glass
stirring rod and place a layer of it about 1 cm. deep in each of
three test-tubes; add (under the hood) a drop of concentrated
sulphuric acid to each tube, heat just to the melting-point, and
then allow to cool. To one test-tube add flowers of sulphur
from the point of a knife blade; to the second, powdered selenium;
and to the third, iodine. In the first test-tube an indigo-blue
solution is formed, in the second a bluish green, and in the third
likewise a bluish green, or, if considerable iodine has been added,
a brown solution. The compounds, S2O3 and SSeO3, are pro-
duced in the first and second tubes respectively.
Oxidation of Naphthalin with Sulphuric A aid.
The dissociation of sulphur trioxide, SO3 = SO2 + O, in opposition to the
reaction of its synthesis by the contact process, is frequently utilized for
technical and analytical purposes; by an increase of temperature, and by the
presence of catalyzers, such as mercury or copper salts, the oxidizing action
is considerably accelerated. Instead of sulphur trioxide, fuming sulphuric
acid or even ordinary concentrated sulphuric acid may be employed, although
the effect is not then so readily obtained.
The most important technical utilization of this oxidizing power of fuming
sulphuric acid is in the transformation of naphthalin into phthalic acid, the
latter being used in the preparation of artificial indigo:
CI0H8 +90= C8H6O4 + H2O + 2 CO2.
Naphthalin Phthalic Acid
Place 5 g. naphthalin, 1 g. mercury, and 80 g. concentrated
sulphuric acid in which the remainder of the above sulphur
trioxide has been dissolved (or 80 g. of commercial, fuming sul-
phuric acid) in a 300 c.c. retort, and heat the mixture slowly,
almost to boiling, on a Babo funnel. Insert the neck of the retort
into a small flask, which serves as a receiver, and cool the latter
with water. A white sublimate of phthalic anhydride soon appears
in the upper part and neck of the retort, and the odor of sulphur
 NITROGEN DIOXIDE. 61

dioxide becomes apparent. From time to time drive the sub-

limate over into the receiver by fanning the top and neck of the
retort with the flame of a Bunsen burner.
When, at the end of two or three hours, X ~Q
nothing further passes over, decant off the C /
sulphuric acid which has distilled into the Fig- 13.
receiver and recrystallize the phthalic
anhydride, from 75 to 100 c.c. of water. The nitrate from the
first crop yields more crystals on evaporation.
Dry the phthalic acid thus obtained, and distil it in a test-
tube held nearly horizontally, the closed end of which is bent
downward at a slight angle, as shown in Fig. 13. Water is split
off from the molecule during the sublimation, and beautiful
needles of phthalic anhydride (melting-point 128° C.) are formed.
By another crystallization from water, 2 to 3 g. of pure, perfectly
white phthalic acid are obtained.
For the characterization and identification of the phthalic
acid, mix a little of it with equal amounts of resorcinol and an-
hydrous zinc chloride. Heat this mixture slowly in a small,
dry test-tube over a small flame until it sinters and then melts.
After heating a minute longer, cool the brownish-red fusion and
dissolve it in a little alcohol. Pour the solution thus obtained
into a large beaker containing distilled water, and add a few drops
of caustic soda solution. A deep-yellow solution is obtained
which, by reflected light, shows a beautiful green fluorescence
(synthesis of fluorescein).

29. Nitrogen Dioxide.

Place 40 g. of coarse lumps of arsenic trioxide in a flask, add
50 g. of concentrated nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.4), and heat the mix-
ture moderately upon a sand bath (or Babo boiling funnel).
Lead the gases evolved successively through an empty wash-
bottle, a U-tube containing glass wool, a second empty wash-
bottle, and finally into a third wash-bottle (surrounded with ice)
in which the oxides of nitrogen are condensed. A mixture of
nitrogen dioxide, nitrogen trioxide,1 and nitric oxide is obtained.
1
Nitrogen trioxide N2O3 can exist only in the liquid condition. It is un-
stable, and when vaporized dissociates into NO and NO2 (or N2O4). v. Wit-
torff, Z. anorg. Chem. 41, 85 (1904).
62 OXIDES.

After the evolution of gas from the flask has ceased, pass a cur-
rent of oxygen through the condensed liquid in the wash-bottle,
still keeping it surrounded with ice, until the color becomes a
pure yellowish brown; only a small amount of the nitrous gases
are lost during this operation. If it is desired to preserve the
preparation, heat the flask containing the liquid nitrogen dioxide
cautiously by means of lukewarm water and distil the liquid
into a sealing tube, in exactly the same manner as with sulphur
dioxide (p. 57). Boiling-point 22° C.
Cork stoppers and rubber tubing are energetically attacked
by the oxides of nitrogen. Therefore, in fitting up the above
apparatus, select corks which fit tightly and protect them with
a coating of vaseline; where the use of rubber connections is
unavoidable, bring the ends of the glass tubing close to-
gether.
Gaseous nitrogen dioxide is always mixed with considerable nitrogen tetrox-
ide, N2O4, formed by association of the dioxide molecules. The mixture is
light brown at room temperature; on being heated it becomes darker as a
result of progressive dissociation: N»O4 —> 2 NO2, but on being heated more
strongly (above 130°) it becomes lighter in color owing to the decomposition
of the dioxide into nitric oxide, NO, and oxygen. These changes in color can
be shown by a simple experiment. Take a 25-30 cm. long glass tube of
difficultly-fusible glass, with about 1 cm. outside diameter, and introduce a
small amount of liquid nitrogen dioxide by the method described for sulphur
dioxide in Preparation No. 27. After all the liquid has been allowed to evapo-
rate, seal the tube filled with the vapor. For the nitrogen dioxide to be com-
pletely dry at this point, phosphorous pentoxide should have been added to the
liquid in the wash bottle before distilling it into the experimental tube. Clamp
the tube in a horizontal position and heat it in the middle with a broad flame
from a Bunsen burner until the gas in this part of the tube appears color-
less (NO + O2); the gas will be dark brown on both sides of the colorless
zone (NO2), while the outer portions of the gas will appear light brown
(NO2 + N2O4).

Arsenic acid may be obtained from the residue in the evolution

flask. Complete the oxidation by further heating with con-
centrated nitric acid, and evaporate the solution to a fairly thick
sirup. If exactly the right concentration of the sirupy solution
is obtained, it will form a nearly solid mass of crystals of arsenic
acid on standing in the ice chest.
 HYDRIDES. 63

30. Chromic Oxide In the Dry Way from a Chromate.

The preparation of chromic oxide by the reduction of an aqueous solution
of a chromate to one of a chromic salt, with subsequent precipitation and
ignition of chromic hydroxide, is not a convenient process because of the
difficulty and tediousness of filtering and washing the very voluminous pre-
cipitate. The method originated by Wohler, 1827, which is that given in the
following directions, is, therefore, preferable. The chromate is heated in a
crucible with ammonium chloride, whereby the ammonium radical is oxidized
to water and nitrogen while the chlorine combines with the alkali metal of the
chromate.
Mix 147 g. potassium dichromate (one-half mol.) intimately
with an equal weight of ammonium chloride, and heat the mixture
in a clay crucible, in a charcoal furnace, until no more vapors
are given off. After cooling, boil the brittle contents of the
crucible repeatedly with fresh portions of water until all the
soluble salt has been removed. Compute the yield of the dried
preparation in percentage of the theoretical. Dependent prep-
aration, Chromium No. 3.
31. Cuprous Oxide.
In a 1750 cc. Erlenmeyer flask mix a solution of 55 grams of
copper sulphate crystals in 500 cc. of water with one of 25 grams
of hydroxylamine hydrochloride in 125 cc. of water. While
cooling in running water and shaking vigorously, slowly add a
solution of 55 grams of stick potassium hydroxide in 750 c c of
water. A yellow precipitate of cuprous oxide will form. After
the precipitate has settled well, pour off the supernatant liquid
and wash the precipitate by decantation four times with very
dilute hydrochloric acid and then with pure water until the wash-
ings show no test for either chloride or sulphate. For the decan-
tations, it is well to support the flask in an inclined position so
that the precipitate is not disturbed when the liquid is poured off.
Finally drain the precipitate with suction, wash with a little
alcohol and finally with some ether. Dry in a vacuum desiccator,
which causes a slight darkening. Yield about 14 grams.

HYDRIDES.
A few metals combine directly with hydrogen at definite temperatures to
form hydrides (e.g., cerium hydride No. 32).
Copper hydride is formed in aqueous solution by treating cupric salts with
very strong reducing agents (No. 33).
64 HYDRIDES.
Certain products which are formed by the occlusion of hydrogen on
the part of some of the heavy metals, and are to be regarded as solid
solutions, should not be confused with the true hydrides; e.g., palladium-
hydrogen.

32. Cerium Hydride.

If cerium dioxide is reduced by means of metallic magnesium in an atmos-
phere of hydrogen, the metallic cerium, as fast as it is set free, combines with
the gas to form cerium hydride.

Ignite a few grams of eerie ammonium nitrate (No. 171), or

cerous ammonium nitrate, at first gently, and finally with the blast
lamp, and mix the pure, yellow cerium dioxide thus obtained
with powdered magnesium in the proportion of 172 parts CeO2
to 64 parts Mg. Place the mixture in a boat and introduce it
into a short combustion tube, one end of which is connected
through a sulphuric acid wash-bottle with a hydrogen generator,
while the other end can be closed when required. After the
air in the apparatus has been completely replaced by hydrogen,
heat the tube in a short combustion furnace, at first gently, until
all moisture is removed; then close the exit end of the combus-
tion tube and open the cock of the generator wide so that the
reaction mixture stands under a slight pressure of hydrogen.
On now heating the tube with the full flame, the mixture glows,
the walls of the tube above it become blackened, and gas bubbles
pass through the wash-bottle, at first rapidly and then less and
less frequently, corresponding to the rate of consumption of the
hydrogen. Heat the mixture five or ten minutes longer, and
then allow it to cool under hydrogen pressure. The reddish-brown,
fairly compact reaction-product consists of a mixture of cerium
hydride and magnesium oxide. Break pieces of it from the boat
and set fire to them with a match; the material burns with a
hydrogen flame to a nearly white ash. While the hydrogen is
burning, occasional flashes occur from the ignition of particles of
unoxidized magnesium. It is possible to keep cerium hydride
for a long time in sealed vessels.
By heating calcium turnings to a dull red heat in an atmos-
phere of hydrogen, calcium hydride, CaH2, may be prepared in
an analogous manner.
 ACIDS, BASES AND SALTS. 65

33. Copper Hydride.

From 100 c.c. of a 5% solution of barium hypophosphite
(No. 96), precipitate all of the barium by the addition of about
18 c.c. of 2-normal sulphuric acid, and treat the clear filtrate
at the room temperature with four grams of copper sulphate dis-
solved in 15 c.c. of water. After some time, or more quickly if
heated to 30°, the solution becomes green, and dark-brown copper
hydride is precipitated which to some extent adheres to the sides
of the glass vessel as an iridescent film. Filter off the precipitate,
wash it with water, and dry the product in a vacuum-desiccator.
Heat a portion of the copper hydride in a small test-tube. It
decomposes suddenly into red copper and hydrogen; the latter
may be ignited at the mouth of the tube.
Cover a second portion with concentrated hydrochloric acid;
hydrogen is evolved, which, in consequence of the admixed spray
of copper compounds, burns with a deep-blue flame. From the
solution in the test-tube, the addition of a little water precipitates
white cuprous chloride.
ACIDS, BASES, AND SALTS.
The majority of the simple compounds are electrolytes, that is, they are
acids, bases, or salts. The preparation of simple electrolytes can take place
according to the methods outlined on p. 51 as generally applicable for simple
compounds; as peculiar to electrolytes, the formation of a compound by
the association of its ions, presents a special case of synthesis from the ele-
ments. In the preparation of pure electrolytes in solution by bringing
together the necessary ions, it is essential that foreign ions should be removed.
Thus soluble hydroxides may be prepared by precipitating solutions of the
corresponding sulphates with an equivalent amount of barium hydroxide,
the barium and sulphate ions being removed as insoluble barium sulphate,
and only the desired hydroxide and its ions remaining in solution (cf.
No. 36). In a similar way acids may be obtained by the interaction of
barium salts and sulphuric acid (No. 33). Potassium iodide, likewise, may
be prepared conveniently by the double decomposition of ferrous iodide with
potassium carbonate, whereby iron and carbonate ions are precipitated in
the form of an insoluble compound (No. 39).
ELECTROLYTIC DISSOCIATION is distinguished from simple dissociation by
the fact that the products of dissociation are electrically charged. Further-
more, the extent of electrolytic dissociation depends in the highest degree upon
the nature of the solvent medium.
2 HI = H2 + I2 (non-electrolytic dissociation).
HI = H+ + I~ (electrolytic dissociation).
66 ACIDS, BASES, AND SALTS.
This double possibility of dissociation enables substances to react in different
ways. According to the first of the above equations, hydrogen iodide is a
reducing agent; according to the second, it is an acid.
Electrolytic dissociation can be detected and measured by physical methods,
either by estimating the apparent molecular weight of the dissolved substance
by one of the osmotic methods, or by determining the conductivity of the solu-
tion (Arrhenius); cf. No. 34. As has already been stated in the discussion of
the preparation of lithium by the electrolysis of fused lithium chloride (No. 14),
the unit of electricity, the electron, can be represented by the symbol e and
the process of electrolytic dissociation, or ionization, of a binary compound
AB can be represented as follows:

AB <=> A+ + B-

which means that neutral molecules of AB have dissociated, or ionized, into

positively-charged cations A+ and negatively-charged anions, B~. The
element A has lost one of its original electrons and thereby obtained a positive
charge, the element B has gained an electron and thereby acquired a unit
negative.
A" - e = A+; B° + e = B~.

The same reasoning applies when A or B is a combination of two or more

elements. In the original compound, the transfer of an electron from A to B
has probably taken place already and a crystal of a salt consists of a rigid
lattice of the charged particles, the electrostatic attraction of the opposite
charges holding each particle in its definite place so that there can be no move-
ment of the charges and hence no conductivity. Dissolving the salt separates
the charged components so that they are no longer held to definite places.
Each then possesses its own independent motions and shows the osmotic
properties of a complete molecule even although the motion is still restricted
in that particles of opposite charge must always be approximately evenly
spaced throughout the solution. The application of an outside potential will
now draw particles of opposite charge in opposite directions, — in other words,
the solution conducts electricity.
LAW OF DILUTION. The application of the law of mass-action to the
dissociation of a binary electrolyte gives the following expression:

[cation] [anion]
= k.
[undissociated compound]

Thus, in a given case, if the fraction of a gram molecule of a binary electrolyte

which has undergone dissociation is denoted by a (the degree of dissociation),
then 1 — a is the undissociated fraction of the gram molecule which is in
undissociated compound is and that of each ion is - . Then according
 ACIDS, BASES, A N D SALTS. 67
equilibrium with the ions, and at the dilution v the concentration of the
to the mass-action law the following relation holds:
i 2
v
' = k, or yz—-—T— = k. (Ostwald's Law of Dilution.)
1 —a (1 — a) V
V
The maximum possible value for a, the degree of dissociation, is 1, and this
represents complete dissociation; it is evident that this is approached in pro-
portion as v is made large. Experiment 37 illustrates a case of dissociation
with progressive dilution.
Ostwald's dilution law fairly accurately describes the behavior of little
ionized acids and bases, but it fails with the highly ionized acids and bases and
with salts, which in general are highly ionized. Indeed, De Bye and others
hold that salts in solution are J.00 per cent ionized and that the apparent lack
of complete ionization in concentrated solutions, computed from conductivity
and osmotic measurements, is due to certain factors restricting the free motion
of the ions.
IONIZATION TENDENCY, OE ELECTEOAFFINITY. A measure of the force
with which the electron is held to the material atom of an ion is given by the
potential which is necessary to effect the discharge of the ion in an electrolysis
(decomposition potential). This force is variously known as ionization
tendency or electroaffinity. In the following table, the tension in volts is given
which is necessary for the discharge of a few of the metal ions from their
normal solutions, on the basis of the discharge-potential of hydrogen being
taken arbitrarily as zero.1
Mg + 1.482 Cd + 0.420 Pb + 0.151
Al + 1.276 Fe + 0.344 Cu - 0.329
Mn + 1.075 Co + 0.232 Ag - 0.753
Zn + 0.770 Ni + 0.228
In this potential series the distinction which has always been recognized
between noble and base metals is again expressed. Elements with a high
ionizing tendency possess to a marked degree the ability to form simple ions.
Simple ions of the noble metals are less stable, so that the number and impor-
tance of the simple salts of these metals is much less than that of their com-
plex salts. (Cf. Chapters IV and V.)
HYDEOLYTIC DISSOCIATION, OE HYDEOLYSIS. The formation of a salt by
the neutralization of an acid and a base is a reversible process. If M denotes
a metal and R an acid radical, then the reaction of equilibrium is:
Neutralization
MOH + HR *± MR + H2O
Hydrolysis
If the equation is read from right to left it represents an hydrolysis, i.e., the
breaking up of a salt into an acid and a base. Neutralization and hydrolysis
1
The choice of an arbitrary zero-point is necessary, since it is only differ-
ences in potential which can actually be measured.
68 ACIDS, BASES, AND SALTS.

represent, therefore, reciprocal processes. It is important in the preparation

of salts to know which of these reactions preponderates. The mass-action
law applied to this reversible reaction gives:
[HR] [MOH]
[MR] [HOH]
Salts, acids, bases, and water are dissociated electrolytically according to the
following equations:
1. MR = M+ + R~
2. HR = H+ + R~
3. MOH = M+ + OH-
4. HOH = H+ + OH-

The corresponding dissociation constants, K\, Ki, K3, Kt, may be given as
follows:
[M+] [R-] , [H+] [R-]. _ [M+] [OH-], [H+] [0H~]
1 2 3 l
[MR] ' [HR] ' [MOH] ' [HOH] '

If, in the above equations of hydrolysis, the values for the concentration of
undissociated MR, HR, MOH, and HOH obtained respectively from the last
four expressions are inserted, the equation

K — ^ ' ' Kt
K K

is obtained. This equation expresses all the essential phenomena in neu-

tralization and hydrolysis. It shows that hydrolysis will be greater if the
value of Ki becomes larger; or, in other words, if the temperature is raised, since
the dissociation of water, although extremely small, increases quite rapidly
with rise of temperature. The hydrolysis is also greater as K* and Kz are
smaller, or in other words as the acid and base in question are weaker. Inas-
much as the weakness of the base usually increases with the valence of the
metal, it follows that salts of the tervalent metals (Fe, Al, Sb, Bi) are hydrolyzed
to a greater extent than the salts of metals having a lower valence (Mn, Ba,
etc.) (cf. Nos. 40, 41). The halides of the quadrivalent metals (Sn, Si, Ti)
are hydrolyzed to an especially "marked extent (cf. Nos. 50 to 52), and it is,
therefore, possible to prepare such salts pure only when water is completely
excluded. If sulphur chloride is regarded as the sulphur salt of hydrochloric
acid (cf. No. 45), this compound then forms the extreme of the hydrolyzable
chlorides, inasmuch as the metallic character of the element combined with
chlorine has entirely disappeared.
Salts of weak acids and weak bases, such as, for example, the sulphides of
aluminium (Nos. 4 and 5) and titanium, can only be prepared when out of
contact with water. After they have been prepared synthetically in a crys-
tallized form, they can be kept for some time without change on account of the
 PHYSICO-CHEMICAL DETECTION 69

fact that the velocity at which compact substances enter into reaction is often
very slight. (Cf. TiS2, No. 58.)
If the phosphides, nitrides, and certain carbides are regarded as the metal
salts of phosphine, ammonia, and the hydrocarbons, that is to say, as the salts
of hydrogen compounds the acid nature of which is almost infinitesimal (the
acidic constants, K2, of which are therefore extremely small), it then becomes
easy to understand why these substances can be prepared only in the absence
of water (best by direct union of the elements themselves). The readiness
with which the preparation of phosphine from calcium or magnesium phos-
phide (No. 63), of acetylene from calcium carbide (No. 64), and of ammonia
from magnesium or boron nitride (Nos. 60, 61), is carried out, depends on the
ease with which the salts of such extremely weak acids hydrolyze.

(a) Acids and Bases.

34. Physico-chemical Detection of Electrolytic Dissociation.
To demonstrate the dissociation of a substance in aqueous solu-
tion, determine the molecular weight of nitric acid by the freezing-
point method, first with nitrobenzene and then with water as the
solvent. Dehydrate some concentrated nitric acid by distilling
it with an equal volume of concentrated sulphuric acid, and
free the distillate from oxides of nitrogen by passing dry air
through it.
Determine the molecular weight by measuring the lowering of
the freezing-point of nitrobenzene, using about 25 g. of the sol-
vent, and 0.2, 0.4, 1.0, and 1.5 g. of nitric acid, then repeat, using
about 22 g. of water instead of nitrobenzene. The details for
carrying out the determinations may be found in H. Biltz; Prac-
tical Methods for Determining Molecular Weights, Translated by
H. C. Jones, 1899. In nitrobenzene the molecular weight corre-
sponds-approximately to the formula HN0 3 , whereas in water the
molecular weight is about half as large.
In order to show that this dissociation causes the aqueous solu-
tion to become a conductor of electricity, insert two platinum
electrodes in a beaker of water, and connect them through an
electric incandescent lamp with the terminals of a lighting circuit.
The lamp does not glow, because water is a very poor conductor
of electricity, and the circuit is therefore practically open. As
soon, however, as a few drops of nitric acid are added to the
water, the lamp begins to glow, and at the same time an evolution
of gas takes place at the electrodes.
70 ACIDS AND BASES.
Test the conductivity of nitrobenzene after the same manner,
first alone, and then with the addition of a little anhydrous nitric
acid; the lamp does not glow in either case.
35. Hydrobromic Add. Hydriodic Acid.
(a) From the Elements. Connect in series, a Kipp hydrogen
generator, a wash bottle containing sulphuric acid, a wash bottle
containing 80 g. of bromine, and a glass tube about 25 cm. long
and 1 cm. wide which is rilled for a space of 8 to 12 cm. with
loosely-packed, platinized asbestos. (Cf. No. 28.) Place a
Bunsen lamp with a flame spreader under the tube. Connect the
farther end of the contact tube with a U-tube containing glass
beads and moist red phosphorus, then with a wash bottle made
from a test tube which contains 1 c.c. of water, and finally with
two wash bottles each containing 35 c.c. of water. Keep the
latter cooled during the experiment, first with ice-water and later
with a mixture of salt and ice.
At the beginning of the experiment, disconnect the train at a
point between the contact tube and the phosphorus tube. Fill
the apparatus up to this point with hydrogen, then heat the con-
tact layer to faint redness, and when the gas escaping from this
tube becomes colorless, reconnect the rest of the apparatus.
Regulate the amount of bromine vapor by pouring .warm (not
hot) water from time to time into the beaker which surrounds
the bromine bottle. The gases after passing the contact layer
must contain no uncombined bromine, and must therefore be
colorless.
From the first receiver fuming hydrobromic acid is obtained,
and the yield can be determined by weighing the flask before and
after the experiment.
Hydriodic Acid can be prepared from hydrogen and iodine in a
similar manner. Dry the hydrogen gas by passing it through three
wash bottles containing concentrated sulphuric acid and lead the
gas through glass tubing to the bottom of a small fractionating
flask which contains 50 g. of iodine and is being heated gently.
Insert the short arm of the distilling flask in a cork stopper which
fits into a wide glass tube, 70 cm. long, which is also kept warm.
Place a plug of platinized asbestos in the wide glass tube not far
from the place where the tubing from the flask enters the wider
 HYDROBROMIC ACID. 71
tube, and heat this plug with a wide flame. Any iodine, distilling
as such without combining with the hydrogen, will be deposited
in the wide part of the tube. Lead the escaping gas mixture into
a test tube containing a little water and from thence into two
successive small flasks each containing some water. Before
starting the experiment, make sure that the entire apparatus is
filled with hydrogen, so that there will be no danger of an explosion
when the contents of the flask and the platinized asbestos are
heated.
(b) By the Intermediate Formation of Phosphorus Bromide.
Provide a 500 c.c. flask with a stopper and dropping funnel and
connect it by means of delivery tubing with two U-tubes placed
in series. From the last U-tube carry a bent delivery tube
through a tight-fitting cork well towards the bottom of a flask
which is to serve as a receiving vessel. Provide this flask with an
exit tube starting from just inside the cork and bending down-
ward externally so as to nearly reach the surface of some water
placed in another flask. Do not, during the process which follows,
allow the tube entering either of the last-mentioned flasks to dip
beneath the surface of the solution contained in them.
Place in the evolution flask, first a layer of 25 g. sand, then upon
this a mixture of 100 g. sand and 25 g. red phosphorus, and moisten
the whole with 45 c.c. water. Fill the first U-tube with glass
beads, the second with glass beads mixed with moist red phos-
phorus, and in the receiving flask place 80 c.c. of water. The
delivery tube which enters the receiver must reach only to a
point just above the surface of the liquid, since if it dipped into
the solution, the latter might be sucked back into the evolution
flask.
Wrap the evolution flask in a towel, because it sometimes breaks
at the beginning of the experiment; cool the first U-tube with a
mixture of salt and ice, and the receiver with ice. Introduce
from the funnel 200 g. bromine, drop by drop, into the mixture of
sand and phosphorus. At the beginning of the reaction cool the
evolution flask by placing it in a dish containing cold water.
Yield, about 250 g. of concentrated hydrobromic acid, which is
collected in the first receiving flask. Determine its density by
means of a Westphal balance. Hydrobromic acid can also be
prepared from bromine and hydrogen sulphide. (Cf. A. Recoura,
72 ACIDS AND BASES.
Compt. rend. 110, 784 (1890)). Dependent preparations: Cupric
Bromide (No. 37), Ammonium Tribromide (No. 69), Hexammine
Nickelous Bromide (No. 128), Praseocobalt Bromide (No. 135).

36. Thallous and Thallic Hydroxides.

Thallium in thallous halides and in thallous sulphide shows unmistakable
similarity to silver and lead: in thallous hydroxide and in the thallous double
salts, it appears like an alkali metal. In the tervalent thallic compounds,
thallium is similar to aluminium quite in accordance with its position in the
periodic classification.

Mix 13.3 g. of thallous nitrate1 (1/20 mol.) and 3 g. concentrated

sulphuric acid in a platinum crucible, and drive off the volatile
acid slowly by heating the upper edge of the crucible with a
Bunsen burner which is held in the hand and moved about so as
to avoid spattering. The decomposition is complete when the
contents of the crucible no longer give off acid vapors. Dissolve
the thallous sulphate thus prepared in 50 c.c. of water, and pre-
cipitate barium sulphate from the boiling solution by adding a
hot solution of 8 g. crystallized barium hydroxide, the amount
of the latter reagent being slightly in excess of that theoretic-
ally required. After filtering, precipitate the excess of barium
hydroxide by the careful addition of very dilute sulphuric acid.
A drop of the solution should not, at the last, give a precipitate
either with barium hydroxide or with sulphuric acid. Evaporate
the solution to a volume of about 25 c.c, filter again and then
evaporate to about 5 c.c, after which, place the evaporating dish
in a desiccator over dry lime. Suck the crystals of thallous
hydroxide free from liquid in a small filter funnel and obtain a
second crop by further evaporation of the mother liquor. Neu-
tralize the last mother liquor with nitric acid, and use the resulting
solution of thallous nitrate for the reaction described below.
1
In order to obtain thallous nitrate from metallic thallium, cut the latter
into small pieces and dissolve them in the calculated amount of dilute nitric
acid. Introduce hydrogen sulphide into the hot, slightly acid solution to
remove lead as sulphide, and evaporate the filtrate until the nitrate crystallizes
out. Drain the crystals with suction, and evaporate the mother liquor to-
gether with the wash-water for more crystals. Yield, theoretical. F. Foerster
(Z. anorg. Chem. 15, 71 (1897)) shows how thallium can be recovered from the
flue gas of pyrite burners.
 CUPRIC AND CUPROUS BROMIDES. 73
Thallous hydroxide forms light-yellow crystals which are
readily soluble in water; the aqueous solution of these crystals is
strongly alkaline, its electrical conductivity being nearly the same
as that of a sodium hydroxide solution of the same concentration.
Filter paper moistened with thallous hydroxide serves as a re-
agent for detecting the presence of ozone; brown thallic oxide is
formed.
Reactions of Thallous Salts. Solutions of thallous salts when
treated with iodide solutions give a yellow, very difficultly soluble
precipitate of thallous iodide (analogous to Agl); with chloro-
platinic acid, they give light-yellow, difficultly-soluble thallium
chloroplatinate, Tl2[PtCl6] (analogous to K2[PtCl6]); with ammo-
nium sulphide, or hydrogen Sulphide together with sodium acetate,
they give a deep-brown precipitate of thallous sulphide (analogous
to Ag2S).
Hydrated Thallic Oxide (analogous to hydrated ferric oxide).
Oxidize a part of the thallous nitrate solution by the addition of
an excess of bromine, and precipitate the resulting brown solution
by adding concentrated ammonia. The very fine precipitate
settles slowly. Wash it by decantation with water containing
ammonia until the decanted liquid is free from bromine, and
then drain it upon a filter. Dry the product in a desiccator over
sulphuric acid, for at higher temperature it loses water and becomes
thallic oxide.
Thallic Thallous Chloride, TICh • 3 TICl. Dissolve a small quan-
tity of hydrated thallic oxide, or the anhydrous oxide, in a little
hydrochloric acid, dilute with about one-third of a test-tubeful of
water, an equal volume of normal oxalic acid solution and boil,
whereby carbon dioxide will escape. After heating a few minutes,
allow the contents of the test tube to cool: iridescent small
crystalline flakes of the above-named salt will be deposited.

(b) Halogen Compounds.

37. Cupric and Cuprous Bromides.

Dissolve 16 g. of cupric oxide in a solution of hydrobromic acid
containing 33 g. of pure HBr. Filter the resulting solution and
evaporate it to a small volume, whereby the color becomes very
74 HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.
dark. Place the evaporating dish, with its contents, in a desic-
cator over sulphuric acid, preferably in a vacuum; an almost
solid mass of crystals forms in a few days. Break up this mass
thoroughly once each day to accelerate the drying process. Cu-
pric bromide is of a deep-black color and glistens somewhat like
iodine.
Heat a portion of the cupric bromide cautiously in an evapo-
rating dish; it loses bromine and is changed into white cuprous
bromide. Cuprous bromide is practically insoluble in water.
The color of the cupric bromide solution varies with the dilution;
the most dilute solutions, which contain practically all the copper
in the state of the simple ions, are light blue; the most concentrated
ones have a dark-brown color from non-ionized cupric bromide and
complex ions; other concentrations have intermediate shades.1

38. Cuprous Chloride.

Treat 50 g. crystallized cupric sulphate and 25 g. sodium chloride
(or 37 g. crystallized cupric chloride) in a flask with 150 g. concen-
trated hydrochloric acid and 20 g. copper turnings. Heat upon
the water bath until, at the end of about an hour, the green color
has disappeared. Pour the clear solution into a liter of water
containing a little sulphurous acid, whereby white cuprous chlo-
ride, insoluble in dilute hydrochloric acid, is precipitated. Wash
the precipitate by decantation with water containing sulphurous
acid, finally drain it with suction and wash successively with
glacial acetic acid, alcohol, and ether. Dry it in the hot closet.
Yield, about 20 g.

39. Potassium Iodide. Iodine from Iodide Residues.

By the action of iodine upon a caustic potash solution, a mixture of potas-
sium iodide and iodate is produced, and this can be reduced completely to the
iodide by heating with charcoal. By extracting the mass with water and
recrystallizing, the product can be purified.2 Potassium iodide can also be
1
The light-blue color of the dilute solutions is the characteristic color of
all solutions of cupric ions. The changes in color with increasing concentra-
tion may be due, certainly in part, to an increasing proportion of undissociated
molecules, but it is also quite certain that changes in the state of hydration of
the dissolved salt have a large influence in altering the color.
2
Cf. Preparation of potassium bromate and bromide, No. 78.
 POTASSIUM IODIDE. 75

prepared without the intermediate formation of iodate, by the interaction of

ferrous iodide (which can be obtained synthetically from the elements) and
potassium carbonate.

Shake 7 or 8 g. iron filings and 50 c.c. water in an Erlenmeyer

flask with 25 g. iodine added in small portions. Warm the mix-
ture somewhat until all of the iodine has combined, and the color
of the solution has become deep yellow (ferrous iodide); then pour
off the liquid from the excess of iron. Add five grams more of
iodine to the solution and heat until it is dissolved.1 Pour this
solution into a boiling solution of 17 g. potassium carbonate in
50 c.c. water. The mixture, which at first is very thick, becomes
more fluid upon further heating, since the precipitate assumes a
more compact form. A little of the solution when filtered must
be perfectly colorless, and free from iron; if this is not the case,
add a little more potassium carbonate to the boiling solution.
Evaporate the filtrate to a small volume in a porcelain dish, filter
again, and evaporate further in a beaker until crystals begin to
separate. Then allow the solution to evaporate slowly by placing
the beaker in a warm place (as on top of the hot closet). Drain
the crystals in a funnel, wash them with a little cold water, and
save the mother liquor for another crop of crystals. Yield, 25
to 35 g.
The potassium iodide when dissolved in a little water and acidi-
fied should not show any yellow color (free iodine), which would
indicate the presence of iodate in the salt. Dependent prepara-
tion: Potassium lead iodide, No. 106.
Iodide residues, such as result from chemical work in organic
laboratories, can be easily worked up into iodine by oxidation with
oxygen gas in acid solution, with oxides of nitrogen as catalyzer.
Half fill a 5-liter flask with the solution of iodide residues and fit
the flask with a stopper carrying a glass tube which reaches down
to about the middle of the flask. Make the solution strongly
acid with commercial sulphuric acid, which should heat the mix-
ture somewhat. With the flask loosely stoppered, introduce
1
The extra addition of the iodine serves to partially oxidize the ferrous
salt, and the subsequent precipitate thus contains hydrated ferric ox-
ide and is' readily filtered; ferrous carbonate would be very difficult to
filter.
76 HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.
oxygen gas until the air has all been replaced, then add a little
concentrated sodium nitrite solution and insert the stopper tightly
into the neck of the flask. To prevent any difficulty from the
liquid backing up into the gas-delivery tubing, it is well to provide
an empty gas-washing flask. On shaking the contents of the large
bottle, an energetic reaction takes place and there is a noticeable
consumption of oxygen. Shake, at first carefully, then more
strongly and continuously. When there is no more consumption
of oxygen, raise the stopper a little, fill the flask with fresh oxygen,
add a little more sodium nitrite solution and repeat the operation.
Continue until there is no further evidence of any consumption
of oxygen. Allow the iodine to settle out in the bottom of the
flask, pour off the supernatant liquid, which is usually colorless,
wash the residue with a little water and filter off the crude
iodine.
Purify the product by distillation with steam. It is best to
avoid the use of a water-cooled condenser. Lead the vapor of
steam and iodine into the middle of a large Erlenmeyer flask.
The stopper of this flask should contain two holes, one to receive
the tube through which the vapors enter and the other a tube
extending about half a meter upwards, to serve as an air condenser.
Clamp the flask in a dish containing cold, running water.
Filter off the purified iodine, drain it with suction and dry in a
vacuum desiccator over calcium chloride. It requires a long time
to accomplish a thorough drying of the iodine in this way. It is
quicker to heat the iodine on the water bath in an evaporating
dish, which is covered with a watch glass. Iodine and some water
will collect on the watch glass. After some minutes, replace the
watch glass with another one, and scrape off the iodine on it.
When the condensate on the watch glass appears to be iodine
without any drops of water, the iodine is practically dry.
To further purify the iodine, place it in a large beaker, cover the
beaker with a Kjeldahl flask filled with cold water, and heat the
bottom of the beaker so that the iodine sublimes and collects on
the flask.
 MANGANOUS CHLORIDE. 77

40. Barium Chloride from Witherite.

If a sample of witherite is dissolved in hydrochloric acid, the resulting
solution of barium chloride contains iron as well as other impurities. The
simplest way to remove the iron is to oxidize it with a little chlorine water,
and then precipitate it by adding an excess of the powdered mineral (cf. the
barium carbonate method for the analytical separation of metals, the salts
of which hydrolyze to different degrees; see p. 68). The more difficultly
soluble barium chloride is freed from any calcium and strontium chlorides by
crystallization.

First determine with a Westphal balance the density of the

pure, concentrated hydrochloric acid which is to be used, find
the percentage of HC1 by referring to specific gravity tables, and
compute the volume of the acid required to dissolve 100 g. of
witherite. Place this amount in a two-liter flask, dilute it with
water to a volume of 1500 c.c, add the powdered witherite and
heat until the mineral is dissolved. Impurities such as silicates
may remain as insoluble residue. Add 50 c.c. of chlorine water,
then 5 to 10 g. more of witherite, and allow the solution to stand
in a warm place with frequent shaking. Next morning again add
from 2 to 5 g. of witherite. From time to time filter a little of the
solution and test with potassium thiocyanate for iron. When all
the iron has been precipitated, filter, and evaporate the filtrate
until crystallization takes place. If during the evaporation any
more ferric hydroxide, which may have been held in colloidal
solution, separates, filter it off after the volume has been reduced
to one-half. Finally, drain the crystals of barium chloride in a
funnel and concentrate the mother liquor for more crystals.
Redissolve all the crystals in water, acidify with a few drops of
hydrochloric acid, filter and recrystallize. Yield, 100 to 110 g. of
BaCl2 • 2 H2O.

11. Manganous Chloride from Waste Manganese Liquors.

Pure manganous chloride can be obtained by crystallizing the waste liquor
obtained in the preparation of chlorine from pyrolusite and hydrochloric
acid, if, as in the last preparation, the iron is first removed.
Similarly, the waste liquor from hydrogen generators can be freed from
iron and worked up into pure zinc salts.

Evaporate 2 to 3 liters of the manganese liquor in a porcelain

77A HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.

dish over the free flame in order to expel the excess of hydro-
chloric acid. Dissolve the residue, which solidifies on cooling, in
3 to 4 liters of water. Dilute one-tenth of this solution in a flask
with a large amount of water, and add caustic soda, avoiding an
excess, in order to precipitate manganese hydroxide. After
settling, siphon off the clear solution, shake up the precipitate
with pure water, and wash it repeatedly by decantation until, at
the end of three or four days, all of the sodium salt has been
removed. Add the manganese slime thus obtained to the remain-
ing nine-tenths of the first solution, and allow the mixture to stand
for several days in a thick-walled, five-liter flask which is placed
in a warm place. Shake the mixture frequently until all of the
iron has been precipitated by means of the manganese hydroxide.
This usually requires about two days, and at the end a little of
the filtered solution should give no test with potassium thiocya-
nate. Filter the solution through a plaited filter and evaporate it
until crystals begin to separate. Then transfer it to a flask and
cool rapidly while rotating under the water tap. Drain the crystal
meal in a suction-funnel and wash it first with 50%, and then with
pure alcohol. By evaporating the mother liquor a further yield
is obtained. Allow the light pink crystals, which are still moist
with alcohol, to dry in contact with the air.

42. Anhydrous Ferric Chloride; Preparation of Chlorine.

Clamp a tubulated retort (cf. Fig. 15, p. 78), of about 250 c.c.
capacity so that its neck (which is 1 to 2 centimeters wide) is in a
horizontal position. Insert a bundle of iron wires (about 0.1 cm.
in diameter), weighing 10 to 25 g., to about the middle of the neck,
and connect the end of the latter, through two sulphuric acid wash-
bottles, with a chlorine generator. Into the tubulus of the retort
insert a vertical tube, about 50 cm. long and 1 cm. wide, making
the joint tight by means of a short piece of rubber tube. Place
the whole apparatus under the hood.
Conduct a fairly rapid stream of chlorine into the retort, and
heat gently, with a small flame that does not touch the glass, that
part of the neck which contains the iron wire. Very soon a reac-
tion begins to take place with the emission of light, and a shower of
 PREPARATION OF CHLORINE. 77B
brilliant, glistening leaflets falls into the bulb of the retort. Heat
the neck of the retort by fanning it with a second and larger flame
until all of the ferric chloride is sublimed into the bulb. Tap the
vertical tube lightly so that any of the product condensed in it
will fall back into the retort.
At the end of the experiment shake the product, which is very
hygroscopic, directly from the retort into a dry, wide-mouthed,
glass-stoppered bottle. The preparation keeps well if the stopper
is made air tight with a little vaseline.

Preparation of Chlorine.
Large quantities of chlorine may be prepared by the oxidation
of hydrochloric acid with pyrolusite. Half fill a round-bottomed
flask of from 1.5 to 2 liters capacity (cf. Fig. 14, p. 77F) with lumps
of pyrolusite, and close the flask with a two-holed stopper;1
through one hole insert a thistle tube, which serves as a safety
tube, and must extend 20 to 30 cm. above the top of the flask
and nearly to the bottom inside. Through the other hole insert
a short delivery tube bent at a right angle. To cause the evolu-
tion of chlorine, pour concentrated commercial hydrochloric acid
through the thistle tube until the pyrolusite is just covered, and
heat the mixture gently on a Babo funnel; regulate the rate at
which the gas is generated by altering the height of the flame
under the evolution flask. A single charge of pyrolusite is suffi-
cient to react with several refillings of the acid. Wash the gas
with water, and dry it (if necessary) by passing it through one or
two bottles containing concentrated sulphuric acid.
It is very convenient to use the dry liquid chlorine which
can be purchased in steel cylinders under pressure; but this
is only to be recommended when large amounts are frequently
used.
When it is desired to prepare a definite amount of chlorine, an
excess of hydrochloric acid can be decomposed by means of a

1
Cork stoppers can be made air tight by immersing them in molten paraffin
at about 150°. Such a paraffined stopper should be tightly wired in place to
prevent it from popping out when the flask is heated.
77C HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.

weighed quantity of potassium permanganate or of potassium

pyrochromate.
2 KMnO, + 16 HC1 = 2 MnCl2 + 2 KC1 + 8 H2O + 5 Cl3,
K 2 Cr 2 0 7 + 14 HC1 = 2 CrCl3 + 2 KC1 + 7 H2O + 3 C12.

43. Anhydrous Ferrous Chloride; Preparation of Hydrogen

Chloride.
On account of its higher melting-point it is more difficult to
prepare anhydrous ferrous chloride than the corresponding ferric
salt. Clamp a porcelain tube, 50 to 60 cm. long and 3 cm. in
inside diameter, in a horizontal position under the hood. Adjust
it at a suitable height above the blast lamp, and surround it with
an asbestos heating chamber (Fig. 4, p. 3). Introduce a loose
bundle of iron wires (0.1 cm. in diameter), weighing from
12 to 15 g., into the part of the tube which can be heated
hottest. Conduct into the tube a rapid current of hydrogen
chloride gas (see below) which is produced by the action of
concentrated, commercial sulphuric acid upon 750 c.c. of con-
centrated, commercial hydrochloric acid. Place a beaker in a
tilted position over the open end of the tube. Maintain the
temperature as high as possible during the experiment. The
product condenses in the cooler parts of the tube, and to some
extent in the beaker.
The yield is 15 to 20 g. of dirty-white, hygroscopic, leaf-like
crystals.
Small amounts of ferrous chloride can be prepared in a similar
way in a wide combustion tube which is heated in a furnace.
Aluminium chloride can be prepared in like manner from
aluminium and hydrogen chloride.

Preparation of Hydrogen Chloride.

Small amounts of hydrogen chloride are most conveniently
prepared in a Kipp generator containing large pieces of sal
ammoniac (ammonium chloride) upon which concentrated sul-
phuric acid is allowed to act. This method does not work as
well for preparing large quantities of the gas, because the foam-
ing which occurs becomes troublesome.
 ANHYDROUS CHROMIUM TRICHLORIDE. 77D

Larger amounts of hydrogen chloride may be obtained by

treating 200 g. common salt (sodium chloride) with a cooled
mixture of 320 g. sulphuric acid and 80 g. water in a round-
bottomed flask, which may be conveniently heated upon a Babo
boiling funnel. On cooling, the flow of the gas slackens, but it
can be started again by renewed heating. When the mixture has
become exhausted, it should be poured out of the flask while
still warm, since on cooling it becomes solid, and is then difficult
to remove. But it must be poured into a dry receptacle to avoid
an explosive formation of steam.
The following method, which depends upon the fact that hydro-
gen chloride is but slightly soluble in concentrated sulphuric
acid, is also to be recommended.1 Allow concentrated sulphuric
acid to drop from a dropping funnel into a large suction flask
containing concentrated hydrochloric acid, to which a handful of
common salt may with advantage be added. It is advisable to
let the sulphuric acid fall first into a small test-tube so that by
its flowing uniformly over the edge of the latter a steady evolu-
tion of gas is produced. The rate of flow of gas from the flask
is governed by the stopcock which regulates the dropping of the
sulphuric acid.
The reverse process of adding hydrochloric acid to concen-
trated sulphuric acid may also be used, but in order to make the
lighter hydrochloric acid solution mix thoroughly with the heavier
sulphuric acid it is necessary to draw out the stem of the dropping
funnel into a capillary which reaches nearly to the bottom of the
generating flask.

44. Anhydrous Chromium Trichloride.

Place 10 to 20 g. of coarsely powdered, metallic chromium
(No. 3) in an apparatus constructed like that used in the last
preparation. Expel the air completely by means of a stream of
dry chlorine, which will take at least half an hour, and then heat
the metal in a current of perfectly dry chlorine for from thirty
minutes to an hour at as high a temperature as possible. After
cooling, replace the chlorine by carbon dioxide and shake the
preparation out of the tube. Beautiful, glistening, violet flakes
1
The same method may be used for the production of sulphur dioxide if
concentrated sulphuric acid is allowed to drop into a solution of commercial
sodium bisulphite.
77E HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.

are obtained, together with a darker powder of a more brownish

shade which under the microscope is shown to be crystalline.
Collect the two forms separately. Chromium trichloride is, on
account of its slow rate of solution, practically insoluble in water.
It is difficult to clean the porcelain tube after this experiment.
Stopper it at one end, and fill it with commercial, concentrated
hydrochloric acid to which a little ferrous sulphate has been
added, and let it stand. Dependent preparations: Chromium
Nitride (No. 62), Hexamminechromic Nitrate and Chloropen-
tamminechromic Chloride (No. 140).

45. Sulphur Chloride, S2C13.

Of the chlorides of sulphur, S2CI2 is the only one stable at the laboratory
temperature. The chloride SCI4 is a yellowish-white substance which melts
at —30° and decomposes at a few degrees above the melting-point. The
dark red compound SCI2 exists in mixtures of S2CI2 and CI2.

Connect a tubulated retort (Fig. 14) of 250 c.c. capacity with

a condenser, an adapter, and a suction flask which serves as a
receiver; from the side arm of the latter, lead a glass tube to
the ventilating flue. Fill the retort with 100 g. of flowers of
sulphur, and heat it upon a Babo funnel, or, better still, in a
nickel air-bath, to a temperature of from 200° to 250°. Conduct
into the retort a rapid current of chlorine, which has been
washed once with water and once with sulphuric acid. The sul-
phur chloride that is formed distils completely into the receiver;
a slight blackish coating which remains behind is due to impurities
in the sulphur. The operation requires about four hours.
To the crude product thus prepared, add 10 to 15 g. of sulphur
which combines with the excess of chlorine. Distil the sulphur
chloride from a fractionating flask provided with a condenser
and a receiver, and if more than a small amount passes over
before a temperature of 130° is reached, pour it back into the
flask and add more sulphur. Then distil again, rejecting the
portion that passes over below 134°, and collecting as pure pro-
duct the distillate between 137° and 138°. Only towards the
end of the process does the temperature rise a few degrees above
this point, due to superheating of the vapors. The excess of
sulphur remains behind in the flask. The preparation may be
 CHLORIDES OF PHOSPHORUS. 77F
further purified by another fractionation. The yield is almost
theoretical.
Sulphur chloride, S2C12, as ordinarily obtained, is a yellowish-
red, heavy liquid which fumes a little in the air, has an unpleas-
ant odor, and attacks the mucous membrane. When distilled in
vacuum it has a pure yellow color. This preparation should be

Fig. 14

carried out in a room reserved especially for working with nox-

ious compounds, and the liquids should be transferred from one
vessel to another only when under the hood.
46. Chlorides of Phosphorus.
Chlorine combines with phosphorus to form either the liquid trichloride or
the solid pentachloride according to whether the phosphorus or chlorine is
present in excess. Phosphorus trichloride boils undecomposed at 76° C ; on
heating phosphorus pentachloride, it vaporizes without passing through the
liquid phase. Density determinations of the gas show that the pentachloride
is appreciably dissociated at 180°, and practically completely so at temper-
atures above 290°, into phosphorus trichloride and chlorine; the latter can be
identified by its yellowish-green color. On cooling, the dissociation products
recombine and again form the pentachloride.
Phosphorus oxychloride is most conveniently prepared by oxidizing phos-
phorus trichloride with potassium chlorate.
3 PC13 + KCIO3 = 3 POCI3 + KC1.
77G HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.

Phosphorus Trichloride. Use the same apparatus as in the

preparation of sulphur chloride (No. 45), except that the heating
bath under the retort is in this case superfluous. Cut 31 g. of
yellow phosphorus under water in a porcelain mortar into pieces
which are not too small. Take the pieces out with pincers, dry
them by rapidly pressing between filter papers and introduce them
through the tubulus into the retort which has previously been
filled with carbon dioxide gas. Avoid handling the phosphorus
with the fingers, because it takes fire easily, and phosphorus burns
are severe and frequently dangerous. Any residue of phosphorus
left in the mortar should be wiped out with moist filter paper, and
the paper immediately burned.
On conducting chlorine into the retort, the phosphorus ignites,
melts, and burns with a pale flame to phosphorus trichloride.
Outside heating of the retort is unnecessary, but it is important
to have the stream of chlorine pass rapidly and steadily. Regu-
late the reaction from time to time, as necessary, by raising or
lowering the tube through which the chlorine enters the retort;
this tube should be fitted so that it can be moved readily.
Lower the tube if a white sublimate of phosphorus pentachloride
forms in the upper part of the neck of the retort; raise it a
little if a yellowish-red sublimate begins to make the neck of
the retort opaque. This regulation, which is necessary for the
proper carrying out of the experiment, does not involve any
difficulty.
Purify the crude product by distilling it from a flask with a
side-arm condenser (Fig. 7, p. 6). Boiling-point, 76°. Yield, 100
to 120 g.
Phosphorus Pentachloride. Close a wide-mouthed liter bottle
by means of a three-holed cork. Through one hole introduce the
stem of a dropping funnel so that it reaches just inside the
stopper; through the second hole insert a glass tube of 1 cm.
bore which reaches to the middle of the bottle and serves for the
introduction of chlorine; through the third hole insert another
tube which ends just below the cork and serves for the escape of
the excess of chlorine. Provide the 1 cm. wide vertical tube with a
side arm through which the chlorine is to be introduced, and close
the upper end with a cork stopper. Then when the lower part of
the tube becomes clogged with phosphorus pentachloride, it is
 CHLORIDES OF ANTIMONY. 77H

only necessary to remove the stopper a moment and push the

obstruction out of the way with a stirring rod.
Conduct chlorine into the flask, and at the same time intro-
duce phosphorus trichloride through the dropping funnel; the
two substances immediately combine. Care should be taken to
keep chlorine present in excess. At the end loosen the phos-
phorus pentachloride formed by means of a spatula, and allow
the flask, which is still filled with chlorine, to stand for some time
before removing the product. The yield is almost quantitative.
Dependent preparation: Thionyl Chloride, No. 151.
Phosphorus Oxychloride. Connect a 150 to 200 c.c. distilling
flask, containing 21 g. (one-sixth mol.) of finely powdered potas-
sium chlorate, with a condenser and receiver. Then allow 69 g.
of phosphorus trichloride (one-half mol.) to flow into the flask a
little at a time. After each addition of the chloride, wait until
the reaction, which is made evident by a gentle ebullition, has
ceased before adding more; at the start it is permissible to
warm slightly if necessary. Should a little liquid distil over into
the receiver during this operation, return it to the distilling
. flask.
When the reaction is complete, distil the phosphorus oxychlo-
ride by heating with a large flame, holding the burner in the hand
and playing the flame around the bulb of the flask. A ther-
mometer is not necessary for this distillation. Clean and dry
the apparatus, and redistil the product, this time using a ther-
mometer. Collect the first few drops which come over separately.
Boiling-point, 110°. Dependent preparation: Triethyl Phos-
phate, No. 157.
47. Chlorides of Antimony.
Antimony Trichloride. Treat 100 g. of finely powdered stibnite,
in a 750 c.c. flask, with 400 g. of concentrated, commercial hydro-
chloric acid, shaking frequently and heating upon the water bath
until as much as possible of the material is dissolved. Boil the
solution five minutes in order to remove the greater part of the
dissolved hydrogen sulphide. Add five cubic centimeters more of
concentrated hydrochloric acid, and filter the solution through a
Biichner funnel containing a layer of asbestos-felt which has been
previously moistened with the concentrated acid.
77l HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.

Distil the antimony trichloride solution from a retort, provided

with a thermometer, until the temperature reaches 120°; in order
to prevent bumping, place bits of pumice or of unglazed porcelain
in the liquid. The distillate consists chiefly of hydrochloric acid,
containing eventually some arsenic trichloride.
Transfer the liquid remaining in the retort, after again filtering
through asbestos if necessary, to a distilling flask. Fit the side
arm of the latter by means of a cork stopper to a long tube
about 1 cm. in diameter which serves as a condenser (cf. Fig. 8,
p. 7). The distillate first passing over is clear, then becomes
more or less yellowish due to ferric chloride, and finally, when the
temperature is above 215°, it becomes colorless again. At this
point change the receiver for a dry, clean, weighed Erlenmeyer
flask. The last portion of the distillate solidifies, on cooling, into
a radiating mass of crystals. It can be further purified by redis-
tillation. Boiling-point, 223°.
Pour the first fraction of the distillate, which consists of a mix-
ture of hydrochloric acid and antimony trichloride, into a large
quantity of water; collect the precipitated basic antimony chloride
(essentially a mixture of SbOCl and Sb2O3) on a filter and wash
and dry it. Dependent preparation: Metallic Antimony, No. 7.
Antimony Pentachloride. Pass dry chlorine gas into fused
antimony trichloride until the gain in weight corresponds to that
required for the change to the pentachloride. At first the reaction
mixture must be kept above the melting-point of pure trichloride,
but as more and more of the pentachloride, which is liquid under
ordinary conditions, forms, the mixture may be allowed to cool to
room temperature. Concerning the preparation of the beautifully-
crystalline salicylic acid methyl ester of antimony pentachloride,
C6H4(OSbCl4)CO2CH3, see A. Rosenheim and W. Loewenstamm,
Ber. 35, 1126 (1902).

48. Iodides of Bismuth.

Bismuth Tri-iodide. Triturate 8 g. of sifted, powdered bismuth
with 13 g. of iodine in a mortar, and introduce the mixture into a
50 c.c. plain retort. Cut off the neck of the retort to a length of
about 7 cm., and suspend the whole with a loop or spiral of wire
from a ring-stand in such a way that all portions of the retort can
be heated freely. On heating the mixture a feeble reaction is soon
observed. On heating more strongly, a little iodine sublimes at
 BISMUTH TRIBROMIDE. 77j
first, and should be driven off by playing a second flame over the
neck of the retort (Hood); then the bismuth tri-iodide sublimes
and condenses in the form of a shower of crystalline spangles.
Collect these in a porcelain evaporating dish which is placed so
that the neck of the retort rests in its lip. Cover the dish with a
watch-glass, and protect the space still left open with some asbestos
paper cut to the proper shape.
On standing, bismuth iodide decomposes rather easily with
liberation of iodine.
Basic Bismuth Iodide, BiOI. Triturate 10 g. of bismuth tri-
iodide in a mortar with water, and decant off the liquid together
with the finest powder into a beaker; treat the residue with
another portion of water in exactly the same way, and continue
the treatment until all of the material is obtained in a state of
finest subdivision with from 200 to 400 c.c. of water. Boil the
mixture for an hour or two, collect the product of hydrolysis on a
suction filter, wash it with water, and dry it in the hot closet.
Small, light-brown to red crystal leaflets are obtained which are
somewhat lighter colored than red phosphorus. Yield, about 7.5 g.
The hydrolysis of the iodide, which is difficultly soluble in water, takes
place more slowly than that of the more soluble chloride, an indication that
such interactions of a solid substance under a liquid do not take place with
the solid itself, but involve rather only that part of the substance which exists,
at the moment, in solution.

49. Bismuth Tribromide.

A mixture of powdered bismuth and bromine reacts only slowly and in-
completely in the cold, but with almost explosive violence when heated. The
simplest way to prepare bismuth tribromide is to pass bromine vapors over
heated bismuth.
The apparatus employed is similar to that used in the prepara-
tion of ferric chloride (No. 42). The neck of a tubulated retort,
of from 100 to 150 c.c. capacity, is bent downward a little, near
the bulb, and a little farther away it is bent upward (cf. Fig. 15).
Introduce 10 to 15 g. of bismuth in the depression of the neck,
and connect the end of the latter with a wash bottle containing
bromine, through which dry carbon dioxide is to be passed in the
direction of the retort.1 Through the tubulus of the retort in-
1
Instead of conducting bromine diluted with carbon dioxide over the
bismuth, the pure vapors may be distilled from a second smaller retort. The
reaction then takes place more rapidly, but requires more attention.
78 HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.

troduce a glass tube one-half meter long and about 1 cm. in diam-
eter, and make the joint tight with a piece of rubber tubing around
the glass. This long tube is to serve as a condenser, and to lead
the excess of bromine into the hood.
After starting the current of carbon dioxide, heat the bismuth
gently by means of a Bunsen burner with a flame spreader, and
warm the bromine by placing
the wash bottle in warm water
and renewing the latter as it
cools. Dark-red vapors of
bismuth bromide form and
condense as yellow flakes in
the bulb of the retort, and
to some extent in the glass
tube.
Break the retort, collect
the product, and let it stand
over night in a vacuum desic-
cator to remove any adhering
bromine; or, distil it from a
FIG. 15. smaller plain retort. The
neck of the latter should be
about 8 cm. long and the whole should be suspended in a double
loop of wire (cf. No. 48). Yield, nearly theoretical.-
Boiling-point of Bismuth Bromide. Use a thermometer filled
under pressure, which measures temperatures as high as 5400.1
Place the bismuth bromide in a Jena glass test-tube, 20 cm. long
and 2.5 cm. wide, and heat until the substance boils; suspend
the thermometer so that it reaches well into the vapor. When the
vapors first begin to reach the mercury bulb, lower or remove the
flame for a while so as to avoid heating the thermometer too
suddenly; then heat strongly again. Correct the boiling-point as
thus determined either as directed in No. 6, or by means of finding
the apparent boiling-point of pure sulphur under exactly the same
conditions. The difference between the latter observed reading
and 448° (the true boiling-point of sulphur) is to be applied as a
correction to the apparent boiling-point of the bismuth tribromide.
This very simple method of making the correction for stem expo-
1
Cf. No. 54 for the thermoelectric measurement of temperatures.
 TIN TETRACHLORIDE. 79
sure gives good results, provided the two temperatures compared
are not far from one another. Boiling-point of bismuth bromide,
4660.1
50. Tin Tetrachloride.
Make use of the same apparatus as described under the prep-
aration of sulphur chloride (Fig. 14, p. 77F). Place 60 g. of tin
in the retort, and heat it by placing a Bunsen flame underneath.
After the tin is melted pass a rapid current of chlorine, allowing
it to play directly on the surface of the metal. Liquid tin tetra-
chloride, which is colored yellow by dissolved chlorine, collects
in the receiver. When the metal in the retort has all disappeared,
add some tinfoil to the distillate in the receiving flask, stopper the
latter, and allow it to stand until the next day in order that the
dissolved chlorine may all react with the tin.
Place the crude product together with a little tinfoil in a 100 c.c.
distilling flask, provided with a side-arm condenser (Fig. 7).
Fit a thermometer in the neck of the flask, and distil the liquid at
the hood, rejecting the first few drops which pass over. If the
distillate is not perfectly colorless, allow it to stand over night with
more tinfoil and repeat the distillation. Boiling-point, 113.5° to •
114°. Preserve the preparation in a sealed vessel.
When exposed to the atmosphere, tin tetrachloride absorbs
water and soon becomes changed to the solid white hydrate.
Tin tetrachloride can, like titanium tetrachloride, be transformed
into the corresponding sulphide (cf. Titanium Disulphide, No. 58).
The formation of colloidal stannic acid from tin tetrachloride is
discussed under Purple of Cassius, No. 25.
A very convenient method for making tin tetrachloride at room
temperatures from tin and dry chlorine has been described by
R. Lorenz.2 Fill a test tube, about 4 cm. wide and 40 mm. long,
about one-quarter full of dry granulated zinc. Place a cork in the
tube, carrying tubing for the introduction of dry chlorine and also
for the escape of gas. Fasten the tube in an upright position and
introduce chlorine with the tube reaching nearly to the bottom of
the test tube. At fir'st introduce the gas slowly, and later, when
liquid stannic chloride has formed, increase the rate of flow.
1
Author's observation: Victor Meyer found 453° with an air thermometer.
Ann. 364, 122 (1891).
2
R. Lorenz, Z. anorg. Chem., 10, 44 (1895).
80 HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.
From time to time raise the tubing through which the gas is flow-
ing but never let it reach above the top of the liquid chloride.
Purify the stannic chloride as described above.
This method of preparation corresponds to the method used
technically for the recovery of tin from waste tin plate.

51. Silicon Tetrachloride.

For preparing silicon tetrachloride from the elements, either commercial
silicon obtained in the electric furnace, or the crystallized product prepared
by the thermite process (No. 4), may be used.
Generate chlorine in a two-liter (or larger) flask from pyrolusite
and concentrated hydrochloric acid, and wash the gas once with
water and twice with concentrated sulphuric acid. Spread a layer
of about 10 g. finely powdered silicon loosely in a 40 cm, long com-
bustion tube which is placed over a row burner (Fig. 3, p. 2). Con-
nect one end of the combustion tube with the chlorine generator, and
draw out the other end to about the size of a lead pencil. Join this
narrow end with a gas wash-bottle, using a rubber connector and
pushing the ends of the glass tubes close together. Cool the wash
bottle by surrounding it with a mixture of ice and salt, and arrange
a glass tube to conduct the waste gases into the ventilating flue!
First of all, — and this is very important, — sweep the air com-
pletely out from the apparatus by passing a rapid stream of chlo-
rine gas for about half an hour. After that, heat the combustion
tube until the reaction begins and produces incandescence; the
flames beneath the tube may be turned quite low while the re-
action is progressing, and it is well to turn the tube from time to
time on its long axis. All of the silicon is acted upon, and only a
few flakes of silicon dioxide remain behind, while a trace of alu-
minium chloride condenses at the end of the tube.
Without using a thermometer, distil the impure product slowly
from a fractionating flask with side-arm condenser (Fig. 7, p. 6).
The greater part of the dissolved chlorine is thereby expelled, but
to remove the last of it, let the distillate stand about a day in con-
tact with mercury in a thick-walled bottle, stoppered with a cork
(not a glass stopper), shaking vigorously from time to time until
the liquid is decolorized. By again distilling, this time with a
thermometer, the compound is obtained pure. Boiling-point,
58° to 60°. Yield, 35 to 40 g.
 TITANIUM TETRACHLORIDE. 81

That portion of the distillate passing over above 60°, which,

however, is small in amount by this method of preparation, con-
tains a little silicon hexachloride, Si2Cla, boiling-point 145° to
146°, and some silicon octachloride, Si3Cl8, boiling-point 210°
to 215°.
Silicon tetrachloride is a colorless, mobile liquid, and shows
a high refractive index for light. It fumes strongly in the air,
and on being mixed with water it hydrolyzes, forming ortho-
silicic and hydrochloric acids:
SiCl4 + 4 H2O = Si(OH)4 + 4 HC1.
Preserve the preparation in a sealed flask. Dependent prepara-
tion: Tetraethyl Silicate, No. 158.
Instead of starting with pure silicon, the directions of Gatter-
mann * may be followed: Prepare an impure silicon by igniting
40 g. magnesium powder with 160 g. dried and sifted quartz
sand, and chlorinate the resulting mixture of silicon and mag-
nesium oxide by heating it to 300° to 310° in a long combustion
tube, placed in a " bomb " furnace, while passing a current of dry
chlorine. This method yields a product containing more of the
hexachloride and octachloride than when, as by the first method,
the chlorination is carried out at a higher temperature.
Silicon Chloroform. The compound SiHCl3 can be obtained in
a corresponding manner if, instead of chlorine, dry hydrogen
chloride, free from air, is passed over the silicon powder at a
temperature of 450° to 500°. For the preparation of this com-
pound in larger quantities, and for its properties (boiling point,
33° to 34°), see Ruff and Albert, Ber. 38, 2222 (1905).

52. Titanium Tetrachloride from Rutile.

A number of oxides which are not reduced by charcoal can be transformed
into the corresponding chlorides by the simultaneous action of carbon and
chlorine. This method was originated by Oersted in 1824, and perfected by
Wohler for a number of different oxides. It has been, for decades, the most
important, if not the sole, method for the preparation of certain chlorides
(A1C13, SiCl4, TiCl4, UC14 (No. 169), etc.). From a theoretical standpoint it is
a good example of the displacement of an equilibrium by the removal of one
or more of the products from the sphere of action, whereby a given reaction is
enabled to become quantitative: the reduction of aluminium oxide cannot be
1
L. Gattermann, Ber. 22, 186; (1889) 27, 1943 (1894).
82 HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.

accomplished by means of charcoal, but the oxides of carbon, on the other

hand, can be reduced by aluminium; an equilibrium mixture of aluminium
oxide, aluminium, carbon, and oxides of carbon, therefore, can contain only
an infinitesimal amount of aluminium. If, however, this minute amount of
aluminium in the mixture is removed continuously by causing it to combine
with chlorine, an opportunity is thus afforded for a continuous reproduction
of fresh quantities of aluminium from the reduction of its oxide, until the entire
amount of the latter is exhausted.
The preparation of titanium tetrachloride from rutile is the most con-
venient laboratory method for obtaining pure titanium compounds from that
inexpensive mineral. Instead of using carbon and chlorine separately, vapors
of carbon tetrachloride may be conducted over the heated oxide; the same
end may be attained by using sulphur chloride.

Mix 100 g. of finely powdered rutile intimately with 40 g. of

lampblack, and knead the mixture, with the aid of as little starch
paste as possible, into a thick, although still plastic mass. Shape
the mass into pellets of about 0.5 cm. diameter, and dry them
first in the hot closet, and then in a crucible placed in the
charcoal furnace. Introduce the dry and very brittle pellets
carefully into a wide combustion tube, and arrange the appa-
ratus, which must be carefully dried, as shown in the sketch
below (Fig. 16). Rubber connectors are to be avoided as much

Combustion Furnace

PIG. 16.

as possible. Before beginning the chlorination ignite the pellets

again, this time in an atmosphere of carbon dioxide, in order to
remove the last traces of moisture; and meanwhile start the evo-
lution of chlorine in the generator. Then connect the apparatus
for the first time with the receiver (capacity 200 to 300 c.c),
which is surrounded by ice. Conduct chlorine into the appa-
ratus, and heat the tube, which rests in a combustion furnace, at
first with small flames, then gradually bring it to a red heat. It
 TITANIUM TETRACHLORIDE. 83

is essential to maintain a strong, steady stream of chlorine, the

bubbles of which pass through the wash bottle so rapidly that it
is just impossible to count them. Titanium tetrachloride collects
in the receiver in the form of a liquid which is colored yellow by
free chlorine and is clouded by small crystals of ferric chloride.1
The operation requires about three hours. The amount of rutile
prescribed is sufficient to yield enough material for two fillings of
a combustion tube.
Filter the crude product through a dry Gooch crucible contain-
ing an asbestos-felt, and then allow it to remain in contact with
mercury, or copper filings, in a thick-walled bottle closed with a
cork stopper; occasionally shake it vigorously, adding a little fresh
metal each time, until, at the end of about twelve hours, all the
free chlorine has combined. A little sodium amalgam may be
added toward the end of the process in order to remove traces
of vanadium. After again filtering through a Gooch crucible,
distil the clear liquid from a fractionating flask with a side-arm
condenser (Fig. 7, p. 6). Boiling-point, 136° to 137°. The liquid
has a strong refracting power for light, and it fumes in the air.
Yield, 100 to 130 g. Dependent preparations: Titanium Disul-
phide, No. 58; Potassium Titanium Fluoride, No. 103.
Titanium Dioxide from Titanium Tetrachloride. Pour about
10 c.c. of titanium tetrachloride, a little at a time, into 200 c.c. of
water, whereby hydrolysis takes place, although the hydrated
titanium oxide which is formed remains in colloidal solution.
Add a little sulphuric acid, and boil; titanic acid is thereby
precipitated in a form which can be readily filtered. Wash the
precipitate with water containing ammonium nitrate, dry it in
the hot doset, and ignite it in a porcelain crucible until white
titanium dioxide is left. In order to remove the last traces of
sulphuric acid, which are retained very persistently, ignite the
product several times with ammonium carbonate. Yield, almost
theoretical.
Hydrogen Peroxide Reaction. Fuse a little titanium dioxide
with potassium acid sulphate, and dissolve the melt in cold water.
A few drops of this solution when treated with an aqueous solution
of hydrogen peroxide show a brownish-yellow to yellow color.
1
If the rutile used has a high iron content, it can happen that the tube
will become clogged with crystals of ferric chloride.
84 HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.

The reaction is extremely sensitive, and can be used as a test for

hydrogen peroxide as well as for titanium. A drop of ordinary 3%
hydrogen peroxide solution diluted with half a liter of water can
be detected by adding a few cubic centimeters of the reagent.
Molybdenum and vanadium compounds react similarly, though
less strongly, with hydrogen peroxide.
53. Anhydrous Titanium Trichloride.
Titanium tetrachloride in aqueous solution may be reduced by metallic
tin or zinc, or by electrolysis, to violet titanium trichloride; solutions of the
latter have recently been recommended highly as reducing agents. The
trichloride is obtained in an anhydrous condition by a method which is of
quite general applicability. A mixture of titanium tetrachloride vapor and
hydrogen is conducted through a red-hot tube whereby the trichloride deposits
in the form of reddish-violet, non-volatile leaflets.
Place a tube made of difficultly fusible glass in a combustion,
furnace, and connect it, as shown in Fig. 17, on the one side with a

Combustion Furnace

FIG. 17.

100 c.c. retort, and on the other side with a receiver of twice that
size. Rest the receiver in a dish filled with ice, and add 40 to 50 g.
of titanium tetrachloride to the retort.
Fill the entire apparatus with hydrogen which is conducted
through the inlet tube of the retort. As soon as the gas escaping
at the other end is shown, on testing, to consist of pure hydrogen,
heat the combustion tube to bright redness and heat the tita-
nium tetrachloride nearly to the boiling-point by means of a small
flame, meanwhile passing a rapid stream of hydrogen continuously
through the apparatus. Regulate the temperature of the titanium
tetrachloride so that, as nearly as possible, all of it is decomposed
and none condenses unchanged in the receiver. If, however, this
is not accomplished, pour back the distillate into the retort and
repeat the process. Finally, disconnect the receiver (close the
end of the tube with a cork carrying a short delivery tube bent
downward) and heat the part of the tube projecting beyond the
furnace by fanning it with a flame, until no more white vapors
 PHOSPHORUS PENTASULPHIDE. 85

escape. Allow the apparatus to cool completely, and remove the

preparation by the aid of a glass rod or a wire, after cutting the
tube, if necessary, into several sections. The preparation should
be protected from moisture, best by keeping it in a sealed tube.
Yield, slight.
(c) Sulphides.
54. Phosphorus Pentasulphide;' Thermoelectric Determination
of the Bolling-Point.
Mix 176 g. of flowers of sulphur with 62 g. of dry red phosphorus;
if the phosphorus is moist, it should be washed with hot water,
rinsed on a filter several times with water, then with alcohol, and
dried in the hot closet.
Clamp a 750 c.c. round-bottomed flask to a ring-stand, under the
hood, at a suitable height above a Bunsen burner. Introduce a
spoonful of the above mixture into the flask, and after replacing
approximately all of the air with carbon dioxide, heat until a
reaction begins. Then remove the burner at once, and add
spoonful after spoonful of the powder so that each portion imme-
diately enters into reaction; toward the end heat the flask from
time to time with the burner. Take care that neither the powder
in the spoon nor the supply of unused material catches fire; keep
a supply of sand on hand to throw on the blaze, and a pan to catch
the liquid, in case the flask should break and its burning contents
run out. Usually the preparation can be carried out without
accident. After cooling, break the flask, and collect the gray and
somewhat hygroscopic crude product.
Purify the substance by distilling it from a small, wide-necked,
plain retort, rejecting the first few drops of distillate and collecting
the main portion in a dry flask. To retain the heat, fold a piece
of asbestos paper into a cone and place it over the neck and bulb
of the retort. The distillate solidifies into a light-yellow, amor-
phous mass. Break the flask and transfer the product, after
removing any fragments of glass, to a bottle which can be tightly
stoppered. Yield, about 180 g.
A part of the preparation can be further purified by crystalliza-
tion from carbon bisulphide. Place the material in a Soxhlet
thimble, extract it for several days with carbon bisulphide in an
Cf. A. Stock, Bcr. 4 1 , 563 (19081.
86 SULPHIDES.

automatic apparatus, and collect the crystals which have separated

in the boiling-flask. The purified product melts at 275° to 276°,
and 0.508 part dissolves in 100 parts of boiling carbon bisulphide.
Thermoelectric Determination of the Boiling-point. Le Chate-
lier's pyrometer is used for the measurement of temperatures up
to 1600°. It consists of two wires, one of platinum and the other
of 10% rhodium - platinum
alloy, which, at one end, are
fused together in the oxyhy-
drogen flame and at the other
end are connected through a
suitable measuring instrument.
A difference between the
temperature at the junction
of the wires and that at the
free ends gives rise to an elec-
tric current, the feeble poten-
tial of which may be measured
by means of a sensitive volt-
meter. In order to economize
in the amount of platinum, the
free ends of the pyrometer are
connected to insulated copper
wires leading to the measuring
instrument. The two parts of
the circuit where the connec-
tion with the copper wires is
made are inserted in glass test-
tubes, and the latter are closed
by cork stoppers. The test-
tubes are placed in a beaker
FIG. 18. filled with water to serve as a
thermostat, and the beaker is
enveloped in asbestos paper. In the voltmeter which is to be used
for pyrometric work, a second scale is graduated to give directly the
temperature readings, each division of the scale representing 10
degrees. In order to find the true temperature of the junction, the
reading must be corrected by adding half the temperature of the
thermostat. If the latter is maintained at 0°, by filling the beaker
 PHOSPHORUS PENTASULPHIDE. 87
with ice, no correction is necessary. On account of the sensitive-
ness of the thermo-element toward chemical influences, the wires
are protected by a long, narrow porcelain tube, to the closed end of
which the thermoelectric junction is inserted. Inside
this tube, one wire is isolated from the other by being
placed inside a porcelain capillary (a, Fig. 19). The
protective tube should, to save space, be made as nar-
row as possible, and it may be of glazed or unglazed
porcelain: the latter will stand a higher heat, but is not
impervious to gases; at temperatures up to red heat, a
protective tube of Jena glass may be employed, which,
particularly if the wires are insulated with mica, can
be made of smaller bore. In setting up an apparatus
for the pyrometric measurements of temperatures,
special care should be taken to properly connect the
thermo-element with the terminals of the voltmeter, to
carefully isolate the pyrometer wires, and to see that the
voltmeter is properly adjusted and set to the correct zero point.
The pyrometer is best standardized by carrying out measure-
ments with a few pure metals, the melting-points of which are
accurately known.1 Refer to the discussion, under Tin (No. 6,
p. 15), of melting-point determinations.
To determine the boiling-point of the phosphorus penta-
sulphide, fasten a Jena-glass test-tube, about 40 cm. long and
4 cm. in diameter, in a perpendicular position, and place in it
about 40 g. of the material. Around the middle part of the
tube above the substance, wrap several layers of asbestos paper
and secure the pyrometer so that the thermoelectric junction
hangs two or three centimeters above the surface of the melted
material. Heat the phosphorus pentasulphide to boiling with a
large flame, meanwhile passing a slow stream of carbon dioxide
into the upper part of the test-tube in order to prevent the
ignition of the hot vapors when they come in contact with the
1
The National Testing Bureau at Berlin recommends the following fixed
thermometry points. The values agree closely with those used by the Bureau
of Standards at Washington, D. C.
B.P. of Oxygen, -183.0° B.P. of Naphthalin, 217.96 M.P. of Antimony, 630
B.P. of Carbon Dioxide, -78.5 M.P. of Tin, 231.84 M.P. of Silver, 960.5
M.P. of Mercury, -38.89 B.P. of Benzophenone, 305.9 M.P. of Gold, 1063
M.P. of Ice, 0.00 M.P. of Cadmium, 320.9 M.P. of Copper, 1083
Transf. P. of Sodium Sulphate, 32.38 M.P. of Zinc, 419.4 M.P. of Palladium, 1557
B.P. of Water, 100.00 B.P. of Sulphur, 444.55 M.P. of Platinum, 1764
88 SULPHIDES.
air. The voltmeter rises slowly until it registers the temperature
of the hot vapor, after which it remains constant. It is neces-
sary, however, that the liquid should boil vigorously. The
boiling-point determined in this way in the author's laboratory
with the substance prepared as above, was 507° to 508° at 710 mm.,
which value agrees with that obtained by Bodenstein (508° at
atmospheric pressure).
55. Black Mercuric Sulphide; Transformation into Cinnabar.
The black sulphide of mercury is always formed by the direct combination
of the elements, as well as by the precipitation of a mercuric salt with hydrogen
sulphide, but this modification changes slowly, of itself, into the more stable,
red form (cinnabar). The transformation may be accelerated greatly by
allowing the black sulphide to stand in a warm place in contact with a solution
containing caustic alkali and alkaline sulphide; little by little the relatively
more soluble black sulphide dissolves, and the more insoluble red form
separates in a crystalline condition.
Triturate 50 g. mercury, 20 g. flowers of sulphur, and a little
ammonium sulphide solution, in a large porcelain mortar. Mix
the resulting black paste of mercuric sulphide, sulphur, and
globules of mercury with 60 g. of a 20% caustic potash solution,
and allow the mixture to stand at a temperature of about 50°
(e.g., on top of the hot closet). Replace the evaporated water
daily, mixing up the mass each time with the pestle. When, at
the end of a week at most, the mass has become of a pure red
color, wash it by decantation with water, whereby the greater
part of the excess of sulphur is removed, and then decant the
cinnabar itself with water into an evaporating dish, allowing any
lumps of the black sulphide to remain behind. Boil the material
with a sodium sulphite solution to remove the remainder of the
free sulphur, and wash the final product by decantation with
boiling water. Drain the product on the suction-filter and dry it
in the hot closet. Yield, 80 to 90% of the theoretical.

56. Sulphides of Tin.

Stannous Sulphide. Dissolve 12 g. of tin in 50 g. of concen-
trated hydrochloric acid, warming gently.1 Dilute the filtered
1
The addition of 2.5 c.c. of nitric acid, of sp. gr. 1.2, together with the
hydrochloric acid will cause the metal to dissolve very much more rapidly.
The nitric acid is reduced to ammonium salt. (Translators.)
 GREEN MANGANESE SULPHIDE. 89
solution to 2000 c.c, and treat it, at the temperature of the water
bath, with hydrogen sulphide until the precipitate settles clear.
Collect the stannous sulphide upon a large plaited filter, wash it
thoroughly with hot water, and allow it to dry over night on a
porous plate. Break up the caked product which results and
leave it in the drying closet, occasionally breaking up the lumps
and grinding them to a powder, until the mass is entirely free
from moisture.
Stannic Sulphide. Triturate the stannous sulphide, prepared
by the above directions, with half its weight of sulphur and 6 g.
of ammonium chloride. Place the mixture in an Erlenmeyer
flask, which should be about three-quarters filled, and bury the
flask to its neck on a sand bath or place it on a Babo funnel,
covering it with a cone of asbestos paper. Heat for two hours,
not too strongly, but say sufficiently to keep the iron pan of the
sand bath at a fairly bright red heat. Then, when the ammo-
nium chloride and the excess of sulphur should be completely
volatilized, allow the contents of the flask to cool. On breaking
the flask, the stannic sulphide is obtained in the form of soft,
glistening, yellow crystals. It is known in this modification
by the name of Mosaic Gold. Impurities may be removed
by decantation with water; they either float off or remain
entirely behind.
Another method for preparing this compound is to start with
stannic chloride and carry out the process as described for tita-
nium disulphide, No. 58.

57. Green Manganese Sulphide.

Heat a solution of 40 g. crystallized manganous sulphate in
1200 c.c. of water to boiling in a 2-liter beaker. Blow in a vigorous
current of steam, and add 300 c.c. of concentrated yellow ammo-
nium sulphide, all at one time, while the solution is being agitated by
the steam; the manganous sulphide formed appears reddish for the
first moment, immediately turns yellowish, and soon becomes dark
olive-green. Wash the precipitate, which settles well, by decan-
tation with boiling water containing a little hydrogen sulphide;
each volume of water added should be thoroughly mixed with the
precipitate by blowing in steam. All of the ammonium salt is
removed in the course of a few hours. A small amount of brown
90 SULPHIDES.
manganese oxide is formed during the process, by oxidation of
the sulphide, but it floats on top of the liquid and is removed by
the decantation.
Finally dry the manganous sulphide mud by draining it rapidly
on a large suction filter, wash it with alcohol and dry it in a desic-
cator over sulphuric acid.
The preparation of green manganese sulphide does not always
succeed the first time.
58. Titanium Disulphide.
1. From Titanium Tetrachloride.
This preparation furnishes an example of the decomposition of a chloride
by hydrogen sulphide in the absence of water (cf. p. 68).
The apparatus described in No. 53 is used (Fig. 17, p. 84),
but instead of hydrogen, hydrogen sulphide is employed. It is
first passed through a small wash-b.ottle containing glycerol, in
order that the bubbles may be counted, and through two U-tubes
containing calcium chloride to dry the gas. In the retort 50 g.
of titanium chloride are placed.
First of all pass a rapid stream of hydrogen sulphide through
the apparatus and heat the combustion tube to dark redness; then
heat the titanium chloride in the retort nearly to boiling, and keep
it at that point by means of a small flame. The vapors of titanium
tetrachloride charged with hydrogen sulphide are decomposed in
the hot tube to TiS2 and HC1; any unchanged titanium chloride
that collects in the receiver is returned to the retort, again distilled,
and the process repeated even a third time. The inlet tube for
the hydrogen sulphide must not be too narrow, or it may become
stopped with titanium disulphide formed within the retort. When
all of the titanium tetrachloride has reacted, withdraw the retort,
and, in order to remove all traces of tetrachloride from the product,
pass a current of hydrogen or of carbon dioxide through the tube.
After allowing the tube to cool, remove its contents in the manner
described in No. 53. A product is obtained which consists of about
10 g. of dark brass-yellow leaflets similar to those of Mosaic gold.
Analyze one sample for titanium by roasting it in a porcelain
crucible and weighing it as TiO2; a second portion for sulphur by
taking it up in aqua regia (or in the manner described below) and
precipitating the highly diluted solution with barium chloride.
 CYANIDES. 91

2. From Titanium Dioxide.

Titanium disulphide was first obtained by H. Rose (1823) on conducting
vapors of carbon disulphide over glowing titanium dioxide. The theory of
this method, which subsequently proved to be of importance for the prepa-
ration of sulphides, is the same as that of the preparation of chlorides from
oxides and carbon tetrachloride (cf. Introduction to No. 52, p. 81).
Lead a fairly strong current of hydrogen sulphide through a
wash bottle containing glycerol, a U-tube filled with calcium
chloride, a wash bottle containing carbon disulphide, and into a
piece of combustion tubing in which has been placed 4 to 5 grams
of finely-powdered titanium dioxide (No. 52). Heat the contents
of the tube to a bright red heat by means of a row burner with an
asbestos hood (Fig. 3). The vaporization of the carbon disulphide
may be hastened by placing the wash bottle in a beaker filled with
lukewarm water. Do not heat the tube until the air has been
completely expelled; during the heating revolve it a little on its
axis from time to time in order that new portions of the dioxide
may come to the surface. After about three hours the reaction
is complete; allow the preparation to cool in the current of hydro-
gen sulphide.
The titanium sulphide has the appearance of a brown powder,
but on being pressed it assumes a dark-yellow, metallic luster.
In the analysis, titanium may be determined by roasting, and
sulphur either by the method given above, or by heating the
sample in a current of oxygen and collecting the gases evolved in
ammoniacal hydrogen peroxide or in bromine water, eventually
making this solution acid and precipitating it with barium chloride.
The results show a somewhat too high titanium value, and too low
sulphur, because, when prepared in this way, the sulphide invari-
ably contains some titanium dioxide.

(d) Nitrides.
59. Hydrogen Cyanide, Mercuric Cyanide, Cyanogen, and
Dithio-oxamlde.
Carbon combines with nitrogen, absorbing heat, and forms the nitride,
cyanogen:
2 C + N2 + 7100 cal. = C2N2.
The endothermic nature of this substance (cf. p. 55) accounts for the
formation of cyanogen compounds in the blast furnace, and for its presence in
92 NITRIDES.
the sun, as shown by the spectroscope. When cyanogen is once formed, its
rate of decomposition at a lower temperature is so small that it may be pre-
pared pure in an indirect manner from its compounds and preserved undecom-
posed; cf. No. 64, Acetylene, and No. 67, Hydrogen Peroxide.
Free cyanogen gas which has the formula C2N2 should not be confused with
the univalent radical CN. The radical CN forms a stable atomic grouping
which behaves in the same manner as the halogen atoms in halides, and it
bears the same relation to uncombined cyanogen as the chlorine ion, for
example, bears to free chlorine.
For the preparation of cyanogen gas, hydrogen cyanide (hydrocyanic acid)
is first prepared by Wohler's method of treating either sodium or potassium
ferrocyanide with sulphuric acid. The hydrogen cyanide, together with the
residues, is worked over into mercuric cyanide and the latter decomposed by
heat.

Hydrogen Cyanide from Potassium Ferrocyanide. Mercuric

Cyanide.
2 K4[Fe(CN)6] + 3 H2SO4 = 3 K2SO4 + K2Fe[Fe(CN)6] + 6 HCN
6 HCN + 3 HgO = 3 Hg(CN)2 + 3 H2O.
Place a 400 to 500 c.c. flask on a Babo boiling funnel, and
through the cork, which fits its neck tightly, pass a delivery tube
leading to a condenser; fit the lower end of the condenser by means
of another cork stopper into an adapter that just dips into 100
c.c. of water in the receiving flask. Introduce into the distilling
flask 100 g. of coarsely broken potassium ferrocyanide and a
cooled mixture of 70 g. concentrated sulphuric acid and 130 c.c.
water. Distil until the residue in the flask consists of a thin
white slime ["prussic acid residue," K2Fe[Fe(CN)6](?)]. Set
aside about 15 c.c. of the distillate. Dilute the remainder with
water to a volume of 300 to 400 c.c. and add mercuric oxide (about
75 grams), shaking well, until the solution no longer smells of
hydrocyanic acid (Caution) and shows a neutral or barely alkaline
reaction. Then pour in the reserved 15 c.c. of hydrocyanic acid
and evaporate the solution under a good hood till it crystallizes.
If necessary, purify the preparation by recrystallization. Almost
the theoretical yield of 85 to 90 grams is obtained.
In this and the following work regard should be paid to the extremely
poisonous nature of hydrocyanic (prussic) acid, and the operations
should be carried out under a well-ventilated hood in the special room
for noxious materials, or in the open air.
Working up of the Prussic Acid Residues. Wash the residue
 DITHIO-OXAMIDE. 93
remaining in the distilling flask by decantation with water, and
then heat it upon the water bath with about 100 grams of 2-normal
nitric acid, which oxidizes it to a mass resembling Prussian blue;
the substance so formed contains potassium and is known as
Williamson's Violet. Wash this pigment several times by decan-
tation with water, suck it free from liquid on a hardened filter
paper, and dry it in the hot closet. Yield, 40 grams.
Mercuric cyanide can be prepared from Prussian blue or William-
son's violet by boiling the pigment with 2.25 times its own weight
of mercuric oxide and forty times its weight of water. After the
blue color has disappeared, filter the solution and boil the turbid
filtrate with more of the Prussian blue until no more of it is de-
colorized and the solution reacts neutral. Add some animal
charcoal, boil the solution again, filter, and finally evaporate to
dryness. Recrystallize the residue from water.
Mercuric cyanide in aqueous solution is but slightly dissociated
electrolytically, and on this account it fails to give a precipitate
when treated with either silver nitrate or with sodium hydroxide.
For the same reason mercuric oxide will dissolve in solutions con-
taining potassium cyanide, forming mercuric cyanide and potas-
sium hydroxide; the experiment should be tried.
Cyanogen from Mercuric Cyanide. Heat about one gram of the
mercuric cyanide strongly in a dry test-tube; cyanogen gas is
evolved and burns with a yellowish-red flame, which is purple
at the edges.
Dithio-oxamide.
Cyanogen unites with one or with two molecules of hydrogen sulphide:
. C= N CSNH2
I + H2S = I (cyanthioformamide).
C^N C=N
C= N CSNH2
1 + 2 H2S = I (dithio-oxamide).
C= N CSNH2
Dithio-oxamide is sometimes formed in qualitative analysis when hydrogen
sulphide is passed into the solution containing potassium cyanide in the test
for cadmium.

1. Saturate 100 g. of alcohol with hydrogen sulphide in a

closed flask. Then conduct into the liquid some cyanogen gas,
which is prepared by heating successively two portions of 10 g.
94 NITRIDES.
each of mercuric cyanide in a test tube fitted with a delivery tube.
Finally, saturate the solution once more with hydrogen sulphide.
After standing for some time a mass of small crystals is deposited;
boil the mother liquor with bone-black and evaporate the filtrate
in order to obtain another crop of crystals. Recrystallize the
product from alcohol, or from a mixture of acetone and chloroform.
Yield, 3.5 to 4 g.
2. Treat an aqueous solution of 25 g. copper vitriol with con-
centrated ammonia until the precipitate, which first forms, just
disappears; decolorize the liquid by the addition of a barely suffi-
cient amount of potassium cyanide solution (about 26 g. KCN)
and then saturate with hydrogen sulphide. The solution first
becomes yellow, then it appears red, and finally a red, crystalline
powder separates. After standing for several hours in the ice-
chest, separate the crystals from the liquor and recrystallize them
from a little alcohol. The yield is small (about 0.5 g.) because
in aqueous solution the greater part of the cyanogen is reduced to
hydrocyanic acid. This is the reason for the use of alcohol in
the first method.
60. Boron Nitride, BN.
Heat an intimate mixture of 5 g. finely powdered, anhydrous
borax and 10 g. ammonium chloride, as hot as possible with the
blast lamp in a covered platinum crucible surrounded by a clay
mantle. After cooling, pulverize the porous contents of the
crucible, and extract it several times with water containing a
little hydrochloric acid. Boil the residue with pure water, collect
it on a filter and dry it. Yield, about 0.3 g. The nitride prepared
in this way always contains a little oxide.
Boron nitride is insoluble in water and in acids; on being
boiled with caustic soda solution, it decomposes slowly, evolving
ammonia; it is attacked more rapidly by fusion with sodium
carbonate on platinum foil.

61. Magnesium Nitride, Mg-N;; Ammonia from the Atmosphere.

Fill a small iron crucible (3 cm. high and 5 cm. wide at the
top) to two-thirds with 8 to 9 g. of magnesium powder, and make
a tight joint with the cover by means of wet asbestos pulp. Like-
wise close with asbestos pulp a small hole which has been made
 MAGNESIUM NITRIDE. 95
in the cover. After drying, make a perforation in this last mass
of asbestos by means of a fine needle. Dry the crucible, with its
contents, in the hot closet.
Place the crucible in a hole made in a piece of heavy asbestos
board, so that its greater part hangs below the asbestos, and
direct the flame of a, blast lamp sidewise against it. By this
arrangement the flame gases are kept well away from the cover
of the crucible. Turn the asbestos board with the crucible from
time to time so that all sides are heated equally. Continue the
heating for 30 minutes.
After cooling, remove the cover of the crucible and the upper
layer of white magnesium oxide. Beneath the latter lies a light
yellowish-green mass of nearly pure magnesium nitride, which is
obtained to about 80% of the theoretical yield. If the heating is
not continued long enough, dark places are found in the mass,
caused by the presence of unchanged magnesium.
Magnesium nitride reacts violently with water with the forma-
tion of ammonia. To obtain the ammonia, place the whole con-
tents of the crucible (without separating the oxide from the
nitride) in a round-bottomed flask which is provided with a
separatory funnel and with a right-angled tube leading to a con-
denser. Prolong the condenser with an adapter that just dips
into 100 c.c. of water in a small flask. Cool the evolution flask
by placing it in a dish of cold water, and then, at first slowly and
later more rapidly, allow 75 c.c. of water to drop upon the nitride.1
Finally, heat the contents of the flask with a small flame as long
as ammonia continues to be evolved. Yield, 3 to 4 g. of ammonia,
as determined by titrating an aliquot part of the distillate with
0.5 normal acid.
Calcium Nitride. Place a small shaving of metallic calcium
on an inverted porcelain cover and set fire to it with a match.
It burns with a light, yellowish-red flame, and both oxide and
nitride are formed. Moisten the white combustion product with a
few drops of water, and test with Nessler's reagent for ammonia.
The chemical reaction is the same for both the magnesium and
calcium nitrides. A part of the metal serves to free the air of
1
Since the reaction produces intense heat, it is well, in order to avoid
breaking the flask, to place in the bottom of the flask a layer of sand and on
top of this the nitride mixed with sand.
96 PHOSPHIDES.
oxygen, while the remainder combines with the nitrogen that is
left. By the hydrolysis of the nitride, ammonia and the hydrox-
ide of the metal are formed. The possibility of obtaining ammonia
from the nitrogen of the air, with the intermediate formation of a
nitride, was first pointed out by Wohler in 1850 when his method
of preparing boron nitride was published.

62. Chromium Nitride, CrN.

Heat 5 to 10 g. of violet, anhydrous chromium chloride (No. 44)
in a 25 to 50 cm. tube of difficultly fusible glass, at first gently
and then strongly with a row burner (Fig. 3, p. 2). Meanwhile pass
through the tube a current of ammonia gas, which is obtained by
heating a concentrated solution of ammonia and drying the gas
successively in a lime-tower and a U-tube containing lime. Leave
the reaction tube entirely open at one end, since if an ordinary
delivery tube is used to carry away the waste gases, it soon becomes
stopped with sublimed ammonium chloride. Carry out the
experiment under the hood and continue the heating until no more
vapors of ammonium chloride escape. After cooling, pulverize
the reaction product and once more ignite it in an atmosphere of
ammonia. Yield, nearly theoretical.
Chromium nitride is very stable towards warm caustic soda
solution, and hot concentrated sulphuric acid reacts with it but
slowly. To test its purity, boil a small sample with chloride-free
caustic soda and test the solution obtained for chloride. If it is
desired to remove traces of chromium chloride from the prepara-
tion, it may be treated in the cold with dilute hydrochloric acid
and a little tinfoil, then washed with water, drained, and dried at
110° to 120°.
Chromium nitride, on being heated upon a porcelain crucible
cover over the blast lamp, changes to dull, grayish-green chromic
oxide.
(e) Phosphides.
63. Magnesium Phosphide, Mg-J",.
Draw out one end of a 35 cm. long combustion tube so that its
diameter is 0.6 to 0.9 cm., and connect this end by a piece of
rubber tubing with two drying bottles and a Kipp hydrogen
generator. Insert two porcelain boats into the tube, the one
 CARBIDES. 97

nearest to the source of hydrogen containing about five grams of

red phosphorus and the other four grams of magnesium powder.
The phosphorus must be perfectly dry (cf. p. 85). Erect the
apparatus under the hood.
After filling the apparatus with hydrogen (Test!), heat the tube
slightly through its entire length to expel moisture; then, while
maintaining a steady current of hydrogen, heat both boats as
equally as possible by means of two Bunsen burners so that phos-
phorus vapor is carried over the magnesium and a violent reaction
takes place. When all the phosphorus has volatilized, allow the
contents of the tube to cool in the atmosphere of hydrogen.
Magnesium phosphide when thrown into water is decomposed,
and phosphine is set free. This gas has a very offensive odor;
it is combustible, but it does not, like the impure phosphine that is
commonly prepared, take fire spontaneously.

(/) Carbides.
64. Calcium Carbide; Acetylene from Calcium Carbide;
Benzene from Acetylene.
Calcium Carbide. Heat 0.5 g. of lampblack strongly in a
porcelain crucible for a few minutes; after it has cooled mix with
it 0.5 g. of thin shavings of metallic calcium, and heat the mixture
strongly with the blast lamp for a few minutes. After cooling
there is found in addition to lampblack a sintered white mass
which contains some calcium carbide; on testing it with water,
acetylene is formed.
Acetylene from Calcium Carbide. Allow water to drop slowly
from a dropping funnel upon a few pieces of commercial calcium
carbide in a half-liter flask. Pass the acetylene evolved through
a solution of sodium plumbite in order to remove any hydrogen
sulphide, and through an acid solution of copper sulphate to take
out any phosphine. Acetylene burns with a brilliantly luminous
and, unless in a special burner, very smoky flame. Before igniting
the gas it should be tested to see whether all the air has been
removed from the apparatus.

At the temperature of the electric arc, acetylene can be formed from its
elements with absorption of heat. At a bright red heat it decomposes, but at
lower temperatures, although it is likewise unstable, its rate of decomposition
98 CARBIDES.
is extremely slow. (Compare with the similar relations which exist for
cyanogen, No. 59, and hydrogen peroxide, No. 67.)
At a dull red heat acetylene polymerizes to a considerable extent, forming
benzene: 3 C2H2 = CeH6. The presence of benzene in coal-tar may be
attributed to this reaction; indeed, this supposition is supported by the fact
that the yield of benzene in the tar sinks if the temperature of the gas retorts
is raised.

Benzene from Acetylene. Prepare pure acetylene, as directed

above, and pass a strong current of it for two hours through a
glass tube that is heated to dull redness in a combustion furnace
(the air must be expelled by acetylene before the tube is heated!).
Lead the products, escaping from the combustion tube, through a
condenser; in this way a few cubic centimeters of an oil having
the odor of coal-tar are obtained. By distilling this product,
a crude, colorless benzene is obtained which boils between 70°
and 90°. For the further identification of this substance as ben-
zene it may be converted into nitrobenzene, aniline, and then
mauvein. Refer to a text-book on organic preparations, for ex-
ample Gattermann, "Laboratory Methods of Organic Chemistry"
(Translated by W. S. Shober).
 CHAPTER IV.

COMPOUNDS CONTAINING A COMPLEX NEGATIVE

COMPONENT.
THE modern conception of complex compounds arose from the necessity of
classifying the compounds formed by the union of two simple salts. Those
composite salts which in aqueous solution are dissociated entirely into the
simple salts, or their ions, are classed as double salts; those which, instead of
dissociating into the simple salts, give characteristic ions of their own -— for
example, simple metal cations and composite metal-containing anions — are
classed as complex salts:
KMgCl3 = KCI + MgCI2 = K + + Mg + + + 3 Cl~ (double salt),
K2[HgI4] = 2 K + + [HgIJ~~ (complex salt).
In such a complex compound, the composite part which remains intact
during dissociation is known as a complex radical or complex ion ' and may be
regarded as the negative component of a new acid; sometimes indeed the com-
plex acid can be prepared in a free state, for example, hydroferrocyanic acid
(No. 108). The individual constituents of a complex ion, since they are not
present in the free state, do not show all the reactions which are characteristic
of the simple ions; it is this reduced ability of metals contained in complex
radicals to react, which forms the most important criterion of this class of
compounds.
The conception of complex compounds has, however, extended considerably
beyond the range of these composite salts. In the first place, the distinction
between double and complex salts is merely a qualitative one. Transition
forms are known in which the simple salts and their ions as well as the complex
ions are found among the dissociation products; the nature and extent of the
dissociation is also dependent to a marked degree upon the nature of the solvent
and upon the concentration. Again, no essential distinction can be drawn
between the compounds with complex, metal-containing anions and those which
are formed by the addition of NH3, H2O, NO2, etc., to the metal ion of a simple
salt, and in which the metal-containing cation is complex and the activity of
its constituents is restricted. Finally, certain binary substances, such as for
example the oxides, which themselves possess none of the characteristics of
salts, can produce salts (or acid3 or bases) by uniting with one another. Thus
1
It is a quite common practice to indicate complex ions in chemical for-
mulas by enclosing them in brackets.
99
100 COMPLEX COMPOUNDS.

the ordinary oxygen-acids are formed by the union of water and acid anhy-
dride, and the salts of the oxygen-acids by the union of metal oxide and
non-metal oxide. Here also there are produced, quite in accord with the
interpretation of complex salts, new ions, the separate constituents of which
are incapable of entering into independent chemical reactions:
H2O + SO3 = H2[SOJ,
H2[SO4] = 2 H + + [SO4]—.
Thus the sulphate radical does not show the reactions of sulphur any more than
the ferrocyanide radical exhibits those of iron.
Since manifestly every compound containing more than two elements can
under certain conditions behave in such a manner as to indicate the grouping
of two of its constituents into a complex, it appears more rational to include
under complex compounds all substances which are produced from simple com-
pounds by the addition of one or several elements; in most cases the complex
radical behaves, like the hydroxyl group, as a unit, and can thus be treated as
a substituent of an atom.
The most essential difference between the complex and the simple com-
pounds lies in the great variety of ways in which the former can react or dis-
sociate, and this is more evident in proportion to the number of constituents.
There is but one way in which electrolytic and non-electrolytic dissociation can
take place in simple compounds. With complex compounds, on the other
hand, the point of division is usually not the same by the electrolytic as by the
non-electrolytic dissociation:
CaCO3 = Ca + + CO3 (electrolytic dissociation).1
CaCO3 = CaO + CO2 (non-electrolytic dissociation).1
Non-electrolytic dissociation may be of very different types:
KC103 = KC1 + 3 0 (Nos . 74 and 75)
NaNO 3 = NaNO2 + 0 (No. 79).
Na 2 S 2 O 3- Na2SO3 + S (No. 90).
KPbI 3 = KI + Pbl 2 (No. 105).
NH44C1 = NH33++ HC1 (No. 120).
(No. 10).
Ni(NH3)6Br2 = NiBr2 + 6 NH 3 (No. 128).
CLASSIFICATION OF COMPLEX COMPOUNDS. Of the various ways in which
complex compounds can dissociate, the electrolytic dissociation exceeds all others
as regards frequency of occurrence. We may classify the complex compounds,
therefore, as: 1. Those with a complex radical which yields an ion of negative
charge (Chapter IV); 2. Those with a complex radical which yields an ion of
positive charge (Chapter V); 3. Those characterized by very little or no
capacity for electrolytic dissociation (Chapter VI).
1
According to whether the one or the other possibility of dissociation is to
be brought especially to notice, two methods of writing the name and symbol
have been devised: CO2 • CaO, " carbonate of lime "; CaCO3, " calcium car-
bonate "; but it would be just as biased to defend the older name as being the
only satisfactory one as it would be to reject it as " unscientific."
 SODIUM PEROXIDE. 101

Within the class of compounds possessing complex anions that sub-class

will first be treated which comprises the compounds containing homogeneous
complexes. Homogeneous complex anions arise, as the name implies, when one
or more additional atoms of the same element are joined to the negative con-
stituent of a binary compound,
K2S + 3 S = K 2 S 4 .
Homogeneous complex compounds can be distinguished from simple com-
pounds of the general formula Am Bn by the fact that the greater number of
negative atoms is not due to an increased valence of the positive component,
but rather to an increased combining power of the negative part originally
present in the mother-substance. FeCl2 differs from FeCl3 in the valence of
the iron. Aqueous solutions of FeCl2 and FeCl3 are identical with regard to
their anions but different with regard to the cations; in aqueous solutions of KI
and KIs, however, the exact opposite is true.
Only a few compounds with homogeneous complex cations are known.
The part played by the valence theory in the interpretation of complex
compounds is varied. In some cases, as with sulphuric acid, it offers certain
advantages in its original form. In other cases an enlargement of our valence
ideas seems necessary (see Complex Halogen Salts, p. 140).

COMPOUNDS WITH HOMOGENEOUS COMPLEXES.

(a) Peroxides.
65. Sodium Peroxide.
Arrange a train of apparatus so that air may be drawn by
means of a suction pump through one wash-bottle containing
sodium hydroxide and two more containing concentrated sul-
phuric acid, and then into a wide, 30 cm. long, combustion tube
which is to be heated on a row burner with an asbestos cover
(Fig. 3). The other end of the combustion tube is made nar-
rower and fitted to an air filter which serves to hold back sodium
peroxide dust. This filter consists of a 30 cm. long and 3 cm.
wide glass tube loosely filled with asbestos fibers. Between
the air filter and the pump, place an empty suction flask to serve
as a safety bottle. Into the combustion tube introduce an
aluminium boat, about 16 cm. long and as deep as possible,
which can be prepared from thin aluminium foil; in the boat place
2 to 3 g. of sodium. Since, during the progress of the experi-
ment, the sodium will tend to flow in a direction opposite to
that of the air current, the combustion tube together with the
burner should be placed in a slanting position so that the end
at which the air enters is uppermost.
102 PEROXIDES.
Heat the sodium to above its melting-point and draw air over
it; at about 300°, it takes fire. Then lower the flame, for
from that point on the combustion proceeds almost without any
application of external heat. Continue to pass a vigorous cur-
rent of air until the reaction has ceased. The yield is 4 to 5 g.
of bright yellow sodium peroxide, which must be protected from
moisture.
66. Barium Peroxide.
At a dull red heat, dry barium oxide is changed by the oxygen of the air to
barium peroxide. In carrying out the reaction, the air must be free from
moisture and from carbon dioxide. Since the barium peroxide gives off its
oxygen again at the same temperature and a reduced oxygen pressure, or at
the same pressure and a higher temperature, a technical process for obtaining
pure oxygen from the air according to the reversible reaction
BaO + 0 <=> BaO,
has been developed. Barium oxide cannot be prepared conveniently from
barium carbonate, at least not on a small scale, because the decomposition
temperature of the latter lies too high.
Crude Barium Peroxide. Place 130 g. of barium nitrate in a
large clay crucible and heat it in a charcoal furnace with slowly
rising temperature, to a dull red heat. After cooling break
the hard, porous, gray contents of the crucible into small
lumps and transfer it, before it can attract moisture, into a
weighed combustion tube. Determine the quantity of barium
oxide by weighing the tube and contents. Heat the tube in a
combustion furnace to a barely perceptible redness, and then
draw through it a current of air which has passed through caustic
soda solution and then through concentrated sulphuric acid. After
two or three hours, let the tube cool and determine the gain in
weight, which should be one-tenth the original weight of the
barium oxide; if it is less, the preparation must be heated again
in the current of air.
Pure Barium Peroxide. Dissolve the barium peroxide, a
little at a time, in the calculated amount of ice-cold \°j0 hydro-
chloric acid and add barium hydroxide solution to the cloudy
liquid until a precipitate consisting chiefly of metal hydroxides,
which are present as impurities, just forms. Filter, and precipi-
tate the nitrate completely with barium hydroxide, whereby a fine,
crystalline powder of barium-peroxide-hydrate, BaO2 • 8 H2O, is
formed. Drain the precipitate and dry it in the steam closet.
 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE. 103

67. Hydrogen Peroxide.

The oxidation of water to hydrogen peroxide takes place with absorption of
heat:
2 H2O (liquid) + O2 + 44,320 cal. = 2 H2O2 (liquid).
Hydrogen peroxide is thus endothermic as regards its formation from water
and oxygen. In accordance with the relation which exists between the equi-
librium constants of the mass-action law and the temperature (cf. p. 47), it
follows that the quantity of hydrogen peroxide in an equilibrium mixture must
increase with rise of temperature, and that therefore in order to obtain hydro-
gen peroxide synthetically by the above reaction it is necessary to work at as
high a temperature as possible. Even at 2000° there is but little peroxide pres-
ent in the equilibrium mixture.1 At low temperatures hydrogen peroxide is
not stable at any appreciable concentration; in fact a liquid containing a high
percentage of it is explosive. The velocity at which hydrogen peroxide decom-
poses, when in the region of instability as regards temperature or concentration,
increases (as does the velocity of all reactions) with rise of tempera-
ture.2 If then it is desired to obtain the hydrogen peroxide produced by a
reaction at a high temperature, it is necessary to cool the reaction products
very rapidly to a point where the decomposition velocity is inappreciable.
When thus chilled the hydrogen peroxide continues to exist, as it were, in a
supercooled condition. This end is accomplished, for example, when an oxy-
hydrogen flame comes in direct contact with a piece of ice and thereby an
extremely sudden drop in temperature is brought about. Cf. Cyanogen,
No. 59, and Acetylene, No. 64.
The principle of preserving the equilibrium concentrations, as they exist at
high temperatures, by means of sudden cooling was first introduced by Deville
in 1863 and applied in the construction of his " hot and cold tubes." A nar-
row silver tube cooled by running water was placed in the center of a white-hot
porcelain tube at the walls of which the gas-reaction to be measured reached its
high-temperature equilibrium; the reaction-products on coming in contact
with the inner tube were chilled, and thus prevented, partially at least, from
undergoing the reverse reaction. In recent years many equilibria, in which
concentrations of measurable magnitude are reached only at high tempera-
tures, have been studied in this manner. The mixtures are cooled, without
suffering change in concentration, to temperatures at which analytical meas-
urements are possible. The quantitative preservation of the concentration
fails, however, in the case of hydrogen peroxide on account of its great decom-
position-velocity.
The velocity of many reactions can be increased by means of catalyzers, as
well as by rise of temperature. The decomposition of hydrogen peroxide,
since it takes place with conveniently measurable rapidity at ordinary tem-
1
At 2000° according to Nernst (1903) less than 1% H3O2 exists in a mixture
of water vapor and oxygen, each at 0.1 atmosphere pressure.
!
In order to keep the temperature low during the distillation of hydrogen
peroxide, it is customary to work in a vacuum.
104 PEROXIDES.

peratures, offers an excellent opportunity for studying the effect of various

catalyzers. In this way a remarkable analogy between organic ferments and
inorganic catalyzers has been discovered. Cf. No. 20. Hot solutions of hydro-
gen peroxide are decomposed rapidly at the rough places on porcelain or glass
apparatus.

A. Hydrogen Peroxide from the Oxy-hydrogen Flame. Let a

hydrogen flame one-half centimeter long, burning from a glass
tip, play against a piece of ice in a watch glass, until all the ice
is melted. The presence of hydrogen peroxide in the resulting
liquid may be easily shown by means of a titanium solution
(see p. 83).
B. Hydrogen Peroxide from Barium Peroxide. Add, little by
little, some pulverized, crude barium peroxide' (No. 66) to a
mixture of 0.6 of its weight of concentrated sulphuric acid and
300 c.c. of water; the liquid must be kept cold by ice both
inside and outside the vessel. Neutralize the excess of acid with
barium carbonate, let the precipitate settle, filter, and distil the
solution on the water bath.
For the distillation use a liter round-bottomed flask with a
stopper through which pass two glass tubes; one is quite narrow
and terminates below in a long, fine capillary and above in a
rubber tube with a screw-cock. The other tube leads from the
flask to a long condenser; the lower end of the latter is fitted to
a suction bottle which serves as a receiver. All parts of the
apparatus must be closed with tightly-fitting stoppers. Evacuate
the apparatus, but allow a fine stream of air bubbles to flow con-
tinuously from the capillary through the liquid in the flask, in
order to avoid bumping; the rate of flow of this air current is to
be regulated by the screw-cock. Distil over about one-third of
the contents of the flask and test the distillate for hydrogen per-
oxide as described below; it should be practically pure water.
Then empty the receiving bottle and distil as before until all of
the remaining liquid has passed over.
Qualitative Tests for Hydrogen Peroxide.
1. Titanium Sulphate Test (cf. p. 83).
2. Chromic Acid Test: To a few c.c. of a chromate solution
weakly acidified with sulphuric acid, add a few drops of hydrogen
1
The use of barium peroxide hydrate has also been recommended.
 HYDROGEN PEROXIDE. 105
peroxide, and then shake with about 1 c.c. of ether; an intensely
blue compound of chromium is. formed which is more soluble
in ether than in water and passes, therefore, into the ether layer.
3. A very dilute solution of potassium iodide on being treated
with a small amount of hydrogen peroxide slowly turns yellow (or
blue if starch is also added) as a result of the separation of iodine.
This reaction is catalytically accelerated, somewhat by acetic acid,
more by mineral acids, and most of all by ferrous sulphate.
Quantitative Determination of Hydrogen Peroxide. Dilute
10 c.c. of the preparation to about 300 c.c, acidify strongly with
sulphuric acid, and titrate with potassium permanganate:
2 KMnO4 + 3 H2SO4 + 5 H2O2 = K2SO4 + 2 MnSO, + 8 H2O + 5 O2.
1 c.c. of 0.1-normal KMnO4 solution = 0.0017 g. H2Oj.
C. Hydrogen Peroxide as a By-product in Slow Atmospheric
Oxidations.
Schoenbein, in 1864, established the fact that hydrogen peroxide is produced
when metals, or their amalgams, are shaken with water containing dissolved
oxygen:
Zn + 2 H2O + O2 = Zn(OH)2 + H2O2.
It was shown by M. Traube,1 in 1893, that the formation of hydrogen per-
oxide according to the equation becomes quantitative if the reaction is allowed
to take place in the presence of calcium hydroxide, for then the peroxide is
precipitated as the difficultly soluble calcium peroxide and is thus withdrawn
from the sphere of action.
Such an oxidation in which twice as much oxygen is used as is necessary for
the primary process itself, the other half of the oxygen being used in some
secondary reaction — mostly in the formation of hydrogen peroxide — is of
frequent occurrence both in organic and inorganic chemistry and is known as
" auto-oxidation." Inasmuch as both the primary and secondary reactions
require the same quantity of oxygen and since they do not take place inde-
pendently of one another, •— hydrogen peroxide is not formed at ordinary tem-
peratures from water and oxygen (see above), — it is necessary to assume the
existence of some peculiar form of reaction-mechanism. Views regarding this,
however, differ widely; for example, the hydrogen peroxide may be regarded
as a decomposition product of some higher oxide, such as zinc peroxide, which
is formed in the primary reaction; or it maybe assumed with Traube that a
dissociation of the water molecules takes place, the hydroxyl groups combining
with the metal and the hydrogen atoms combining with undissociated oxygen
molecules.
Place 200 c.c. of water, 6 g. of slacked lime, 2.5 g. of potas-
sium hydroxide, and 30 g. of mercury in a thick-walled liter
1
Ber. 26, 1471 (1893).
106 POLYSULPHIDES.
flask. Amalgamate the surface of about 0.5 g. of zinc turnings
by treating with a solution of mercuric chloride, and then add
the zinc a little at a time to the contents of the flask. On
shaking vigorously, the zinc dissolves completely in the mercury
and then becomes oxidized according to the equation given
above. To show the presence of hydrogen peroxide, treat
samples of the resulting turbid liquid with an acidified iodide-
starch solution containing a drop of ferrous sulphate, or with a
titanium sulphate solution.
(b) Poly sulphides.
68. Ammonium Pentasulphide, (NH4)2S5.
The sulphur which is bound directly to the metal in metallic sulphides is
capable of taking on more sulphur to form polysulphides (Berzelius). The
additional binding power of the sulphur seems to be influenced to a high degree
by the metal with which it is combined. Polysulphides of the alkali metals
are numerous and well known, as are also many of the alkaline earth group;
but for the heavy metals either none exist or they play, at most, a subor-
dinate role. Polysulphides of the alkali metals can be obtained by fusion
(sulphur livers), those of caesium and rubidium with the general formula
M2Sn, in which n = 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, having been identified;' polysulphides can
also be formed by dissolving sulphur in solutions of the monosulphides and
thereupon crystallizing or precipitating the product. (See below.) Of the
polysulphide solutions, those of the tetrasulphides with the ion S4 are
especially stable.2 Besides the types already mentioned, other polysulphides
have been obtained under varying conditions from such solutions, but the
individuality of some of them is doubtful.
Saturate 25 c.c. of concentrated ammonia solution with hydro-
gen sulphide in a closed flask, add another 25 c.c. of the ammonia,
and then dissolve in this mixture as much roll sulphur as pos-
sible (about 25 g.) at 30° to 40°. Filter off the excess of sulphur
and to the yellow solution in an Erlenmeyer flask add an equal
volume of 95% alcohol. After the solution has stood over night
in the ice-chest, an abundant crystallization of intensely yellow
needles of ammonium pentasulphide is obtained. Drain the crys-
tals, wash them with alcohol and ether and allow them to dry for
a day in a vacuum desiccator over quicklime upon which a few
drops of concentrated ammonia have been poured. The yield is
1
W. Biltz and Wilke-Doerfurt, Ber. 38, 123 (1905); Z. anorg. Chem. 48,
297; 50, 67 (1906); J. S. Thomas and A. Rule, Chem. Soc. I l l , 1063
(1917).
2
Kuster, Z. anorg. Chem. 43, 53 (1904); 44, 431 (1905).
 AMMONIUM TRIBROMIDE. 107

about 40 g. On long standing, the crystals become lighter colored,

due to decomposition. Determinations of ammonia and sulphur
confirm the above formula.

(c) Polyhalides.
Polysulphides and polyhalides are very closely related. The latter likewise
occur chiefly as salts of the alkali and alkaline earth metals and as the free
halogen acids. The stability of the compounds increases very rapidly in the
series of the alkali metals with the increase in the atomic weight of the metal.
From caesium and rubidium a large number of both simple and mixed polyha-
lides of the type MHa3 and MHa5 (Ha = Cl, Br, or I) have been obtained. As
regards the stability of its polyhalogen compounds, ammonium comes next to
the higher alkali metals; still more stable are the substituted ammonium salts,
namely, the polyhalides of the complicated alkaloids, such as coniin, nicotin,
atropin, narkotin, and of the diazonium salts.

69. Ammonium Tribromide, NH4 [Br3].

Add 8 g. of bromine * to a lukewarm solution of 10 g. ammonium
bromide2 in 12 g. of water, whereupon the temperature of the
mixture rises a little. Allow the solution to stand over sul-
phuric acid in a vacuum desiccator which, if possible, should be
placed in an ice-chest. Prismatic crystals, or lamellar aggre-
gates, of the color of potassium pyrochromate separate from the
solution which still contains free bromine. After one or two days
drain the crystals and dry them in a vacuum desiccator con-
taining a small dish of bromine in addition to sulphuric acid (the
preparation would lose bromine to an atmosphere free from that
element). The yield is about 10 g. Analyze the product as
1
This is only half the calculated amount. The use of more bromine does
not improve the yield.
2
Ammonium bromide may be prepared either by the neutralization of
hydrobromic acid (No. 35) with ammonia or by the action of bromine on
ammonia. According to the latter method, allow 13 g. bromine to flow drop
by drop from a dropping-funnel into 130 c.c. of 2-normal ammonia in a flask,
which is surrounded by ice and is constantly shaken.
8 NH 3 + 3 Br2 = 6 NH4Br + N 2 .
Evaporate the solution on the water bath, and if desired powder the residue
and dry it in the steam closet. The salt may be purified by recrystallization.
Dissolve it in its own weight of boiling water, cool the solution with ice, and add
an equal volume of alcohol; recover the rest of the salt from the mother-liquor
by evaporating and crystallizing in a similar manner.
 108 LAW OF DISTRIBUTION.
follows: First dissolve a sample of about 0.25 g. in a solution
of potassium iodide and titrate with 0.1-normal thiosulphate;
second, expose about 0.25 g. to the air in a moderately warm
place until it has become colorless, and weigh the residue of
ammonium bromide which is left.
On dissolving the tribromide in water, free bromine separates
in considerable quantity and one molecule of Br2 can be com-
pletely removed by shaking the solution with carbon bisulphide,
or chloroform.

70. Law of Distribution; Proof of the Existence of Potassium

Tribromide and Potassium Tri-iodide.
A. Law of Distribution.
If to two non-miscible solvents standing in contact with one another, a third
substance is added which is soluble in both, the ratio of the concentration1
of this substance in the two solvents after equilibrium has been established,
i.e., the distribution coefficient, will be constant for a given temperature pro-
vided the solute has the same molecular weight in both solutions:

If the dissolved substance exists in one of the two solvents in a disso-

ciated or associated condition, the distribution law holds only for the same
sort of molecular aggregate in both solvents. This fact finds expression in
c n2
the formula in such a way that now the ratio -!— remains constant if n t
and n2 are the number of simple molecules associating to give the prevalent
form of molecules in the respective solutions.
I. Dissolve about 4 g. of succinic acid in 200 c.c. of water,
shake the solution with 50 c.c. of ether in a 500 c.c. separatory
funnel, allow the two liquids to separate, and titrate 10 c.c. from
both layers with 0.1-normal sodium hydroxide, using phenolphtha-
lein as an indicator. To what is left in the separatory funnel add
about 100 c.c. of water and some ether, shake thoroughly again,
and titrate portions of 20 c.c. each from both layers. Again add
50 c.c. of water and half as much ether, and determine the concen-
trations in 20 c.c. portions. Finally add 100 c.c. of water and
this time titrate 40 c.c. portions. The four distribution coefficients
1
Concentration = the amount of substance contained in a unit of volume,
TO
 POTASSIUM TRIBROMIDE. 109

calculated from the data obtained should be practically equal.

Succinic acid is about six times as soluble in water as in ether.
II. Dissolve 10 g. of benzoic acid in a mixture of 100 g. of
water and 100 g. of benzene; shake a little longer after it is all
dissolved until the distribution equilibrium is reached, and titrate
10 c.c. from each layer. Add 50 c.c. of water and again shake
vigorously, repeating this several times in succession and titrating
both layers after each addition. Nearly constant values are
obtained in this experiment if the square of the solubility in water
is divided each time by the solubility in benzene; the molecular
weight of benzoic acid dissolved in benzene is nearly twice as large
as in water.

B. Proof of the Existence of Potassium Tribromide in Aqueous

Solution.
Bromine dissolves more freely in a potassium bromide solution than in
water, this being due to the formation of the potassium salt of the complex
brom-hydrobromie acid, K [BrBr^]. The salt has never been obtained in a
solid form suitable for analysis; but its composition can be derived, with
the aid of the mass-action law and the law of distribution, by finding which
of the assumptions, x — 2, x = 4, etc., leads to conclusions agreeing with
the facts found experimentally. Calculating first on the basis of the com-
plex ion Br3~ (i.e., x — 2), this ion would be partially broken down in solution
into simple bromine ions and free bromine:
Br3~ <=i Br~ + Br2.
For the state of equilibrium, the mass-action law gives:
[Br~] [Br2] fc

[Br,-]
The three concentrations which are in equilibrium according to the above
equation may be determined by preparing a concentrated solution of bro-
mine in carbon bisulphide and shaking one portion of it with water, and a
second portion with a potassium bromide solution of known molecular con-
centration,1 A. In each experiment the molecular quantities of bromine,
D and B, which pass into the aqueous layer are determined; the excess of
bromine in the second case is equal to that combined in the complex: thus,
[Br3-] = B - D.
Furthermore, [BrJ = D; according to the distribution law, the amount
of free bromine existing in the potassium bromide solution, as well as that
1
The molecular concentration is the amount of substance dissolved in
one liter divided by its molecular weight.
110 LAW OF DISTRIBUTION.

existing in the pure water, is determined solely by the concentration of

bromine in the carbon bisulphide layer.
Finally, [Br~] = A — (B — D), i.e., the equilibrium concentration of
bromine ions is equal to the difference between the original concentration
of the bromine ions and that of the part which forms the complex. By
inserting these values in the mass-action equation, we obtain:
D[A - (B - D)]
=K
B~^D -
Mix one volume of bromine with four volumes of carbon bisul-
phide and add 5 c.c. of the mixture to each of six 50 c.c. glass-
stoppered bottles; add about 20 c.c. of water to each of two of
the bottles, and to the other four add equal volumes of potassium
bromide solution of the following normal concentrations:
A = 1/1; 1/2; 1/4; 1/8.
Establish equilibrium between the layers by shaking vigorously
for a long time; place the bottles in water at room temperature,
and give them an occasional lateral motion in order to make the
drops of carbon bisulphide solution floating on the surface sink.
After about an hour, when the aqueous layer has become entirely
clear, pipette off 10 c.c. from each bottle, and after adding potas-
sium iodide, titrate with 0.1-normal thiosulphate to disappear-
ance of color. In this way the concentrations B and D are
obtained. Substitute these values, as well as the corresponding
values of A, in the mass-law equation and see whether K remains
constant throughout the experiment. If this is the case, it proves
the existence of the compound KBr3. It is a good plan to make
the assumption, by way of a check, that more than one molecule
of bromine combines with the potassium bromide in the formation
of the complex, to substitute the values in the corresponding
mass-law equation, and to compare the values of K thus obtained.
C. Proof of the Existence of Potassium Tri-iodide in Aqueous
Solution. The method of proof is the same here as in the above
case. Place a few grams of finely powdered iodine in each of
seven bottles, and add 250 c.c. of water to the first, 250 c.c. of
T J 5 normal KI to the second, 250 c.c. of ^ normal KI to the
third, 150 c.c. of ^ normal KI to the fourth, 150 c.c. of ^ normal
KI to the fifth, 75 c.c. of J normal KI to the sixth, and 75 c.c. of
J normal KI to the seventh. The concentration of these solutions
must be accurately known, but the amount taken need only be
 SODIUM HYDRAZOATE. Ill

roughly measured. Shake the seven bottles in a shaking-machine

for about ten hours at as constant a temperature as possible. Let
settle, and titrate 100 c.c. of the clear solution from each of bottles
1, 2, and 3, with thiosulphate; 50 c.c. each from bottles 4 and 5;
25 c.c. from bottle 6; and 20 c.c. from bottle 7. From these
results the molecular concentrations of iodine, D and B, are
obtained; the value of A is the original concentration of the
potassium iodide solution used. If these values are introduced
in the above mass-law equation, a constant value for K should be
obtained, which at 20° is about 0.0013.
Experiments with more concentrated potassium iodide solutions
show an increase in the values of the constant; this indicates the
presence of higher poly-iodides.
71. Rubidium Iodine Tetrachloride, Rb[ICl4]; Potassium Iodine
Tetracbloride, K[IC14]; Rubidium Tri-iodide, Rbl3.
Dissolve 2.5 g. of rubidium chloride in 7.5 c.c. of water and sus-
pend 2.7 g. of iodine in the solution. On passing chlorine into this
mixture large, beautiful, orange-red crystals of rubidium iodine
tetrachloride are obtained. The iodine dissolves during the action
with a slight liberation of heat, and later the new salt separates in
large plates which increase in quantity after several hours standing
in the ice-chest. Drain the crystals without washing and allow
them to dry for an hour in a vacuum desiccator over sulphuric
acid. Too long drying causes decomposition. Yield about 5 g.
A corresponding potassium iodine tetrachloride is formed by
triturating 1 g. of potassium iodate with a little concentrated
hydrochloric acid in a mortar. Chlorine is liberated as the iodine
of the iodate is reduced. Continue the trituration, adding small
portions of concentrated hydrochloric acid from time to time, until
finally there is no further evolution of chlorine. This requires
about 5 c.c. of acid. A paste of dull-yellow' crystalline needles
remains. Filter, drain with suction and wash with a little concen-
trated hydrochloric acid. On standing, the salt slowly decomposes.
The behavior of this salt with ether, which dissolves out iodine
trichloride and leaves behind white potassium chloride, would
indicate that it may have the constitution K[C1 • IC13].
Rubidium Tri-iodide, Rbl3, is obtained by crystallization from
a warm solution of iodine in rubidium iodide. Neutralize a
112 POLYNITRIDES.
solution of 2.5 g. of rubidium hydroxide in 3 g. of water with
concentrated hydriodic acid, add 6.2 g. of iodine, and heat until
solution is complete. On cooling, the salt separates in crystals
resembling iodine. Treat them as in the preceding preparation.

(d) Polynitrides.
72. Sodium Hydrazoate NaN,,, from Sodamide NaNH2.
Sodamide reacts with nitrous oxide to form sodium hydrazoate, the salt
of hydrazoic acid, HN 3 ; from an aqueous solution of sodium hydrazoate,
silver nitrate precipitates the difficultly soluble silver salt, a substance which
like, the pure hydrazoic aeid is extremely explosive. Hydrazoic acid, or
azoimide, was discovered by Curtius in 1890; the method of preparation given
below was devised by W. Wislicenus, in 1892. The relationship between
hydrazoic acid, iodo-hydriodic and brom-hydrobromic acids was pointed out
by Hantzsch in 1895, as well as by others.
Sodamide. Place an aluminium boat containing about 3 g. of
sodium (cf. Sodium Peroxide, No. 65) in a combustion tube;
support the tube on a row burner and heat the sodium to 300-400°
in a current of dry ammonia. Generate this gas by heating
100 c.c. of concentrated ammonia solution and dry it by passing
through a tube containing soda-lime. Hydrogen escapes from
the end of the combustion tube together with the excess of am-
monia, and the mixture can be made to burn. Sodamide must
be preserved in a well-stoppered bottle.
Sodium Hydrazoate. Place a porcelain boat containing 0.5 g.
sodamide in a combustion tube which is inclosed in an asbestos
chamber (Fig. 4, p. 3). Prepare nitrous oxide by heating 10 g. of
ammonium nitrate in a small flask; dry the gas by passing it
through a calcium chloride tube, and conduct it over the sodamide.
Then heat the combustion tube to 250° until the reaction is finished,
after which moist litmus paper is no longer turned blue by the
escaping gases.
NaNH2 + N2O = NaN3 + H2O,
NaNH2 + H2O = NaOH + NH3.
Silver Hydrazoate. Dissolve the sodium hydrazoate in 10 c.c. of
water; a portion of the solution, when treated with a little ferric
chloride, gives a deep brownish-red color. Acidify another and
very small portion of the solution with nitric acid, add silver
nitrate, collect the precipitate on a filter, wash it with water,
alcohol and then ether, and while the filter is still moist with ether,
 POTASSIUM CYAN ATE. 113

tear it into several small pieces. After drying in the air the
small amounts of the preparation adhering to the bits of paper will
explode violently when heated or struck. It is very dangerous to
prepare any larger amount of silver hydrazoate than that indicated.
Another simple method for obtaining silver hydrazoate is given
by Sabanejeff. Heat gently 1.5 g. of hydrazine sulphate (No. 122)
with 4 c.c. of nitric acid, d. 1.3, in a test-tube which isprovided
with a gas exit tube bent at right angles. Pass the escaping gas
into a little silver nitrate solution in a second test-tube; silver
hydrazoate is obtained in the form of a white, curdy precipitate.
Filter and test the salt as before, but do not preserve it.

OXYACIDS AND THEIR SALTS.

(a) Cyanates.
73. Potassium Cyanate; Urea from Ammonium Cyanate.
The cyanates, i.e. the salts of cyanic acid, are produced by the addition
of oxygen to the cyanides:
KCN + O - KCNO.
With regard to the constitution of cyanic acid there are two possible for-
mulas:
I. C* II. C
^O ^OH
but which of these correctly shows the structure of the free acid and of its
salts has not been definitely determined; it is quite possible that both forms
exist iii the presence of one another.
Similarly two possible formulas may be written for hypochlorous acid:

I. C1^H II. Cl
%
O \ 0 H
but the second is undoubtedly the correct one for free hypochlorous acid in
aqueous solution.
The potassium cyanide required for the production of the cyanate is formed,
together with some cyanate, by heating potassium ferrocyanide with an alkali:
K4[Fe(CN)6] + K2O = Fe + KCNO + 5 KCN.
In the presence of an oxidizing agent (CrO3) the cyanide is oxidized to cyanate.
Dehydrate 130 g. of coarsely broken potassium ferrocyanide by
stirring it in a shallow iron dish over a rather low Fletcher burner
flame. When no more dark yellow particles can be detected in
the lumps, grind the mass to a fine powder and remove the last
traces of moisture by reheating. While still warm, triturate 100 g.
114 OXY-HALOGEN ACIDS.
of the powder thus obtained with 75 g. of potassium dichromate
which has been dried by being melted. Heat the mixture in the
iron dish already used, whereupon the reaction will begin in spots
and spread with incandescence throughout the mass. Pulverize
the loose black product while still warm, cover it in a flask with a
warm mixture of 450 c.c. 80% ethyl alcohol and 50 c.c. of methyl
alcohol and boil it with a return condenser on the water bath for
two minutes. Decant the hot solution through a plaited filter into
a beaker, which is cooled with ice, and allow the salt to crystallize
while stirring. Using the mother-liquor from this crystallization
as a solvent, extract the black mass again in the same manner as
before; filter, and repeat the extraction three or four times.
Collect all of the cyanate crystals on the same suction filter, and
after washing with ether, dry them in a vacuum desiccator over
sulphuric acid. Yield, 30-40 grams. The product may be used
in the preparation of urea, or of semicarbazid, No. 123.
Urea from Ammonium Cyanate.
Ammonium cyanate when heated in aqueous solution undergoes a trans-
formation into urea (Wohler, 1828).
NH4CNO = CO(NH2)2.
To carry out this classic reaction, evaporate a solution of 8.1 g.
potassium cyanate and 8.0 g. ammonium nitrate to dryness on the
water bath. Boil the powdered residue in a flask twice with alco-
hol, and concentrate the extract until a crystallization in fine, long
needles is obtained. Yield, about 5 g.
Heat a pinch of dry urea in a test-tube until it just melts, and
keep it at this temperature for about a minute; ammonia escapes.
Dissolve the residue in a little water and add a drop of copper sul-
phate solution and some sodium hydroxide, whereupon a rose-
violet coloration appears; this is the so-called biuret reaction.

(6) Oxy-halogen Acids.

74. Electrolytic Production of Sodium Hypochlorite and Potassium
Chlorate.
Sodium hydroxide and chlorine react in cold, aqueous solution, forming
sodium hypochlorite, sodium chloride and water.
2 NaOH + Cl2 = NaCl + NaCIO + H2O.
As soon as chlorine is present in excess, it reacts to produce free hypochlo-
rous acid,
HOH + Cls = HOC1 + HC1;
 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE. 115

and the latter being a much stronger oxidizing agent than sodium hypochlo-
rite, or the hypochlorite ion, it oxidizes chlorite and hypochlorite ions into
chorate ions:
2 HC10 + CIO" = C1O3- + 2 HC1,
3 HC10 + Cl- = C1O3- + 3 HC1.
Heating accelerates these reactions.
The raw materials necessary for these experiments can be prepared more
conveniently by the electrolysis of alkali chloride solution than by purely
chemical means. At the anode, chlorine is the primary product; sodium is
the primary product at the cathode, but it immediately decomposes water
to give sodium hydroxide and hydrogen. The products formed at the elec-
trodes react together in the manner shown above when they are allowed to
mix by diffusion.
The process as outlined above is, however, interfered with somewhat by
the progress of certain secondary reactions. First, the hydrogen produced
at the cathode reduces the hypochlorite, and to some extent the chlorate,
to chloride. Since only the discharged hydrogen atoms, which have not
yet combined to form molecules, cause the reduction, it is advantageous
to restrict the formation of hydrogen to as small an area as possible; by
this means the formation and escape of gaseous hydrogen is favored. In
other words, the current density at the cathode must be kept high. To
further avoid cathodic reduction, the deposition of a thin skin — a "dia-
phragm" — of hydrated chromic oxide on the metal of the cathode works
excellently; this can be most simply accomplished by the electrolytic reduc-
tion of a little alkali chromate which is added to the electrolyte.
Second, the C1O~ and C1O3~ ions, that are formed in the process, carry a
part of the current, and when they become discharged at the anode, they
then react with water to form the free acids and oxygen. The current which
serves to discharge these ions is, therefore, wasted. The loss can be lessened
by using a high anodic current density.
Both of these secondary reactions become more pronounced as the elec-
trolysis progresses, i.e., as the concentration of the chlorate or the hypochlo-
rate becomes greater. This explains why the yield for a given amount of
current gradually grows less with a long-continued electrolysis.
Sodium Hypochlorite. A. The arrangement of the electrical
connections, the external resistance, and the measuring instru-
ments is that described in No. 14 (cf. Fig. 9). Place the beaker
containing the electrolyte, which is a solution of 88 g. of sodium
chloride in 500 c.c. of water (3-normal), inside a larger beaker
containing ice water. For electrodes use two sheets of platinum
of known area, e.g., 30 sq, cm. The anode reaches only into the
upper part of the solution, the cathode nearly to the bottom with
the attached wire insulated by being passed through a glass tube.
The hydrogen bubbles rising from the cathode cause stirring. The
116 OXY-HALOGEN ACIDS.
current density should be the same at the anode as at the cathode
and about 15 amperes per 100 sq. cm. of electrode surface (con-
sidering only one side of the electrodes, since it is chiefly between
the inside surfaces that the current passes). The current strength
holds fairly constant and does not need to be regulated much by
changing the resistance. The minimum potential necessary for
the electrolysis of a normal sodium chloride solution is 2.3 volts,
but for obtaining the desired current density at least 6 volts will
be required. The temperature of the electrolyte should not be
allowed to exceed 20°. Follow the extent of the hypochlorite
formation by an analysis every 10 to 20 minutes. For this pur-
pose, remove 15 c.c. of the electrolyte with a pipette, let it stand in
a beaker a short time until the gas bubbles have escaped, and then
pipette 10 c.c. of it into a solution of potassium iodide which is
slightly acid with hydrochloric acid. Titrate the iodine set free
with 0.1-normal thiosulphate solution, and from the amount
required calculate the entire amount of hypochlorite present in
the whole solution. To determine the current yield,1 find the total
number of ampere-seconds used at the time of taking the samples,
then calculate from this the theoretical yield, on the basis that
96,540 amperes flowing for one second would set free one equivalent
each of sodium and of chlorine and thus produce one-half mol. of
NaClO. The observed data and the calculated values can be
arranged advantageously in a table as follows:

Time Theoretical Actual

Volume Temper- Current
in Min- Amperes. Yield in Ha2S2O3 Yield in
in c.c. ature. Yield.
utes. Grams. Used. Grams.

0 500 10 6. 0 0 0 0
10 500 11 6.6
20 500 13 6.3 2.91 12.6 2.34 80.4%
40 485 18 6.2 2.89 ' 19.8 1.30 45.0%

Continue the electrolysis until the current yield falls below

30%, which may take about an hour, and calculate, from the last
titration showing a yield better than 30%, the number of grams
of "active" chlorine in a liter of the solution (7 to 9 g.).
B. Repeat the above experiment, using again 500 c.c. of
3-normal sodium chloride as the electrolyte, but adding to it 2.5 g.
1
Compare the data in No. 14.
 POTASSIUM CHLORATE. 117

of neutral sodium chromate. Before titrating with sodium thio-

sulphate, acidify strongly and dilute well, in order that the color
of the chromate may not interfere with the end-point. From the
total volume of thiosulphate used deduct the amount which
corresponds to the iodine set free by the chromate. The current
yield is now much better, on account of the addition of the chro-
mate, and remains above 30% for a longer time; the total yield of
"active" chlorine, computed as above, now amounts to from
14 to 16 g. per liter.
C. If experiment A is repeated without cooling the solution,
the current yield falls very rapidly to below 30%, and the quantity
of active chlorine produced before this point is reached amounts
to only about 5 or 6 g. per liter.
Test qualitatively the bleaching action of the hypochlorite
solutions obtained by adding a little to some indigo solution.
Potassium Chlorate. As electrolyte use a solution containing
100 g. of potassium chloride and 1 g. of potassium pyrochromate
in 250 c.c. of water. Use a 600 c.c. beaker for the electrolyzing
vessel, and cover it with the two halves of a divided watch glass.
The electrodes should be, as before, of sheet platinum. Maintain
at the anode a current density of 20 amperes per 100 sq. cm. and
at the cathode a higher density. Keep the temperature at 40-60°,
using a small flame if necessary to add to the heating effect of the
current. A source of current at from 6 to 10 volts will suffice to
maintain the necessary potential. Pass a slow stream of carbon
dioxide continuously into the solution between the electrodes. To
obtain a good yield, about 60 ampere-hours are required; thus for
an anode surface (one side) of 25 sq. cm. the experiment must be
continued 14 hours. If necessary it is permissible to interrupt the
electrolysis. Occasionally replace the water lost by evaporation.
A little potassium chlorate crystallizes out during the electroly-
sis, but the main part is obtained after cooling; drain the crystals
with suction and wash with a little cold water. To determine the
entire yield of chlorate, dilute the mother-liquor to 500 c.c. and
titrate a part of it with ferrous sulphate: boil 10 c.c. of the solution
in a flask in order to drive out the free chlorine, replace the air by
means of carbon dioxide, and after cooling add 50-70 c.c. of a
0.1-normal ferrous ammonium sulphate solution acidified with
sulphuric acid. Close the flask with a Bunsen valve and boil the
solution ten minutes. After cooling, dilute the liquid to twice its
118 OXY-HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.
volume, add 20 c.c. of a 20% manganous sulphate solution to pre-
vent the hydrochloric acid from interfering with the titration, and
titrate in the cold with 0.1-normal potassium permanganate. A
slight correction can be applied to allow for the chromate present.
Determine in a similar manner the percentage of KC103 in the
crystals obtained; then calculate the entire quantity of potassium
chlorate and the current yield. It is to be remembered that
according to the equation for its formation, 96,540 ampere-seconds
yield but 1/6 of a mol. of KCIO3. The current yield amounts to
about 70%, and about 85% of all the chlorate is obtained in the
crystals. A further loss occurs when the crude, solid product is
purified by recrystallization from hot water. The yield of puri-
fied chlorate actually obtained in an experiment carried out
according to the above directions was 23 g.
The chlorate dissociates into a potassium ion and a chlorate ion.
Test the purity of the preparation by dissolving a little in water,
acidifying with nitric acid and adding silver nitrate; there should
be no precipitate of silver chloride.
To illustrate the decomposition of chlorates by heat, melt a little
of the preparation in a test-tube and test for oxygen with a glowing
splinter (see the next preparation).
75. Potassium Percblorate.
Potassium chlorate on being heated to about 400° decomposes in two
different ways:
1. 4 KCIO3 = KC1 + 3 KCIO4.
2. KCIO3 = KC1 + 3 0.
If the vessel is clean and the potassium chlorate pure, the decomposition
proceeds essentially according to equation 1. If, on the other hand, cataly-
zers are present, such as manganese dioxide or ferric oxide, or if it is heated
to a higher temperature, then the reaction takes place principally according
to equation 2. It is on this account that a mixture of manganese dioxide
with potassium chlorate is used, rather than the pure chlorate, in preparing
oxygen.
Heat 50 g. of potassium chlorate in a new 100 c.c. porcelain cru-
cible until the salt just melts. Without increasing the heat keep
the temperature as uniform as possible, so that oxygen barely
escapes while the melt gradually becomes more viscous and pasty.
If at the end of 10 or 15 minutes the mass has become uniformly
semi-solid, allow it to cool, then cover it with 50 c.c. of cold water
and allow it to stand until fully disintegrated. Collect the undis-
 IODIC ACID. 119
solved potassium perchlorate on a filter and recrystallize it from
200 c.c. of water. Yield, 30 g. The potassium chloride passes
into the filtrates.1
Potassium perchlorate, like the chlorate, yields no precipitate
with silver ions.
Heat in a dry test-tube a mixture of potassium chlorate and one-
sixth of its weight of manganese dioxide, and test the oxygen
evolved with a glowing splinter. Observe that the evolution of
oxygen takes place at a lower temperature than when pure potas-
sium chlorate is used. Extract the residue with water, and filter;
potassium chloride is in the filtrate, as may be shown with silver
nitrate.
Free perchloric acid is not explosive. Potassium perchlorate
when covered with concentrated sulphuric acid remains unchanged
in the cold and does not explode on gentle heating; potassium
chlorate, on the other hand, yields explosive chlorine dioxide even
in the cold. Pure perchloric acid, or a perchlorate mixed with
concentrated sulphuric acid, must be handled with caution, since
if it comes in contact with any oxidizable matter when warm
it explodes with great violence.
76. Iodic Acid and Iodic Anhydride; a "Time Reaction."
Seal a 0.5-1.0 meter long glass extension tube to the neck of a
round-bottomed flask, and boil 32 g. of iodine with 130 g. of con-
centrated, colorless nitric acid in the flask, using a ring burner to
avoid bumping. Remove the lower oxides of nitrogen, as fast as
they are formed, by means of a current of carbon dioxide, or of air.
After the oxidation is complete and the solution has cooled, collect
the solid iodic acid on an asbestos filter and separate it from the
asbestos fibers by dissolving in the least quantity possible of hot
water and filtering. Allow the iodic acid, HIO3, to crystallize,
after concentrating somewhat if necessary, by letting the solution
stand in a vacuum desiccator over sulphuric acid. Evaporate the
mother-liquor and dehydrate the residue at 200°. Iodic anhy-
dride, I2O5, is thus obtained.
Heat a sample of the iodine pentoxide in a test-tube; it is broken
down into iodine and oxygen, as is shown by the violet vapors and
by the test with a glowing splinter.
1
At the room temperature about 36 g. KC1, 6.6 g. KC1O3, and 1.5 g. KCIO4
are soluble in 100 c.c. of water.
120 OXY-HALOGEN COMPOUNDS.

" Time Reaction."

If a solution of iodic acid is added drop by drop to an aqueous solution of
sodium sulphite acidified with sulphuric acid, the solution at first remains
colorless:
3 H2SO3 + HIO 3 = 3 H2SO4 + HI.
When, with further addition of iodic acid, all the sulphurous acid becomes oxi-
dized, the reduction then continues at the expense of the hydriodic acid
which has been formed:
HIO 3 + 5 HI = 3 H2O + 3 I2.
Thus if an acidified sulphite solution is treated with more than one-third of a
mol. of iodic acid, a separation of iodine occurs; if the solution is concen-
trated this takes place immediately; if dilute, only after some time, and then
suddenly and completely.
This very remarkable retardation reminds one of the phenomena of super-
cooling, superheating, and supersaturation, but it is different inasmuch as the
reaction takes place in a homogeneous medium, and is not followed by a
separation of material in another state of aggregation.
Prepare one solution by dissolving 1.8 g. of iodic acid, or an
equivalent amount of potassium iodate, in water and diluting to
one liter; prepare a second solution with 0.9 g. of Na2SO3 • 7 H2O,
5 g. of 10% sulphuric acid, and 9.5 g. of starch (the latter should
first be suspended in a little cold water and then stirred into a
beaker of boiling water to form a paste),' and dilute this likewise
to one liter. Measure 100 c.c. of each solution into separate
beakers, mix these two portions at a definite instant, and count
the seconds until a deep blue color suddenly appears. Check
this result by repeating the experiment. Then dilute each of the
solutions to i, 1,1, and £ of their former concentrations, and deter-
mine for each dilution the time which elapses before the blue color
appears. Plot graphically the dependence of the time on the dilu-
tion. The results are reproducible and comparable only when the
temperature of the solutions does not vary appreciably.

77. Potassium Iodate from Potassium Chlorate.

2 KCIO3 + I2 = 2 KIO3 + Cl2.
Place 30 g. of potassium chlorate in a 200 c.c. flask and dissolve
it in 60 c.c. of warm water. Add 35 g. of iodine to the solution,
and while maintaining the mixture at a moderate temperature
introduce 1 to 2 c.c. of concentrated nitric acid. (Hood.) After
one or two minutes a vigorous reaction begins and a stream of
chlorine escapes, carrying with it a little iodine. When the re-
action moderates, boil to drive off the chlorine, and, when this is
 POTASSIUM BROMATE. 121

nearly accomplished, add 1 g. more of iodine. Concentrate by

evaporation until on cooling nearly all of the potassium iodate
crystallizes; collect the product on a filter, and recover what is left
in the mother-liquor by evaporation.
Dissolve the crude product, which always contains some acid
salt, in 150 c.c. of hot water, and neutralize exactly with potassium
hydroxide. On cooling a good yield of the pure salt is obtained.
Ignite a little of the product in a porcelain crucible, and test the
residue for chloride by distilling it with potassium bichromate and
concentrated sulphuric acid, and passing the vapors into ammonia
water.
78. Potassium Bromate and Potassium Bromide.
To a solution of 62 g. potassium hydroxide in 62 g. of water,
add 80 g. of bromine drop by drop while cooling by means of tap
water. (Hood.) The solution soon becomes colored a permanent
yellow, and later a crystalline powder of potassium bromate sepa-
rates; after cooling completely, collect the bromate on a filter and
purify it by recrystallization from 130 c.c. of boiling water. Com-
bine all the mother-liquors and evaporate them to a semi-solid
mass; mix this thoroughly with 5 g. of powdered wood-charcoal,
dry it completely and then heat it to redness for an hour in a large
porcelain crucible surrounded by an asbestos or sheet-iron funnel.
Treat the sintered mass with 120 c.c. of hot water, and then
wash the residue with 20 c.c. more of water; evaporate the filtered
solution to crystallization. The yield is 26 to 27 g. of KBrO3 and
90 to 95 g. of KBr.
The addition of acid to the aqueous solution of either one of
these salts should not produce a yellow coloration, due to the
separation of free bromine.
(c) Nitrites and Nitrates.
79. Sodium Nitrite from Sodium Nitrate.
Sodium nitrate, when melted with a reducing agent such as lead, loses
one-third of its oxygen and goes over into the nitrite.
In the absence of reducing agents sodium nitrate can be melted without
decomposition; at higher temperatures, however, a dissociation, although
incomplete, takes place according to the equation:
NaNO3 = NaNO2 + O.
From the above facts the conclusion may be drawn that this dissociation of
sodium nitrate takes place even at more moderate temperatures, although
to so small extent that it can be proved only indirectly. The reducing agent
122 NITRITES AND NITRATES.

by removing oxygen, one of the products of the dissociation, causes the

decomposition to continue until it has become of appreciable magnitude.
This is a good example of a non-electrolytic dissociation which though actually
insignificant can be made apparent by the use of a reagent.
Sodium nitrite is the most important technically of all the salts of nitrous
acid. It is used principally for diazot!zing in the manufacture of azo-dyes.
Heat 85 g. of sodium nitrate in an iron dish, of 15 cm. diameter,
until it melts, and add 207 g. of lead a little at a time while stirring
with an iron spatula. Continue the heating until all the lead is
oxidized, which may take half an hour, and then while cooling
keep stirring in order to obtain the mass in small loose lumps.
Extract the product first with 300 c.c. of hot water and then twice
more with 100 c.c. To precipitate the lead which has gone into
the solution as plumbite, pass in carbon dioxide for a few minutes.
Filter and neutralize the filtrate cautiously with a very little dilute
nitric acid. Evaporate to a small volume to obtain crystals, collect
these on a suction-filter, wash with alcohol, and evaporate the
mother-liquor to obtain more crystals. Yield, 40-50 g.
The lead oxide can be again converted into lead by reduction
with charcoal (No. 1).
80. Potassium Nitrate from Sodium Nitrate.
If a mixture of sodium nitrate and potassium chloride is boiled with a
quantity of water insufficient for complete solution, the undissolved residue
will be sodium chloride, which is the least soluble in hot water of the four
possible salts:
NaNO 3 + KC1 ?± KN0 3 + NaCl.
If the filtrate is cooled, potassium nitrate will crystallize, since this is the
least soluble at the room temperature.
GKAMS OF SALT SOLUBLE IN 100 GRAMS OF WATER.

At 10°. At ioo°.

Potassium nitrate 21 246

Sodium chloride 36 40
Potassium chloride 31 56
Sodium nitrate 81 180

Thus the interaction of the salts used depends entirely upon the solu-
bility relations.
This method has had an important application in the manufacture of
potassium nitrate for the gunpowder industry.
 SILVER NITRATE. 123
Dissolve 190 g. of crude Chile saltpeter in 200 c.c. of boiling
water in a previously weighed flask. To the boiling solution
add 150 g. of powdered potassium chloride and boil for half an
hour longer, replacing any water lost by evaporation. The con-
tents of the flask should at the end weigh 520 to 540 g. While still
hot, filter rapidly through a Biichner funnel and rinse the residue
with a test-tubeful of hot water. Cool the filtrate rapidly while
shaking, whereby a crystalline meal of potassium nitrate is formed.
Evaporate the mother-liquor; remove the sodium chloride by
filtering while hot; and cool the1 filtrate rapidly to obtain more
potassium nitrate. If sufficient mother-liquor still remains, work
it up in the same manner to obtain a further yield. Unite all of
the crystals of potassium nitrate and purify them by recrystalliza-
tion until they are free from chloride. The yield is from 60 to
70% of the calculated.
81. Silver Nitrate.
The nitrates of the alkali metals break down into nitrites when heated;
those of all the other metals dissociate into metallic oxide and nitric anhy-
dride or its decomposition products:
Cu(NO3)2 = CuO + N2O4 + O.
This dissociation begins to take place at very different temperatures with
the various metals. Silver nitrate can be melted without decomposition,
while, at the same temperature, the nitrates of metals with a higher valence,
for example, copper nitrate, are decomposed; thus by melting a mixture of
these two nitrates and dissolving the fusion, silver nitrate can be obtained
free from copper.
By carefully regulating the temperature and repeating the process, mix-
tures of very closely related nitrates can be separated; the "nitrate method"
for separating the metals of the rare-earths depends upon this principle.
A completely analogous behavior is shown by the sulphates, as in the
Ziervogel process for obtaining silver from argentiferous pyrite. By roasting,
the sulphates of the metals are first formed, all of which, however, with the
exception of silver sulphate, decompose at a somewhat higher temperature
into metal oxide and sulphur trioxide; by leaching, the silver is obtained in
the solution.
Dissolve a silver coin in 30% nitric acid, evaporate the solution
to dryness, and transfer the residue to a porcelain crucible. Place
this crucible upon a wire triangle inside a larger crucible, and
gradually heat the outer crucible to a dull red heat. When the
decomposition is completed, extract the black residue with water,
concentrate the filtrate and test it for copper. Should any copper
124 NITRITE AND NITRATES.
be present, which will frequently be the case, evaporate the solu-
tion to dryness and heat the silver nitrate carefully until it just
begins to melt. In this way the remainder of the copper nitrate
is decomposed. Repeat the extraction with water.
The copper oxide residues should contain very little silver.
83. Bismuth Nitrate and Basic Bismuth Nitrate.
Bismuth nitrate may be obtained from the solution of the metal in nitric
acid in the form of large, colorless crystals with 5 molecules of water. The
salt is strongly hydrolyzed by water, and, according to the temperature and
the concentration of the acid, basic salts of various compositions are pro-
duced.1 The following directions yield a precipitate of approximately the
composition, 4 Bi2O3 • 3 N2O6 • 9 H2O, which is not, however, to be regarded as
a homogeneous compound. This is the so-called bismuth subnitrate so much
used in medicine and often called bismuth by physicians.
Dissolve 100 g. of coarsely pulverized bismuth by heating it in
a flask with 500 g. of nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.2). Filter through a
hardened filter, using suction, and evaporate in a porcelain dish
until crystallization begins. Collect the crystals on a suction-
filter, wash with a little nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.2) and dry in a desic-
cator. Evaporate the mother-liquor to obtain more crystals.
To prepare the above mentioned basic salt, triturate one part of
the bismuth nitrate with four parts of water and stir this mixture
into 21 parts of boiling water. Allow the precipitate to settle,
wash by decantation, collect on a suction-filter and dry the prepa-
ration at a temperature not exceeding 30°.
(d) Manganates and Ferrates.
83. Potassium Permanganate by the Fusion Method.
By fusing manganese compounds in an oxidizing-alkaline flux a man-
ganate is formed, and this, when it is dissolved in water and the free alkali
is neutralized, changes into permanganate and manganese dioxide:
MnO2 + K2CO3 + O = CO2 + K 2 Mn0i,
3 K 2 Mn0 4 + 2 H2O = MnO2 + 4 KOH + 2 KMnO4.
Melt together 80 g. of potassium hydroxide and 40 g. of potas-
sium chlorate in a sheet iron crucible 6 to 8 cm. in diameter.
Remove the flame and while stirring with an iron spatula (a heavy
wire or an old file), add 80 g. of finely powdered pyrolusite, quite
rapidly but not all at once. The fusion effervesces somewhat.
1
Cf. A. Findlay: The Phase Rule.
 ELECTROLYTIC PREPARATION. 125

Heat again, at first moderately then more strongly, and stir

vigorously all the while until the mass has become dry. Finally
heat for 5 minutes at a dull red heat. Unless stirred as directed,
the melt will solidify to a hard cake which can be removed from
the crucible only with difficulty. When it is cold, break up the
mass and boil it with 1.5 liters of water while conducting a vigorous
stream of carbon dioxide into the liquid. When the manganate
is completely decomposed and a drop of the solution gives a clear,
violet-red spot on filter paper, with no trace of green, allow the
precipitate to settle, and decant the liquid as carefully as possible
from the sludge of manganese dioxide. Filter with suction
through a felt of asbestos on a Biichner funnel. Concentrate the
filtrate to one-half, filter again through asbestos, and evaporate
until crystallization begins. Collect the crystals on a porcelain
filter-plate and wash with a little cold water. Obtain a second
crop of crystals from the mother-liquor and examine with a micro-
scope to see if it is free from crystals of potassium chloride.
Finally recrystallize. The yield should be 50 to 60 g. of the pure
salt. The yield can be improved somewhat by using chlorine
instead of carbon dioxide.
84. Electrolytic Preparation of Potassium Permanganate.
If a solution of an alkali hydroxide, or better of an alkali carbonate, is
clectrolyzed with an anode of manganese, permanganate is formed by anodic
oxidation. For the reaction to succeed it must be carried out at a rather
high temperature, since otherwise only manganate is formed. For the cathode,
nickel or iron wires may be used, but they must be surrounded with a porous
clay diaphragm to avoid reduction of the permanganate.
Place a porous cup, 10 cm. high and 4 cm. wide, in a liter beaker,
and inside the cup place an iron wire to serve as the cathode.
For the anode use a good sized lump of manganese (obtained by
the Goldschmidt process; cf. No. 2); fasten it by means of a
fine platinum wire to a stout iron wire and allow only the man-
ganese to dip into the liquid. Use as the electrolyte 200 c.c. of
a solution of potassium carbonate saturated at 0° (solubility:
105 g. of K2CO3 in 100 g. of water) which should stand at the same
level inside and outside the porous cell. In order to effect a rapid
electrolysis it will probably be necessary, on account of the high
resistance of the diaphragm, to draw from a current supply of
more than 6 volts. Raise the temperature of the bath to 50-60°
and maintain it at this point by using an external flame whenever
126 OXY-ACIDS OF SULPHUR.
it is necessary to supplement the heating effect of the current.
The formation of permanganate begins as soon as the current starts;
red films of solution form at the anode surface and sink to the
bottom of the beaker. At the end of 30 minutes, and then after
every 20 minutes, stir the bath well and take samples of 5 or
10 c.c. with a pipette for the purpose of determining the current
yield.1 Acidify the sample with sulphuric acid, whereupon the
precipitate, which is mainly ferric hydroxide, dissolves; decolorize
the hot solution with a measured excess of 0.1-normal oxalic acid
and titrate back at 60° with 0.1-normal permanganate. The per-
manganate solution obtained in this manner is so dilute that it
does not pay to attempt to crystallize the solid salt. The current
yield in several experiments made in the author's laboratory with
1.5-3.0 amperes was as high as 25% at the end of 45 minutes; in
the next hour it sank to about 10%.
85. Barium Ferrate, Ba[FeO4].
Clamp a 50-75 c.c. flask in an upright position and place in it a
mixture of 10 g. of fine iron filings and 20 g. of potassium nitrate.
Heat with a flame until a reaction takes place and the iron burns
with a shower of sparks. After cooling break the flask, extract
four times with 50 c.c. of ice water, and filter the combined extract
through asbestos. Pass the deep violet-red filtrate again through
a fresh asbestos felt and precipitate it immediately with a solution
of barium chloride. After an hour drain the precipitate of barium
ferrate on a hardened filter, wash it with alcohol, then with ether,
and dry at the room temperature in a vacuum desicccator. Yield,
1.0 to 1.5 g.
(e) Oxy-acids of Sulphur and Their Salts.
For sulphurous acid the two following constitutional formulas2 have been
proposed:
O<. • O H .OH
0XH °-< 0H
Unsymmetrical Formula. Symmetrical Formula.
1
Compare the directions in Preparations 14 and 74.
2
Constitutional formulas of the complex inorganic acids apply only with
a certain reservation: They characterize the ability to react only in one par-
ticular direction, and show, of several possibilities, only one definite con-
dition of the acid (see cyanic and hypochlorous acids). They are of value,
however, as aids to the memory.
 OXY-ACIDS OF SULPHUR. 127
For a further discussion of these formulas, see Nos. 155 and 156.
Regarding the constitution of sulphuric acid, it is to be noted:
1. Sulphuric acid contains two hydroxyl radicals: sulphuryl chloride
(No. 149) and water react together with the formation of sulphuric acid,
whereby the chlorine atoms are replaced by hydroxyl groups:
. SO2C12 - » SO2(OH)C1 —> SO2(OH)2.
2. The two hydroxyl groups of sulphuric acid are bound to the sulphur
atom: Either one or both of these groups can be replaced by organic radi-
cals, such as phenyl, whereby phenyl sulphonic acid, C6H5SO2OH, and diphe-
nylsulphone, (C6H6)2SO2, are formed. But the same substances can be pre-
pared by the oxidation respectively of mercaptan, C6H5SH, and of diphenyl
sulphide, (C6H5)2S, in which the organic radical must be joined directly to
the sulphur atom. From this it follows that both hydroxyl groups are
held by the same sort of a bond:
.OH
os;
3. The way in which the two remaining oxygen atoms are bound is not
known with certainty, but a mutual bonding of the two atoms to one another
is improbable on account of the great stability of the SO2-grouping. Thus
the structural formula is apparently
O. / O H

PYROSTTLPHURIC ACID, HO.SO2—O—SO2.OH, may be regarded as derived

from two molecules of sulphuric acid by the loss of one molecule of
water; it is prepared by dissolving sulphur trioxide in sulphuric acid.1 By
substituting the two hydroxyl groups of pyrosulphuric acid with chlorine
atoms, pyrosulphuric-acid-chloride is obtained which is stable and easy to
obtain pure. (See No. 150.)
CARO'S ACID, HO.SO 2 .OOH, is formed by the withdrawal.of a molecule
of water from between a molecule of sulphuric acid and a molecule of hydro-
gen peroxide.
PERSULPHURIC ACID, H 2 S 2 O S (see No. 94), is produced by the electrolysis of
H^Oj when two discharged monovalent acid-sulphate anions, HSO4, become
united; it may also be regarded as resulting from the condensation of one mole-
cule of sulphuric acid with one of Caro's acid.
THIOSULPHTJHIC ACID. Just as sulphuric acid may be formed by the
addition of an atom of oxygen, so thiosulphuric acid, H2S2O3, is produced by the
addition of an atom of sulphur to a molecule of sulphurous acid (cf. No. 90).
POLYTHIONIC ACIDS. Among the polythionic acids are included dithwnic
acid, H 2 S 2 O 6 , triihionic acid, H 2 S 3 O 6 , tetrathionic add, HjS^Og, a n d pentathionic

1
Concerning the various hydrates of SO3, see R. Knietsch, Ber. 34, 4100
(1901). Notice particularly the curves.
128 OXY-ACIDS OF SULPHUR.

acid, H2S6Oe. These can be prepared only in aqueous solutions or in the

form of their salts. (Cf. Nos. 91, Barium Dithionate, and 92, Sodium Tetra-
thionate.) The acids readily change into one another, and their constitution
is doubtful.
HYPOSULPHUHOUS ACID, H2S2O4. See No. 93.

86. Sulphuric Acid from Pyrite by the Chamber Process.1

Construct the apparatus shown in Fig. 20. The wide-mouthed
liter bottle is closed with a cork through which three holes are
bored. In one hole the bent-side arm of a 25 c.c. distilling flask is

FIG. 20.

inserted. A delivery tube is passed through the second boring to

the middle of the bottle and on the outside is joined to a short
combustion tube. In the third boring a tube is inserted which
leads through the safety bottle to a suction pump. Charge the
combustion tube with about 10 g. of powdered pyrite, and place a
small, loose plug of asbestos just beyond the powder to retain any
unburnt sulphur. Place about 10 c.c. of concentrated nitric acid
in the distilling flask, and insert a glass tube through the stopper so
that the lower end, which is drawn out to a capillary, reaches to
the bottom. Half fill the safety bottle with water to show the
1
From Alexander Smith and William J. Hale's A Laboratory Outline of
General Chemistry.
 ANTIMONY SULPHATE. 129

rate at which air is drawn through the apparatus. The total air
admitted is regulated by a screw clamp placed between the safety-
bottle and the water-pump, and the proportion passing over the
pyrite and through the nitric acid is governed by the clamp shown
at the end of the combustion tube.
First heat the pyrite in a slow stream of air until it takes fire.
Then warm the nitric acid and, by partially closing the clamp at
the end of the " pyrite-burner," cause air to enter also through the
capillary in the distilling flask, and thus carry nitric acid vapors
into the large bottle. Heat the pyrite strongly and continuously;
regulate the current of air laden with nitric acid so that red fumes
are always present in the bottle. If insufficient nitric acid is pro-
vided, the walls of the flask become coated with colorless crystals
of nitrosyl sulphuric acid (" chamber crystals "; cf. No. 152).
When the pyrite is completely burned, disconnect the apparatus,
and wash the contents of the bottle into a beaker with a little
water. Test the solution qualitatively, and determine by titration
the yield of sulphuric acid.

87. Reduction of Barium Sulphate and Preparation of Barium

Nitrate.
Mix thoroughly 47 g. of finely powdered heavy spar with 12 g.
of fine sifted charcoal, and place the mixture in a Hessian crucible
which should be two-thirds to three-quarters filled by it. Spread
a layer of charcoal on top, and place a cover on the crucible.
Heat to a red heat for two hours in a charcoal furnace. After
cooling break up the reddish-gray, porous contents of the crucible,
and add it little by little to 600 c.c. of a solution containing 25 g.
of nitric acid. Boil, filter, and evaporate the solution to crystalli-
zation. Separate the crystals on a filter, wash them with a little
water, and dry them at a moderate temperature on a porous plate.
Recover more crystals from the mother-liquor. Yield, 45 to 50 g.
of Ba(NO3)2.

88. Antimony Sulphate Sb 2 (SO 4 ) 3 .

Antimony sulphate is an example of a salt which is very easily hydrolyzed.
In spite of the fact that it can be crystallized from concentrated sulphuric
acid, it is impossible to obtain it pure without adopting some special expe-
dient. The sulphuric acid adhering to the crystals cannot be removed by
130 OXY-ACIDS AND SALTS OF SULPHUR.

suction or by evaporation. Washing with anhydrous acetic acid is effective,

however, because this solvent does not react appreciably with either sulphuric
acid or antimony sulphate, and the excess can be easily removed.
Add 10 g. of finely powdered antimony (from No. 7 or 10) in
small portions to 100 c.c. of hot, concentrated sulphuric acid, and
heat the mixture in a beaker nearly to boiling until all the anti-
mony has dissolved. On cooling, antimony sulphate crystallizes
in long, colorless, lustrous needles. Allow the solution to cool
completely, dilute it with 80 c.c. of anhydrous acetic acid, and
again permit the mass to cool. Drain the crystals by suction on
a hardened filter, and wash them rapidly with a little anhydrous
acetic acid and then with ether; allow the product to dry for one
or two days in a vacuum desiccator over sulphuric acid. Yield,
13 g.
If a sample of the salt is treated with water, it undergoes
hydrolysis, and free sulphuric acid is found in the solution decanted
from the insoluble basic salt.
For the quantitative analysis of the salt, dissolve a weighed
sample in a little concentrated hydrochloric acid, add tartaric
acid, dilute well, and precipitate with barium chloride. From a
second solution prepared in the same way, precipitate the antimony
with hydrogen sulphide and weigh it in a Gooch crucible as Sb2S3
after drying it in an atmosphere of carbon dioxide at 280°.

89. Alum from Kaolin.

Potassium aluminium sulphate, K2SO4. A12(SO4)3.24 H2O, is distin-
guished from other aluminium salts by its marked ability to crystallize, and
on this account it can readily be obtained pure. Thus it has long been the
most important salt of aluminium in spite of the fact that it contains but
5.71% of that element. More recently, however, aluminium sulphate has
been used a great deal instead of alum; it is prepared by neutralizing with sul-
phuric acid the hydrated aluminium oxide, which can now be prepared pure
from the mineral bauxite.

Stir 50 g. of powdered kaolin with 75 g. of concentrated sul-

phuric acid in an evaporating dish; heat the mixture for 2J hours
on a Babo funnel, at first gently and then more strongly, until
white fumes escape. Triturate the mass when cold, and extract
once with 300 c.c. and then three times with 100 c.c. of boiling
water; the last filtrate should show no test for aluminium with
 BARIUM DITHIONATE. 131

ammonia. Dissolve 28 g. of potassium sulphate (15% less than

the calculated amount) in the combined filtrates, and bring the
double salt to crystallization in the usual way. Recrystallize the
combined crops of crystals. Yield, about 150 g.

90. Sodium Thiosulphate, Na2S2O3 • 5 H2O.

Add 16 g. of finely powdered roll sulphur (not flowers of sulphur)
to a solution of 126 g. crystallized sodium sulphite, Na2SO3-7 H2O,
in 250 c.c. of water, and boil the mixture in a flask until, at the
end of about two hours, the sulphur has dissolved. Filter, evapo-
rate to the point of crystallization, and concentrate the mother-
liquor to obtain further crops of crystals. The yield is nearly
quantitative.
The above reaction, Na2SO3+ S <=» Na2S2O3, is reversible.
Heat 2-3 g. of sodium thiosulphate with about 5 g. of copper
powder in a test-tube so that the thiosulphate melts in its water
of crystallization and the latter partly boils away; the copper
becomes black (copper sulphide), and the aqueous extract when
treated with calcium chloride gives a precipitate of calcium
sulphite; calcium thiosulphate is easily soluble.

91. Barium Dithionate, BaS2O0 • 2 H2O.

Prepare sulphur dioxide by allowing sulphuric acid to drop into
160 c.c. of commercial bisulphite liquor (see note on p. 71), and
pass the gas into a suspension of 50 g. of finely powdered pyrolu-
site in 250 c.c. of water until the latter is saturated and nearly
all of the black manganese dioxide has dissolved. During this
reaction, .which lasts about two hours, keep the mixture cooled
with water.
Dilute to 1.5 liters, bring the solution to boiling, and keep it at
this temperature while adding a solution of 200 g. of crystallized
barium hydroxide. Filter, and test the filtrate with ammonium
sulphide for manganese. If the manganese is shown to be all pre-
cipitated, remove the excess of barium hydroxide from the filt-
rate by passing carbon dioxide into the boiling solution. Filter,
evaporate to one-half, filter again, and allow the salt to crystallize.
Drain the crystals and evaporate the mother-liquor to obtain
another crop. Yield, about 120 g.
132 OXY-ACIDS AND SALTS OF SULPHUR.
A sample of the salt dissolves clear in water and remains
unchanged upon the addition of a little nitric acid. By boiling
with nitric acid, however, it is oxidized to sulphate, and oxides of
nitrogen are evolved.

92. Sodium Tetrathionate, Na2S4O6 • 2 H 2 O.

Triturate 50 g. of sodium thiosulphate, 26 g. of iodine, and 5 g.

of water in a mortar to a bright brownish-yellow paste. After a
short time rinse the mass with 50 c.c. of alcohol into an Erlenmeyer
flask. At the end of about three hours drain the precipitated
sodium tetrathionate and wash it with alcohol until the washings
are free from iodine.
Dissolve the crude product in 20 to 25 c.c. of lukewarm water,
and by adding alcohol in portions of 10 c.c.—in all 50 c.c.—
bring about a separation of crystals. After about ten hours,
during which time the mixture has stood out of contact with the
air in an Erlenmeyer flask, or in a vacuum desiccator, drain the
crystals, wash with alcohol, and dry in a desiccator over sulphuric
acid. The yield is about 20 g. of compact, colorless, crystalline
aggregates.
Reactions: A solution prepared in the cold gives no precipitate
with copper sulphate even on boiling; with mercuric nitrate a
yellow precipitate is obtained which becomes black on boiling;
with mercuric chloride a yellow flocculent precipitate separates
slowly. Compare the behavior of sodium thiosulphate and
sodium sulphite with these reagents.
Analysis: Determine the water of crystallization in a 0.7-1.0 g.
sample by heating it to constant weight in the steam closet; deter-
mine the sulphur by dissolving in water, oxidizing with bromine,
and precipitating with barium chloride. The amount of water
contained in the salt prepared in this way is stated variously in
the literature.

93. Hyposulphurous Acid, H2S2O4.

Zinc dissolves in aqueous sulphurous acid without evolution of hydrogen,
and forms a yellow solution of great reducing power. By studying the
properties of this solution and later by preparing the solid sodium salt, the
formula of free hyposulphurous acid was established as H2S2O4.
 POTASSIUM PERSULPHATE. 133
The older name for hyposulphurous acid is hydrosulphuroua acid. It
should not be confused with thiosulphuric acid, H2S2O3, the sodium salt of
which is commonly known as "hypo."
Take two samples of the same solution of sulphurous acid, allow
one of them to stand a short time in contact with a zinc rod, and
afterward test the reducing power of each solution towards dilute
indigo.
94. Potassium Persulphate, Electrolytically.
In concentrated solutions of acid sulphates, dissociation takes place for
the most part only partially:
KHSO4 <=• K+ + HSO4--
On electrolyzing, and particularly with high-current densities, the acid sul-
phate ions on becoming discharged at the anode unite in pairs to form per-
Bulphuric acid, H2S2O8, the potassium salt of which is insoluble.
Inside a large beaker filled with ice water, place a glass cylinder,
or a small beaker 14 cm. high and 6 cm. in diameter. Suspend in
this, by means of a wire triangle, an 11 cm. long, 2.7 cm. wide
glass tube open at both ends (a test-tube with its bottom cut off).
Use for the cathode a loop Of platinum wire,
placed as near the surface of the solution as
possible and outside the inner tube; for the
anode melt a platinum wire into a glass tube
so that it projects 1.5 to 2.0 cm., and insert
this through the inner tube until it reaches
nearly to the bottom of the beaker (see Fig. 21).
Fill the inside beaker one-half full of a satu-
rated solution of acid potassium sulphate. Use
a current density at the anode of 100 amperes
per 100 sq. cm. of electrode surface. Measure
the protruding anode wire and estimate its
surface. The current will amount to less than FIG. 21.
an ampere with a moderately stout platinum
wire. The temperature of the electrolyte should be lower than
15° and may quite easily be maintained at 6° to 8°. A few min-
utes after closing the circuit, crystals of the difficultly soluble
persulphate are seen to separate. Continue the electrolysis 40
minutes in one experiment and an hour in another. Collect the
salt on a hardened filter, wash it with alcohol and then with ether.
Weigh the salt, after drying in a desiccator, and analyze it as soon
134 CARBONATES.
as possible in the following manner: Dissolve 0.3 g. of the salt in a
beaker with 10 c.c. of 0.1-normal ferrous ammonium sulphate1
solution and 200 c.c. of hot water. After cooling, titrate back the
unoxidized ferrous salt with 0.1-normal permanganate.
According to the above directions, 1.25 g. of the persulphate of
92 to 95% purity should be obtained in 40 minutes and 1.65 g. in
an hour, and the current yield should be from 41 to 43%.
To test qualitatively the oxidizing power of the salt, dissolve
some of it in water, make the solution alkaline, add it to a solution
of a lead or manganese salt to which alkali has also been added,
and heat the mixture.
(/) Carbonates.
95. Sodium Carbonate (Ammonia-Soda Process).
From a concentrated solution containing the ions Na+, Cl~, NH4+, and
HC03~, sodium bicarbonate, NaHC0 3 , the most insoluble of the possible
salts, is the first to separate (cf. No. 80). 100 grams of saturated aqueous
solutions of the four salts that come into consideration contain the following
weights of anhydrous salt in grams.
15° 30°
NaCl 26.4 26.5
NH4HCO3 15.7 21.3
NH4CI 26.1 29.3
NaHCO 3 8.1 9.9
The dry acid salt loses carbon dioxide when heated and changes into the mono-
carbonate, Na2CO3. This process, which was first placed on a commercial
basis by Solvay, yields at the present time the largest part of the world's soda.
For a technical discussion of the process, consult Ost, Lehrbuch der technischen
Chemie; for a theoretical treatment in the light of the phase rule, see Bod-
lander and Breull, Z. angew. Chem. 14, 381, 405 (1901); and P. P. Fedotieff,
Z; physikal. Chem. 49, 162 (1904).
Add 60 g. of pulverized sodium chloride to 180 g. of a 10%
ammonia solution, and allow it to stand with occasional shaking
until nearly all has dissolved. Place the filtered solution in a closed
flask and saturate it at room temperature with carbon dioxide; pass
the gas through a wash bottle containing water and then allow it
to enter the flask through a single inlet tube, which dips under
the solution, as rapidly as it will be absorbed (in all, perhaps 24
hours).2 Collect the precipitated sodium bicarbonate on a filter
1
40 g. of (NH^SOi • FeSO4 • 6 H2O and 30 g. of cone. H2SO4 made up to
1 liter and standardized against 0.1-normal permanganate.
2
The time taken for the absorption may be reduced to one-half hour if a
2 liter flask is used and it is shaken vigorously throughout the absorption.
 BARIUM HYPOPHOSPHITE. 135
and wash it with a little cold water. Dry the product in a por-
celain dish and then heat it with a free flame until carbon
dioxide ceases to escape. Recrystallize the crude sodium carbonate
thus obtained from five times its weight of water, and wash the
crystals with a little water. Concentrate the mother-liquor to
obtain another crop of crystals. Recrystallize. Yield, about 40 g.
A solution of the sodium carbonate, after being acidified with
nitric acid, ought not to show more than a slight cloudiness with
silver nitrate.
(g) Phosphoric Acids.1
Structural formulas can be written as below for orthophosphoric acid,
H3PO4, phosphorous add, H3PO3, and hypophosphorous add, H3PO2, if it is
taken into consideration that the first acid is tribasic, the second dibasic, and
the third monobasic, and if it is assumed, although this is by no means proved,
that all the hydroxyl hydrogens, and only these, can be replaced by metals
in the formation of salts.

O=P-OH O=P-OH O = P-H

X X X
OH OH OH
Orthophosphoric acid. Phosphorous acid. Hypophosphorous acid.
The reducing action of the last two acids would accordingly consist in
taking up oxygen which would enter between the phosphorus atom and the
hydrogen atoms.
If it is not assumed that all the hydroxyl hydrogens are replaceable, then
the formulas P(OH)3 and HP(0H)2 become possible, according to which phos-
phorous and hypophosphorous acids are derived from tervalent phosphorus.
It may be, as in the case of sulphurous acid, that both formulas have a cer-
tain justification (compare p. 126 and Nos. 155 and 156).
By the loss of water from one and from two molecules of orthophosphoric
acid, meta-phosphoric and pyro-phosphoric acids respectively are obtained:

O=P-OH HO-P-0-P-OH
HO/ X
OH
Metaphosphoric acid. Pyrophosphoric acid.
HYPOPHOSPHOHIC ACID, H2PO3, which was formerly written H4P2O6, has
recently been found to have a molecular weight corresponding to the smaller
molecule, and is presumably derived from quadrivalent phosphorus.

96. Barium Hypophosphite, Ba(H2PO2)2 • H2O.

Salts of hypophosphorous acid are formed by the action of phosphorus
on warm, aqueous solutions of strong bases:
4 P + 3 KOH + 3 H20 = 3 KH2PO2 + PH3.
1
Cf. Note 2, p. 126.
136 THIO-ACIDS AND SALTS.
If barium hydroxide is chosen as the base, it is possible to obtain the crys-
tallized salt, after precipitating the excess of the base with carbon dioxide
and evaporating the filtrate. Hypophosphites are strong reducing agents.
Heat a solution of 120 g. crystallized barium hydroxide in
1200 c.c. of water with 30 g. of yellow phosphorus (Caution) in
a round-bottomed flask on a Babo funnel. After about four hours
, nearly all of the phosphorus will have disappeared. The process
should be carried out in a well-ventilated hood, since phosphine
gas escapes freely. Filter the solution through a plaited filter
into a large porcelain dish; heat and pass in carbon dioxide until
the excess of barium hydroxide is precipitated. Filter, rinse the
precipitate with boiling water, and evaporate the solution to one-
half its volume. After again filtering, concentrate further — at
the last in a beaker — until crystals begin to separate; then add
alcohol and leave the solution to crystallize. Collect the product
on a filter and evaporate the mother-liquor to obtain more crystals.
Purify the entire product by recrystallization. Yield, 40 to 60 g.
of colorless flaky crystals.
Reactions: 1. Treat a sample of the product with concentrated
sulphuric acid and heat it to boiling; a large amount of sulphur
dioxide escapes and sulphur distils to the cooler part of the test-
tube.
2. On adding hypophosphite to a dilute solution of gold chloride,
H[AuCl4], and warming gently, a blue-violet coloration (cf. No. 25)
and later a violet-red precipitate of gold is obtained.
3. With silver nitrate a dark brown separation of silver takes
place, slowly at the room temperature and more rapidly when
warm; with mercurous salts a separation of mercury occurs.
4. If a dry sample of barium hypophosphite is heated in a test-
tube, it turns red with loss of water and further decomposition:
phosphorus distils off and phosphine escapes.
Dependent preparation: Copper Hydride, No. 33.

97. Phosphorous Acid.

Phosphorous acid, which is sometimes used in quantitative analysis, is
prepared by the hydrolysis of phosphorus trichloride (No. 46):
PC13 + 3 H2O = H3PO3 + 3 HC1.
Pour 100 c.c. of water into a 200 c.c. beaker, place the beaker
in ice water under the hood, and slowly add 25 g. (15 c.c.) of
 BARIUM TRITHIOCARBONATE. 137

phosphorus trichloride from a dropping funnel. After the re-

action is over, transfer the liquid to a distilling flask and distil off
the hydrochloric acid and water under reduced pressure (p. 8).
The phosphorous acid remains behind as a colorless, fibrous,
crystalline mass which is hygroscopic and therefore must be kept
in well stoppered vessels.

THIO-ACIDS AND THEIR SALTS.

98. Potassium Trithiocarbonate Solution (Reagent for Nickel).
Divide 50 c.c. of a 5% solution of potassium hydroxide into two
equal portions; saturate one with hydrogen sulphide and mix it
with the other portion. Shake this solution of potassium sulphide
vigorously with 2 c.c. of carbon bisulphide for five minutes and
then pour it through a filter which has been moistened with water.
The bright, orange-red solution contains K2CS3, and is an extremely
delicate reagent for nickel. With concentrated ammoniacal solu-
tions of nickel salts, it gives a brownish-black precipitate; with
dilute solutions, a dark brown coloration.
Determine the sensitiveness of the test: Start with 1 or 2 c.c. of
a 0.0002-normal nickel solution, and if this gives a distinct reaction,
dilute ten times and test again, and continue in this way until the
limit of sensitiveness is reached.
In order to find to what extent cobalt interferes with the re-
action, test solutions containing 1, 2, 10, 50 and more atomic
equivalents of cobalt for each atom of nickel.

99. Barium Trithiocarbonate.

Dissolve 32 g. of crystallized barium hydroxide in 100 c.c. of hot
water. Place one half of the solution in a closed flask and saturate
it with hydrogen sulphide, whereby barium sulphydrate is formed;
then add the other half of the original barium hydroxide solution.
Shake the resulting solution of barium sulphide with 8 g. of carbon
bisulphide, whereupon barium trithiocarbonate, BaCS3, precipi-
tates as a yellow, crystalline powder. Drain the precipitate, wash
it with a little water, then with 50% alcohol, and finally with pure
alcohol; and dry it in a warm place (on top of the hot closet). As
the alcohol used for washing runs into the filtrate, more of the
barium trithiocarbonate precipitates. Yield, 12 to 15 g.
138 THIO-ACIDS AND SALTS.

100. Sodium Thioantlmonate, Na3SbS4 • 9 H2O.

Sodium thioantimonate, or "Schlippe's salt," is formed by the interaction
of antimony sulphide, sodium sulphide, and sulphur; sodium thioantimonite
may first be formed in the dry way (Schlippe), or the whole process may be
carried out in the wet way (Mitscherlich). According to Schlippe's method,
sodium sulphate is heated together with charcoal and antimony trisulphide
in the furnace; sodium sulphide is formed by reduction, and this immediately
combines with the antimony sulphide. By suspending the pulverized fusion
in water and boiling it with powdered sulphur, the sodium thioantimonite is
converted into thioantimonate.
In recrystallizing the salt, it is necessary to add a little sodium hydroxide
to prevent hydrolysis, for otherwise the free thioantimonic acid which would
form would decompose into antimony sulphide and hydrogen sulphide.
Sodium thioantimonate is used in making the medicinal preparation of anti-
mony pentasulphide.

1. Mix thoroughly 36 g. of powdered stibnite (34 g. = 0.1 mol.),

43 g. of anhydrous sodium sulphate, and 16 g. of powdered charcoal.
Place the mixture in a Hessian crucible, which should be about half
filled, cover with a layer of charcoal, and heat in a charcoal furnace
until the charge comes to a state of quiet fusion, and then heat ten
minutes longer. Pour the melt upon an iron plate, pulverize the
mass when cold, and boil it half an hour with 7 g. of flowers of
sulphur and 300 c.c. of water. Add a little caustic soda solution
and evaporate the filtrate to crystallization in a porcelain dish.
Collect the crystals, wash them with a little alcohol, and work
up the mother-liquor further. Recrystallize the combined por-
tions, adding a little caustic soda to the solution; dry the product
in a vacuum desiccator over lime, upon which a few drops of
ammonium sulphide have been poured. The yield is 40 to 50 g.
of light-yellow well-formed crystals.
2. Slake 26 g. of quicklime with hot water, stir it up to a paste
with an additional 80 c.c. of water, and add a solution of 70 g.
crystallized sodium carbonate in 250 c.c. of water. Bring the
mixture to boiling in an iron dish, and while it is boiling add little
by little a paste made from 36 g. of powdered stibnite, 7 g. of pow-
dered sulphur, and 12 g. of water. When, after boiling about
15 minutes, the gray color of the antimony sulphide has disap-
peared, filter the solution through linen cloth and extract the
residue by boiling it with 100 to 150 c.c. of water. Bring the
 AMMONIUM COPPER TETRASULPHIDE. 139
combined filtrates to crystallization and proceed as in Method 1
with the recrystallization, etc. Yield, about 60 g.1

101. Potassium Ferric Sulphide, K[FeS2].

Place an intimate mixture of about 30 g. iron powder, 180 g.
flowers of sulphur, 150 g. potassium carbonate, and 30 g. anhydrous
sodium carbonate in a Hessian crucible, and heat the mass in a
charcoal furnace until it is melted to a thin liquid. This takes
about an hour. Close the furnace and let the melt cool slowly;
break the crucible and digest the lumps of the melt with warm
water in a porcelain dish until they are completely disintegrated.
From time to time replace the resulting green solution with fresh
water until nothing more dissolves and pure, glistening, dark
needles remain behind. Wash the product with water and alcohol
and dry it in the steam closet. Yield, about 70 g. Confirm the
composition by a quantitative analysis. The experiment can be
performed on a smaller scale using about one-sixth as much of
each substance. In this case a porcelain crucible and a blast lamp
or Meker burner should be used.

102. Ammonium Copper Tetrasulphide, NHJCuSJ.

It is known from qualitative analysis that copper sulphide dissolves appre-
ciably in ammonium or sodium polysulphide. Alkali salts of thio-copper acids
are thereby formed of which the one under consideration has been best in-
vestigated.2

Place a mixture of 200 c.c. of concentrated ammonia and 50 c.c.

of water in a closed flask, and while keeping the liquid cooled with
tap water, pass in hydrogen sulphide until it is saturated. Dis-
solve in one-half of the solution as much finely powdered sulphur
as possible at 40° (about 60 g.), then filter this and add it to the
other half of the solution.
While rotating this solution in a flask, add a 10% solution of blue
vitriol little by little until a permanent precipitate of copper sul-
phide just begins to form; filter immediately through a plaited
filter into an Erlenmeyer flask; the latter should be filled almost
completely with the liquid. On standing, best in an ice-box,
1
The yield corresponds closely with the reaction as given by Mitscherlich:
8 Sb2S3 + 16 S + 18 Na2CO3 + 3 H2O = 10 Na3SbS4 + 3 H2Na2Sb207 + 18 CO2.
2
H. Biltz and P. Herms, Ber. 40, 977 (1907).
140 COMPLEX HALOGEN ACIDS AND SALTS.
brilliant red prisms separate, which on the next day should be
washed with water and then with alcohol and dried quickly over
lime in a vacuum desiccator. On adding copper sulphate to the
main filtrate (to which the washings should not have been added)
a further yield of the crystals is obtained. The entire product is
about 25 g.
A sample of the salt dissolves completely in a small amount of
2-normal sodium hydroxide, which points to the existence of the
copper as a part of the complex; after some time copper sulphide
begins to separate slowly. Ammonia is readily detected in this
solution by its odor or by Nessler's reagent. Concentrated potas-
sium hydroxide added to the fresh solution immediately pre-
cipitates red potassium copper tetrasulphide. Concentrated
hydrochloric and nitric acids act but slowly on the dry salt, con-
centrated sulphuric acid not at all.

COMPLEX HALOGEN ACIDS AND THEIR SALTS. — COM-

PLEX CYANOGEN COMPOUNDS.
Among the complex compounds formed by the union of two simple sub-
stances, the particular class in which both of the simple substances are halo-
gen or cyanogen compounds requires a special treatment, — first, for the
reason that the number of such compounds is very great, and many of them
are of considerable practical importance; and second, because their classifica-
tion and interpretation on the basis of the old theories of valence have for a
long time caused chemists much perplexity.
For the diagnosis of such complex compounds, purely chemical tests are
first made as to the reactivity of their constituents. If the typical reactions
of the simple salts do not occur with these double compounds, but instead
new specific reactions are found, then a complex structure of the substance
is indicated. Such cases are abundant in analytical chemistry, as, for example,
with the iron-cyanogen compounds.
Further, the existence in aqueous solution of complex metal-containing
ions can be proved electrochemically, and with this proof began the clearing
up of the constitution of these substances. The metal migrates, as a constit-
uent of the anion, toward the positive pole and there increases in concentra-
tion. Thus an anomalous change in concentration takes place with respect
to the metal when it is compared with that occurring in the electrolysis of
simple metal salts. From this Hittorf, in the years 1853-1859, deduced
the existence of complex ions in solution. Previously Porett (1814) had
noticed, incidentally, the analogy existing between potassium ferrocyanide
and the salts of the oxy-acids.
Finally, the degree of the complexity of dissolved double compounds can
be estimated by means of any one of the methods of determining ion concen-
 COMPLEX HALOGEN ACIDS AND SALTS. 141

trations, such as by measurements of the freezing-point, of electromotive force,

etc. Thus not only can the extreme cases be distinguished — in which there
is merely a dissociation into a simple cation and a complex anion or else a
complete breaking down into the simple ions — but also it can be shown, in
the transition cases, to what degree the two kinds of dissociation prevail.
The extent to which the nature of the compound, and indeed the nature
of the elements forming the complex as well as of those outside of the com-
plex, favors the first or second form of dissociation is now understood in a
general way. The formation of complexes seems to be favored when the
anions of the simple compounds are the same. The stability of the com-
plex increases from the chlorine compounds through the other halogen to
the cyanogen compounds; it increases further, as far as metal-containing
anions are concerned, with the "nobleness" of the metal. The latter property
of metals is intimately connected with the discharge potential of their ions —
a quantity capable of exact measurement — (electroaffinity, cf. p. 67), hence
it would seem possible to predict, from data concerning discharge potentials,
the relative tendency of the metals to form complexes. Abegg and Bodlander
have in fact proposed a new system of chemical classification1 based upon this
fundamental property of the atoms. Among the numerous investigations
which these ideas have instigated, mention should be made of the measure-
ments carried out by Bodlander of the so-called "stability-constants" which
give the proportion in which simple metal ions dissociate from complex metal-
containing anions.2
The composition of the complex halogen compounds shows that one atom
of non-haloid nature occupies a peculiar position in the complex, while the
remaining atoms of the complex, which are either all of the same kind or
closely related, are most frequently either four or six in number. Start-
ing from these facts Werner has used with success the so-called "Coordina-
tion Theory," 3 which he himself proposed, to explain the constitution of
these compounds. According to this theory the halogen atoms are situated
in space around the other atom of the complex, the "central atom"; when
they number four they may be supposed to be located at the corners of a
tetrahedron, and when they number six, at the corners of an octahedron which
surrounds the central atom (see p. 166). Werner has, in constructing his
theory, also introduced the idea of "secondary valences" which differ from
the "principal valences" by being weaker and incapable of binding electrons.
Thus aluminium, when its three principal valences are saturated with fluo-
rine, can bring into play its three secondary valences, and thereby bind the
fluorine atoms in three molecules of sodium fluoride:
[F ,.F_]_N£
F_^Afl..F— —Na
LF/ XF—J—Na
1
Abegg and Bodlander: Die Electroaffinitat. Z. anorg. Chem. 20,453 (1899).
2
Bodlander: Ber. 36, 3933 (1903).
3
For a full discussion of this theory see A. Werner, Neuere Anschau-
ungen auf dem Gebiete der anorganischen Chemie, 4th Edition, 1919.
142 COMPLEX HALOGEN ACIDS AND SALTS.

The secondary valences have nothing to do with the state of oxidation of

the central atom, which is determined by the primary valence alone. Thus
in tervalent cobaltic salts, the element cobalt acting as a central atom tends to
unite with six other atoms, radicals or molecules. In the [Co(NH3)6]++ + ion,
therefore, the 6 molecules of NH 3 are held in place by secondary valence
bonds and the ion has the triple charge because none of the principle valences
are satisfied in the complex cobalt-ammonia ion. In [Co(N02)o] , the NO2
radicals have a negative valence of one; the 6 NO2~, therefore, neutralize all
of the primary valences of the cobalt and since there are only three of these,
the anion has a negative valence of 6 — 3 = 3. The primary valences are
characteristic of the element and its position in the periodic classification of
the elements; the secondary valences are residual "affinities" which remain
when the principal valences have been satisfied.
This theory of Werner, which started with the study of complex inorganic
compounds of a very special nature, has gradually become of increasing im-
portance as a theoretical basis of inorganic chemistry and the application of
the theory is constantly being broadened. The electronic conception has
helped to interpret the theory. Many compounds such as potassium ferro-
cyanide and ferricyanide, to which very complicated structural formulas were
formerly assigned, are now much easier to understand. In the later chapters
of this book this theory will be mentioned repeatedly.

103. Hydrofluosilicic Acid.

The reaction, SiO2 + 4 HF = SiF4 + 2 H2O, is reversible. When warm
and in the presence of sulphuric acid, which has a dehydrating action, it
proceeds from left to right. If, however, silicon tetrafiuoride is brought in
contact with a large amount of water, then silicic acid and hydrofluoric acid
are formed, but the hydrofluoric acid combines in a secondary reaction with
undecomposed silicon fluoride to form hydrofluosilicic acid:
2 HF + SiF4 = H2[SiF6].
Place a mixture of 100 g. of powdered fluorspar and 40 g. of pre-
cipitated silicic acid, or 80 g. of sand, in a round-bottomed flask,
and, while shaking, add 500 g. of concentrated sulphuric acid in
small portions. Heat the mixture on a Babo funnel and conduct
the escaping silicon fluoride into 1 liter of water by means of a dry
delivery tube that dips directly into mercury which one-third fills
a small beaker standing in the bottom of a large beaker containing
the water. The lower end of the delivery tube should be made
wider by sealing on a short piece of tube 1.5 cm. in diameter.
The mercury keeps the opening of this tube dry and thus pre-
vents it from becoming clogged with silicic acid. If the water
becomes too much thickened with silicic acid, remove a part of
the liquid without interrupting the process, filter it through a
 AMMONIUM PLUMBIC CHLORIDE. 143

piece of linen laid in a large Biichner funnel, and return the fil-
trate to the beaker.
When the reaction is complete remove the silicic acid, as above,
with a linen filter, and estimate the yield by analyzing a sample of
the filtrate. Either titrate hot with 0.1-normal sodium hydroxide,
using phenolphthalein as indicator, whereby the reaction is
H2SiF6 + 6 NaOH = 6 NaF + H4Si04 + 2 H2O,
or else add to the solution an excess of neutral calcium chloride
and titrate the hydrochloric acid set free, using methyl-orange as
indicator:
H2SiF6 + 3 CaCl2 + 4 H2O = 3 CaF2 + 6 HC1 + H4Si04.
Add some potassium chloride solution to another sample of the
product; the difficultly soluble potassium salt separates, and,
although the precipitate is barely visible at first, the liquid is
eventually left in a jelly-like condition.

104. Potassium Titanium Fluoride, K2[TiF6].

Allow 19 g. of titanium tetrachloride (No. 52) to flow very
slowly from a dropping funnel into 20 c.c. of ice-cold water in a
platinum dish. (Hood.) The dish must meanwhile be kept sur-
rounded with ice. Add 30 g. of pure, 40 to 50% hydrofluoric acid
to the mixture, and then a warm concentrated solution of 15 g.
potassium chloride; the contents of the dish thereupon harden
to a crystalline paste. Evaporate to complete dryness on the
water bath, to remove the excess of hydrofluoric acid, and recrystal-
lize the difficultly soluble residue from water. Yield, about 20 g.

105. Ammonium Plumbic Chloride, (NH4)2[PbCl6]. Lead

Tetrachloride, PbCl4.
Triturate 10 g. of lead chloride, PbCl2, with 20 c.c. of concentrated
hydrochloric acid; after allowing the suspension to settle some-
what, decant off the solution together with the fine, suspended
solid; repeat the above treatment with the residue until all of
the lead chloride is in solution or in a state of finest suspension in
200 c.c. of hydrochloric acid.
Place mixtures prepared in this manner in each of two 250 to
300 c.c. gas-wash-bottles, and, while keeping the temperature at
10° to 15° and shaking occasionally, pass a slow current of chlorine
144 COMPLEX HALOGEN ACIDS AND SALTS.
through the two bottles placed in series. After about five hours
all the lead chloride should be dissolved. If any remains, allow
the solutions to stand overnight and then filter off any insoluble
residue on asbestos. Combine the two filtrates in a 600 c.c.
flask, cool the liquid with ice, and add an ice-cold solution of 8 g.
ammonium chloride in 80 c.c. of water; after a short time a heavy,
yellow, crystalline precipitate of ammonium plumbic chloride
begins to separate. After several hours filter rapidly on a hardened
filter, wash the precipitate with 50 c.c. of ice-cold alcohol and dry
it at 50°. Yield, about 20 g.
On treating a sample of the ammonium plumbic chloride with
water, it decomposes immediately, forming brownish-black hydrated
lead dioxide which remains to some extent in colloidal solution.
Lead Tetrachloride. Mix 20 g. of ammonium plumbic chloride
thoroughly, by means of a mechanically driven stirrer, with 60 c.c.
of ice-cold, concentrated sulphuric acid. In a short time heavy,
nearly colorless, oily drops of lead tetrachloride separate. By
repeated decantation and stirring up with fresh portions of sul-
phuric acid, it is possible to separate all of the ammonium sulphate
from the oil, and the latter then settles as a fairly clear layer. If
the oil is allowed to remain long in contact with the sulphuric
acid, lead sulphate is formed.
Lead tetrachloride decomposes with explosive violence when
strongly heated.

106. Potassium Lead Iodide, K[PbI ] . 2 H2O.

Potassium lead iodide is stable only when in contact with a cold, concen-
trated solution of potassium iodide. If the solution is diluted with water,
or even if it is merely heated, potassium iodide dissolves out of the solid
compound, and lead iodide remains behind. On concentrating and cooling
the solution, the double salt is again formed.
If a hot solution of 4 g. lead nitrate in 15 c.c. of water is mixed
with a hot solution of 15 g. of potassium iodide in 15 c.c. of water,
yellow lead iodide is at first precipitated. On cooling to room
temperature, the crystals of lead iodide disappear and a very pale-
yellow, felted mass of crystal needles is produced. On heating,
the crystals of the double compound disappear with a re-formation
of lead iodide; on cooling, the double salt is again produced.
The change can be observed especially well if a drop of the hot
 POTASSIUM MERCURIC IODIDE. 145

solution is placed between a heated slide and cover glass under the
microscope.
If it is desired to obtain the dry salt, it should be collected on a
filter, and, without washing, pressed between filter papers and
dried in a vacuum desiccator.
Potassium lead iodide possesses the remarkable property of
being extremely soluble in acetone. If the preparation is treated
while still moist with 10 to 15 c.c. of acetone, there is produced,
even in the cold, a yellow solution from which the salt can be
precipitated by addition of two or three volumes of ether. On
evaporating the acetone solution, no well-formed crystals are
obtained. If a few drops of this solution are allowed to evaporate
on filter paper the salt is obtained in a state of very fine subdivision,
in which condition it is extremely sensitive to the least traces of
moisture. Even the moisture of the air suffices to decompose
the salt in a short time; the yellow color of lead iodide which
thereby appears indicates in the sharpest manner the presence of
traces of water. If another paper prepared in the same manner
is left in a vacuum desiccator over sulphuric acid, no noticeable
yellow color appears; on opening the desiccator, however, it
develops immediately.

107. Potassium Mercuric Iodide, KJLHgI,]. % H2O.

Precipitate mercuric iodide from an aqueous solution of 13.5 g.
mercuric chloride by adding a solution of 16.6 g. potassium iodide.
Wash the precipitate and then redissolve it in a hot solution of
16 g. potassium iodide in 10 c.c. of water. Filter off the small
amount of undissolved mercuric iodide and allow the double salt to
crystallize in a vacuum desiccator over sulphuric acid, breaking up
occasionally the crust which forms over the surface. When a thick,
pasty mass of crystals is obtained, drain off the liquid with suction,
and without washing dry the light-yellow, prismatic crystals in a
desiccator. Obtain more of the product from the mother-liquor.
Test-Tube Experiments. 1. Treat a little mercuric oxide with a
few cubic centimeters of potassium iodide solution. A colorless,
strongly alkaline solution containing potassium mercuric iodide
and potassium hydroxide is produced. The formation of the com-
plex salt makes it possible for the mercuric oxide to dissolve with
the liberation of free potassium hydroxide (cf. No. 112).
146 COMPLEX HALOGEN ACIDS AND SALTS.
2. Heat a sample of the dry salt in a test-tube. In addition to
a little water, mercuric iodide distils off and condenses in the yellow
modification on the cooler part of the tube. After some time, or
more quickly on touching it with a glass rod, the sublimate changes
into the red form, and this can again be changed into the yellow
condition by heating (cf. Prep. 17).
108. Potassium Cobalticyanide, K.,[Co(CN)6].
Triturate 30 g. of cobalt carbonate with a little water until it is
thoroughly wet; then suspend it in 100 c.c. of water and dissolve it
by adding a solution of 110 g. potassium cyanide in 400 c.c. of
water. Oxidize the potassium cobaltocyanide thus formed by
drawing a vigorous current of air through the liquid for an hour.
After filtering the dark-yellow solution, add to it 40 g. of glacial
acetic acid and evaporate it to crystallization under a well-ven-
tilated hood outside of the general laboratory. Drain the crystals,
and wash them with alcohol of about 66% by volume. Work up
the mother-liquor repeatedly as long as a sample of the crystals
obtained gives a deep-blue solution when heated with concentrated
sulphuric acid. The easily soluble potassium acetate remains in
the residual liquor. Recrystallize the combined fractions from a
solution which is slightly acidified with acetic acid. Yield, about
60 g. The product may be used in No. 109.

109. Hydroferrocyanlc Acid, H4[Fe(CN)e].

Hydroferrocyanic acid can be obtained pure without difficulty, and dif-
fers in this respect from most of the related acids which are only stable in
the form of their salts. Hydroferrocyanic acid is easily soluble in water
and alcohol; but it can be readily precipitated as an addition product with
ether, and the ether can be removed from the compound by heating it in a
current of hydrogen at 80° to 90°.
Treat a solution containing 42 g. of potassium ferrocyanide
(0.1 mol.) in 350 c.c. of water with 120 c.c. of concentrated hydro-
chloric acid; if any precipitate of potassium chloride separates,
redissolve it by adding a little more water. Cool and add about
50 c.c. of ether. After standing for several hours, colorless, glisten-
ing, microscopic crystals separate which should be drawn off and
washed with dilute hydrochloric acid containing a little ether. To
remove any admixed potassium chloride, dissolve the product in
50 c.c. of alcohol, filter, precipitate again with 50 c.c. of ether,
 POTASSIUM COBALTOTHIOCYANATE. 147

drain off the liquid, and wash the crystals with the ether. Bring
the ether-hydroferrocyanic-acid compound into an Erlenmeyer
flask, which is provided with an inlet and an outlet tube, and heat
it in an atmosphere of dry hydrogen at 80° to 90° on the water
bath. The ether is removed in this way in about an hour. Yield,
about 12 g. The hydroferrocyanic acid is nearly colorless at first,
but it quickly develops a light-blue color by contact with the air.

110. Cobaltous Salt of Hydromercurlthlocyanic Acid, Co[Hg(SCN)J.

Prepare two solutions, one with 30 g. of mercuric chloride and
44.5 g. of potassium thiocyanate in 500 c.c. of water, and another
with 20 g. of cobalt nitrate in 50 c.c. of water. Mix the two
clear solutions; a shower of small, deep-blue crystals of the diffi-
cultly soluble double salt begins to fall at once. After standing
12 hours, drain the crystals, wash them with water, then with
alcohol, and dry the product in the steam closet. The yield is
nearly quantitative.
A sensitive test for mercury is based upon the formation of this
salt; the test is so delicate that less than 0.01 mg. of mercury can
be detected. Evaporate one small drop of dilute mercuric chloride
solution on a microscope slide and moisten the residue, by means
of a platinum wire, with a tiny droplet of cobaltous acetate dis-
solved in a concentrated aqueous solution of ammonium thio-
cyanate. Under the microscope, tiny, dark-blue needles will soon
be seen; these often unite to form concentric aggregates. Rub-
bing with a platinum wire serves to start the crystallization.
Powdered cobaltous mercurithiocyanate in contact with con-
centrated sodium carbonate solution decomposes after a few hours:
on filtering a residue of dull red cobaltous carbonate remains on
the filter and the filtrate contains sodium mercurithiocyanate.

111. Potassium Cobaltothiocyanate, K2[Co(SCN)4].

Prepare a hot, saturated solution of 14.5 g. of crystallized cobalt
nitrate and 24 g. of potassium thiocyanate; let it cool, and after
several hours remove the crystals of potassium nitrate which have
separated and rinse them with 40 g. of amyl acetate, added in small
portions, until they are nearly colorless. Add these washings to
the .main part of the liquid in a separatory funnel and shake thor-
oughly. Separate the two layers that form; this will require very
148 COMPLEX HALOGEN ACIDS AND SALTS.
close attention, since both are deep blue. Extract the aqueous
layer once or twice more with 10 to 15 c.c. of amyl acetate. To
obtain a good product it is necessary, before evaporating the amyl
acetate solution, to free it mechanically from drops of aqueous
solution by pouring it back and forth into clean, dry beakers. In
order to crystallize the salt, evaporate off one-tenth of the amyl
acetate under the hood, and to the cooled solution add slowly
50 to 60 c.c. of low-boiling ligroin. Drain off the crystals, wash
them with ligroin, and dry them over sulphuric acid. The product
consists of deep-blue needles; when dissolved in water, it disso-
ciates and a red solution is formed; upon the addition of potassium
thiocyanate the dissociation is driven back and the solution be-
comes blue. Instead of amyl acetate, ethyl acetate can be used
in the above procedure.
By allowing a solution of this substance in amyl acetate to
evaporate at room temperature, fairly large, dark blue, flat
crystals can be obtained.

112. Cadmium Iodide, Cd[CdIJ (Autocomplex Compound).

Cadmium iodide is, according to Hittorf, the cadmium salt of the com-
plex iodocadmic acid, H2[CdIJ. A compound of this nature, in which one and
the same metal exercises different functions, is known as auto-complex. (W.
Biltz, 1902.) In harmony with the complex nature of cadmium iodide, the
simple ions Cd++ and I~ show a strong tendency to combine with each other,
as is illustrated, for example, by the fact that when a solution of potassium iodide
is treated with cadmium hydroxide, the liquid becomes strongly alkaline, due
to the formation of undissociated cadmium iodide and potassium hydroxide.
Allow several rods of pure zinc to stand for about 24 hours in con-
tact with a solution of 26 g. crystallized cadmium sulphate in 100 c.c.
of water, until all the cadmium is precipitated as spongy metal. To
test for complete precipitation treat a few drops of the solution with
hydrogen sulphide; no cadmium sulphide should form. Purify
the finely divided cadmium by boiling it repeatedly with water.
Boil the cadmium with 24 g. of iodine and 50 c.c. of water, in a
flask with return condenser, until all the metal is dissolved (1 or
2 hours). Then continue the boiling in an open flask to remove
any excess of iodine, filter, and concentrate the filtrate to crys-
tallization. Work up the mother-liquor. Yield, 30 to 35 g. of
nearly colorless, lustrous plates.
To show that the amount of cadmium ions in a concentrated
 SODIUM COBALTINITRITE. 149

cadmium iodide solution is very small, treat the last mother-

liquor with hydrogen sulphide. A slight separation of cadmium
sulphide takes place after some time, but the precipitation is
incomplete.
NITRITO ACIDS AND THEIR SALTS.
113. Potassium Mercurinitrite, K3[Hg(NO2)5]. H2O.
Treat 43 g. of yellow mercuric oxide in a 500 c.c. flask with 71 g.
of potassium nitrite and 240 g. of 10% acetic acid, and shake
frequently until all is dissolved. Filter and concentrate the
solution to crystallization on the water bath. The separation of
crystals is much aided by the cautious addition of some alcohol.
Collect the crystals and work up the mother-liquor. Recrys-
tallize the combined crude product from a little water to which a
few drops of potassium nitrite solution have been added. Pale-
yellow, lustrous prisms, or plates, are obtained which are easily
soluble in water; by slow evaporation, crystal aggregates are
sometimes obtained of finger length.
The small content of mercuric ions in the solution of this salt is
shown by its indifference toward a solution of urea, or toward a
cold sodium bicarbonate solution that is saturated with carbon
dioxide; on the other hand, precipitates are produced by sodium
carbonate and by sodium hydroxide. From this it follows that
a potassium mercurinitrite solution contains mercuric ions in
about the same concentration as a solution of mercuric chloride.

114. Sodium Cobaltinitrite; Potassium Cobaltinitrite.

Sodium Cobaltinitrite. Dissolve 50 g. of cobaltous nitrate and
150 g. of sodium nitrite in 150 c.c. of water. Cool the solution
to 40° and, while shaking frequently, add 50 c.c. of 50% acetic
acid, a little at a time. Then oxidize the cobaltous salt by draw-
ing air through the liquid for half an hour (see No. 107). After
some time filter off the precipitate, which consists of sodium cobalti-
nitrite and perhaps a little of the corresponding potassium salt.
Stir this precipitate with 50 c.c. of water at 70°-80° and after
10 minutes filter off the solution. Combine the two filtrates, and
by introducing 350 c.c. of 96% alcohol from the jet of the wash-
bottle while stirring, throw down the sodium cobaltinitrite from
150 NITRITO ACIDS AND SALTS.
the solution. After standing 2 hours collect the precipitate and
wash it twice with 25 c.c. of alcohol. Yield, 51 to 52 g.
Purify the crude product by recrystallizing it in three portions,
each of which is stirred up with 1.5 times its weight of cold water.
Filter off the small undissolved residues, and precipitate each of
the clear nitrates by injecting from the wash-bottle, as above,
50 c.c. of a mixture of alcohol and a little glacial acetic acid
(70 : 1). Wash the precipitate with alcohol and ether, and dry
it at a temperature not exceeding 80°. Yield, about 40 g.
Potassium Cobaltinitrite. To the combined mother-liquors from
the above, add potassium chloride solution until precipitation is
complete. Collect, wash, and dry the yellow, crystalline precipitate.
The aqueous solution of the readily soluble sodium cobaltinitrite
is a useful reagent in testing for the presence of potassium ions.

115. Potassium Tetranitrito-diammine-cobaltate,

K[Co(NO2)4(NH3)2].
Dissolve 10 g. of cobaltous carbonate in a barely sufficient
amount of hydrochloric acid, so that a trace of residue remains
undissolved and the solution is only faintly acid. Dilute the
solution to 200 c.c. with water and add 70 g. of ammonium chloride,
whereupon the color changes from red to violet. Warm the
liquid to 50° and add a solution of 100 g. of potassium nitrite in
100 c.c. of water which is likewise warmed to 50° (use a large
beaker on account of foaming). Maintain the mixture at 50° for
half an hour and then place it in the ice-chest for 24 hours. Dull-
brown crystals and a fine yellow powder separate; the latter may
be removed by rotating the mass two or three times with 100 c.c.
of cold water and each time pouring the liquid and the suspended
matter away from the brown crystals.
Dissolve the crude product in 150 c.c. of boiling water; filter
and cool the filtrate at once, because the salt is decomposed in hot
solution. The main part of the salt crystallizes on cooling; wash
it with a little water and then with alcohol. The addition of
alcohol and a little ether to the mother-liquor causes the remainder
of the salt to precipitate, and this should be recrystallized from a
little water. Yield, 8 g. of brown, lustrous crystals.
A cold saturated aqueous solution gives yellowish-brown prisms
or rhombic leaflets when treated with mercurous nitrate solution.
 HETEROPOLY ACIDS AND THEIR SALTS. 151

HETEROPOLY ACIDS AND THEIR SALTS.

Among the compounds with complex anions belong a great number of
complicated acids, many of them known only in the form of their salts, which
are formed by condensation of oxy-acids. Such acids are often called poly
acids; heteropoly acids if the condensed acids are unlike and isopoly acids if
the condensation takes place from like constituents. The first classic repre-
sentative of a heteropoly acid is phosphomolybdic acid (No. 116) which was
discovered by Berzelius; almost equally well known is silicotungstic acid,
discovered by Marignac. The components of condensed acids which come
chiefly into consideration are, aside from those just mentioned, boric, stannic,
arsenic and vanadic acids. To the group of isopoly acids belong the poly-
chromic, polysilicic and polyboric acids. The study of such acids is com-
plicated by the fact that the acids condense not only in one but often in several
proportions. An acid of a particular composition, therefore, is produced only
under certain definite conditions. Thus, a compound such as ammonium
phosphomolybdate is well fitted for use in analytical chemistry for the pre-
cipitation of phosphoric acid, but it is only when the precipitate is produced
under definite conditions that it is suitable as a form for weighing. There
are, however, often clearly defined limits to the composition of the polyacids,
since with a number of pairs no product can be obtained containing more than
12 molecules of the one acid anhydride to one molecule of the other.
The heteropoly acids crystallize exceptionally well. The crystals are often
very soluble, sometimes even in organic solvents such as alcohols and ether.
Drechsel has made use of their affinity for ether as a means for their purifica-
tion. In the field of organic chemistry, certain of the heteropoly acids have
been used as precipitants for high-molecular bases. Thus phosphomolybdic
and phosphotungstic acids have been used for the detection of alkaloids and
the latter can serve in the separation of the cleavage products of albumin.
Further information concerning the preparation and analysis of polyacids may
be found, for example, in a compilation by Rosenheim and Jaenicke, Z. anorg.
Chem. 101, 215 (1917).
The constitution of the polyacids is still a subject for speculation. Miolati
and Rosenheim have assumed that one atom can be regarded as the central
atom, around which six substituents are grouped. As the central constituent,
phosphorus, silicon or boron can serve. Sometimes water, H2O, serves as one
of the six substituents and we have the following hypothetical acids:
or H7[PO6]; Si g j ^ 1 or H,[SiOJ; B ( ° g » or H,[BOJ.
If to each of the 6 atoms of oxygen foreign acid anhydrides are added the follow-
ing types of acids result:
H7P(W2O,)6 H8Si(W2O7)3 H9B(W2O7)e
phosphotungstic acid silicotungstic acid borotungstic acid
Pfeiffer has assumed an inner complex with a coordination number of 6
and an outer one with a coordination number of 12 and deduced a similar
formula for phosphotungstic acid: — H7[(PO6)(WO3)i2J.
152 HETEROPOLYACIDS AND THEIR SALTS.

Copaux assumes that two atoms of hydrogen can also act as the central
atom. In this way the hypothetical acid H2 « or H^H^Oe) is obtained,
from which metatungstic acid, Hio[H2(W207)6], is derived.

116. Ammonium Phosphomolybdate, (NH4)3PO4 • 13 MoO3 • H2O.

Treat a concentrated solution of 24 g. ammonium molybdate
with concentrated nitric acid until the precipitate of molybdic acid
first appearing has redissolved and the solution remains clear even
on boiling. On adding a solution of 3.6 g. of sodium phosphate the
well-known, yellow precipitate is produced. Wash this and dry
it in the steam closet. Yield, about 20 g.
117. Silicotungstic Acid, H8[Si(W2O7)6] • 39 H2O.
First prepare silicic acid hydrogel by dissolving 50 g. of com-
mercial, precipitated silicic acid in 12 g. of sodium hydroxide and
50 c.c. of water, diluting to 200 c.c, heating to about 100°, and
precipitating with hydrochloric acid. Dilute further with hot
water, drain the hydrogel on linen cloth in a large Biichner funnel
and wash with hot water. Stir up the hydrogel in a dish with
hot water and again drain it on the linen cloth.
Neutralize a solution of 50 g. pure, commercial sodium tungstate
in 200 c.c. of water with about 80 c.c. of 2-normal sulphuric acid,
using litmus paper as indicator. Have this solution boiling, add
the hydrogel above obtained, and boil the mixture until a filtered
sample no longer gives a yellow precipitate of tungstic acid when
acidified with hydrochloric acid. During the boiling add a little
2-normal sulphuric acid whenever the solution becomes alkaline
(in all about 20 c.c). This operation should take half to three-
quarters of an hour. Water should be added from time to time
to replace that lost by evaporation. Finally, filter the solution.
Cool the nitrate, which amounts to about 200 c.c. in volume, and
acidify it strongly by adding about 25 c.c. of concentrated sul-
phuric acid. Again cool and add ether, little by little with con-
stant shaking, until on settling in a separatory funnel three
layers are formed: on top an ethereal, in the middle an aqueous
solution, and underneath a thick, oily layer of a liquid compound
of silico-tungstic acid with ether. If this lowest layer does not
form, or forms but incompletely, more sulphuric acid must be
added. Allow the whole to stand over night, then draw off the
 PLATINOTYPES 153

bottom layer into a dry beaker, free it from drops of water by pour-
ing it back and forth into dry beakers, and remove the ether by
warming it for some time upon the water bath. Dissolve the resi-
due in a little water, filter the solution, concentrate it to a small
volume, and bring it to crystallization by surrounding the beaker
with ice. If no crystals separate, the solution must be concen-
trated still further. Drain the crystals quickly from the liquid; do
not wash this product, but free it from mother-liquor by spreading
it on an unglazed plate. After the crystals have become white on
the porous plate, dry them completely by letting them remain in
a vacuum desiccator over sulphuric acid. Yield, 13 to 14 g.
When working with larger amounts of silicotungstic acid, large
characteristic crystals can be obtained by slow evaporation in a
vacuum desiccator.

ORGANOCOMPLEX COMPOUNDS.
118. Potassium Ferric Oxalate, K3[Fe(C2O4)3]; Platinotypes.
Oxidize a solution of 35 g. of crystallized ferrous sulphate in
100 c.c. of water by boiling it with just the necessary amount of
nitric acid (test with potassium ferricyanide). Dilute the liquid
to 2 liters, add ammonia and wash the precipitate of hydrated ferric
oxide by decantation for several days, then collect it on a large,
plaited filter and wash it with hot water.
To a hot solution of 44 g. of crystallized acid potassium oxalate
in 100 c.c. of water add the ferric oxide hydrogel a little at a time
until no more will dissolve. Such a solution is sensitive to direct
sunlight. Filter and concentrate the filtrate to crystallization,
wash the emerald-green crystals with water and alcohol, and dry
them in a vacuum desiccator over sulphuric acid.
Platinotypes.
Potassium ferric oxalate is changed by the action of light to potassium
ferrous oxalate, and the latter reduces platinum salts to metallic platinum.
Soak a piece of filter paper, the size of a photographic plate,
with potassium ferric oxalate solution and dry it in the hot closet.
Then place the paper in a shallow glass tray; wet it uniformly with
about 2 c.c. of a 5% chloroplatinic acid solution, whereupon it
turns yellowish red; and dry it again, avoiding any strong illumi-
nation. Then expose it for about an hour to a medium light under
154 ORGANOCOMPLEX COMPOUNDS.

a paper stencil in a printing frame. At the end of the exposure,

only the outlines of the pattern are to be distinguished, but the
print may be developed by placing it for about one minute in a
warm solution of potassium oxalate. Fix the "picture" in dilute
hydrochloric acid, wash it repeatedly with water and then dry it.
If potassium chloroplatinite is used instead of chloroplatinic acid
the picture is developed of itself during the printing, but it should
be fixed as in the preceding case by washing with dilute hydro-
chloric acid and water.

119. Optical Rotation of Uranyl Lsevo-malate.

Aqueous, not too concentrated, solutions of ordinary malic acid rotate
the plane of polarized light feebly toward the left. The presence of uranyl
salts increases the extent of the rotation very considerably, and this is presum-
ably due to the formation of complex compounds, although such substances
have not yet been isolated. For this experiment a sensitive polarizing appa-
ratus with graduations is necessary.
Prepare the following solutions: (I) 1.3 g. of malic acid in 10 c.c.
of water; (II) 4 g. of uranyl nitrate in 10 c.c. of water; (III) 2 g.
of potassium hydroxide in 20 c.c. of water.
First mix 1 c.c. of (I) and 2 c.c. of (III) and dilute to 20 c.c.
Next prepare the same mixture of solutions (I) and (III), add
1.5 c.c. of solution (II) and dilute to 20 c.c. Determine in both
samples the degree of rotation. If the polariscope is not very
sensitive, use instead of the first mixture one which contains 5 c.c.
of solution (I).
If c is the concentration of the malic acid, I the length of the
tube (usually 20 cm.), and an the angle of rotation read with
sodium light, then the specific rotation is [a]D = ~. The
C • t
experiment with malic acid gives for the value of [ao] about
—3°, with uranyl-malic acid, about —475°.
 CHAPTER V.

COMPOUNDS CONTAINING A COMPLEX POSITIVE

COMPONENT.
THE fundamental principles involved in the formation and dissociation of
compounds containing complex cations are essentially the same as in com-
pounds with complex anions. For example, hexamminenickelous bromide
is formed as represented by the equation:
NiBr2 + 6 NH, = [Ni(NH3)6] Bra;
hexaaquochromic chloride:
CrCl3 + 6 H2O = [Cr(H2O)6] Cl3;
ammonium chloride is formed either in a similar manner:
NH 3 + HC1 - [NH3.H]C1;
or by the association of the ions:
NH 4 + + Cl- = NH4C1.
The last two equations, viewed in the light of Werner's theory of secondary
valences (cf. page 141), lead to the following structural formula:

H—N-H- -Cl.
H^ J
Compounds with complex cations dissociate according to reactions which
are the raverse of the reactions of their formation; naturally both formation
and dissociation may take place in stages.
In the production of complex cations, ammonia and water come most
frequently into consideration. Among the ammonia compounds, those in
which ammonia, or a substituted ammonia, is joined to hydrogen (ammonium
or substituted ammonium compounds) are to be distinguished from those
in which ammonia, or a substituted ammonia, is joined to metal. The classi-
fication which follows is based upon this distinction.
Other complex-producing substances than those mentioned are less often
met with. As representative of the compounds which they form, the nitric-
oxide-metal compounds (cf. the well-known test for nitric acid with ferrous
sulphate) may be mentioned, as well as the addition products with alcohol,
ether, and ethyl acetate, which are similar in nature to the hydrates.
155
156 AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS.

AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS AND SUBSTITUTED AMMONIUM

COMPOUNDS.
120. Dissociation of Ammonium Chloride.
The fact that the vapor density determination of ammonium chloride
shows the molecular weight to be but one-half the formula weight, leads to
the conclusion that the number of molecules is doubled by the dissociation of
the substance into ammonia and hydrogen chloride. If the compound is
volatilized into an atmosphere either of ammonia or of hydrogen chloride, the
dissociation is driven back in accordance with the mass-action law — this
phenomenon being especially pronounced when working at lower temper-
atures and under reduced pressure. In the complete absence of water the
dissociation fails to take place, thus showing in a remarkable manner the
catalytic effect of traces of moisture.
The dissociation of ammonium chloride may be demonstrated qualita-
tively, by taking advantage of the greater velocity at which the lighter
ammonia diffuses as compared with the heavier hydrogen chloride; the
products of diffusion may be most conveniently separated by the use of a
diaphragm.
Fasten a piece of combustion tubing, 20 cm. long, in a hori-
zontal position. Insert a loose plug of asbestos at the middle of
the tube, and place about a gram of ammonium chloride on one
side of the plug. Heat the asbestos diaphragm and the ammonium
chloride by means of a wide burner so that a slow sublimation
takes place and the entire tube becomes filled with the vapors.
After a few minutes test the gases at both ends of the tube with
moist litmus paper. An acid reaction is shown on the side of
the asbestos plug on which the solid salt was placed, while on the
other side an alkaline reaction is obtained.
131. Hydroxylamine Sulphate, [NH2OH.H]2SO4.
Sodium nitrite and sodium bisulphite react together in cold aqueous solu-
tion, at first molecule for molecule, forming nitrososulphonate of sodium:
ONjONaTHiSOjNa = NaOH + ON-SO3Na.
Then, by the immediate taking up of a second molecule of sodium bisul-
phite, the stable sodium salt of hydroxylaminedisulphonic acid results:
ON-SO3Na + NaHSO3 = HO-N(SO3Na)2.
If the solution is warm a third molecule of sodium bisulphite reacts and
nitrilo-sulphonate of sodium is formed.
When heated above 100° with water the sodium salt of hydroxylaminedi-
sulphonic acid is hydrolyzed into hydroxylamine and sodium bisulphate:
HON(SO 3 Na), + 2 H2O = H0NH 2 + 2 NaHSO4,
 HYDROXYLAMINE SULPHATE 157

and these substances interact to form hydroxylamine sulphate,

and neutral sodium sulphate. The presence of barium chloride favors this
reaction, since the sulphate ions are thereby precipitated as fast as they are
formed. The filtrate then contains, in addition to free hydrochloric acid
only hydroxylamine hydrochloride, HONH2-HC1, and sodium chloride, and
these can be separated by means of alcohol.
Hydroxylamine is of great importance in organic chemistry, where it is
used both as a reducing agent and as a reagent for the carbonyl groups of
aldehydes and ketones:
(CH3)2C;O + H 2 ;NOH = (CH3)2C : N O H + H 2 O.
acetone acetone-oxime

Hydrazine (No. 122) and semicarbazid (No. 123) show a similar behavior:
(CH3)2CO + H 2 NNH 2 = (CH3)2C : N-NH 2 + H2O
hydrazine acetone-hydrazone
2 (CH 3 ) 2 CO + H 2 N - N H 2 = (CH3)2C : N - N : C(CH 3 ) 2 + 2 H 2 O
acetone-azine
(CH3)2CO + H 2 N-NH-CO-NH 2 = (CH3)2C : N-NHCONH 2 +H 2 O
semicarbazide acetone-semicarbazone

Saturate a solution of 143 g. crystallized sodium carbonate in

100 c.c. water with sulphur dioxide (from 150 g. copper and 600 g.
concentrated sulphuric acid). Cool the solution to 0° with ice and
salt, add 300 g. pulverized ice and then with mechanical stirring
allow a solution of 60 g. of sodium nitrate in 100 c.c. water to drop
in slowly. Finally add 50 c.c. of glacial acetic acid.
Place the solution in a round-bottomed flask, and heat it to
boiling upon a Babo funnel. To the boiling liquid add a hot
solution of barium chloride (about 250 g. of the crystallized
salt in 300 c.c. water), avoiding an appreciable excess, until a
little of the solution on being filtered is found free from sul-
phate. The duration of this operation is about one hour.
Allow the liquid to settle, filter and evaporate the filtrate, at first
over a free flame and finally to dryness on the water bath. Break
up frequently the crusts of salt which are formed, and draw them
up on to the sides of the dish. Place the anhydrous residue in a
flask and extract it three times by boiling it with alcohol, using
200, 100, and 50 grams respectively of the latter; evaporate the
alcoholic filtrate to a small volume, allow the solution to cool
completely, collect the crystals on a filter, and evaporate the cold
mother-liquor to obtain more crystals. Recrystallize the crude
 158 SUBSTITUTED AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS.
product from half its weight of hot water. Yield, 10 to 14 g. of
hydroxylamine chloride.
Heat a trace of the hydroxylamine salt with Fehling's solution;
cuprous oxide is precipitated.
Potassium Salt of Hydroxylaminedisulphonic Acid. On add-
ing a saturated potassium acetate solution to some of the solution
of the sodium salt of hydroxylaminedisulphonic acid obtained in
the course of the foregoing procedure, crystals of the potassium
salt HO • N : (SO3K)2 are deposited. With potassium chloride
the crystals separate more slowly.
Acetoneoxime, (CH3)2C:NOH. Add a solution of 8 g. sodium
hydroxide in 12 c.c. water slowly and with constant stirring, but
without cooling, to a mixture of 14 g. hydroxylamine hydrochloride,
12 g. acetone and 13 c.c. water. Acetoneoxime separates out as
an upper layer which solidifies after standing for some time.
After several hours pour off the aqueous solution and dissolve the
oxime in ether, in which it is extremely soluble. Pass this solu-
tion through a dry filter to remove any suspended drops of aqueous
solution, and evaporate the ether on the water bath, taking the
usual precautions. On cooling, the oxime solidifies in beautiful
crystals; if desired, it may be recrystallized from a low boiling
ligroin. Yield, 10 to 13 g. Melting-point 59°-60°.

133. Hydrazine Sulphate, [N2H4.H2] SO4; Monochloramine, NH2 Cl.

Hydrocyanic acid, as formed by the hydrolysis of potassium cyanide,
unites in aqueous solution with two molecules of potassium bisulphite, form-
ing aminomethanedisulphonate of potassium:
HCN + 2 HSO3K = H(NH2)C(SO3K)2.
By strongly acidifying the solution with hydrochloric acid, the difficultly-
soluble acid salt is precipitated:
H(NH2)C(SO3H)SO3K.
By "diazotizing" the amido group, diazomethanedisulphonate of potassium is
obtained:
N
\
H(NH2)C(SO3H)SO3K + KN0 2 = || y C(SO3K)2 + 2 H2O.
N/
This salt is capable of adding on one molecule of potassium sulphite at the
point of the nitrogen double bond, and the acid corresponding to the salt
 HYDRAZINE SULPHATE. 159

thus formed breaks down with water, essentially into sulphur dioxide, carbon
dioxide, and hydrazine sulphate:
H.N
I ^ C(SO3H)2 + H2O = (H 2 N.NH a )H£O 4 + CO2 + 2 SO,.

Saturate a solution of 75 g. potassium hydroxide in 300 c.c. of

water with sulphur dioxide. To the solution of potassium bisul-
phite thus prepared add 50 g. of powdered potassium cyanide
(98-99%) while shaking; the yellow color of the bisulphite sol-
ution disappears, and the mixture becomes somewhat heated.
After all the cyanide has dissolved, heat the solution on the water
bath, and when, after some time, the liquid has become alkaline,
acidify it cautiously with hydrochloric acid. Repeat the cautious
additions of hydrochloric acid until the solution has become
permanently acid. This operation requires from 1.5 to 2 hours,
and in all about 30 c.c. of concentrated hydrochloric acid are
necessary. Finally, add an additional 150 c.c. of concentrated
hydrochloric acid and allow the mixture to stand in the ice-chest,
when 60 to 80 g. of the crystals of acid potassium aminomethane-
disulphonate are obtained. Collect this product on a filter and
wash it with water.
Treat this salt in separate portions of 23 g. each as follows:
stir each portion to a paste with 34 c.c. of water and then add to
it a solution of 10 g. potassium nitrite in 6 c.c. water. The tem-
perature of the mixture rises slowly to 40°-50° and within 10 or
15 minutes all of the solid salt has passed into solution. Make the
solution alkaline with a little caustic potash and allow it to cool;
about 18 g. of potassium diazomethanedisulphonate are deposited
from each portion in the form of orange-yellow needles.
Dissolve the latter salt in a solution of an equal weight of
crystallized sodium sulphite in two-thirds as much water; make
the solution alkaline by the addition of a little sodium carbonate
solution and then warm slightly until the color has disappeared.
Finally, decompose the salt of the trisulphonic acid by adding an
amount of 20% sulphuric acid equal to five times the weight of
the salt. When the liquid no longer smells of sulphur dioxide,
filter it and allow it to cool, whereby the hydrazine sulphate
crystallizes out. Obtain a further yield from the mother-liquor
and recrystallize the entire crude product from water. Yield,
160 SUBSTITUTED AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS.

about 40% of the weight of the potassium diazomethanedisul-

phonate. Dependent preparation: Sodium Hydrazoate, No. 72.
Monochloramine, NH2Cl; Hydrazine Sulphate according to
Raschig.1
Ammonia is chlorinated by the action of sodium hypochlorite in dilute
aqueous solution:
NH 3 + NaOCl = NH2C1 + NaOH.
The monochloramine thus formed reacts with more ammonia to form hydra-
zine chloride:
NH2C1 + NH 3 = H2N . N H 2 . HC1.
Place 600 g. of ice and a cold solution of 85 g. of sodium hy-
droxide in 160 c.c. of water in a one-liter flask, weigh the flask and
contents, wrap the flask in a towel, and pass in a rapid current of
chlorine until the gain in weight is exactly 71 grams; avoid an
excess of chlorine. Then on diluting to one liter, an approximately
molal solution of sodium hypochlorite is obtained.
Monochloramine. Add 50 c.c. of this sodium hypochlorite
solution to a mixture of 25 c.c. 2-normal ammonia and 75 c.c. of
water. The liquid ceases to smell of ammonia, and in its place a
peculiar, penetrating odor of monochloramine is noticeable which
is similar to that of nitrogen chloride. Nitrogen is evolved from
the solution at the same time, owing to the fact that monochlora-
mine decomposes slowly in an aqueous solution according to the
following equation:
3 NH2C1 = N2 + NH.C1 + 2 HC1.
Hydrazine Sulphate. Mix 200 c.c. of 20% ammonia, 5 c.c. of
a 1% gelatin solution, and 100 c.c. of the above prepared molal
sodium hypochlorite in a one-liter Erlenmeyer flask, heat the
mixture immediately to boiling, and boil it for half an hour. The
solution is thereby concentrated to about one-fourth its original
volume. Cool it, then add 25 c.c. of 2-normal sulphuric acid, and
surround the flask with ice. Hydrazine sulphate crystallizes out
in the form of glistening, transparent crystals which are obtained
pure by recrystallizing from water. Yield, 5 to 6 grams.
This process, which is very interesting from a theoretical standpoint, is
now used technically for the production of hydrazine sulphate, whereby the
cost of the latter has been considerably reduced.
1
Raschig, Ber. 40, 4586 (1907).
 SEMICARBAZIDE HYDROCHLORIDE 161

123. Semicarbazide Hydrochloride.

From ammonia and cyanic acid urea can be obtained, with the interme-
diate formation of ammonium cyanate. From hydrazine, which is an amino
substituted ammonia, semicarbazide

C= 0

an analogous substituted urea is obtained. Semicarbazide, like free hydra-

zine, condenses with carbonyl groups (cf. Introduction to No. 121), and the
semicarbazones thus formed being difficultly soluble, serve for the detection
and isolation of carbonyl-containing compounds.
Dissolve 130 g. hydrazine sulphate and 54 g. anhydrous sodium
carbonate in 50 c.c. of water, warm the solution to 50°-60°, and
then add a solution of 86 g. potassium cyanate in 500 c.c. water.
The next day filter off the few grams of secondary product which
have separated, treat the filtrate with 120 g. of acetone and allow
the mixture to stand in a flask, with frequent shaking, for another
24 hours. Drain the precipitated salt, and evaporate the mother-
liquor to dryness on the water-bath, stirring towards the end.
Place the entire amount of the salt in an automatic extraction
apparatus, and extract it thoroughly with alcohol, in which the
acetone-semicarbazone is more soluble than in acetone; a few
cubic centimeters of acetone should be mixed with the alcohol.
The acetone-semicarbazone crystallizes in the distilling flask of
the extraction apparatus. After it is drained and washed with a
little alcohol and ether, it melts at 186°-187°. Crystallize the
remainder of the salt by evaporating the alcoholic mother-liquor
somewhat and adding a little ether. Yield, 80%.
The above product can be transformed quantitatively into
semicarbazide hydrochloride, as follows: Warm the acetone-
semicarbazone gently with concentrated hydrochloric acid in the
proportion of 11.5 g. of the former to 10 g. of the latter until the
solid is just dissolved. On cooling, the solution solidifies to a
thick paste of colorless, well-formed needles. Drain the product
with suction and wash it with a little alcohol and ether; it melts at
173° with decomposition. To the mother-liquor, add double its
volume of alcohol, and bring the rest of the salt to crystallization
by adding ether.
162 SUBSTITUTED AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS.

134. Millon's Base.

Millon's base, Hg2NOH . 2 H2O, is formed by the action of mercuric oxide
upon an ammonia solution. Since, by merely heating, this compound is
changed first to the monohydrate and then to dimercuriammonium hydrox-
ide, Hg2NOH, it follows that in Millon's base itself the mercury is probably
united to the nitrogen atom, as is unquestionably the case in the dehydration
product. Whether the water is present in the compound as water of crystalli-
zation, or whether it is combined by atomic valences, has not been established.
In the latter case Millon's base would be regarded as dihydroxydimercuri-
ammonium hydroxide (I) and its first dehydration product as oxydimercuri-
ammonium hydroxide (II);
HOHg N / Hg\
;NH 2 OH (I) O' ,NH 2 OH (II).

The ability of mercury to replace hydrogen in certain compounds, with the

formation of substances like the above, which are stable in presence of water,
is also apparent in several series of mercury organic compounds.
Treat a solution of 25 g. mercuric chloride in 200 c.c. of water
at 70° with a solution of 7.5 g. sodium hydroxide in 20 c.c'water,
wash the resulting precipitate several times by decantation,
collect it on a suction filter and wash it further with water. Mean-
while prepare a carbonate-free solution of ammonia by distilling
a mixture of 150 g. concentrated ammonia with 20 g. of lime, first
placing 100 c.c. of cold water in the receiver. Introduce the
moist mercuric oxide into this ammonia solution and allow the
mixture to stand with frequent shaking for a day or two in
the dark. Collect the product on a suction filter, wash it with
water, alcohol and finally with ether, and dry it at the temperature
of the laboratory.

Salts of Millon's Base.

When solutions of ordinary salts are treated with Millon's base, salts of the
latter, which are very difficultly soluble, and free metal hydroxide, are formed.
Shake a little of Millon's base with a dilute solution of potassium
iodide. The solution becomes alkaline, and the brown residue is,
in all probability, identical with the well-known precipitate
obtained in the test for ammonia with Nessler's reagent. Filter
the solution through a double filter of hardened paper, and clarify
the turbid filtrate by shaking it with pieces of torn filter paper and
 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS. 163
again filtering. The solution, after being acidified with nitric
acid, gives no precipitate with silver nitrate.
A dilute solution of copper sulphate, or one containing ferric
chloride, when shaken with Millon's base, is entirely freed from all
dissolved salt.
Oxydimercuriammonium hydroxide. Spread 10 g. of Millon's
base in a thin layer on a watch-glass and allow it to dry for five
days over lime in a desiccator, adding in the first place 0.5 to 1 c.c.
of concentrated ammonia to the lime so that an atmosphere of
ammonia is produced. The product is explosive. Clamp a test-
tube containing a small amount of the substance in an upright
position and heat it behind the lowered window of the hood.

METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.
The importance of the metal-ammonia compounds lies in their great
number,1 in their stability, and in the significance of the theoretical questions
pertaining to them. Among the best known of these compounds are those
containing tervalent cobalt, chromium, rhodium and iridium. Metal-ammonia
compounds are formed by the addition of gaseous ammonia to the solid salts,
or by the union of the two components in solution.
The first method, inasmuch as it represents the combination of two sub-
stances of widely different volatility (very difficultly volatile metal salt and

200

0 100 200 300 O400 100 200

l
Isobar ' Tension Curves
FIG. 22b FIG. 22C

gaseous ammonia), offers opportunity for the investigation of these substances

from the standpoint of heterogeneous equilibrium.
Of the three variables, pressure, p, temperature, t, and concentration, c,
which determine the condition of a system, one may hold any one constant
and follow the variation of the other two with respect to each other. With
temperature constant, the curve obtained by plotting concentration against

1
Werner estimates the number of compounds of the general formula
MXB(NH3)m as 1700.
164 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.

pressure is known as an isotherm. With pressure constant the plot of con-

centration against temperature is an isobar; each compound has a definite
limit (similar to a boiling point) beyond which it changes abruptly into the
next lower compound of the series. When pressure and temperature are both
variable, a curve appears for each compound quite of the nature of a vapor
pressure curve which is known as a tension curve. Along this curve the par-
ticular compound can exist in equilibrium with the vapor and the next com-
pound of the series. In the area between two curves only the one compound
can exist in equilibrium with the vapor.
By studying isobars and isotherms it is possible to determine the number and
composition of all compounds of gaseous ammonia and a given salt and to
characterize the individual compounds by the tension curves which separate
the fields of their existence. The decomposition temperature, T on the
absolute scale, is, for different compounds at the same pressure, proportional
to the mutual affinities of the salt and ammonia. These studies show, there-
fore, not only what particular ammoniates can exist but they give us a rational
means of measuring the affinities of salts toward ammonia. Fig. 22a is
the isotherm curve for the system NiCl2/NH3. The curve shows that NiCla
forms a monammine which has a pressure of 74 mm. at 300°, a diammine with
a pressure of 540 mm. and a hexammine with a pressure of more than an
atmosphere. If the pressure is kept constant at 710 mm., Fig. 21b, shows that
the hexammine is stable up to 176°, the diammine up to 311° and the monam-
mine to 375°. Fig. 21c shows, by tension curves, the separate fields in which
the three ammoniates can exist.
The second method of preparing complex metal-ammonia compounds, i.e.
by the combination of metal salt and ammonia in aqueous solution, has been
up to the present time the one most used. It should be noted, however, that
the principal form in which the complex salt exists in the solution is not
necessarily that form in which it crystallizes out. The determination of the
stoiehiometric composition of dissolved metal-ammonia salts in the presence
of an excess of ammonia is possible by a combination of different physico-
chemical methods (solubility measurements, and determinations of ion con-
centrations by measuring the electromotive force). Thus it has been found
that the composition of the silver-ammonia ion which preponderates in
aqueous solution is [Ag(NH3)2]+, whereas the salt separating from such a solu-
tion has the formula 2 AgCl • 3 NH 3 .
The question, with which of the components of the salt is the ammonia
combined, can be answered by the physico-chemical behavior of the com-
pound (conductivity and transference number) and also in a purely chemical
way. A solution of a cupric salt to which an excess of ammonia is added
possesses a deep-blue color instead of the usual light-blue of copper ions, and
the addition of sodium hydroxide solution no longer causes a precipitation of
cupric hydroxide. From this, and from the fact that electrolysis of the solu-
tion causes copper to migrate as before towards the negative pole, the con-
clusion is drawn that the copper ions have disappeared and been replaced by
new cations containing copper, and that these can have been formed only by
the adding of ammonia to the copper. The investigation of other metal-
 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS 165

ammonia salts has led to corresponding results: ammonia is usually found in

the cation.1
Whether other components than ammonia take part in the formation of
the complex ions is ascertained, first by conductivity measurements, from
which the number of ions contained in the solution is determined, and second
by chemical reactions from which the composition of the ions can be deduced.
If the molecular conductivity, a, of 1/512 normal or 1/500 normal solutions
at 25° is compared as follows:2
Co(NH3)6X3 Co(NH3)6X3 Co(NH3)4X3 Co(NH,),X,
a 402 245 117 7
and at the same time the conductivity of the following types of simple salts
under the same conditions:
Na3PO4 MgCl2 NaCl
a 370 249 125
is taken into consideration, it follows that the first of the above complex
salts must be a quaternary electrolyte, the second a ternary one, the third a
binary one, while the fourth is not an electrolyte at all; this is expressed by
the following formulas:
[Co(NH3)6]X3 [Co(NH3)6X]X2 [Co(NH3)4X2]X [Co(NH3)3X3]
A confirmation of this view is furnished by the chemical reactions of the
compounds. If, for example, X is a halogen, then in a solution of the com-
pound [Co(NH3)6Br]Br2 only two-thirds of the bromine is precipitated by
the addition of silver nitrate. In a similar way it has been found, in numerous
cases, that the deductions from conductivity measurements are in accord
with the chemical behavior of substances, and thus it is shown that in addi-
tion to ammonia, also certain atoms and radicals which usually act as anions
(e.g. the halogens, NO2, and CO3) may participate in the formation of complex
cations.
In one series of metal-ammonia salts the compounds as they exist in the
solid state contain water which cannot be removed without destroying the
compounds. This water remains as a constituent of the salts even when
their negative components are replaced by others, and it must therefore
belong to the cation (cf. No. 134)
[Co(NH3)6H2O]Cl3 + 3AgNO3 = [Co(NH3)6H2O](NO3)3 + 3 AgCl.
The water apparently plays the same part in these compounds as ammonia
in the first-mentioned series, as is evident from the fact that the conductivity
is not materially changed when molecules of ammonia in one of the above
compounds are replaced successively by water molecules:
[Co(NH3)6]Br3 [Co(NH3)6H2O]Br3 [Co(NH3)4(H2O)2]Br3
a 402 390 380
1
For exceptions to this general rule see No. 115 and p. 169 (top).
2
These values are taken from measurements on [Co(NH3)6]Br3,
[Co(NH3)6Br]Br2, [Co(NH3)4Cl2]Br, and [Co(NH3)3(NO2)3] Werner and Mio-
lati; Z. phys. Chem. 13, 35 (1893); 14, 506 (1894); 31, 225 (1896).
166 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS

Besides ammonia a number of other substances of similar nature, such as

ethylene diamine and pyridine, often take part in the formation of complex
cations.
A comparison of the composition of a large number of complex com-
pounds which have been carefully studied from different points of view has
shown that here, as in the case of the complex anions, the number of atoms
or atomic groups which are attached to a single metal atom is in a majority
of cases either four or six. Werner1 accounts for this by assuming here also
that the constituents forming the complex are situated around the central
metal atom either in the four corners of a square or in the six corners of an
octahedron. The ever-recurring coordination numbers 4 and 6 would thus
be a measure of the available space around the central atom, but they are quite
independent of the valence of this atom. This space, which Werner desig-
nates as the "inner sphere" is characterized by the fact that no components
can be dislodged from it by electrolytic dissociation and that the whole is
able to take part in chemical reactions exactly in the same way as an indi-
vidual metal atom. The valence of the complex is equal to the difference
between that of the central atom and the valence of the attached acid radi-
cals. If the valences of the acid residues are sufficient to satisfy that of the
central atom, then the total valence of the complex is zero, i.e. the substance
is a non-electrolyte, e.g. trinitrito-triammine-cobalt. (No. 139.)
Nomenclature. Before the constitution of the metal-ammonia com-
pounds was known certain series were designated according to their external
characteristics (e.g. color, in roseo salts and purpureo salts) while others
were named after the discoverer (e.g. Magnus' salt). Werner, after formu-
lating his theory, proposed a rational system of nomenclature which is now
quite generally adopted. According to this system the names of the con-
stituents belonging to the complex cation are placed before the name of the
metal and are arranged in the following order: first the acid radicals; then
any groups which behave in the same manner as ammonia; and lastly, just
preceding the metal, the ammonia itself. The acid radicals are given the
suffix "o" while ammonia is designated by the term "ammine," and water
contained in the complex is designated as aquo. The number of each kind of
constituent is indicated by the appropriate prefix, di, tri, etc. The com-
plete name of the cation is commonly printed as a single word. The anions are
designated in the usual way and follow the name of the cation. Further
particulars will be evident from a study of the examples in the accompanying
tables, pp. 167 and 168.
Isomerism. It is apparent from the tables on the following two pages
that in certain cases two compounds exist which have the same empirical
composition, and the same molecular weight, but still have different prop-
erties (isomerism). The existence of such isomers leads here, as in all similar
cases, to the assumption that there is a definite spatial arrangement of the
various parts of the molecule and gives justification for the arbitrary assump-
1
Neuere Anschauungen auf dem Gebiete der anorganischen Chemie, 4th
Ed. Braunschweig 1919.
 • TABLE I . — COBALTIAMMONIA COMPOUNDS.
Rational Name. Formula. Old Name.

1. With Trivaknt Cation.

Hexamminecobaltic Salts [Co(NH 3 )JX 3 Luteocobaltic Salts (No. 133).
Aquopentamminecobaltic Salts [Co(NH 3 ) 5 H 2 0]X 3 . . . . Roseocobaltic Salts (No. 134). ^
Diaquotetramminecobaltic Salts [Co(NH 3 ) 4 (H 2 O) 2 ]X 3 . . . Tetrammineroseocobaltic Salts (No. 136). j"3

2. With Bivalent Cation. ^

Chloropentamminecobaltic Salts [Co(NH 3 ) 6 Cl]X 2 Chloropurpureocobaltic Salts (Nos. 130-132, 135). §
Nitritopentamminecobaltic S a l t s l . . . . [Co(NH 3 ) 6 N0 2 ]X 2 . . . . Xanthocobaltic Salts. O
Chloroaquotetramminecobaltic Salts . . . [Co(NH 3 ) 4 H 2 O.Cl]X 2 . . Chloropurpureotetramminecobaltic Salts (Nos. p
130, 138). •**
3. With Monovaknt Cation g
Dichlorotetramminecobaltic Salts [Co(NH 3 ) 4 Cl 2 ]X D i c h l o r o p r a s e o c o b a l t i c S a l t s ( N o . 138). ^
D i b r o m o t e t r a m m i n e c o b a l t i c S a l t s . . . . [ C o ( N H 3 ) 4 B r 2 ] X . . . . D i b r o m o p r a s e o c o b a l t i c S a l t s ( N o . 135). O
1.6 D i n i t r i t o t e t r a m m i n e c o b a l t i c Salts 2 ) r Croceobaltic S a l t s . ^
1.2 D i n i t r i t o t e t r a m m i n e c o b a l t i c S a l t s 2 ) ' ' 34 2
' ' ' ( F l a v o c o b a l t i c Salts (Nos. 136-138). O
C a r b o n a t o t e t r a m m i n e c o b a l t i c Salts . . . . [Co(NH 3 ) 4 CO 3 ]X . . . . ( N o . 129). ^

4. Undissociated Compound.
Trinitritotriammine Cobalt [Co(NH 3 ) 3 (NO 2 ) 3 ] . . . . Triamminecobaltic Nitrite of Gibbs or of Erd-
mann (No. 139).
1
Recently Werner has designated the group NO2 in the complex as nilro (1907).
i '
2
See Introductory part to No. 138. Oi
 O5
00

TABLE 2. — PLATINOAMMONIA COMPOUNDS.1

Rational Name. Formula. Old Name.

Tetrammineplatinous Salts [Pt(NH 3 )JX 2 Platodiammine Salts: Salts of the first Reiset Base
(Nos. 141 and 142.) g
Chlorotriammineplatinous Salts. . . . [Pt(NH 3 ) 3 Cl]X . . . . Platomonodiammine.
>
1.3 Dichlorodiammine Platinum! . . .
1.2 Dichlorodiammine Platinum} . . . [ t( p NH
3) 2 Cl 2 ]
Platosammine Chloride; Chloride of the second Reiset
Base (No. 143).
Platosemidiammine Chloride; Salt of Peyrone (No.
r>
143).
o
TABLE 3. — PLATINIAMMONIA COMPOUNDS.1
Rational Name. Formula. Old Name. o
o
Hexammineplatinic Chloride [Pt(NH3)6]Cl4 Chloride of Drechsel's Base. g
Dichlorotetrammineplatinic Salts .
Trichlorotriammineplatinic Salts .
.
.
. [Pt(NH3)4Cl2] X2 . . . . Platindiammine; Salt of Gros's Base.
. [Pt(NH3)3Cl3]X . . . . Platinmonodiammine Salts.
a
1.6 Tetrachlorodiammine Platinum [ . ._ „__ . „. ( Platiniammine Chloride; Gerhardt's Salt.
1.2 Tetrachlorodiammine Platinum ) . " f Platinisemidiammine Chloride.
1
The use of the discoverer's name is less customary in the more recent literature; but on the other hand, the old rational designations,
which originated with Biomstrand, and are given in the same column in the above tables, are still often employed. This leads to confusion because
according to the Biomstrand momenclature " ammine " usually signifies two ammonia molecules.
 SILVER-AMMONIA SULPHATE. 169
tion that the constutuents of the "inner sphere" which surrounds the central
metal atom are actually situated at the corners of a square or of an octahedron.
Two different pairs of substituents are manifestly capable of two different
arrangements at the corners of a square;
NH3X /Cl NH,v, /Cl
NH3X X
C1 CK X
NH3
1.2 or cis-position 1.3 or trans-position.
If, however, three substituents in a square are the same and the fourth
different, such an isomerism is impossible. The actual lack of isomers in the
latter case and their existence in the former, strongly support the above
assumption.
Similarly, the isomerism of the two dinitritotetramminecobaltic series is
explained by the use of the corresponding octahedral formulas (cf. No. 138).
As has already been stated, the external valence of the complex is equal to
the difference between the valence of the metal and the total valence of the
acid radicals contained in the complex. This external valence may become
zero, or even negative when the valence of the acid part of the complex
preponderates. In the following series of seven cobalt compounds, the valence
of the complex changes progressively from three positive to three negative:
[Co(NH3)6]Cl3 [Co(NH3)6NO2]Cl2 [Co(NH3)4(NO2)2]Cl [Co(NH3)3(NO2)J
K[Co(NH3)2(NO2)4] (No. 115) K2[Co(NH3)(NO2)5]
K3[Co(NOa)6] (No. 114).
The binding power for potassium, or in other words the affinity for nega-
tive electrons, is occasioned by the valences of the nitrite radicals. The bind-
ing of these nitrite groups within the complex takes place in part by means of
the secondary valences (cf. pp. 141 and 155).
2^ ,..-NO2-l-K
N02-Co-N02- -K
^ --NO 2 -J-K
so that of the six nitrite groups attached to the cobalt, three are held by the
principal valences and three by the secondary valences of the metal. Inas-
much as the secondary valences are weaker than the principal ones, this view
corresponds well with the formation of potassium cobaltinitrite from potas-
sium nitrite and cobaltic nitrite, and with its manner of ionizing. For
the further development of this theory, which leads to the conception of
"indirect combination," the work of Werner already cited should be consulted.

125. Silver-ammonia Sulphate [Ag(NH3)2]2SO4.

Diamminesilver sulphate can be prepared in the solid form although this
is not possible with the corresponding chloride (cf. p. 164).
Treat 10 g. of silver nitrate with 31 c.c. of 2-normaI sulphuric
acid and heat the mixture in a small evaporating dish on an air
bath, until no more acid vapors are given off. While still hot
170 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.

dissolve the perfectly dry residue in the least amount possible of

concentrated ammonia (Hood). Filter the solution and allow it
to crystallize. Recrystallize the crude product from water con-
taining a little ammonia. Yield, about 5 grams of colorless,
columnar crystals.
Analyze the product by determining the silver as AgCl and the
ammonia by distilling with caustic soda and titrating the distillate.

136. Tetramminecupric Sulphate, [Cu(NH3)4]SO4-H2O, and Ammonium

Cupric Sulphate, CuSO4-(]VH4)2SO4-6 H2O.
The first of these salts may be regarded as ordinary blue vitriol in which
four molecules of water have been replaced by ammonia. The fifth mole-
cule of water evidently has another function from that of the other four,
cf. p. 191 (top).
Dissolve 20 g. of powdered blue vitriol in a mixture of 30 c.c.
concentrated ammonia and 20 c.c. of water and precipitate the
deep-blue solution (first filtering it through asbestos if necessary)
by the gradual addition of 30 c.c. alcohol. After standing for
some hours in the cold, filter off the dark-blue crystals with suc-
tion, and wash them first with a mixture of equal volumes of
alcohol and concentrated ammonia and finally with alcohol and
ether. Dry the salt at the laboratory temperature. Yield, almost
quantitative.
Ammonium Cupric Sulphate crystallizes on cooling from a hot
solution of 25 g. blue vitriol and 13.25 g. ammonium sulphate
in 40 c.c. of water. Recover the last portions of the salt by con-
centrating the mother-liquor. The yield is nearly quantitative,
and consists of large, light-blue crystals. The aqueous solution
of the salt gives a precipitate of cupric hydroxide on being treated
with sodium hydroxide. The salt belongs to the large class of
monoclinic double salts which crystallize with six molecules of
water.
127. Tetramminecupric Chloride, [Cu(NH3)JCl2-H2O.
In order to prepare this salt, which is readily soluble in water,
conduct ammonia gas through a wide delivery tube into a warm
filtered solution of 17 g. crystallized cupric chloride in 15 c.c. of
water. The ammonia gas is obtained by heating 100 c.c. of con-
centrated ammonia solution gently and passing the gas through
an empty wash-bottle to free it to some extent from water vapor.
 HEXAMMINENICKELOUS BROMIDE. 171'
The mixture becomes heated to boiling as a result of the reaction,
and it should therefore be cooled somewhat to prevent too much
evaporation. When a clear, deep-blue solution is obtained add
8 c.c. of alcohol and again saturate the liquid with ammonia, this
time cooling it with ice. Drain the deposited salt on a hardened
filter, wash it with alcohol to which a little concentrated ammonia
has been added, then with pure alcohol and finally with ether,
and suck it as dry as possible. Yield, 15 to 18 grams. The
preparation must be placed immediately in a stoppered bottle,
as it loses ammonia on standing in the open air. The addition
of the alcoholic washings to the mother-liquor causes the pre-
cipitation of a few grams more of finely-divided and consequently
lighter-colored product.

128. Hexaniminenickelous Bromide, [Ni(NH3)c]Br2.

Hexamminenickelous bromide can be used in making cobalt-free prepa-
rations of nickel such as are required for atomic weight determinations.
The corresponding cobalt salt is far more soluble. The raw material used
and the final product obtained should be tested qualitatively for cobalt.
Pour a solution of 141 g. crystallized nickel sulphate in 4 liters
of water into a large flask and add a solution of 41 g. sodium
hydroxide in 200 c.c. of water. Wash the resulting, voluminous,
light-green precipitate by decantation; let it settle as much as
possible, then siphon off the supernatant liquid and fill the flask
again with distilled water; repeat this process from time to time
for from three to five days. Collect the washed precipitate upon
a large plaited filter and dissolve it in an aqueous solution of hydro-
bromic acid containing about 82 grams of the acid.1 Evaporate
the filtered solution to dryness on the water-bath, take up the
residue in as little water as possible, cool the solution to 0° with
a mixture of ice and salt and then treat it with concentrated
ammonia; an abundant precipitate of violet, micro-crystalline
flakes is obtained and the liquid becomes colorless. After stand-
ing for a short time at 0°, collect the crystalline mass on a suction-
filter, wash it carefully with ice-cold ammonia (to remove any
cobalt present), and dry it in a desiccator over lime which is
mixed with a little solid ammonium chloride. The yield is almost

> Cf. No. 35.

172 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.

theoretical. If desired the preparation can be carried out on a

smaller scale.
139. Carbonatotetramminecobaltic Nitrate,
[C0(NH3)4CO3]NO3-JH20.
When cobalt salts are treated out of contact with the air with an excess of
ammonia, hexamminecobaltous salts are formed. If such a solution is mixed
with a large amount of ammonium carbonate, oxidized by the air, and then
evaporated to a small volume with the addition of more ammonium carbonate,
crystals of carbonatotetramminecobaltic salt are produced.
Dissolve 20 g. of cobalt carbonate in as. little concentrated
nitric acid as possible and dilute the solution to 100 c.c. (or 50 g.
of crystallized cobaltous nitrate may be dissolved in an equal
amount of water).
Dissolve 100 g. of ammonium carbonate in 500 c.c. of water in
a 1-liter flask, add 250 c.c. of concentrated ammonia, and into
this solution pour the above prepared solution of cobalt nitrate.
Draw a stream of air through the deep-violet-colored liquid in the
manner described under No. 108. At the end of three hours,
pour the liquid, which is now of a blood-red color, into a porce-
lain evaporating dish, and concentrate it to about 300 c.c, adding
5 g. of powdered ammonium carbonate every fifteen minutes
(about 25 or 30 grams in all). Filter the solution immediately
from any small amount of sediment and boil it down to 200 c.c,
still continuing to add ammonium carbonate in small quantities
(about 10 g. in all during this final evaporation). Allow the
liquid to cool and collect the large, purple crystal-plates which
separate out. Wash the crystals with a little water, then with
dilute alcohol and finally with pure alcohol. Recover a crop of
impure crystals by concentrating the mother-liquor; extract this
product at the laboratory temperature with 15 times its weight
of water, and precipitate the salt from the filtered solution by
gradually adding two to three volumes of alcohol. Collect this
precipitate and wash it as directed above. Total yield, 22 to
25 grams.

130. Chloropentamminecobaltic Chloride, [Co(NH3)6Cl]Cl2,

from the preceding.
The preparation of chloropentamminecobaltic chloride from the carbonato-
tetrammine salt is an example of the replacement of certain constituents
in the complex by means of others. On acidifying an aqueous solution of
 CHLOROPENTAMMINECOBALTIC CHLORIDE. 173

the carbonatotetrammine salt with hydrochloric acid, there is formed, for the
most part, chloroaquotetramminecobaltic chloride. This is changed, on being
heated in an ammoniacal solution, into aquopentamminecobaltic chloride, and
the latter on being acidified with hydrochloric acid is converted into chloro-
pentamminecobaltic chloride. This is one of the best and longest-known mem-
bers of the entire series, and has, on account of its color and chlorine content,
been called chloropurpureocobaltic chloride. It may also be prepared by
thermal decomposition of luteocobalt chloride.

Add concentrated hydrochloric acid (about 4.5 c.c.) to a solution

of 3 g. carbonatotetramminecobaltic nitrate in 40 c.c. of water
until all the carbon dioxide has been expelled. Then make the
solution slightly ammoniacal; thereupon add an excess of 5 c.c.
concentrated ammonia and heat the solution for three-quarters
of an hour on the water-bath. After cooling add 50 c.c. of con-
centrated hydrochloric acid and heat the mixture once more for
an hour on the water-bath. Drain the violet-red salt which
separates and wash it with alcohol. Yield, 1.5 to 2.5 grams.
131. Chloropentamminecobaltic Chloride from Cobalt Carbonate.
By oxidizing a strongly ammoniacal solution of hexamminecobaltous
chloride containing a large amount of ammoniumcarbonate, carbonato-
tetramminecobaltic chloride (cf. No. 129), aquopentamminecobaltic chloride,
[Co(NH3)6H2O]Cl3, and oxycobaltammine chloride, [Co202(NH3)io]Cl4, are
formed. By adding ammonium chloride in considerable quantity to the solu-
tion and evaporating, the last-mentioned compound is converted into chloro-
pentamminecobaltic chloride, or into aquopentamminecobaltic chloride.
These substances, like carbonatotetramminecobaltic chloride, can be con-
verted into chloropentamminecobaltic chloride (cf. preceding preparation).

Dissolve 20 g. of cobalt carbonate in as little hydrochloric acid

as possible and treat th'e filtered solution in the cold with 250 c.c.
of 10% ammonia and 50 g. of ammonium carbonate dissolved in
250 c.c. of water. Oxidize the mixture by passing through it a
rapid current of air for three hours (cf. No. 107). Then add 150 g.
of ammonium chloride and evaporate the solution on the water-
bath until it becomes of pasty consistency. Acidify with hydro-
chloric acid, while stirring, until no more carbon dioxide is evolved
and then make ammoniacal once more, adding 10 c.c. of con-
centrated ammonia in excess. After diluting to 400-500 c.c. heat
the mixture again on the water-bath for an hour. Add 300 c.c.
of concentrated hydrochloric acid and leave the solution on the
water-bath until, at the end of from half to three-quarters of an
174 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.

hour, a separation of chloropentamminecobaltic chloride takes

place. After cooling, filter off the crystals and wash them with
dilute hydrochloric acid.
For purification, dissolve the crude product in 300 c.c. of two
per cent ammonia solution, whereby aquopentamminecobaltic
chloride is formed (cf. No. 134), extract the residue twice with
50 c.c. of the same ammonia solution, and precipitate the filtrate
by adding 300 c.c. of concentrated hydrochloric acid and heat-
ing the mixture for three-quarters of an hour on the water-bath.
After it has become perfectly cold, filter off the salt, and wash it
with dilute hydrochloric acid and alcohol. Yield, 30 to 34 grams,
which is nearly the theoretical quantity.
Since nickel does not form any similar salt, this gives a means of preparing
a nickel-free product from impure cobalt preparations.

Reactions. A cold, concentrated, aqueous solution of the above

salt when treated with hydrochloric acid yields short, red crystals
after standing some time. Mercuric chloride causes the imme-
diate precipitation of long, rose-red needles of the composition
[Co(NH3)5Cl]Cl2-3 HgCl2. Potassium chromate gives brick-brown
crystals. Potassium dichromate causes the slow formation of
clusters of fine, orange needles, or of large, flat prisms; ammonium
oxalate slowly yields well-formed, red prisms which can be seen
under the microscope.

133. Sulphate and Nitrate of the Chloropentammine Series.

Acid Chloropentamminecobaltic Sulphate, [CoiNHshClhiHSO^ySO^
Triturate 5 g. of chloropentamminecobaltic chloride with 12 g.
of concentrated sulphuric acid in a mortar, whereby hydrogen
chloride is evolved. Dissolve the mass in 40 c.c. of water at
70° and filter. On cooling the solution, long, thin, fuchsine-red
prisms are deposited. The crystals become larger if they are
allowed to stand for several days in contact with the mother-
liquor, because smaller crystal grains are slightly more soluble
than larger ones and therefore dissolve slowly, while the larger
crystals grow still larger. Wash the crystals with absolute alcohol
and dry them in the hot closet. Yield, 3 grams.
When the alcoholic washings are added to the mother-liquor
a fine, dull-red, crystalline meal of the same salt is precipitated.
 HEXAMMINECOBALTIC SALTS. 175

Dissolve it in a little warm water, cool the solution and precipitate

the nitrate by adding concentrated nitric acid (Mass-action).
Recrystallize in order to obtain a purer product. Small dull-red
crystals.
Reactions. The aqueous solution of the pure sulphate gives no pre-
cipitate when treated with silver nitrate at the room temperature;'
on heating, however, some silver chloride is thrown down, but even
on boiling, the reaction is incomplete. On the other hand, the
sulphate radical, not being contained in the complex, gives at
once a quantitative precipitation with barium chloride. The
nitrate shows a similar behavior towards silver ions; the solution
becomes turbid only on boiling.
In the analysis of the salt, chlorine and sulphate are determined
after the substance has been decomposed by boiling with caustic
soda; cobalt is weighed as sulphate after igniting the salt and
heating the residue with concentrated sulphuric acid; ammonia
is estimated in the usual manner by distilling with caustic soda
and titrating the distillate.

133. Hexamm}necobaltlc Salts, [Co(NH3)6]X3 (Luteocobalt Salts).

la. Luteocobalt Chloride. Place 10 g. of chloropentammine-
cobaltic chloride, 8 g. of ammonium chloride, and 100 c.c. of 20%
ammonia solution in a soda-water bottle (pressure-flask), and
stopper it tightly. Wrap the bottle firmly in a towel, fasten it to
a wooden handle and heat it for six hours in a pail of boiling water,
shaking thoroughly once every two hours. Since a strong pres-
sure prevails in the bottle, this part of the process should be
carried out outside of the general laboratory, and before each
shaking- the mixture should be removed from the bath and allowed
to cool somewhat. At the end of the heating the chloropent-
ammine salt must have disappeared almost entirely. When cold
open the bottle, pour the contents into an evaporating dish, and
let it stand 24 hours in the open air, or under the hood, to allow
the ammonia to volatilize. Dilute with 300 to 400 c.c. of water,
add 50 c.c. of concentrated hydrochloric acid and heat the mixture
in a flask for an hour on the water-bath. Add 250 c.c. more of
concentrated hydrochloric acid and cool rapidly, while shaking,
under the water-tap. Drain the yellow precipitate on a hardened
filter paper and wash it with 20% hydrochloric acid,
176 METAI^-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.

To purify the first product, dissolve it in as little cold water as

possible (about 5 g. of the chloride dissolves in 100 c.c. of water),
filter the solution from any residual chloropentamminecobaltic
chloride, and precipitate the yellow filtrate (keeping the liquid
cold) by the gradual addition of half its volume of concentrated
hydrochloric acid. Yield, 8 to 10 grams.
16. The following method may be used to prepare large amounts
of luteocobalt chloride: Prepare as concentrated a solution as
possible of 100 g. crystallized cobalt chloride and 30 g. of ammonium
chloride and add 20% ammonia until the precipitate first formed
has redissolved. Prepare an ammoniacal silver chloride solution
by precipitating silver chloride with NH4C1 from 75 g. AgNO3 and
dissolving the precipitate in 20% ammonia. Mix the latter solu-
tion with the cobalt salt solution and leave the whole for 24 hours
at 40° or two days at room temperature. Collect the precipitate,
which is a mixture of metallic silver and luteocobalt chloride, on a
filter and extract from it the luteo salt with water at 25°. Heat
the extract on the water bath to 80° and add concentrated HC1
until a permanent turbidity just appears; then cool the mixture
by shaking it under the water tap. The desired preparation
thereby crystallizes out perfectly pure. The silver residues are
easily worked up to serve for further quantities of this preparation.
By cautiously acidifying the ammoniacal filtrate from above
with repeated small portions of concentrated HC1 (avoid much
heating) additional luteo salt may be obtained contaminated with
silver chloride and purpureocobalt chloride. This may be purified
as in la. Total yield, about 80 grams. As by-product about 15
grams of purpureocobalt chloride.
Reactions. A cold, saturated, aqueous solution of the luteo-
chloride when treated with ammonium oxalate yields the very
difficultly-soluble oxalate which consists of small, light-brownish-
yellow, irregular crystals. With mercuric chloride a voluminous,
light-pink double salt, [Co(NH3)6]Cls-3HgCl2-H2O, is at once thrown
down. Potassium chromate immediately precipitates brownish-
yellow clusters of needles. Potassium dichromate causes the im-
mediate formation of a precipitate which under the microscope is
seen to be crystalline.
2. Luteocobalt Nitrate by the Iodine Method. Dissolve 24 g. of
cobalt carbonate by warming it with a barely sufficient amount of
 AQUOPENTAMMINECOBALTIC SALTS. 177

dilute nitric acid, filter, and dilute the solution to 100 c.c. Add
200 c.c. of concentrated ammonia, heat the solution to boiling,
and oxidize the salt by adding 25.4 g. of iodine, which must be
introduced slowly at first. A vigorous reaction takes place and a
pale yellowish-brown precipitate of luteo salt is formed. All the
iodine should be added in the course of half an hour. Allow the
liquid to cool and after it has stood about two hours filter off
the precipitate and wash it with water containing ammonia. Then
boil the salt with 200 c.c. of approximately 56% nitric acid, where-
by iodine is set free which can be recovered to some extent by
means of two funnels, one placed in the flask and the other inverted
over it to form a double cone. When all the iodine has been
expelled, filter off the precipitate, drain it with suction, wash it
with water containing nitric acid and finally with alcohol, and dry
it in the hot closet. Yield, about 22 grams.

134. Aquopentamminecobaltlc Salts, [Co(NH3)6H2O]Cl3

(Roseocobalt Salts).
Chloropentamminecobaltic chloride dissolves in ammonia, forming aquo-
pentamminecobaltic chloride. If this solution is precipitated hot with
hydrochloric acid, the chloropentammine salt is formed again, but if the
hydrochloric acid is added slowly and the solution kept very cold, aquopent-
amminecobaltic chloride separates. Less care need be taken in the prepara-
tion of the difficultly-soluble aquopentamminecobaltic oxalate. Aquopent-
ammine salts are also formed by the oxidation of hexamminecobaltous salts
by potassium permanganate.

1. Dissolve 10 g. of chloropentamminecobaltic chloride in a

liter flask by shaking it with 300 c.c. of 5% ammonia and heating
upon the water-bath. Filter, if necessary, and then cool the solu-
tion to about 0°, first by holding the flask under running water
and then by surrounding it with ice. While rotating the flask and
keeping its contents cold, add strong hydrochloric acid from a
dropping-funnel, a few drops at a time, until the solution reacts
acid. Filter and drain the bright-red, crystalline precipitate;
wash it first with a little 50% alcohol then with pure alcohol and
dry it in a fairly warm place. Yield, 10 grams.
2. To a cold solution of 20 g. crystallized cobaltous chloride
in 360 c.c. of water, contained in a 1500 c.c. flask, add 110 c.c. of
concentrated ammonia and then 10 g. of potassium perman-
ganate dissolved in 400 c.c. of water. Shake the mixture a
178 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.

number of times, and, after it has stood for 24 hours, filter off the
slime of hydrated manganese dioxide. Neutralize the nitrate with
dilute hydrochloric acid, and, while keeping it cold by surround-
ing the vessel with ice, precipitate the product by the gradual
addition of a mixture of three volumes of concentrated hydro-
chloric acid and one volume of alcohol. Wash the precipitate
with alcohol. Yield, 12 to 15 grams.
3. Purification of Aquopentamminecobaltic Chloride. Dissolve
the crude product, prepared according to either 1 or 2, in cold,
2% ammonia, using 75 c.c. for each 10 g. of the salt; filter off the
slight residue of luteo salt, and, while keeping the solution cold
with ice, precipitate the roseo salt by the gradual addition of con-
centrated hydrochloric acid. Drain the precipitate and wash
it with a mixture of equal parts concentrated hydrochloric acid
and water, then with alcohol, and dry it in a warm place.
4. Aquopentamminecobaltic Oxalate. Dissolve 10 g. of chloro-
pentamminecobaltic chloride in a flask with 75 c.c. of water and
50 c.c. of 10% ammonia, heating on the water-bath. After cool-
ing the deep-red solution to the room temperature, filter it and
treat with a solution of oxalic acid until a precipitate begins to
form, then continue to add the reagent very carefully until the
solution is just acid. Filter, and wash the salt with water.
To purify the product, dissolve it as directed under 3, and re-
precipitate the salt by the careful addition of oxalic acid solution.
Drain the precipitate, wash it with water, then with alcohol, and
dry it in a warm place. Yield, 9 grams of pure1 substance.
5. Aquopentamminecobaltic Chloride from Aquopentammineco-
baltic Oxalate. Cover 10 g. of aquopentamminecobaltic oxalate
at room temperature with 30 c.c. of water and dissolve the salt by
the addition of 50 c.c. of normal hydrochloric acid. Cool the solu-
tion with ice to about 0° and precipitate it very slowly by allow-
ing 100 c.c. of concentrated hydrochloric acid to flow upon it
drop by drop. Drain off the bright red precipitate and wash it
first with hydrochloric acid diluted to one-half and then with
alcohol. Yield, about 8 g. of perfectly pure aquopentammineco-
baltic chloride.
1
The separation of luteo salt present as impurity is here more complete
than according to procedure 3, because its oxalate is much more insoluble
than its chloride.
 DINITBITOTETRAMMINECOBALTIC SALTS. 179
Aquopentamminecobaltic chloride changes slowly on long keep-
ing into chloropurpureocobaltic chloride.

135. Dibromotetramminecobaltlc Bromide, [Co(NH3)4Br2]Br

(Dlbrompraseo Salt).
Place 20 g. of carbonatotetramminecobaltic nitrate in a flask,
shake it with 80 g. of concentrated hydrobromic acid (cf. No. 35)
and continue to shake while heating slowly over a free flame.
The mass evolves a large amount of carbon dioxide and changes
at first to reddish-brown, then pale-brown, and finally to a dull-
green. When the color ceases to change, allow the mixture to
cool to room temperature and add 50 c.c. of cold water, which
serves to dissolve a little admixed bromoaquotetramminecobaltic
bromide. Drain the precipitate on a hardened filter and wash
it with cold water until the filtrate is no longer reddish-violet but
comes through colorless. Yield, 24 grams of a very fine, light-
yellowish-green, difficultly-soluble powder.
Dissolve a portion of the powder in warm, dilute ammonia,
acidify with hydrobromic acid, and heat for half an hour on the
water-bath. The salt is thereby transformed into bromopent-
amminecobaltic bromide, [Co(NH3)5Br]Br2, which is a very finely
granular, reddish-violet precipitate.

136. Dinitrltotetramminecobaltic Salts, [Co(NH3)4(NO2)2]X

(Flavocobalt Salts).
Flavocobalt Nitrate, [Co(NHt)4(NOz)t]NOi. Dissolve, without
heating, 10 g. of carbonatotetramminecobaltic nitrate in a mixture
of 100 c.c. water and 14 g. of 40% nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.25), where-
by a blood-red solution of diaquotetramminecobaltic nitrate is
obtained. Add 20 g. of crystallized sodium nitrite to this solution,
little by little, and place the flask containing the mixture in a
bath of boiling water for 7-8 minutes, or until the color of the
solution has become deep brownish-yellow, then immediately
cool under the water tap and add 130 c.c. more of the 40% nitric
acid. This causes foaming and a strong evolution of nitric oxide.
The next morning, drain off the precipitate of mixed acid and
neutral flavonitrate and wash it first with a little nitric acid and
then with alcohol. Yield, 8-9 grams.
180 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.

To purify the salt, recrystallize from 25 c.c. of water slightly

acidulated with acetic acid. Collect the light-brown, crystalline
flakes, or prisms, which are obtained, and wash with 50% alco-
hol, then with pure alcohol, and dry at a gentle heat. Yield, 6.5
grams.
Reactions. A cold, saturated solution of flavonitrate (3 g. in
100 c.c. water) gives with potassium chromate a crystalline pre-
cipitate of irregularly indented leaflets which are crossed and
branched at right angles (microscope). With potassium di-
chromate small clusters of fine needles are at once precipitated,
which are inclined towards one another like the branches of a fir
tree.
Flavocobalt Chloride, [CoiNH^iiNO^Cl. Dissolve 1 g. of
flavonitrate in 30 c.c. of water, warming gently; add 2 g. of
ammonium chloride and filter if necessary. Then gradually add
100 c.c. of alcohol to the mixture and after standing 24 hours filter
off the small, deep-yellow crystal leaflets. Wash the product
with dilute alcohol, then with pure alcohol, and dry it in the hot
closet. Yield, 0.9 gram.

137. Dinitritotetramminecobaltic Chloride, [Co(NH3)4(NO2)2]C'l

(Croceocobalt Chloride).
To a cold, filtered solution of 100 g. ammonium chloride and
135 g. sodium nitrite in 750 c.c. water, add 150 c.c. of 20% ammo-
nia and 90 g. of cobaltous chloride dissolved in 250 c.c. of water.
Draw air through this solution (cf. No. 108) for four hours, whereby
the color, which is at first a pale, brownish-green, changes to
green with a tinge of yellow, and a precipitate is formed. After
standing for 12 hours filter off this precipitate and wash it with
water until the last washing, on being treated with ammonium
oxalate, stirred, and allowed to stand for some time, shows no
precipitation. To purify the product which still contains some
nitrate, divide it first into portions of 20 grams; then dissolve
each portion in 40 c.c. of hot water containing a little acetic acid,
filter the solution quickly through a plaited filter and immedi-
ately precipitate the salt from the filtrate by adding a solution of
40 g. ammonium chloride. Cool the mixture and after letting it
stand 24 hours, filter off the yellow crystals, wash them with
90% alcohol until the washings barely give a test for chloride,
 DINITRITOTETBAMMINECOBALTIC SALTS. 181
then with pure alcohol, and dry the product in a desiccator. The
yield is variable.
Reactions. A cold solution of croceochloride on being treated
with potassium chromate gives a yellow precipitate of short,
blunt crystals; with potassium dichromate there appears (but
only after shaking some time) a deposit of short leaflets which are
frequently grouped together in the form of stars (microscope).
On being treated with nitric acid, yellow, feathery crystals of the
difficultly-soluble nitrate are formed (0.25 g. of the latter dissolve
in 100 c.c. of water at the room temperature).

138. Comparison of the Isomerlc Dinitrltotetramminecobaltic Salts.

The difference between the flavo and croceo salts, in both of which the
complex has the same empirical formula, [Co (1013)4X2], can be explained
according to Werner's theory by assuming that the substituents in the "inner
sphere" are arranged differently in space. It is evident that if the con-
stituents of the complex are placed around the central cobalt atom some-
what as the corners around the middle point of an octahedron, there are two
possible arrangements; either the two constituents,. X, which are different
from the other four, are arranged opposite to one another and are connected
by the hypothetical axis of the octahedron (trans-position), or they are situ-
ated side by side and are joined by one edge of the octahedron (cis-position).
If the corners of the octahedron are numbered from one to six, as shown below,
then the first arrangement may be designated as 1 • 6 and the latter as 1 • 2.

I X X

5> I 72 KH 3/ 7KH» NHj/ 1 7X

/ C o / / Co / / Co /

6 X NH 3
1, 6: trans-position 1, 2 : cis-position

The usefulness of t h e above conception of isomerism is shown, among

other ways, b y t h e fact t h a t it does n o t allow isomers t o exist of the com-
plexes in which only one of t h e substituents is different from t h e others;
in reality no such isomers have been observed. I t has been found that the
crooeo salts correspond t o t h e trans arrangement, t h e flavo salts to the cis
arrangement. T h e praseo salts belong t o t h e trans series.
It is of fundamental importance with respect t o Werner's conception of the
structure of complex cobalt compounds, t h a t it has been found possible t o
prepare isomers capable of rotating the plane of polarized light in opposite
182 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.

directions, optical isomers as they are called.1 According to van't Hoff,

optical isomerism is caused by the fact that the atoms are arranged in the
molecules so that one compound is the mirror-image of the other, just as the
right hand is opposite to the left in the arrangement of the fingers; one cannot
be superimposed upon the other. Only in such a case can there be optical
isomerism. When, therefore, optical isomerism is detected there must exist
a corresponding spacial grouping of the atoms. The following drawings show
how this can be with a complex molecule containing a cobalt atom around
which the other atoms are grouped

X,

Co / / C o

A. Both Salts are Tetrammine Compounds. Dissolve some of

each salt separately at the laboratory temperature in concentrated
sulphuric acid and allow the deep-violet solutions to stand for 12
hours. Then add to each, while cooling with ice, somewhat more
than an equal volume of concentrated hydrochloric acid, drop by
drop, until the further addition causes merely a slight effervescence.
Two days later decant the liquid from the small, glistening, green
crystals, shake the latter with alcohol, drain them on a hardened
filter and wash them with more alcohol. Both preparations are
identical and consist of dichlorotetramminecobaltic acid sulphate
(praseo salt). To establish the identity, transform each portion
either into chloropentamminecobaltic chloride (1) or into chloro-
aquotetramminecobaltic chloride (2).
1. Dissolve small portions of each preparation in dilute ammo-
nia by heating gently. Add concentrated hydrochloric acid little
by little to the purplish-red solutions and then heat for half an hour
on the water-bath. This brings about an almost quantitative sep-
aration of chloropentamminecobaltic chloride in the form of minute
crystals which can be identified by the reactions given in No. 131.
2. Dissolve a small portion of each of the praseosulphate prep-
arations in water by heating gently, and when the solutions have
turned a deep, violet-red, which takes place after standing for some
time in the cold or more quickly if warm, add an equal volume of
alcohol and some concentrated hydrochloric acid. Let stand for
1
A. Werner, Bcr. 44, 1887 (1911) and subsequent papers.
 TRINITRITOTRIAMMINECOBALT. 183

12 hours more and then collect the precipitate on a filter. The

chloroaquotetrammine salt is very similar externally to the chloro-
purpureo salt, but differs from it in the following reactions:
mercuric chloride gives well-formed crystals only after standing
for some time; potassium chromate and dichromate likewise
yield precipitates only after long standing, or not at all.
B. Distinguishing Reactions. Boil small portions of the salts,
each with 1 c.c. of concentrated hydrochloric acid. The flavo salt
gives a green precipitate of praseo salt and the solution acquires a
bluish color. The croceo salt, on the other hand, gives a dull-red
precipitate of chloronitritotetramminecobaltic chloride.
To prepare somewhat larger amounts of these last substances,
dissolve 0.5 g. of the flavo or croceo salt in 10 c.c. of concentrated
hydrochloric acid. After 12 hours filter, drain and wash the
precipitate, first with hydrochloric acid diluted with an equal
volume of water, and finally with alcohol. Yield, 0.4 g. of each.
The chloronitritotetramminecobaltic salt dissolves readily in 35 c.c.
of cold water and recrystallizes upon the addition of 70 c.c. of
concentrated hydrochloric acid to the filtrate. The praseo salt,
which decomposes very easily, can be recrystallized by dissolv-
ing it quickly in about 200 c.c. of cold water, cooling the filtrate
with ice and salt, and slowly introducing 70 c.c. of concentrated
hydrochloric acid.

139. Trinitritotriamminecobalt, [Co(NH,)3(NOs)8].

Dissolve 45 g. of crystallized cobalt chloride in 125 c.c. of water.
Dissolve 50 g. of ammonium chloride and 67 g. of sodium nitrite
without heating in 375 c.c. of water and add this, together with 250
c.c. of 20% ammonia, to the first solution. Conduct a rapid cur-
rent of air through the mixture for four hours (cf. No. 108). Divide
the thick brown solution in three evaporating dishes and allow it
to stand three days in the open air or under the hood. Filter off
the crystals which separate and wash them with cold water until
the washings are nearly free from chloride. Yield, about 35 g.
Divide the crude product between two filters and extract it with
1.0 to 1.25 liters of hot water containing a little acetic acid. On
cooling, yellow to yellowish-brown crystals of trinitritotriammine-
cobalt separate from the clear filtrate. Yield, 20 to 25 g.
Solutions of this substance do not conduct the electric current
184 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.
nor do they give precipitates with mercuric chloride, with oxalates,
or with chromates.
140. Hexaminlnechroniic Nitrate, [Cr(NH3)6](NOs)3 and Chloro-
pentamminechromic Chloride, [Cr(NH3)i,Cl]Cl2.
Anhydrous chromic chloride, when in contact with liquid ammonia, takes
up partly five and partly six molecules of ammonia. The hexammine salt
dissolves readily when the mixture is treated with cold water, and from the
filtrate the nitrate can be precipitated by the addition of nitric acid. The
chloropentammine chloride, on the other hand, does not dissolve in the cold
water, but can be purified by suitable recrystallization.1
Chloropentamminechromic chloride (chloropurpureochromic chloride) fur-
nishes an excellent illustration of the fact that the characteristic properties of
these complex compounds are often less influenced by the nature of the metal
present than by the type of combination. Chloropurpureochromic chloride
is so similar to chloropurpureocobaltic chloride that it is necessary to decom-
pose the substances completely in order to prove that the metal is different.

Generate ammonia by heating 500 g. of concentrated ammonia

solution on a Babo funnel, dry the gas by passing it through two
towers filled with lime and through a U-tube containing sodium
hydroxide, then condense it to a liquid in an Erlenmeyer flask
containing 8 g. of finely powdered, anhydrous chromic chloride
(No. 43). In order to exclude carbon dioxide from the condensing
flask, this must be closed with a stopper and provided with an
inlet and an outlet tube. For the cooling agent use a mixture
of carbon-dioxide-snow and ether (temperature about —80°)
placed in a small beaker, which in turn is placed within a larger
beaker so that an inclosed air space between the glass walls shall
act as an insulator.
When the chromic chloride has combined with the liquid
ammonia, forming a reddish-brown mass, stop the operation and
allow the excess of ammonia to evaporate from an open dish.
Triturate the residue with 30 c.c. of ice-cold water, filter and wash
the undissolved salt with a little cold water until the filtrate runs
through of a reddish color. Add concentrated nitric acid to the
filtrate, which precipitates luteo-chromic nitrate. Again filter,
dissolve the salt in a little warm water containing a few drops of
1
For a method of preparing chloropurpureochromic chloride without the
use of liquid ammonia, cf. O. Christensen; J. pr. Chem. (2) 33, 54 (1881) and
8. M. Jorgensen, ibid. 30, 105 (1879).
 HEXAMMINECOBALTOUS CHLORIDE. 185

nitric acid, and, by the addition of more nitric acid, precipitate

out the crystalline hexamminechromic nitrate. Yield, about 7 g.
The residue from the treatment with ice water consists of chloro-
purpureochromic chloride. Boil it in a beaker with concentrated
hydrochloric acid, cool, add some water, collect the salt on a filter
and wash it with a little cold water. Then dissolve the salt as
quickly as possible at 50° in 400 to 500 c.c. of water containing a
few drops of sulphuric acid. Filter the solution at once through a
large plaited filter and add an equal volume of concentrated hydro-
chloric acid. Allow the beautiful red crystals which separate to
stand an hour in contact with the mother-liquor, then drain them
and wash first with 20% hydrochloric acid (1 pt. cone. HC1 : 1 pt.
H2O), then with alcohol, and dry the product in a desiccator.
Yield, about 5 grams.
Transformation of the Luteo Salt into Chloropurpureo Salt. Mix
a solution of hexamminechromic nitrate, dissolved in eleven
times its weight of hot water, with an equal volume of concen-
trated hydrochloric acid and boil gently for from thirty minutes to
an hour. When the liquid has become cold, filter off the precipi-
tated chloropentammine chromic chloride and wash it as above.

141. Hexamminecobaltous Chloride, [Co(NH3)6]CL.

In compounds with a coordination number 4, if the substituents are sup-
posed to be at the corners of a square lying in a plane passing through the
central atom, there is, according to Werner, a possibility of isomerism. Thus,
if the outlying groups consist of two unlike pairs, stereoisomerism will take
place, if, in one case, the two like groups are side by side in neighboring corners
of the square and in the other case the like groups are opposite to one another,
as at the ends of a diagonal of the square. The classic example of this kind
of isomerjsm is found in fo-aras-diamminechloroplatinum and eis-diammine-
chloroplatinum, which have been known for a long time as "chloride of Rie-
set's second base" and "Pyrone's salt." More recently1 perfectly analogous
derivatives of bivalent cobalt have been prepared, a- and 0-diamminedichloro-
cobalt, which have different colors and are characterized by different ammonia
tensions. The pink alpha compound is the more stable and probably corre-
sponds to the cis-formula:
CK XNH3 CK ,NH3
)C (
a-diamminedichlorocobalt /3-diamminedichlorocobalt
pink blue
1
W. Biltz and B. Fetkenheuer, Z. anorg. Chem. 89, 121 (1914).
186 METAL^AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.

The preparation of these two isomeric compounds is described in Preparations

142 and 143. Both of these can be obtained from hexamminecobaltous
chloride, which, as described here, is prepared in much the same way as the
analogous nickel salt (No. 128).
Before beginning the experiment proper, prepare some air-free
alcoholic ammonia solution. Boil 200 c.c. of alcohol, in a flask
connected with a reflux condenser, for half an hour, then remove
the condenser and pass a current of dry ammonia into the alcohol
while it is cooling. Take the ammonia from a bomb or generate
it as in Preparation No. 140.
Dissolve 15 g. of cobaltous chloride crystals, CoCU-GH^O, in
15 c.c. of water and boil the solution to expel all air. While still
hot, pour this solution into 40 c.c. of hot, concentrated ammonia
solution. Filter immediately into a 150 c.c. Erlenmeyer flask
using a 12 cm. filter which has been moistened with concentrated
ammonia solution and letting the funnel hang in the neck of the
flask to avoid contact of air with the filtrate. Keep the filtrate
hot, over a burner, and add enough of the alcoholic ammonia
solution to form a slight permanent turbidity. The flask will now
be practically full of liquid; close it loosely with a cork stopper
and cool under running water; tiny, pink, octahedral crystals of
hexamminecobaltous chloride will form. To collect the precipi-
tate, it is best to use a small filter tube containing a perforated
porcelain plate covered with a flat piece of filter paper. A large
Gooch crucible and paper filter can be used if preferred but a
Btichner filtering funnel is less satisfactory because there is too
much exposure to the air. Wash the precipitate once with con-
centrated, aqueous ammonia solution, three times with alcoholic
ammonia solution and finally with ether, keeping the crystals
covered with liquid throughout the washing operations. Finally,
apply strong suction for a moment, remove the crystals to a vacuum
desiccator and dry over soda lime to which a little powdered
ammonium chloride has been added. The color of the crystals
should be a pale, yellowish-pink. A deeper yellow or brown color
shows that oxidation has taken place.
Yield, 7 g. A better yield can be obtained if the ammoniacal
cobalt solution is completely precipitated with the alcoholic
ammonia, but the crystals are then so small that they are very
susceptible to atmospheric oxidation and are hard to wash
thoroughly.
 DIAMMINEDICHLOROCOBALT. 187

142. a-Diamminedicblorocobalt, a-[Co(NHj)aCla].

The more stable of the two isomers mentioned in the introduction to Prepa-
ration No. 141 can be prepared as equilibrium product by thermal decomposi-
tion of the hexammine. At about 150° the hexammine has an ammonia
tension of considerably more than an atmosphere whereas the ammonia
tension of the diammine corresponds to only 10-20 mm.

Transfer about 2 g. of dry hexamminecobaltous chloride with

the aid of a short, dry funnel, to a dry, weighed test-tube, taking
care that none of the crystals adhere to the sides of the tube.
Weigh the tube and its contents to an accuracy of 4 significant
figures. Stopper the tube with a vacuum-tight, rubber stopper
carrying a right-angled piece of glass tubing with a glass stop-
cock. Connect this tubing with a short-armed manometer and
beyond the latter with the outlet-arm of a 100 c.c. distilling flask,
placing a screw-cock between the manometer and the distilling
flask. Fill the distilling flask about one-third full of concentrated
sulphuric acid for absorbing ammonia, insert a rubber stopper
carrying glass tubing that reaches almost to the surface of the
sulphuric acid and make connection through a rubber tube with
a screw-cock with the suction pump. Evacuate the entire ap-
paratus down to a pressure of 10-15 mm., close the stopcock at the
test-tube and dip the tube in a bath of melted paraffin or sulphuric
acid at 150°. Immediately after placing the tube in the hot bath,
open the glass stopcock very slowly and apply suction for one
minute to withdraw the ammonia. The latter is given off very
vigorously at the start and, if the stopcock is opened too quickly,
powdery solid material will be carried along with the gas. The
color of the solid changes from pink to blue, the latter being the
color of the unstable diammine. Close the stopcock and allow
the tube to remain in the hot bath at 150° for half an hour to give
the unstable diammine time to change to the stabler modification.
Then carefully open the stopcock again, apply a little more suction
and again allow the stoppered tube to remain quietly in the bath
for a half hour. Repeat this treatment two or three times until
a pure, pink-colored salt is obtained. Then, if the decomposition
has been complete, on closing the screw-clamp between the manom-
eter and the sulphuric acid, which was used to absorb escaping
ammonia, a pressure of about 40 mm. will be shown in the manom-
188 METAL-AMMONIA COMPOUNDS.

eter. If some undecomposed hexammine remains, the pressure

will be much greater. Weigh the tube and its contents as a further
proof that the change has been completed.

143. /3-Dlammlnedichlorocobalt, /3-[Co(NH3)2Cl2].

The unstable (3-diamminedichlorocobalt can be obtained by careful decom-
position of the hexamminecobaltous chloride (cf. Nos. 141 and 142) at a fairly-
high temperature, as the primary decomposition product.
Place about 2 g. of hexamminecobaltous chloride in the appara-
tus used in the preceding preparation. Weigh the substance taken
to 4 significant figures. Heat the contents of the test-tube to 72°
but in this case pump off the ammonia continuously until there is
no more of the undecomposed hexammine discernible with the
aid of a lens and the substance appears a pure light blue in color
(about 2 hours). From time to time, tap the test-tube and shake
it a little so that the entire powder is uniformly heated. Finally,
weigh the tube and its contents again, to prove that the decom-
position is complete.
Transformation of /3- into a-diamminedichlorocobalt. In order to
show, even more clearly, that the beta salt is less stable than the
alpha, and to illustrate the transformation, place a few milligrams
of each diammine in separate glass tubes of about 15 cm. length
and 6 mm. internal bore. Evacuate both tubes and seal them by
softening the glass with a flame and drawing out the glass. Sus-
pend both of the sealed tubes in a bath at 180° which can be done
conveniently if a little glass hook is made at the top of the tubes
when they are being sealed. After about an hour it will be found
that the blue diammine has become pink while the pink diammine
has remained unchanged.
The experiment succeeds even in open tubes but the change does
not show as convincingly.

HYDRATES.
The hydrates formed by crystallization from aqueous solutions vary in
composition with the temperature and concentration of the solution. A
systematic determination of the hydrates which a compound can form, as
well as of the conditions under which they can exist, can be carried out in
the light of the principles of heterogeneous equilibrium.
 HYDRATES. 189
1. THERMIC ANALYSIS. If the freezing-point of an aqueous solution of a
salt is determined at various concentrations and the results are plotted with
the temperatures as ordinates and with the concentrations in per cent as
abscissas, a curve AC is obtained which starts at the freezing-point of pure
water and descends in accordance with the law of Raoult and van't Hoff
(Fig. 23). The highly concentrated solutions, on the other hand, are to be
regarded as solutions of water in the salt; the curve CB shows the region in
which the freezing-point rises as the amount of water diminishes until finally
the freezing-point (or melting-point) of the pure salt is reached. In the
region of the first curve, that part of the mixture which acts as solvent
crystallizes out on freezing, — in this case pure ice; in the region of the sec-
ond curve, the solid salt is deposited as the solution cools. The point where

Oonc. Compouijd Cone.

FIG. 23. FIG. 24.

these two curves intersect is called the eutectic point, and is characterized by
the fact that salt and ice crystallize simultaneously in an intimate, eutectic
mixture. Such mixtures, which are also known as cryohydrates, possess
freezing (or melting) points which are constant, and are lower than the freez-
ing-point of pure water; they are on this account used for maintaining uniform
temperatures of below zero centigrade.
If the salt employed forms a chemical compound with water, then the two
systems water/hydrate on the one hand and hydrate/anhydrous salt on the
other hand are each to be considered independently, according to the principle
just outlined. If, as before, the concentrations are plotted as abscissas and
the temperatures as ordinates, a double pair of curves is obtained with two
eutectic points. The two inside curves unite in a common maximum which
is the freezing-point of the pure hydrate (Fig. 24). Conversely it is clear
that by determining the freezing-points of a complete series of mixtures of
the salt and water, the presence of a hydrate can be detected by the appear-
ance of a maximum on the curve, and its composition can be read by dropping
a perpendicular from the maximum point to the horizontal axis. Several
maximum points indicate the presence of several hydrates. In this way
Roozeboom has, for example, proved in the case of ferric chloride the existence
of the hydrates 2FeCl 3 -4H 2 O. 2FeCl3-5H2O, 2FeCl 3 -7H 2 O, 2FeCl3-12H2O.
190 HYDRATES.
This method of analysis does not apply solely to the mixtures of a salt
and water, but it can be used very generally to prove the existence of com-
pounds. It has acquired a high importance in the study of alloys (Tammann
and his students: see articles in Z. anorg. Chem. mostly later than 1903).
2. VAPOR TENSION ANALYSIS. When a hydrated crystallized salt is in
equilibrium with water vapor, its water of hydration can be progressively with-
drawn in the same manner that ammonia is withdrawn from the metal ammo-
nia compounds (cf. p. 163). Two methods are available by which salts can be
investigated from this point of view. According to the first the vapor pressure
of the salt is determined for varying water content, and a curve is constructed
with the aqueous tensions as ordinates and the corresponding percentages of
water as abscissas; if the salt forms a number of different hydrates, the vapor
pressure above any given mixture of the hydrates remains constant, when water
is slowly withdrawn, as long as any of the hydrate richest in water is still pres-
ent. When this hydrate is entirely exhausted, the pressure sinks abruptly,
and a second, and lower, horizontal line on the plot corresponds to the tension
of the next lower hydrate, etc. (cf. Fig. 25). The tension of aqueous vapor in
the case of hydrated cupric sulphate is given in the following table:

CuSO4 + 4.5 H2O 46.3 mm. CuSO4 + 1.5 H2O 29.7 mm.
CuSO4 + 3.5 H 2 0 47.1 " CuSO4 + 0.5 H 2 0 4.4 "
CuSO4 + 2.5 H2O 29.9 "

From this we may conclude that the following hydrates exist: CuSO4 • 5H 2 O;
CuSO4 • 3 H2O; CuSO4 • 1 H2O. The vapor pressure of the pentahydrate is
about 46 mm. and remains constant, irrespective of the amount present,
until the pentahydrate has entirely disappeared. Then the pressure drops to
that of the trihydrate (about 30 mm.), and again remains constant until
this is completely changed into monohydrate (vapor pressure about 4.5 mm.).
The other method of vapor tension analysis consists in determining the
decomposition temperature under a constant pressure of aqueous vapor
(cf. p. 163). Approximate values for the decomposition temperature can
be obtained, however, by finding the point at which
Preset) re — water is given up when the salt is heated in any
40 mm- indifferent atmosphere. In this way crystallized
copper sulphate loses the last molecule of water at
80 " •
220° to 240°, and from this and the fact that the
!0 " - other molecules of water escape at much lower tem-
peratures, the existence of a definite monohydrate
10 " .
has been recognized for a long time.
0 " 1 •jBo I n the cases where the water is not chemically
p I G 25 bound in a compound, but is merely adsorbed (cf.
pp. 41 and 44), either of these methods of investi-
gation shows merely a continuous loss of water with rising temperature, or
diminishing pressure.
The question as to how the water is united with the components of the
 MELTING-POINT MAXIMUM. 191

salt can be answered only in a few special cases. Undoubtedly in certain

metal-ammonia compounds it belongs to the complex, positive component of
the salt, (cf. especially No. 134). Probably the water is also attached to the
metal atom as one of the constituents of the complex in such of the hydrated
salts as are closely related to the metal-ammonia salts in their stoichiomet-
rical composition. For example, cupric sulphate hydrate is analogous to
tetramminecupric sulphate (No. 126), whereas the violet modification of
chromic chloride corresponds to the hexammine salts (No. 140):
[Cr(NHa)6]Cl3
[Cr(NH3)5H2O]CI3
[Cr(H2O)6]Cl3.
The fact that the number of molecules of water in hydrated salts is fre-
quently four or six is quite in accord with the views just stated, inasmuch as
four and six are also the most usual coordination numbers. It cannot be
claimed, however, that all compounds containing water of crystallization
must possess complex cations; since, among other reasons, it is quite certain
that the negative components of compounds have the power of attaching
water molecules.
How much, and in what manner, water is united with the ions in solution
is not positively known. A number of facts make it seem extremely prob-
able, however, that the ions are hydrated.1
144. The Melting-point Maximum for Magnesium Nitrate
Hexahydrate; Eutectic Mixture of Barium Chloride
Dihydrate and Water.
1. The freezing-point diagram of a series of mixtures of anhydrous mag-
nesium nitrate and water shows a pronounced maximum for the composition
corresponding to that of the hexahydrate. Measurements from which such
a diagram can be constructed can be made with the very simplest apparatus.
Starting with the crystallized hexahydrate, one branch of the curve is
obtained through successive additions of water, which by dissolving in the
hexahydrate depresses its freeziug-point; on the other hand, another branch
of the curve is obtained by adding successive portions of a less hydrated
magnesium nitrate which likewise dissolves in the hexahydrate and depresses
its freezing-point. The two branches of the curve unite in a very pronounced
maximum at the composition Mg(NO3)2 + 6H 2 O. As a rule the maxima
obtained in the investigation of hydrates are less pronounced, and often they
are entirely concealed. Regarding the so-called "concealed maxima," see
Tammann. A critical compilation of all the known equilibria between
water and inorganic substances is given in Table 133, in Landolt-Bornstein-
Roth's physikalisch-chemischen Tabellen, 4th edition, 1912.
1
E. W. Washburn. The Hydration of Ions. J. Am. Chem. Soc. 31, 322
(1909); Hydrates in Solution; Review of Recent Experimental and Theoretical
Contributions, Technology Quarterly, 1908, 360, or Jahrbuch der Radio-
aktivitat u. Elektronik, 1908, December.
 192 HYDRATES.
The method employed is the same in principle as that followed
in determining freezing-points with the well-known Beckmann
apparatus, but it is very much more simple because the freezing-
points here measured are so far apart that an accuracy of between
one and two degrees is sufficient. As container for the sub-
stance, a test-tube about 19 cm. long and 2 to 2.5 cm. wide suffices;
as thermometer, one graduated in whole degrees and reading
to 120° is suitable; an air-mantle is superfluous; as stirrer, a thin
glass rod or a piece of iron wire bent into a suitable shape may be
employed, although it is preferable to use a heavy platinum wire
as in the Beckmann apparatus. As heating and cooling baths,
two beakers of from 300 to 400 c.c. capacity, filled with paraffin
oil and provided with heavy iron wire stirrers, are used. Weigh-
ings need be accurate only to two, or at the most three, significant
figures.
Place about 12 g. of magnesium nitrate hexahydrate in the test
tube and close the mouth with a stopper through which the
thermometer and stirrer are inserted. Dip the tube well into the
heating-bath, heat rapidly to 70°, and from that point on, more
slowly. The melting point of the substance is shown, in the
first place, by the disappearance of crystals, and, second, by the
fact that the temperature remains for some time constant (89°).
Next heat the bath to 110°-120°, transfer the test-tube to the
cooling-bath, which has been brought to about 90°, and observe
the point at which crystals begin to appear and the temperature
ceases to fall during the crystallization; by repeating the experi-
ment several times it is possible to establish very sharply the point
at which the crystals appear or disappear. Now, from a weighed
pipette, or from a small weighed wash-bottle, add one or two
grams of water, and determine the amount added by a second
weighing. Mix the mass well with the water, melt it completely,
and determine as before the point where crystals begin to sepa-
rate; it lies considerably lower. Follow the curve in this way by
three or four similar experiments until the laboratory temperature
is reached. The heating-bath should be, in every case, about 10°
warmer and the cooling-bath 10° colder than the temperature
which is to be measured, the latter being first determined by a
preliminary rough experiment. As the concentration of the
water increases, the points of constant temperature become less
 MELTING-POINT MAXIMUM. 193

pronounced, but the beginning of crystallization can always be

observed distinctly by the clouding of the liquid.
To establish the other branch of the curve, determine the
freezing-points in a new series of mixtures: First, take a weighed
amount (about 30 g.) of the hexahydrate, and free it from a part
of its water of crystallization by heating it in an open dish upon
the water-bath for five or six hours, or until the loss in weight
corresponds to about 10%. Pour the sirupy liquid while still
warm into a porcelain mortar, and stir it with a pestle while it
solidifies. When cold, powder the porcelain-like mass and com-
pute the amount of water present by igniting a weighed sample
until it is completely changed to MgO. For the freezing-point
determinations, commence as in the first series with the pure
hexahydrate, and add successively portions of 1 —3 g. of the par-
tially dehydrated salt just prepared. After each addition, bring
about complete solution by fusing the mixture, and then observe
the point at which crystals begin to separate on cooling. More
highly concentrated liquids are sirupy and become turbid on
account of air bubbles, and thus the freezing-points are not so
sharply defined; it is sufficient, however, to carry the observa-
tions to about 70° on this branch of the curve.
To construct the melting-point diagram, compute for each
experiment the total amount of anhydrous magnesium nitrate
present, the total amount of water, and from these the number of
parts of anhydrous salt in 100 parts of the mixture. Plot the
latter values as abscissas and the observed temperatures as ordi-
nates. Between points corresponding to 42% and 58% of the
anhydrous salt the curve rises from about 18° to 89°, whereas
between 58% and 65$, it falls from 89° to 70°. The maximum
point of the curve corresponds to the hexahydrate, and it is thus
proved thermo-analytically that this hydrate exists as a definite
compound.
2. If the magnesium-nitrate-hexahydrate/water diagram were to be carried
out to the freezing-point of pure water, it would show the existence of a second
hydrate with nine molecules of water, and of a eutectic point at —29°, between
the latter and pure water. The characteristics of the eutectic point are more
conveniently studied in the case of the system barium-chloride-dihydrate/water.
Place 10 c.c. of water in the apparatus used above and determine
the freezing-point; then add about 1 g. of crystallized barium
194 HYDRATES.
chloride (weighing it to an accuracy of two significant figures),
and determine the freezing-point of the solution with a thermom-
eter which reads from — 20° to 100° and is graduated in whole
degrees. Repeat the measurements with successive additions of
1 g. of the salt. As cooling-bath a mixture of ice and salt can be
used at first. The solidification point is easily recognized by the
temperature remaining constant, but this point is usually pre-
ceded by a supercooling of about 0.5° before crystallization is
induced by vigorous stirring. When temperature equilibrium
has been established, withdraw the test-tube from the freezing
mixture in order to note the appearance of the separated solid.
Pure water usually shows a crust of ice and large needles; the
solutions show finely divided flakes of ice. If, in about the third
experiment, the neighborhood of the eutectic point is reached, a
freezing-point is at first observed as usual, but after the mixture
has stood in the freezing bath for some time the temperature
again falls until a second halting-point is registered at — 8.4°, and
at this temperature opaque, white masses of the cryohydrate, con-
sisting of ice and barium-chloride-dihydrate, separate. In the
succeeding experiments the solidifying point rises rapidly since
the region is reached in which the salt acts as the solvent for the
water. The deposited substance now consists of barium-chloride-
dihydrate which is easily distinguishable from ice. At the same
time the halting-point on the thermometer becomes less distinct
because the heat of solution of the salt is less than the heat of
fusion of ice. It is possible, however, to determine very sharply,
as in the magnesium nitrate series, the point at which crystalli-
zation begins; and this is especially true since the baths used in
these experiments are of ice water, water at the room temper-
ature, and finally liquid paraffin, instead of the opaque mixture of
ice and salt. Each measurement is repeated several times, leav-
ing a little of the barium salt undissolved each time to serve in
starting the next crystallization. It is sufficient to carry the
curve up to about 70° in three or four experiments. The tempera-
ture readings in the case of the first field (the ice curve) should be
accurate to about 0.1°, and in the second field (solubility curve)
to within one or two whole degrees.
The curve is plotted as before. Between 0% and 24% BaCl2
the temperature of solidification falls from 0° to — 8.4°; between
 CALCIUM SULPHATE HEMIHYDRATE. 195

24% and about 33%, it rises from - 8.4° to above 70°. If the
eutectic point itself is not actually obtained in one of the experi-
ments, it is easily found as the intersection point of the two curves.

145. Calcium Sulphate Hemihydrate.

Gypsum, as it occurs in nature, consists of calcium sulphate dihydrate.
On heating gypsum, its aqueous tension increases until at 101.5° it is equal to
the atmospheric pressure, and at 107° it is 970 mm. or the same as that of
liquid water at the same temperature; in a closed tube, therefore, water and
the dihydrate co-exist up to a temperature of 107°. At higher temperatures
the dihydrate breaks down into the hemihydrate, CaSO4.iH2O, and water,
but these recombine to again form the dihydrate when the tube is allowed to
Cool. In analogy with the transformation of allotropic forms into one another,
the temperature at which the above reaction is reversible is known as the
transition point.
Gypsum is dehydrated technically by heating the powdered mineral in
iron kettles to about 130° while stirring. The product is the ordinary plaster
of Paris, which consists of calcium sulphate hemihydrate, and which when
mixed with water at a temperature below 107° takes up some of the latter to
again form the dihydrate. This solidifies to a solid mass of interlocking
crystal needles. The production of plaster casts is accomplished in this
manner. When heated to 160°, gypsum becomes "dead burnt," or com-
pletely dehydrated, in which form it does not readily unite with water again.
The conversion of the dihydrate to hemihydrate can be effected below
107° if the aqueous tension is lowered by the presence of other substances.
Thus under a saturated solution of common salt the hemihydrate is formed
at 77°, and under a saturated solution of magnesium chloride at about 11°.
The dehydration is effected very rapidly by heating gypsum in concentrated
nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.4) on the water bath.

Prepare calcium sulphate dihydrate by adding 120 c.c. of

2-normal sulphuric acid to an aqueous solution of 50 g. of calcium
chloride;, wash the precipitate by decantation with water, and
then with a little alcohol, and dry it in the hot closet. The pro-
duct consists of small needles (Microscope). Mix 20 g. of the
preparation with 50 c.c. of concentrated nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.4)
so as to form a thick paste, and heat the mixture on the
water-bath with occasional stirring. Watch the course of the
transformation by removing a few drops of the mixture from
time to time and examining it under the microscope; after about
10 minutes the finely pointed needles disappear, and compact
prisms with right-angled outlines appear in their place. After
half an hour cool the contents of the dish, allow the solid to settle.
196 HYDRATES.
decant off the liquid as completely as possible, shake the residue
with 50% alcohol, and filter at once with suction. Throw away
the filtrate, wash the precipitate, and dry it in the hot closet.
Yield, almost quantitative.
Determine the water content of the product by igniting a
weighed sample to faint redness. The hemihydrate contains
6.2% water.
The hemihydrate prepared as above consists of larger crystals
than commercial plaster of Paris, and for this reason it " sets "
more slowly. Mix half of the preparation with water to form a
thick paste, and allow it to stand until, at the end of about 30
minutes, solidification takes place. The process may be watched
more closely by placing a few drops of the fresh mixture under
the microscope; after about 20 minutes, fine needles of the dihy-
drate are seen to appear, and after that to increase rapidly in
quantity while the compact prisms of the hemihydrate disappear.
Simultaneously with the formation of the crystal needles under
the microscope, the larger sample grows hard. This change may
be compared with the similar transformation of potassium lead
iodide (cf. No. 105). Moisten the remainder of the hemihydrate
with a mixture of alcohol and water; this time the mass solidifies
much more slowly because the vapor pressure of the water is
diminished by the presence of the alcohol.

146. Hydrates of Sodium Sulphate. Supersaturated Solutions.

The solubility of ordinary, crystallized sodium sulphate, Na^jSO,. 10 H2O,
increases rapidly with rise in temperature, but can be followed only to 32.4°
because at this temperature the solid decahydrate, standing in contact with
the solution, is completely dehydrated. The solubility of the anhydrous
salt is peculiar in that it diminishes with rise of temperature; thus at 32.4°
the saturated solution contains the maximum amount of sodium sulphate.
Accordingly, when a saturated solution is allowed to evaporate, the anhy-
drous salt separates if the temperature is above 32.4°, whereas the decahydrate
is deposited if the solution is below this temperature. The solutions, how-
ever, can very easily become supersaturated, provided they are protected
from dust, etc., which tends to start crystallization. By allowing such
supersaturated solutions to remain in the cold, a different hydrate,
NajSO4.7H2O, crystallizes spontaneously, but since this salt is more soluble
than the decahydrate, the solution standing over it remains supersaturated
with respect to the decahydrate.
Dissolve 170 g. of crystallized sodium sulphate in 75 c.c. of
 TRANSITION POINT OF SODIUM SULPHATE. 197

water at 32°, filter, and divide the solution equally among five
small, clean flasks which have been freshly rinsed with distilled
water. In filling the flasks take care not to wet the necks with
the solution. Immediately stopper each flask with a loose plug
of cotton. Allow two of the flasks to stand in the ice-chest over
night, or longer, until the heptahydrate has crystallized out in
large, closely packed crystals which fill about one-third the vol-
ume of the liquid. Allow the three other flasks to cool to room
temperature; a thick, oily solution is obtained from which,
although it is supersaturated, no crystals separate even when
the liquid is gently rotated. Inoculate the first flask with a
minute fragment of sodium sulphate, whereupon crystals at once
begin to form at the point inoculated and grow rapidly until the
whole contents of the flask have solidified. Place a trace of
sodium sulphate upon a piece of filter paper, then brush it
off as completely as possible. Tear off a piece of this filter
paper and use it to inoculate the contents of the second flask.
Open the third flask, and close it with the thumb, which has
first been well rinsed with distilled water. If the thumb is per-
fectly clean and free from crystals of the salt and particles of
dust, the solution will bear shaking without the appearance of
crystals.
Introduce a trace of decahydrate into each of the two flasks
which contain the deposited heptahydrate. The supernatant
solution then crystallizes into the decahydrate so that the two
hydrates are obtained together in the flask one above the other.
After standing a long time, the more soluble heptahydrate goes
over into the less soluble decahydrate.

147. Transition Point of Sodium Sulphate,

Na 2 SO 4 .10H 2 O<^Na 2 SO 4 + 10 H 2 O.
32.383°.
If a mass of crystals of sodium sulphate decahydrate is heated slowly, the
temperature rises steadily until 32.383° is reached, at which point it remains
constant for a considerable time, because the heat then received from the
exterior is used entirely in dehydrating the salt. If the mixture of water
and sodium sulphate is heated to a higher temperature and then allowed to
cool slowly, the temperature again remains constant at the same point as
long as the heat of hydration is sufficient to compensate the loss of heat to
the surroundings. Compare the corresponding relations in the change in
198 HYDRATES.
state of aggregation (No. 6, p. 15). Practical advantage may be taken of
this behavior of hydrated sodium sulphate for producing and maintaining
very accurately the temperature of 32.383°, as, for example, for a fixed point
in thermometry. By placing a mixture of the anhydrous salt and the
hydrate in surroundings of approximately 32 to 33°, the temperature of the
mass adjusts itself sharply to 32.383°, and remains constant a very long
time at this point, for if the external temperature is somewhat higher, the
heat conducted into the mixture is absorbed in dehydrating the salt, whereas
if the surroundings are cooler the temperature of the mixture is maintained
by the heat liberated in the hydration of the salt. A bath composed of such
a mixture, therefore, can be used as a very delicate thermostat. 1
The transformation MnCl2.4 H2O <z± MnCl2.2 H2O + 2 H3O takes place at
58.089° ± 0.005°. Richards and Wrede, Z. phys. Chem. 61, 313 (1907).
Dissolve 100 g. of crystallized sodium sulphate in 50 c.c. of
water at about 33°, filter the solution, and cause the salt to
recrystallize by shaking the solution and cooling it under the
water tap. Drain the crystalline meal on the suction filter, wash
the salt once with a little cold water, and use it moist in the follow-
ing experiment. Place about 12 g. of the crystals in a test-tube
and insert a thermometer which is graduated in tenths, or fifths,
of a degree. Place this test-tube inside a slightly larger one so
that an air space of about 2 mm. separates their walls, and clamp
the two tubes thus arranged so that they dip into a beaker con-
taining about 600 c.c. of water. Keep the temperature of the
water at 35° to 36°.
To prepare the equilibrium mixture in the inner test-tube,
remove this from its air mantle, and dip it directly into the warm
water in the beaker. When its contents are partly melted, wipe
the tube and replace it in the larger tube. The transition tem-
perature is quickly established, especially if the mixture is stirred,
and remains constant for more than half an hour. By removing
the inner tube and allowing it to cool somewhat, the mixture
again assumes the transition temperature. Before every read-
ing of the thermometer, the mass should be stirred.
The anhydride present in the mixture is recognized as a fine
turbid powder in the presence of relatively large crystals of the
decahydrate.
1
Cf. Richards, Z. phys. Chem. 26, 690 (1898); Richards and Mark, ibid, 43,
465 (1903).
 ISOMERIC CHROMIC CHLORIDE HYDRATES. 199

148. Isomeric Chromic Chloride Hydrates, CrCl s .6H 2 O.

Hydrated chromic salts possess both violet and green modifications.
Although solutions of most of the green chromic compounds cannot be made
to yield the crystallized salts, the chloride, on the other hand, can be crystal-
lized in both forms, each having the same composition CrCl3.6H2O. The
violet salt is normal in its behavior, inasmuch as when it is dissolved in
water the entire chlorine is ionizable, and the solution thus contains three
chlorine ions to one hydrated chromic ion. The formula of the violet modi-
fication is therefore [Cr(H2O)6]Cl3. On the other hand, the solution of the
green salt contains chlorine in a non-ionic condition — according to Werner
and Gubser,1 two of the chlorine atoms are attached in the complex. Since,
furthermore, two of the six molecules of water are less firmly bound in the
salt than the other four, the green chloride may be formulated:
[Cr(H2O)4Cl2]C1.2H2O.
For further details, consult the original article cited in which the above ex-
planation is deduced from conductivity measurements. It has been shown
by Weinland and Koch 2 that precipitations with silver salts serve qualita-
tively but not quantitatively to explain the relations.
Preparation of the Crude Chloride. Warm 100 g. of chromic
acid anhydride (under the hood in the hydrogen sulphide room)
in a flask, with 400 g. of concentrated hydrochloric acid. Red
vapors are first evolved. Boil the solution until it becomes pure
green and no more chlorine is evolved. About three hours are
required, and during the boiling more hydrochloric acid is added
if necessary. Concentrate the solution in an evaporating dish
until it has the consistency of sirup, allow it to cool, spread the
thick mass of crystals on a porous plate, and finally dry the pro-
duct in a desiccator over lime.
1. Crystallized Green Chromic Chloride. Dissolve 50 g. of the
impure chloride in 40 c.c. of water, filter, and while keeping cold
with a mixture of ice and salt, saturate the solution with gaseous
hydrogen chloride. After standing several hours, drain the
crystalline paste in a funnel containing a marble around which
a thin cord of asbestos is laid. Without washing, dry the crys-
tals one to two days in a desiccator; then stir them up with
acetone, which does not dissolve the dry salt, drain the product
on a hardened filter, and wash it with acetone until the latter runs
through colorless. Yield, 10 to 20 grams.
1
Ber. 34, 1591 (1901).
1
Z. anorg. Chem. 39, 296, 320 (1904).
200 HYDRATES.
The preparation dissolves in water to an emerald-green solu-
tion. If this solution is precipitated with ammonia, and the
chromic hydroxide is redissolved in hydrochloric acid while cool-
ing, a violet solution of the other modification of the chloride is
obtained. The violet modification is the more stable in solutions
that are free from acid.
2. Crystallized Violet Chromic Chloride. Dissolve 40 grams of
commercial chromic nitrate, Cr(NO3)3-9H2O in 40 c.c. of water,
add 20 c.c. of concentrated hydrochloric acid, cool with ice and
saturate with hydrogen chloride at ice temperature. Collect the
precipitate on a double layer of hardened filter paper in a 5 cm.
Biichner funnel and wash it with ice-cold concentrated HC1.
Dissolve this product in 40 c.c. water, filter if necessary, add
20 c.c. of concentrated HC1 and again saturate at the ice tempera-
ture with hydrogen chloride. Pour the now almost colorless
mother-liquor off and drain the crystal mass on a double layer of
hardened filter paper in the Buchner funnel; wash several times
with acetone, and lastly with anhydrous ether. Dry the product
in a vacuum desiccator over sulphuric acid. The violet chromic
chloride can only be kept unchanged when it is completely dry;
otherwise it turns green.
 CHAPTER VI.

COMPLEX NON-ELECTROLYTES.
IN this chapter are brought together a number of different kinds of sub-
stances, many of them containing organic radicals, and all of them showing
very little, if any, tendency to undergo electrolytic dissociation. The ability
of these substances to dissociate otherwise than electrolytically is slight, and
most of them can, like many of the pure organic compounds, be distilled with-
out undergoing decomposition. It is characteristic of them, however, that in
the presence of water they suffer hydrolysis (saponification) instead of elec-
trolytic dissociation (cf. p. 60). Here, as in the case of organic substances, it
is permissible to develop structural formulas, and thus the probable structure
of the products of hydrolysis can be derived. For example, it is possible to
deduce the structure of certain inorganic acids from the graphic formulas of
their chlorides and esters. Cf. Cyanic Acid, p. 113; Oxy-acids of Sulphur,
p. 126; Acids of Phosphorus p. 135.

ACID CHLORIDES.
149. Sulphuric Acid Dichloride (Sulphuryl Chloride), SO2C12, and
Sulphuric Acid Monochloride (Chlorosulphonic Acid), HO.SO2C1.
By the term add chloride is understood a substance which is converted
into an oxy-acid when its chlorine atoms are replaced with hydroxyl groups.
Sulphuryl chloride, SO2C12 is the chloride of sulphuric acid:
SO2C12 + 2 H2O = SO2(OH)2 + 2 HC1.
It is produced by the direct union of sulphur dioxide and chlorine in the sun-
light; the combination takes place more readily, however, in the presence of
catalyzers such as anhydrous acetic acid, porous charcoal, or, most efficient
of all, camphor.
Sulphuric acid monochloride is formed by the partial hydrolysis of sul-
phuryl chloride, but it can also be prepared from sulphuric acid and phos-
phorus pentachloride by a reaction which is of very general applicability.
Phosphorus pentachloride acts upon substances which contain hydroxyl in
such a way that phosphorus oxychloride, hydrogen chloride, and a chloro-
substitution product of the original material are formed:
R.OH + PC15 = RC1 + POC13 + HC1
In certain cases the phosphorus oxychloride itself also acts as a chlorinating
agent.
201
202 ACID CHLORIDES.

Sulphuric acid mono-chloride can be prepared in still another way by the

direct addition of hydrogen chloride to sulphur trioxide:
SO3 + HC1 = HO.SO2C1.
All acid chlorides have a choking, often very disagreeable odor, and all
fume when exposed to moist air. In preparing them, moisture must be
excluded with great care.
Sulphuryl Chloride. Connect in series a 500-c.c. distilling flask,
a fairly long condenser, and a receiving flask, making all the joints
tight with closely fitting cork stoppers. From the receiver lead
an escape-tube to the ventilating flue. Through the cork in the
neck of the distilling flask pass two tubes, reaching to the bottom
of the flask, by means of which sulphur dioxide and chlorine can
be introduced separately. Allow the distilling flask to rest in a
porcelain dish on a water-bath, which is not heated at the start.
Place 50 g. of camphor in the distilling flask and fill the porce-
lain dish wth water and a few pieces of ice. Generate sulphur
dioxide from 400 g. of copper turnings and 800 g. of concentrated
sulphuric acid (or from bisulphite solution, see note, p. 71).
Pass the gas first through a sulphuric acid wash bottle and then
into the distilling flask, where it is taken up by the camphor, with
which it forms a colorless liquid. Then begin to introduce chlorine,
which is likewise dried by sulphuric acid (cf. No. 42, p. 69).
Regulate the evolution of the two gases so that about equal
amounts of each bubble through the washing bottles; an excess of
chlorine colors the contents of the distilling flask yellow. Con-
tinue the process until this flask is a little more than half filled.
Towards the end allow first an excess of chlorine to collect in the
flask and then strengthen the stream of sulphur dioxide until this
excess is just removed, after which stop the evolution of the gases.
After some time — six to twelve hours — remove the porcelain
dish and heat the flask on the water-bath as long as anything
distils over; at first a considerable quantity of gas is evolved. If
the distillate contains free chlorine remove it by shaking the
liquid with mercury (cf. Nos. 51 and 52), and filtering through
a perfectly dry asbestos felt in a Gooch crucible. Finally redistil
the material from a distilling flask provided with a thermometer
and a condenser. Boiling-point, 69.5°.
A mixture of a few drops of sulphuryl chloride and a few c.c. of
water reacts slowly with the formation of sulphuric and hydro-
 SULPHURIC ACID MONOCHLORIDE. 203

chloric acids. Larger quantities react, after some time, suddenly

and very energetically, with a considerable evolution of heat.
Sulphuric Acid Monochloride.
(a) From Sulphuric Acid and Phosphorus Pentachloride.
The chlorination of sulphuric acid by phosphorus pentachloride takes
place according to the equation
SO2(OH)2 + PC15 = SO2C1.OH + POCI3 + HC1.
The phosphorus oxychloride formed acts likewise as a chlorinating agent in
this case:
2H2SO4 + POC13 = 2SO2C1.OH + HPO 3 + HC1.
First prepare pure sulphuric acid " monohydrate " by adding
fuming sulphuric acid to the ordinary concentrated acid until the
specific gravity at exactly 15° is 1.84.
To 200 g. of this acid in a liter flask add 150 g. of phosphorus
pentachloride in small portions from a glass spatula. The mix-
ture becomes somewhat heated, and large quantities of hydrogen
chloride escape. (The operation should be carried out under the
hood, or, better still, out-of-doors.) When all the phosphorus
pentachloride has been added, heat the flask on a Babo funnel
until the evolution of hydrogen chloride has ceased. Transfer
the liquid product to a distilling flask, or a tubulated retort, in
which a thermometer is inserted through a ring of asbestos cord
(not through a cork). Slip a glass tube, 40 cm. long and 1 cm. in
diameter, over the side arm of the distilling flask, or the neck
of the retort to serve as an air condenser; it is not necessary to
make the joint tight. Distil until the temperature has risen to
about 165°. To purify the crude product, redistil it from a
fractionating flask with a side arm condenser (Fig. 7, p. 6).
Boiling-point, 153°. Yield, 120 to 150 grams.
(6) From Sulphur Trioxide and Hydrogen Chloride. Melt some
commercial, 80% fuming sulphuric acid, which can be obtained
in small sealed flasks, by placing it for a short time in a warm
place. Add 200 g. of this acid to a large, gas-washing flask which
has ground glass joints; cool the flask and contents to the room
temperature and pass in a vigorous stream of gaseous hydrogen
chloride. As soon as the mixture becomes warm, cool it by
surrounding the flask with ice. When the hydrogen chloride
ceases to be absorbed, transfer the liquid to a distilling flask;
204 ACID CHLORIDES.

provide an air condenser as in (a) and fit a thermometer in the

neck of the flask by means of asbestos cord. On distilling the
liquid the dissolved hydrogen chloride escapes first. Save the
distillate between 150° and 165° and purify it by redistilling.
Yield, about 170 g. of sulphuric acid monochloride, boiling-point
153°.
Dependent preparation: Pyrosulphuric Acid Chloride No. 150.
150. Pyrosulphuric Acid Chloride (Disulphuryl Chloride),
Q /SO 2 C1
N
SO2C1
The action of phosphorus pentachloride on sulphuric acid monochloride
results in the formation, not of sulphuric acid dichloride, but of pyrosul-
phuric acid chloride, with the splitting out of a molecule of water:
Cl SO2OH Cl SO 2 .
^ O + H2O.
Cl SO2OH Cl SO2 /
For the purpose of withdrawing the water, however, phosphorus pentoxide
serves better than the pentachloride. It is upon this mode of forming the
acid chloride that the customary constitutional formula of pyro- or di-sul-
phuric acid is based.
Introduce 20 g. of phosphorus pentoxide and then 30 g. of
sulphuric acid monochloride into a small retort, and close the
tubulus with asbestos. Distil slowly without a condenser and
catch the distillate in a flask that rests in a bath of cold water.
Redistil the first product from a small flask with a side-arm con-
denser and with a thermometer made tight with asbestos cord.
The liquid boils at 146°. Yield, 20 to 25 grams. Preparations
of entirely pure pyrosulphuric acid chloride boil at 152.5-153°.
151. Sulphurous Acid Chloride (Thionyl Chloride) SOCV
Provide a liter, round-bottomed flask with a stopper through
which a delivery tube and the lower end of a return condenser are
inserted, the latter so as to just pass through the stopper and the
former so as to reach to the bottom of the flask. Place this
apparatus under the hood, and add 500 g. of phosphorus penta-
chloride (not less) to the flask. Introduce sulphur dioxide
(from 200 g. copper and 400 g. concentrated sulphuric acid),
purifying it by bubbling it through sulphuric acid and then pass-
ing it through a tube filled with crystals of potassium sulphate.
1
Another method for preparing thionyl chloride depends on the reac-
tion: SO3 + SC12 = SO2 + SOC12.
 SULPHUROUS ACID CHLORIDE. 205
As soon as all the phosphorus pentachloride is dissolved, stop the
flow of gas at once, and subject the resulting mixture of thionyl-
chloride and phosphorus oxychloride to a careful fractional dis-
tillation.
Through the cork in the neck of a round-bottomed flask fit a
fractionating tower, 35 cm. high, containing a 30-cm. column of
coarse glass beads. Connect the side arm of the tower with a
condenser and insert a thermometer through a cork placed in the
top of the tower. On the first distillation collect four fractions:
(1) all that distils up to 82°; (2) between 82° and 92°; (3) between
92° and 105°; (4) between 105° and 115°. The quantity of the
fractions varies from 110 to 180 grams. Distil each one of these
portions separately in the same apparatus — except that a
smaller flask is now used — observing the following plan of pro-
cedure: pour fraction (1) into the distilling bulb and place the same
flask in position again as receiving vessel. Distil until the tem-
perature reaches 82°, add the contents of receiving flask (2) to
the bulb and distil again. Continue to collect in receiver (1)
until the temperature again reaches 82°, then exchange this flask
for the now empty receiver (2). When the temperature reaches
92° add the contents of receiver (3) and continue to distil into
receiver (2) until 92° is again reached; then exchange this flask
for receiver (3). At 105° add the contents of receiver (4) and
continue to distil into receiver (3) until 105° is once more reached;
then change the receivers and collect the distillate in (4) until
115° is reached. It will be found that the middle fractions of
the second series of distillations are smaller than in the first
series. Repeat the fractionation, whereby the middle fractions
become still smaller with a corresponding increase of the end
fractions. Finally use only the two end fractions; distil each by
itself from the same apparatus after it has been cleaned, and reject
a small amount of each both at the beginning and the end of the
distillation. About 165 g. of thionyl chloride of boiling-point
77° to 79° and about 180 g. of phosphorus oxychloride of boiling-
point 109° to 111° are thus obtained. The yield of thionylchlo-
ride amounts to 55-60% of the theoretical, the percentage yield
is much lower when smaller quantities are prepared because of
the losses incidental to the fractionation: these losses are rela-
tively less in preparing larger quantities. The preparation is not
206 ACID CHLORIDES.
entirely free from phosphorus compounds; it is, however, admir-
ably suited for use as a chlorinating agent in organic chemistry.
Its odor is suffocating and offensive.
A few drops of thionyl chloride added to a little water react
slowly, — more rapidly on warming, — yielding hydrochloric and
sulphurous acids.
To test for the presence of phosphorus, add some nitric acid to
the solution just obtained, evaporate to dryness on the water-
bath, dissolve the residue in a little water, and test with ammonium
molybdate.
Dependent preparation: Symmetrical Ethyl Sulphite, No. 155.
152. Nitrosylsulphuric Acid, HOSO 2 .NO 2 .
Although it contains no chlorine, nitrosylsulphuric acid can be regarded
as in the same class with the acid chlorides, because its characteristic atom
grouping, — SO2. NO2, is entirely analogous to that which is present in sul-
phurylchloride, or in sulphuric acid monochloride. It is, like the two latter
compounds, converted by hydrolysis directly into sulphuric acid.
Nitrosylsulphuric acid can be formed by the interaction of sulphur dioxide
and nitric acid:
SO2 + HN0 3 = HOSO2.NO2
or of sulphuric acid and nitrous acid:
2H2SO, + N2O3 = H2O + 2HOSO2.NO2
Because of its formation in the lead chambers of sulphuric acid plants
when insufficient water is supplied, this compound has long been known by
the name of "chamber crystals " (cf. No. 86).
Place 100 g. of anhydrous nitric acid (cf. No. 34) and 25 g. of
anhydrous acetic acid in an Erlenmeyer flask and surround the
flask with a freezing mixture. For introducing sulphur dioxide,
insert a tube 1 cm. in diameter through the cork. The top of this
tube is closed with another cork and just below this stopper a
side arm is provided through which the gas is to enter. Whenever
the lower end of the tube becomes clogged with crystals, the
stopper may be removed for a moment and the obstruction dis-
lodged with a stirring rod (cf. No. 46). Generate the sulphur
dioxide from 200 g. of copper turnings and 400 g. of concentrated
sulphuric acid (or from bisulphite solution), and pass it through a
sulphuric acid wash bottle.
Pass the gas rapidly into the reaction flask, shake the mix-
ture from time to time, and take particular care that it is kept
 ESTERS. 207

well cooled, since otherwise an energetic, sometimes explosive

oxidation may occur according to the equation
SO2 + 2 HN0 3 = H2SO4 + 2 NO2.
This last reaction is more likely to take place if the nitric acid
has not been diluted with acetic acid as recommended above.
Drain the thick crystalline paste, wash it with a little cold, glacial
acetic acid, then freely with carbon tetrachloride, and dry the
product in a vacuum desiccator over sulphuric acid. The crys-
tals obtained in this manner can be preserved in a well-stoppered
flask for a long time unchanged. Yield, about 80 to 90 g.

ESTERS.
Esters are derived from acids by the replacement of the acid hydrogen
atoms by hydrocarbon radicals; they are often called "etherial salts," but are
to be distinguished from ordinary salts by their inability to dissociate elec-
trolytically.
HNO3 CH3NO3
Nitric Acid. Methyl nitrate (methylester of nitric acid).

Of the methods of forming such substances the following three will be con-
sidered here:
1. From an acid and an alcohol with elimination of water:
C2H6OH + HNO3 = H2O + C2H5NO3 (No. 153)
Ethyl Alcohol Ethyl Nitrate

2. From an acid chloride and an alcohol with elimination of hydrogen,

chloride:
SOC12 + 2 C2H5OH = 2 HC1 + SO^GJI,;), (No. 155)
Thionyl Chloride Ethyl Alcohol Diethyl Sulphite
3. From the silver salt of an acid and an alkyl halide:
Ag2SO3 + 2 C2H5I = 2 Agl + SO3(C2H5)2 (No. 156)
Silver Sulphite Ethyl Iodide Diethyl Sulphite

The first method of formation is reversible; the opposed reaction, by which

the ester is broken down, is termed saponification and is in its nature quite
identical with the hydrolysis of salts. Since the saponification of esters
takes place much more slowly than the hydrolysis of salts, it is admirably
adapted for the study of reaction velocities (see text books on Physical Chem-
istry). Inasmuch as the two opposed reactions — esterification and saponi-
fication — often lead to an equilibrium in which all four of the reacting
substances are present in finite determinable concentrations, this so-called
"ester equilibrium" is used with great success in demonstrating the law of
208 ESTERS.

mass action. This law requires that at a constant temperature the relation
expressed in the following equation shall hold true:
[Ester] . [Water] _
[Acid] • [Alcohol] ~
It is evident from this equation that to obtain a favorable yield of ester the
concentration of the water should be kept as low as possible. This can be
accomplished in practice by adding concentrated sulphuric acid to the reac-
tion mixture. On the other hand, saponification is favored by the removal
of the acid, and this can be brought about by the addition of a base.

153. Ethyl Nitrate, C2H5ONO2.

Ethyl nitrate is formed from nitric acid and ethyl alcohol according to
Method 1 described above. Since, however, the nitric acid may also act as
an oxidizing agent upon the alcohol, and since, moreover, the oxidation is so
vigorously catalyzed by the lower oxides of nitrogen that the mixture some-
times decomposes explosively, the expedient is adopted of adding urea, which
removes the reduction products of nitric acid. Urea reacts with nitrous acid
according to the equation
CO(NH2)2 + 2 HN0 2 = CO2 + 2 N2 + 3 H2O.
Place in a 150-c.c. distilling flask 38 g. of absolute alcohol, 6 g.
of urea, and 60 g. of concentrated nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.4) which
has previously been boiled with 0.5 g. of urea. Distil the mixture
on the water-bath, and when about one-third has passed over, add
slowly from a dropping funnel a further mixture of 100 g. of con-
centrated nitric acid (which has likewise been boiled with a gram
of urea and subsequently cooled to the room temperature) and
75 g. of absolute alcohol. Continue the distillation until nothing
more passes over. Purify the ester from acid and alcohol by
shaking it three times with water in a separatory funnel, using a
double volume of water for the first shaking. Free'the layer of
ester as completely as possible from drops of water by pouring
it into a dry flask, and let it dry by standing several hours in
contact with granular calcium chloride. Finally, distil the prod-
uct with the bulb of the flask immersed in a water-bath. Yield,
about 40 g. of a colorless liquid which boils sharply at 87°. On
setting fire to a few drops of the ethyl nitrate, it burns with a
pale flame.
By allowing larger amounts of the above mixture to drop into
the reaction flask, the ester may be prepared conveniently in con-
siderable quantity.
 SYMMETRICAL DIETHYL SULPHITE. 209

154. Amyl Nitrite, C5HU.ONO, and Methyl Nitrite, CH3.ONO.

Amyl nitrite is easily formed by the action of nitrous acid on amyl alcohol.
Since neither amyl nitrite nor amyl alcohol are miscible with water, the prog-
ress of this esterification is not retarded by the presence of water.
To 50 g. of amyl alcohol and 300 g. of cold, 20% sulphuric acid
in a 750-c.c. flask add 60 g. of sodium nitrite in small portions
while shaking the flask continuously and cooling under the water
tap. Wait, before adding each fresh portion, until the reaction
from the previous addition is ended and the yellowish-red vapors
have disappeared from the flask. About 30 minutes is required
for this operation. After waiting an hour longer, separate the
layers in a separatory funnel, wash the oily layer twice by giving
it a rotary motion with water (but do not shake it, as an emulsion
then forms which will separate into layers only on long standing),
free the liquid from drops of water, and let it dry by standing
overnight with lumps of fused calcium chloride. Distil the ester
from a fractionating flask with a side-arm condenser. Boiling-
point, 97°. Yield, about 60 grams.
Methyl Nitrite.
Methyl alcohol and amyl nitrite interact readily with the formation of
methyl nitrite and amyl alcohol. Amyl nitrite is much used in organic
chemistry as a reagent in preparing nitroso and diazo compounds.
Mix amyl nitrite with about one-third its weight of methyl
alcohol. After a short time, or sooner on warming gently, methyl
nitrite (boiling-point, — 12°) begins to escape as a gas. By using
25 g. of amyl nitrite and 7 g. of methyl alcohol, several cylinders
full of gas may be obtained. When set on fire it burns with a pale
flame.
155. Symmetrical Diethyl Sulphite, SO(OC 2 H 5 ) 2 .
There are two isomeric substances of the composition (C2H5)2SO3, both of
which are to be regarded as esters of sulphurous acid. One of them is pro-
duced by the action of thionyl chloride on ethyl alcohol, and upon being
saponified it yields sulphurous acid and alcohol; the other can be formed
from a sulphite and a halogen alkyl, or by the esterification of ethyl sulphonic
acid, C2H5SO2.OH. Since it is only possible for thionyl chloride to have
the structural formula O : SC12, the ester formed from it must have the cor-
responding symmetrical structure
, CI . OC2H
O : S N + 2 HOC2H5 = 2 HC1 + O : S '
Cl \ OC2H6
210 ESTERS.
On the other hand, in ethyl sulphonic acid, since this can be formed by
the oxidation of ethyl mercaptan, C2H5. SH, it must be true that the ethyl
is bound directly to the sulphur atom, and that therefore the compound has
the structural formula C2H5. SO2. OH, while its ester has the corresponding
unsymmetrical structure
, OC2HS
/
o 2 sX
C2HS
As regards the sulphites and free sulphurous acid there are, therefore, two
possible formulas. The fact that solid sulphites react with halogen alkyls to
form unsymmetrical esters suggests that the sulphites have an unsymmetrical
structure. There is no positive proof as to whether the constitution of free
sulphurous acid is represented by the formula
/OH /OH
O :S or by the formula O2 S X
^OH H
It is perfectly possible that both forms of the acid may exist together in a
state of mobile equilibrium (cf. Cyanic Acid, No. 73). Such a condition is
known as tautomerism or dynamic isomerism (cf. A. Findlay, The Phase
Rule, p. 193.)
Insert a dropping funnel through a cork in the mouth of a 75-c.c.
flask with side-arm condenser (Fig. 7, p. 6), so that the stem of
the funnel reaches just to the bulb of the flask. Place 40 g. of
thionyl chloride (one-third mol) in the bulb and surround it with
a mixture of ice and salt. Then allow 31 g. of alcohol (which has
been dehydrated by standing two hours over a large quantity of
quicklime and then distilled), to drop into the flask. The alcohol
should be added very slowly at first, as the reaction is violent and
considerable heat is evolved. The operation requires thirty to
forty-five minutes. Finally let the liquid become warmed to room
temperature, whereby hydrogen chloride escapes freely (Hood),
exchange the dropping funnel for a thermometer, and distil.
At first, in addition to hydrogen chloride, a little alcohol passes
over, then about 38 g. of ethyl sulphite distils between 130° and
160°. Redistil the crude product after cleaning and drying the
apparatus. About 35 grams of the pure ester are obtained, boiling
at 158° to 158.5°.
The ester is a colorless oil of an agreeable odor, and is some-
what more viscous than water. It is not decomposed by water
even on boiling, but when treated with caustic soda, it is saponi-
fied with the formation of ethyl alcohol and sodium sulphite.
Warm a few drops of the ester with 2 c.c. of caustic soda and a
 TJNSYMMETRICAL DIETHYL SULPHITE. 211

few drops of alcohol, drive off the latter by boiling a short time,
cool, and acidify the solution with dilute sulphuric acid. Sul-
phur dioxide escapes and can be recognized by its odor.
Saponify a second portion in like manner by adding barium
hydroxide together with a few drops of alcohol; boil off the
alcohol and acidify the cooled solution with nitric acid. At first
no change is noticed, but on boiling a cloudiness appears which
is caused by the precipitation of barium sulphate.

156. Unsymmetrical Diethyl Sulphite, C2H5.SO2.OC2H5.

To prepare silver sulphite, which is to serve as the starting
material for this preparation, pass a stream of sulphur dioxide
into a solution of 150 g. silver nitrate in 500 c.c. of water. Keep
the mixture cooled with water, and continue the process until a
small filtered portion of the solution no longer gives a precipitate
with hydrochloric acid. Drain the precipitated silver sulphite
immediately and wash it successively with water, alcohol, and
ether; then dry it over sulphuric acid in a vacuum desiccator.
The next day place the silver sulphite and 1.1 times its weight
of ethyl iodide in a flask, provided with a return condenser, and
allow the mixture to stand overnight. The top of the condenser
should be closed with a calcium chloride tube to exclude moisture;
the outer jacket should be filled with water, but a constant flow
need not be maintained. After 24 hours, add 150 to 200 c.c. of
thoroughly dry ether (which has stood for several days in con-
tact with sodium wire), and boil the mixture six hours on the
water-bath with return condensation, still protecting from atmos-
pheric moisture with the calcium chloride tube. Filter the liquid
from the silver iodide1 and wash the latter with ether; distil the
ether from the filtrate, using a tower containing glass beads. Then
fractionate the liquid in a smaller flask, using a tower with a column
of glass beads 13 cm. high and 1.5 cm. wide (cf. No. 151). Reject
the first runnings up to 100°; collect two fractions, first from 100°
to 200°, and second at above 200°, and ref ractionate these portions
repeatedly according to the process described in No. 151. The
1
Recover the silver from the silver iodide residue by reducing it with a
warm solution of sodium hydroxide and dextrose, and then melting the silver
powder obtained with twice its weight of sodium carbonate.
212 ESTERS.
pure, unsymmetrical diethyl sulphite boils sharply at 214°-215°
(760 mm.). Yield, 12 to 18 grams of a colorless oil, quite similar
to the symmetrical ester. It is immiscible with water, but is slowly
saponified by it. Alkalies in alcoholic solution cause saponifica-
tion to take place more quickly.
C2H5SO2.OC2H5 + H2O = C2H.SO2.OH + C2H5OH.
Allow four drops of the ester to stand a few minutes with an
equal amount of alcoholic potassium hydroxide solution. The
mixture becomes warm and a solid separates. On acidifying
with sulphuric acid and boiling, no sulphur dioxide is evolved.
This behavior distinguishes the unsymmetrical from the sym-
metrical ester.
157. Triethyl Phosphate, PO(OC2H5)3.
Add 14 g. of freshly-cut sodium to 150 c.c. of absolute alcohol,
and after the reaction moderates, heat the mixture on the water-
bath with a return condenser until all the metal has dissolved.
Cool the sodium ethylate solution with ice and salt, then add,
drop by drop, 31 g. of phosphorus oxychloride (No. 46); each drop
reacts energetically and much heat is evolved. After some time,
drain the solution on a Biichner funnel from the precipitated
sodium chloride and rinse the residue with a little anhydrous ether.
The sodium chloride is so finely divided, however, that it cannot
be removed completely. Distil the alcohol and ether from the
filtrate, placing the bulb of the flask on the water-bath and wrap-
ping the upper part and neck with a towel. Pour the residual
liquid through a smaller filter — it still comes through somewhat
cloudy — and distil it from a fractionating flask with a side-arm
condenser (Fig. 7, p. 6). Collect the first runnings up to 110p
and the main portion above 110°; some sodium chloride is left
in the flask. Fractionate the distillate which comes over above
110° twice more from the same distilling flask, after cleaning it; a
pure product is readily obtained which boils sharply at 217°—218°.
Yield, 20 to 25 g. Triethyl phosphate is a colorless oil having a
typical etherial odor. It is miscible with water and is saponified
by it to diethyl phosphoric acid.
 METAL-ORGANIC COMPOUNDS. 2l3

158. Tetraethyl Silicate, Si(OC2H5)4.

To about 20 g. of silicon tetrachloride (No. 51) in a small flask
allow 1.1 times its weight of absolute alcohol to flow slowly from a
dropping funnel. The alcohol must have been boiled with quick-
lime for several hours immediately beforehand and then distilled
out of contact with moisture. During the operation hydrogen
chloride escapes in quantity; it is not necessary to cool the mix-
ture since it becomes warmed but little.
Purify the crude product by distilling it from a small round-
bottomed flask and through a fractionating tower containing a
13 cm. column of glass beads. Use an air condenser consisting
of a tube 40 cm. long and 1 to 1.5 cm. in diameter, which is loosely
slipped over the side-arm of the tower; a cork connection is unneces-
sary. Collect two fractions during the first distillation — the first
one, which is large in quantity, between 160° and 175°, and the
second, which is smaller, between 175° and 185°. On the second
fractionation, collect a small amount of first runnings and then
portions from 167° to 170° and from 170° to 180°, respectively.
Finally, after cleaning and drying the apparatus, distil the
fraction boiling between 167° and 170° again, whereby nearly
all goes over between 168° and 169°. Yield, 13-15 g.
Small amounts of higher boiling by-products are formed and
consist of esters of metasilicic and polysilicic acids.
Tetraethyl silicate is a colorless liquid having a typical etherial
odor; it is immiscible with water, but it dissolves in dilute alcohol
and gradually undergoes hydrolysis in that solution.

METAL-ORGANIC COMPOUNDS.
The metal in the metal-organic compounds is bound directly to hydro-
carbon radicals or to carbon monoxide: Zn(C2H5)2, zinc ethyl (No. 159);
Pb(C6H6)4, lead tetraphenyl (No. 160); Ni(CO)4, nickel carbonyl (No. 161).
The low boiling-points of these compounds, which would scarcely lead one to
suspect the presence of a metal, permit in most cases a ready determination
of the vapor density and thus of the molecular weight. In this respect, as
in fact in almost their entire chemical behavior (e.g. the ready solubility in
organic solvents), these compounds show themselves to be closely related to
the purely organic compounds. It is, therefore, not surprising that the
theory which has found its most specific application, as well as its greatest
success, in the field of organic chemistry — namely the valence theory in its
214 METAL-ORGANIC COMPOUNDS.

original form — should have originated in the discovery of these very metal-
organic compounds. It was not until Frankland (1853) had recognized that
the saturation capacity of the metals in these compounds could be measured
by the number of univalent organic radicals which are joined directly to the
metal atom that this combining capacity began to be regarded as a funda-
mental property of the metals — as well as of all other elements — which
governs their behavior in all of their compounds.

159. Zinc Ethyl. Zn(C 2 H 5 ) 2 .

Zinc and ethyl iodide when heated together combine to form ethyl-zinc
iodide:
Zn + I.C2H5 = C2H6.Zn.I,
and upon stronger heating the ethyl-zinc iodide is transformed into zinc
ethyl and zinc iodide:
2 C2H6.Zn.I = Zn(C2H5)2 + Znl2.
The formation of ethyl-zinc iodide, which does not always prove success-
ful when zinc alone is used, can be accomplished with certainty if instead
of zinc an intimate mixture of zinc and copper (zinc-copper couple) is
employed.
Zinc ethyl takes fire spontaneously when it comes in contact with the air,
and it is, therefore, a dangerous substance. Above all, care should be taken to
prevent its coming in contact with the skin, for the burns produced heal
only with difficulty. With suitable precautions, however, it is possible to
work quite safely with zinc ethyl; it can, for example, be transferred from
one vessel to another without danger if a plentiful supply of carbon dioxide is
allowed to flow over the openings as well as to fill the interiors of the
vessels.

Place an intimate mixture of 100 g. zinc dust and 12 g. of finely

powdered and sifted copper oxide in a glass tube of 2.5 cm. diam-
eter. Lay the tube in a shallow trough of asbestos paper over
a row burner and pass into it a stream of dry hydrogen. After
proving the purity of the hydrogen, heat the mixture gently,
allowing the flames to only just touch the asbestos. During the
reduct'on the mass becomes lighter in color and swells up to a
considerable extent; on this account the tube ought not to be
more than half filled with the mixture at the outset. At the end
of half an hour, if no more water vapor escapes from the tube,
extinguish the flame and allow the material to cool in an atmos-
phere of hydrogen.
Place 100 g. of this zinc-copper mixture and 100 g. of ethyl
iodide in a 200 to 300 c.c. Erlenmeyer flask and attach a return
 LEAD TETRAPHENYL. 215

condenser. Heat the mixture on the water-bath until a thick,

grayish mass is formed and no more ethyl iodide condenses and
drips back (20 to 30 minutes). Then remove the condenser and
place in the mouth of the flask a cork which is already fitted with
a gas delivery tube to reach into the lower third of the flask and
with another tube leading to a condenser. Place at the lower
end of the condenser, to serve as a receiving vessel, a 100-cc.
distilling flask with a side-arm condenser (Fig. 7, p. 6). All
the joints should be made air-tight with corks. After filling
the entire apparatus with carbon dioxide, heat the Erlenmeyer
flask to 180 to 220° in an oil-bath, whereupon zinc ethyl distils
over.
Some time after the distillation is finished, disconnect the receiv-
ing vessel and stopper it immediately with a cork, already made
ready, which carries a thermometer and a carbon dioxide de-
livery tube. Keeping a plentiful supply of carbon dioxide flowing
through the apparatus, redistil the liquid. Catch the first run-
nings of zinc ethyl mixed with ethyl iodide in a test-tube filled
with carbon dioxide. At 110° interrupt the distillation, and
replace the test-tube with a thick-walled tube drawn out near its
upper end preparatory to being sealed off. Fill this tube like-
wise with carbon dioxide and distil over all the liquid, heating
the entire distilling flask at the last by fanning it with the flame.
Then seal the tube immediately with the blast lamp. Carefully
avoid any access of air at this or any previous part of the opera-
tion, since this would cause immediate ignition of the zinc ethyl.
Boiling-point, 118°. Yield, about 30 g.

160. Lead Tetraphenyl, Pb(C 6 H 5 ) 4 , by Means of Grignard's

Reagent; Diphenyl Lead Iodide, Pb(C a H 5 ) 2 I 2 .
The action of metallic magnesium upon etherial solutions of alkyl halides
results, as was discovered by Grignard, in the formation of compounds in
which the alkyl radical is bound directly to the magnesium:
C6H5Br + Mg = C6H5MgBr.
The compounds formed are soluble in ether, and themselves contain ether;
their etherial solutions, which constitute the so-called "Grignard'a reagent,"
can be employed for transferring alkyl groups to different metals as well as to
organic radicals of the most varied types.
2 PbCl2 + 4 C6H5MgBr - Pb + Pb(C6H6)4 + 2 MgCl2 + 2 MgBr,.
216 METAL-ORGANIC COMPOUNDS.

Lead Tetraphenyl. Place 70 g. of perfectly dry ether, which

has stood several days in contact with sodium wire, and 25 g. of
brombenzene in a small flask. Add 3.7 g. of magnesium ribbon
which has been scraped clean with a knife, close the flask with a
calcium chloride tube and allow it to stand 24 hours in a dish of
water. When all the magnesium has dissolved, add, while
shaking, 24 g. of dry powdered lead chloride in small portions,
and allow the mixture to stand for two days with occasional
shaking. Then add this mixture, a little at a time, to 200 c.c. of
water and acidify faintly with dilute hydrochloric acid. Collect
the precipitate (which is colored dark by precipitated lead) on a
suction filter, wash it with water, and dry it in the hot closet.
The mass becomes lighter colored on drying and weighs about
15 g. Boil the material with two successive portions of 100 c.c.
each of benzene, using a reflux condenser, and concentrate the
combined filtrates in a distilling apparatus 1 to about 75 c.c. Color-
less, glistening prisms, melting-point 222° to 224°, crystallize from
the liquid. Yield, 8 to 9 g.
Further concentration of the mother-liquid furnishes but little
additional product.

Diphenyl-lead-iodide. (CeHb)2 Pbl2.

Two of the phenyl groups in lead tetraphenyl can be replaced with
hydroxyl groups, or with acid radicals:
Pb(C6H5)4 + 2 I2 = (C6H6)2PbI2 + 2 C6H6I.
Dissolve 3 g. of lead tetraphenyl by warming it with 60 g. of
chloroform. After cooling add carefully a cold solution of 3 g.
iodine in a little carbon disulphide until the color of the iodine
just fails to disappear. Allow the yellow solution to evaporate
in a warm place; extract the residue first with 10 c.c. and then
with 5 cc. of carbon disulphide; concentrate2 the filtered extract
to a volume of between 5 and 10 c.c; and allow it to crystal-
lize, after the addition of 2 to 3 c.c. of absolute alcohol. Drain
1
Benzene vapors are inflammable and burn with a smoky flame.
* Small quantities of carbon bisulphide and other inflammable liquids can
be evaporated over a free flame in an open vessel if the vapors are drawn
rapidly away through a tube connected with the suction pump. The tube
should be inserted about one-third the way into the beaker or flask.
 NICKEL CARBONYL. 217

the deep lemon-yellow crystals, wash them with a little alcohol,

and dry them at a gentle heat. The product melts with decom-
position1 at 105 to 107°. The yield is not quite quantitative, as
some lead iodide is always formed.

161. Nickel Carbonyl,2 N1(CO)4.

When carbon monoxide is conducted over very finely divided nickel,
four molecules of the gas combine below 100° with one atom of nickel to form
nickel carbonyl (boiling-point, 43°). At higher temperatures this compound
dissociates and the nickel separates in the form of a dust, or deposits as a
mirror on the walls of the vessel. In making the preparation a careful main-
tenance of the proper temperature and a state of very fine subdivision of the
metal are important; nickel is obtained in the desired condition by reducing
nickel oxalate in a current of hydrogen.

Treat a hot solution of nickel sulphate with oxalic acid, then

add ammonia, but without entirely neutralizing the solution.
The precipitation of nickel oxalate in this way is not quite
quantitative, but the product can be washed readily by
decanting with hot water. By draining the precipitate and
drying it in the hot closet, a light-green, loose powder is
obtained.
The carbon monoxide may be prepared by allowing 30 g. con-
centrated formic acid to slowly drop from a dropping funnel into
a distilling flask containing 100 g. concentrated H2SO4 at about
100°, and passing the gas through two wash-bottles containing
concentrated sodium hydroxide solution. Collect the carbon mon-
oxide in a gasometer.
The reduction of the nickel oxalate and the synthesis of the
nickel carbonyl may be accomplished in the same apparatus.
Connect two sulphuric acid wash bottles in series at one end of a
combustion tube about 26 cm. long, and beyond them place a
three-way cock through which either hydrogen from a Kipp gen-
erator or carbon monoxide from the gasometer may enter. The
carbon monoxide, before entering the tube, must be further purified
from traces of carbon dioxide by passing through two bottles
containing caustic soda solution. Place an asbestos heating
1
Diphenyl is formed: (C6H6)2PbI2 = Pbl 2 -I- C6H5.C6H5. The same
decomposition takes place slowly even in a solution of diphenyl-lead-iodide.
The diphenyl is easily recognized by its characteristic odor.
1
Mond, Langer, and Quincke, Chem. News, 62, 97 (1890).
218 METAL-ORGANIC COMPOUNDS.

box1 (cf. Fig. 4, p. 3) around the combustion tube and insert

a thermometer into the chamber. Heat the tube by means of
a Bunsen burner with a flame spreader, but do not place the
flame immediately under the lower opening of the box. Clamp
the combustion tube so that it slants downward a little and pro-
vide an extra burner to expel any water which may condense
inside the tube.
Place 5 to 7 g. of nickel oxalate in the tube between two loose
plugs of asbestos, replace the air completely with hydrogen, and
heat the charge to 300° in a current of hydrogen until it has
become black and no more water vapor escapes. Avoid a higher
temperature, as the nickel would then lose its condition of fine
subdivision. Then allow the temperature to sink to between 80°
and 100°, and replace the hydrogen by means of a current of air-
free carbon monoxide (the wash bottles and connections should
be filled with carbon monoxide before beginning the operation).
Test the escaping gases for nickel carbonyl as follows:
1. Insert into the end of the combustion tube a cork carrying
a tube drawn out to a capillary jet; set fire to the escaping gas;
it burns with a brilliantly luminous flame from which metallic
nickel is deposited upon a cold piece of porcelain in a form resem-
bling soot.
2. Connect the combustion tube by means of rubber tubing
with a carefully cleaned glass tube, and heat the latter gently
with a Bunsen burner; a mirror of nickel is deposited in the
heated part. If the tube is heated to redness the nickel is then
precipitated in the form of a powder.
If the procedure above outlined is carried out on a larger scale
the nickel carbonyl vapor issuing from the apparatus may be
condensed by passing it into a vessel surrounded by a freezing
mixture. Nickel carbonyl is a colorless liquid which boils at 43°
under 751 mm. pressure, and solidifies at —25° to a mass of needle-
shaped crystals.
1
The openings in the cover of the heating box should be covered with
discs of asbestos to avoid drafts.
 CHAPTER VII.

PREPARATION OF COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE

ELEMENTS FROM THEIR MINERALS.
IN this chapter methods are described for preparing compounds of some
of the rarer elements. It has seemed advisable to devote to these elements a
special chapter in which the chief stress is laid upon the methods of working
up the natural raw materials, and upon the characterization of the individual
elements by the aid of their compounds, rather than upon a classification of
the compounds according to types.

163. Lithium Carbonate from Lepidolite, Petalite, or Spodumene;

Spectroscopic Tests for Rubidium and Other Metals.
Mix 100 g. of the finely powdered mineral intimately with 100 g.
of ammonium chloride and 200 g. of finely powdered calcium
carbonate; heat the mixture in a clay crucible, at first gently for
half an hour, and then strongly for an hour in the furnace.
Break up the sintered mass and extract it about ten times by
boiling with 750 to 1000 c.c. of water in a large evaporating dish.
Pour off the solution each time through a plaited filter and begin
at once to concentrate the filtrate in a second evaporating dish.
After the entire filtrate has been reduced to about one liter,
make it alkaline with ammonia and add ammonium carbonate
until a little of the liquid when filtered gives no further precipi-
tation with the reagent. Drain the solution, on a suction filter,
from the precipitated calcium carbonate, and, as the latter con-
tains some lithium carbonate, dissolve it in acetic acid, dilute to
about 1.5 liters and precipitate this solution cold with oxalic
acid. After the precipitate has settled, filter and add the filtrate
to the main solution of the lithium salt. Evaporate the entire
solution to dryness, and drive off the ammonium salts from the
residue by gentle ignition. Then moisten the substance with
concentrated hydrochloric acid and dissolve it in a little hot
219
220 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.
water; again evaporate the solution to dryness, and dehydrate
the residue completely by heating to about 160°. Extract the
residue with absolute alcohol either in a Soxhlet apparatus or in
a simple flask with a return condenser. In the latter case, extract
eight times and distil each of the alcoholic solutions poured from
the insoluble residue, using the alcohol, thus recovered, for the
next extraction. Finally, after all of the alcohol has been dis-
tilled from the extract, dissolve the salt in a little water and
precipitate lithium carbonate by adding ammonium carbonate
and a little ammonia. From lepidolite 1 to 3 g. of pure lithium
carbonate should be obtained, from petalite a little more, and
from spodumene about twice as much. Test the purity of the
preparation by means of the spectroscope.
The insoluble salt left by the alcoholic extraction contains
rubidium, besides other of the alkali metals. Dissolve it in
water, treat the solution with about 1 c.c. of 10% chlorplatinic
acid solution, and allow it to stand over night. Next morning
filter off the insoluble chlorplatmates and ignite them in a Rose
crucible in a current of hydrogen. Dissolve the residue in a
little water and test it with the spectroscope for rubidium.

Spectroscopic Analysis.

The scale of the spectroscope, which is usually graduated arbi-

trarily, must first be standardized according to the wave lengths
of light. After the apparatus is properly set up, make the
sodium line fall upon a certain division of the scale; or, in case
the scale telescope is not movable, observe the position of this
line as accurately as possible. Then note the position of the
following lines:
Wave Length Wave Length
Kared 768 X 10- e mm. Src blue 461 X 10-"mi
Li a red 671 Ha red 656
Na yellow 589 it
H/3 blue 486
Tl green 535 it
Hv violet 434

The hydrogen lines are very sharp and easy to observe; ready
prepared tubes filled with hydrogen under diminished pressure
can be used, and are to be excited by means of an induction coil.
Plot the scale readings as abscissas and the corresponding wave
 BERYLLIUM HYDROXIDE. 221

lengths as ordinates, and connect the separate points by a smooth

curve. One millimeter on the plot may be taken to represent
one scale division, and one-half millimeter on the other axis to
represent one unit of wave length. From this curve the •wave
length may be read that corresponds to each division on the
scale.
If the lithium preparation is pure it shows only the line 671,
and eventually the weaker line at 610, when subjected to the
spectroscopic test. If it still contains calcium a red line appears
at 616, and green bands at about 500. Rubidium is recognized
by red lines at 795 and 780; caesium by the yellowish-red lines
622, 601, 584, and the blue lines 459 and 456.

163. Beryllium Hydroxide from Beryl.

Beryl is essentially a beryllium aluminum silicate, 3 BeO.Al2O3.6 SiO2,
and is most readily decomposed by treatment with acid ammonium fluoride,
whereby silicon fluoride escapes as a gas, aluminum goes into the difficultly
soluble aluminum fluoride, and beryllium into the soluble beryllium fluoride.
The beryllium fluoride is transformed into the sulphate, and the latter is dis-
solved in water and freed from traces of aluminum by means of concentrated
ammonium carbonate solution. Beryllium remains in the solution as a double
compound with ammonium carbonate. The small amount of iron present is
precipitated by adding ammonium sulphide, and the beryllium is finally
thrown from the filtrate in the form of hydroxide.
Treat 50 g. of finely powdered beryl in a large platinum dish
with 200 g. of neutral ammonium fluoride and 300 g. of concen-
trated hydrofluoric acid, and heat the mixture under the hood
on a Babo funnel until thick vapors escape freely. Continue
the heating and gradually increase the temperature until the
escape of vapors practically ceases, allow the porous mass to
cool, rub' it to a powder with a platinum spatula or a wooden
stick, and heat again until nothing more is vaporized. Boil the
residue, which amounts to about 37 g., five times with water,
allowing the sediment to settle and decanting the clear liquid
through a plaited filter after each extraction. About 15 g. of
aluminum fluoride remain undissolved after this treatment.
Evaporate the filtrate in a platinum dish, heat the residue with
30 g. of concentrated sulphuric acid until thick fumes of sulphur
trioxide escape, and dissolve the dry sulphate in 100 to 200 c.c. of
water. Stir this solution slowly into a cold solution of 150 g. of
222 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.
ammonium carbonate in 600 c.c. of water, whereby only a slight
clouding should occur. Then dilute with an equal volume of
boiling water and add 2 to 3 c.c. of ammonium sulphide, whereby
any iron present — which is usually but little — gives a voluminous
precipitate of iron sulphide. Filter through a large plaited filter,
the point of which is reinforced by linen cloth folded under
it. Wash the precipitate with hot water containing a little
ammonium sulphide, and concentrate the filtrate to one-half.
The beryllium precipitates as beryllium hydroxide during the
evaporation. Collect the precipitate on a filter and boil down
the solution still further, thus obtaining the little beryllium
which is left as a less pure product than the first. Wash the
hydroxide with water and dry it at a gentle heat. Yield, about
13 g. By igniting, 5 to 6 g. of beryllium oxide could be obtained
as a loose white powder, but for use in the following preparation
the hydroxide should be taken.
If a large platinum dish is not available for the above work, a
sheet-iron crucible can be used.
164. Basic Beryllium Acetate, Be 4 O(CH 3 CO 2 ) a .
Beryllium hydroxide and acetic acid form a stable and very remarkable
compound of the above composition. It melts undecomposed sharply at
289.5, and boils, also without decomposition, at 342 to 343°. This acetate
can be used to purify beryllium preparations from all other metals, and it
can be obtained of such a definite composition and in such a high degree of
purity that it has been used for determining the atomic weight of beryllium.1
Dissolve the beryllium hydroxide obtained in No. 163 by
warming it with dilute acetic acid. Evaporate the solution on
the water bath and dissolve the gummy residue in about 200 c.c.
of glacial acetic acid (Hood). Heat the mixture (still under the
hood) and filter the solution at the boiling temperature; the salt
crystallizes on cooling in beautiful colorless needles or octahedra.
Concentrate the mother-liquor to one-fourth, in order to obtain
the small remainder of the salt, and dry the entire product in
the steam closet.
Determine the melting-point. Boil a sample of the prepara-
tion in a test-tube; the vapors condense on the cooler upper
walls to form a white crust, and almost no residue remains in the
1
C. L. Parsons: J. Am. Chem. Soc. 27, 721 (1904).
 COLUMBIUM AND TANTALUM COMPOUNDS. 223
bottom of the tube. The salt is insoluble in cold water but is
decomposed by hot water. It is slightly soluble in alcohol, less
so in ether, but dissolves readily in chloroform.
165. Columbium and Tantalum Compounds from Columblte.
Columbium and tantalum, the most important elements in columbite and
tantalite, are separated from one another by crystallizing their potassium
double fluorides. Potassium tantalum heptafluoride, K2[TaF7], is but spar-
ingly soluble, and crystallizes from a dilute solution, whereas potassium
columbium oxyfluoride, K2[Cb0F6], separates only from a concentrated solu-
tion. This classic method was originated by Marignac in 1866, and is still
used almost exclusively; in this way the first perfect separation of the two
elements was obtained.
Concerning the history of these elements, it is of interest to note that
Hatchett, in 1801, first obtained from American columbite a peculiar acid
which ten years later was shown by the researches of Wollaston to be identi-
cal with a similar acid obtained by Eckeberg in 1802 from Swedish minerals
and named by him tantalic acid. The influence of Berzelius led to the adop-
tion of the name tantalum for the element. By more careful researches dat-
ing from 1844, H. Rose found in columbite a new element, columbium, and
of this he was the first to obtain pure compounds. He believed for a time
that a third element, which he named pelopium, was also present. Matters
were further complicated by the assumption by various investigators of other
elements in this group, and it remained for the work of Marignac to show
that all of the minerals worked with contained both columbium and tantalum
in varying proportions, and that the preparations studied up to that time
were, for the most part, mixtures.

Heat 100 g. of potassium bisulphate gently in a platinum dish

until it has reached a state of quiet fusion; allow the mass to
just solidify, and distribute 25 g. of finely powdered columbite
over its surface. Heat again with slowly rising temperature
until finally a clear melt is obtained. Allow the mass to cool, or
chill it by placing in cold water; break up the solid mass and
allow it to stand in water over night. Next morning pour off
the clear solution, and boil out the residue several times with
water containing a little hydrochloric acid. Finally collect the
residue on a plaited filter, wash it with hot water containing
hydrochloric acid, and dry it in the hot closet.
To purify this product completely, fuse it again with potassium
bisulphate exactly as before and wash the residue very thoroughly
with the dilute acid. Yield, 25 g. of a powder consisting of the
oxides of tantalum and columbium, and containing 30 to 50% of
water; the powder is usually entirely free from iron.
224 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.
Determine the actual amount of the oxides present by igniting
0.6 g. of the powder in a platinum crucible to constant weight.
For each gram of the anhydrous oxides, 2.5 g. of concentrated
hydrofluoric acid and 0.5 g. of potassium carbonate are to be
used. The hydrofluoric acid must be pure and above all free
from fluosilicic acid. Test for the presence of the latter with
potassium salt solution in a platinum crucible.
First dissolve the oxides in the hydrofluoric acid, and pour the
solution cold through a plaited filter placed in a funnel which
has been coated with paraffin. Allow the filtrate to run into a
platinum dish containing a filtered solution of the required amount
of potassium carbonate. Dissolve the resulting precipitate by
boiling and adding sufficient water, then evaporate the solution
until crystals begin to deposit. On cooling, fine needles of potas-
sium tantalum fluoride are obtained. After twelve hours collect
the crystals on a plaited filter in a paraffined funnel and wash
them with cold water. On further evaporation of the filtrate the
remainder of this salt (which is but very little) can be obtained.
Finally, concentrate the solution to a much smaller volume
until, instead of the fine needle-like crystals, larger thin plates of
potassium columbium oxyfluoride are obtained. Several further
crops of these crystals should be obtained from the mother-liquor.
Recrystallize both of the salts from water containing some
hydrofluoric acid. Yield, usually about 1.5 g. K2[TaF7] and 30 g.
K2[Cb0F6]; but the relative quantities of the two salts vary
according to the composition of the original material.

166. Molybdenum Compounds from Molybdenite.

Molybdenum occurs in nature to some extent in the form of molybdates
(wulfenite, PbMoO^ and powellite, CaMoOO, but the most important ore is
the sulphide (molybdenite, MoS2).

(a) Ammonium Molybdate, 5(NH'

Grind 50 g. of molybdenite1 and sift it through fine wire gauze;
grind again all the powder that will not pass through the sieve,
and continue the process until nothing remains behind. Roast
1
Since molybdenite is difficult to pulverize the expedient recommended
long ago by Scheele may be used. Cut it into small pieces with scissors and
mix it with potassium sulphate crystals, the sharp edges of which under the
pestle tear the flakes of the molybdenite apart; finally dissolve out the potas-
sium sulphate with water.
 MOLYBDENUM COMPOUNDS FROM MOLYBDENITE. 225
the powder in a small evaporating dish, heating strongly with a
Fletcher burner, and stirring frequently until the mass has been
largely converted into yellow molybdenum trioxide and the sul-
phur has escaped as sulphur dioxide. Carried out in this manner
the roasting consumes from four to six hours; if it is carried out
in a porcelain tube, in which a better circulation of air is obtained,
the same result is accomplished in from thirty minutes to an
hour. The tube should be about 25 cm. long and 3 cm. in diam-
eter, and should be placed in a slightly inclined position within
an asbestos heating chamber (Fig. 4, p. 3).
Extract the roasted product with 2-normal ammonia solution,
dry the dark-colored residue, roast it, and extract it again with
ammonia; finally repeat the process once more, when nothing
but a grayish gangue remains.
To the entire ammoniacal extract add three drops of ammo-
nium sulphide to precipitate traces of copper; after standing
twelve hours, filter, add a drop of bromine to the filtrate, and
evaporat3 until crystallization takes place, adding at the last a
few drops of concentrated ammonia. The addition of a little
alcohol aids the separation of crystals. Dry the product in the
air. Yield, 35 to 40 g. of small flake-like crystals; theoretical
yield from pure molybdenite, 47.5 g.
A dilute solution of ammonium molybdate slightly acidified
with hydrochloric acid, gives a dark-blue color when treated with
one drop of stannous chloride; upon further addition of this
reagent it becomes a dirty green. Dependent preparation: Molyb-
denum Blue, No. 24.
(b) Oxides of Molybdenum.
Molybdenum Trioxide, MoO3. Ignite some ammonium molyb-
date at first gently and then strongly in an evaporating dish.
The ignited product usually contains some lower oxide; to
change this completely to the trioxide, place the material in a
combustion tube and heat in a slow current of oxygen, using
a row burner (Fig. 2) and covering the tube with an asbestos
mantle. Do not heat the substance sufficiently to volatilize
the molybdenum trioxide.
Molybdenum Dioxide, MoO2. Place 2 g. of molybdenum triox-
ide in a weighed glass tube, about 35 cm. long, which has been
226 COMPOUNDS OP THE RARE ELEMENTS.

drawn out a little at one end, and fill the tube with hydrogen
which has been washed successively with caustic soda solution,
silver nitrate, potassium permanganate, and sulphuric acid.
Heat in the atmosphere of hydrogen for 15 minutes to moder-
ate redness so that the temperature surely exceeds 470°. When
cold, determine the loss in weight, and if necessary repeat the
heating until finally the change in weight corresponds to the
change from the trioxide to the dioxide. In this way a reddish-
brown glistening powder is obtained.1 Stronger ignition in
hydrogen causes the formation of metallic molybdenum.

(c) Chlorides of Molybdenum.

Molybdenum Dioxydichloride, MoO2Cl2- Place 2 g. of molyb-
denum dioxide in a glass tube about 50 cm. long, and pass over it
a current of chlorine which is dry and entirely free from air.
After the air is completely expelled from the tube, heat gently by
means of a Bunsen burner with a flame spreader. The volatile
molybdic acid chloride sublimes and deposits as a loose mass of
pinkish-white plates in the colder parts of the tube. After the
reaction is ended replace the chlorine with dry carbon dioxide, and
when cold, cut the tube at a point between the residue and the
sublimed product. Transfer the crystals immediately to a glass-
stoppered tube, since they are very hygroscopic, and make the
stopper air-tight with a little vaseline.
Molybdenum Pentachloride, MoCl5. First prepare the neces-
sary metallic molybdenum by heating 15 g. of molybdenum tri-
oxide in a current of hydrogen as hot as possible in a combustion
furnace until no more water vapor is evolved. This method of
reduction requires about three hours, and even then it is expedi-
ent to pulverize the product and to heat it a second time in hydro-
gen. Molybdenum reduced by the Goldschmidt method (see
footnote below) may also be pulverized and used.
Meanwhile construct, under a hood with a strong draft, the
apparatus represented in Fig. 26. Make as indicated two con-
1
Molybdenum dioxide, being non-volatile, is especially suited for the
aluminothermic production of the fused metal. Place a mixture of 80 g. of
molybdenum dioxide and 21 g. of aluminum powder in a clay crucible
embedded in sand, and start the reaction by means of some fuse powder (cf.
No. 2). Yield, 70 to 80%.
 MOLYBDENUM COMPOUNDS FROM MOLYBDENITE. 227

strictions in the combustion tube so that at these points the

inside diameter is from 1.0 to 1.2 cm., while the right-hand
arm of the tube is 32 cm. and the left arm 60 to 70 cm. long.

I Hood

_ B a
Jj=» IP Z3
702->n . p-aBSS-^ Burner

Fig. 26.

Place about 6 g. of powdered molybdenum in the shorter arm,

and introduce carbon dioxide and hydrogen into the apparatus
until all the air has been replaced in the wash bottles and the
connections. Then close the pinch cock of the carbon dioxide
tube, and, while passing a slow current of hydrogen, heat the
molybdenum as strongly as possible with a row burner for one
or two hours, preventing loss of heat by using the asbestos
mantle. Drive out any condensed water through the open
end of the tube, C, by fanning with a Bunsen flame. Allow
the apparatus to cool completely while the hydrogen is still
passing. Meanwhile start the action in the chlorine generator.
Pass the chlorine gas through a wash bottle containing water,
and then through two others containing concentrated sulphuric
acid; at the outset, keep the rubber connector which admits to
the combustion tube closed by means of a pinch cock, and allow
the chlorine to escape as indicated through the side arm into the
ventilating flue. When the air has been completely driven out
of the evolution flask and from all the connections (which, with a
fairly rapid current of chlorine, requires about an hour), replace
the hydrogen in the combustion tube with carbon dioxide, and
then the latter with chlorine. The reaction begins either of
itself or on heating very gently with the row burner. Streams of
a dull-red vapor rise and condense beyond the constriction at B.
By heating the molybdenum gently with the row burner and
 228 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.
occasionally playing a Bunsen flame over the constriction at B,
bring the product into the section of the tube BC where it pre-
cipitates in a shower of very minute crystals. Avoid heating too
strongly. At the end of the operation only a few gray flocks
remain behind to the left of B. During the process the end of
the tube at C is connected with a wide glass tube leading into
the flue.
Allow the crystals to cool in a current of carbon dioxide, close
C with a cork, and, with a blast lamp, fuse the tube together
at B. By repeatedly tapping the tube loosen the crystals and
transfer them to a preparation tube which is made ready as fol-
lows: Close one end of a fusible glass tube 35 cm. long and of
the same width as the combustion tube, and make a constriction
20 cm. above the closed end. Fill the tube with carbon dioxide,
and place the open end over the narrowed end C of the com-
bustion tube. As soon as the substance is transferred seal the
constricted part of the preparation tube. Dissolve the residue
adhering within the combustion tube in alcohol; considerable
heat is evolved, and an emerald-green solution is obtained which,
when treated with ammonia, gives a grayish-brown flocculent
precipitate.
Molybdenum Trichloride, MoCl3. In an apparatus like that
used for the preparation of the pentachloride, substitute a com-
bustion tube prepared as shown in Fig. 27. The lengths of th»
A
0
Fig. 27.

three sections of the tube are 32 cm., 8 cm., and 60 to 75 cm.

respectively, and the inside diameter at the constrictions A, B,
and C is from 1.0 to 1.2 cm. Proceed at first, exactly as directed
above, to prepare molybdenum pentachloride from 6 g. of molyb-
denum, and allow the greater part of this product to sublime
into the longest section of the tube, while a small amount con-
denses in the 8 cm. section. Allow the tube to cool, replace the
chlorine by carbon dioxide and the latter by hydrogen. Then
place the combustion tube in a somewhat inclined position so
that D is higher than A. Heat the tube at C, while a fairly
strong current of hydrogen is passing, until the pentachloride
 TUNGSTEN COMPOUNDS FROM WOLFRAMITE. 229

there vaporizes, and then continue to heat so that 5 to 10 cm. of

the section CD remains constantly filled with red vapors. At
first there is no evidence of chemical change; but after some time
hydrogen chloride can be recognized in the escaping gases, and,
on continuously vaporizing the pentachloride, which repeatedly
condenses and flows back, a copper-red film is deposited, and
gradually a mass of the same or often a darker color is produced.
Carry the heating gradually towards D until finally all the pen-
tachloride is converted to the trichloride; two to three hours are
required for this. Too strong heating is to be avoided, for the
lower the temperature at which the transformation takes place
the better the preparation. Finally, replace the hydrogen by car-
bon dioxide and distil the remainder of the pentachloride from
the 8 cm. section so that its vapor passes over the trichloride.
Allow none of the pentachloride to remain with the preparation,
but drive out all the excess at D after removing the escape tube
which leads to the flue. Allow the preparation to cool, cut the
tube into several pieces, and remove the crystals with a glass
rod. Yield, 4 to 6 g. The product is not hygroscopic; it consists
usually of a crystalline mass the color of red phosphorus but
sometimes of feathery crystalline aggregates.

167. Tungsten Compounds from Wolframite.

The most common tungsten mineral is wolframite, which is essentially a
mixture of manganous and ferrous tungstates.
(a) Ammonium Tungstate, 5 (NH4)2WOt. 7 WO3.11 H2O.
Boil 200 g. of finely powdered wolframite gently for about
three hours in a 300-c.c. Erlenmeyer flask with 50 c.c. of concen-
trated hydrochloric acid and 10 c.c. of concentrated nitric acid;
replace from time to time the acid as it evaporates. Then dilute
the mass with a large amount of water and decant off the solu-
tion, which contains chiefly ferric and manganous chlorides, from
the grayish-yellow easy-settling residue. Again boil the residue
gently for two hours with the same mixture of acids and repeat
the washing and decantation.
Dilute the decanted liquids to a volume of 1.0 to 1.5 liters,
and if after several hours a yellow precipitate of tungstic acid
separates, collect it on a filter after pouring off most of the liquid,
and add it to the main insoluble residue.
230 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.

Wash the insoluble residue, consisting of silicic acid, unat-

tacked wolframite, and yellow tungstic acid, first with water con-
taining a little hydrochloric acid, and then with pure water;
transfer the powder to a beaker, and warm it on the water bath
with enough 2-normal ammonia so that all of the tungstic acid
passes into solution. Then filter and treat the residue with
acids, etc., exactly as at first, in order to make certain that no
large amount of the original mineral remains unattacked.
Finally, unite all the ammoniacal extracts, filter the solution
again, and concentrate it until crystals of ammonium tungstate
begin to form. Then add 10 c.c. of concentrated ammonia and
allow the solution to cool. Drain the colorless crystalline meal
on a filter, and work up the mother liquor until only a very little
remains. Dry the preparation in the hot closet. Yield, about 90 g.
A solution of ammonium tungstate gives a light-yellow pre-
cipitate with stannous chloride. The precipitate dissolves partly
or wholly in concentrated hydrochloric acid, and, on heating the
latter solution, a precipitate is thrown down which at first is
dirty blue and later becomes pure dark blue.
{b) Tungstic Acid and Tungsten Trioxide.
Yellow Dibasic Tungstic Acid, H^WO^. Boil 3 g. of ammo-
nium tungstate gently for five minutes in an evaporating dish
with a mixture of 10 c.c. of concentrated hydrochloric acid
and 5 c.c. of concentrated nitric acid. Allow the liquid to cool
and dilute it with water. Collect the solid residue on a suction
filter, wash it with hot water until the washings show a neutral
reaction to blue litmus, and dry it in the hot closet. By igniting
the tungstic acid it loses one molecule of water and is transformed
into tungsten trioxide. Determine the loss in weight.
White Tungstic Acid, HJVO^I). Dissolve 3 g. of ammonium
tungstate in 30 c.c. of water with the addition of a few drops of
ammonia. Then add to the solution at the room temperature an
equal volume of 10% hydrochloric acid. White tungstic acid is
thereby precipitated. After it settles, collect the solid and wash it
with hot water containing some hydrochloric acid. If the filtrate
is opalescent by reflected light, it contains colloidal tungstic acid
which can be precipitated by gentle heating. Dry the prepara-
tion at a moderate temperature on top of the hot closet.
 WORKING UP OF PITCHBLENDE. 231

Tungsten Trioxide, WO3. This oxide can be obtained by heat-

ing either of the above acids, or it can be formed directly from
ammonium tungstate by heating the salt in a porcelain crucible
at first over a Bunsen flame and finally over a blast lamp. The
oxide is a lemon-yellow powder which in the Sunlight acquires a
greenish tinge.

(c) Tungsten Hexachloride, WCle.

First prepare metallic tungsten, as a grayish-black powder, by
reducing the trioxide in an atmosphere of hydrogen at the highest
temperature obtainable in the combustion furnace. (Cf. the prep-
aration of molybdenum under Molybdenum Pentachloride, p. 224.)
Prepare tungsten hexachloride from the metallic tungsten
according to the directions for obtaining molybdenum penta-
chloride from molybdenum (p. 224). Here also it is important
to exclude moisture and atmospheric oxygen with the greatest
care. On passing chlorine over the metal some yellow tungsten
oxychloride is formed at first; expel this by heating the tube with
a free flame, and allow the vapors to condense only when they
have become dark colored. The hexachloride is a dark-violet,
very hygroscopic, crystalline powder, which must be preserved
in a sealed tube. Light and air change it to yellow tungstyl
chloride, WO2C12.

168. Working Up of Pitchblende and Testing of the Components

for Radioactivity.
Becquerel discovered in 1896 that pitchblende and uranium preparations
send out peculiar radiations which, like the Roentgen rays, can be detected
by their action upon photographic plates, and by their ability to make the
air through which they pass a conductor of electricity. These radiations
are called Becquerel rays, and the substances emitting them are said to be
radioactive. By separating pitchblende into its constituents and by testing
each for its radioactivity, M. and Mme. Curie (1898) established the fact
that the ability to emit Becquerel rays becomes concentrated in certain
definite constituents; the barium sulphate, which they prepared from the
barium residues obtained in the technical working up of the ore, was found
to be particularly active; and from this they succeeded in isolating a new
element, radium, which showed to the very highest degree the property of
radioactivity. The lead, bismuth, uranium, and rare earths obtained from
pitchblende are also radioactive, although to a lesser degree.
232 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.
Uranium compounds are obtained technically from pitchblende by digest-
ing the ore with nitric acid, evaporating to dryness, and extracting the
residue with water; uranyl nitrate is crystallized from the solution. The
insoluble material is then extracted with a large amount of sodium carbonate
solution, whereby the rest of the uranium is dissolved as sodium uranyl car-
bonate. The residues from this treatment form the starting material for
obtaining radium.
This discovery of radium and radioactivity was epoch-making for both
physics and chemistry. So intense has the investigation of radioactivity
become that special journals giving original literature and references to all
work performed in this field are now published both in English and German.

Pulverize 10 to 15 g. of pitchblende as finely as possible, and

digest the powder for several hours on the water bath with a
mixture of 20 g. of concentrated nitric acid and an equal amount
of water. Evaporate the mixture to dryness, and treat the resi-
due twice successively with 5 g. of the same acid mixture, evapo-
rating each time to dryness. Extract the dry mass with water
and evaporate the filtrate on the water bath. Place the dry
residue from the aqueous solution in a flask, and extract it several
times with warm ether until nothing more dissolves; evaporate
the ethereal solution of uranyl nitrate, taking care that the
vapor does not take fire. Dissolve the salt in water, precipitate
it with ammonia, and ignite the precipitate to uranium octo-
oxide, U3O8.
Treat with aqua regia the water-insoluble residue from the
nitric acid treatment, and evaporate the mass to dryness. Moisten
the residue with a little concentrated hydrochloric acid, extract
it with hot water, and combine the solution with an aqueous solu-
tion of the residue left from the extraction with ether.
Separate the constituents of the solution thus obtained accord-
ing to the usual procedure of qualitative analysis. The working
up of the hydrogen sulphide precipitate yields: (1) As, Sb, Sn;
(2) Pb; (3) Bi; (4) Cu. Dissolve the ammonium sulphide pre-
cipitate in hydrochloric acid, oxidize the solution, and precipitate
Fe, Al, and the rare earths with ammonia. Treat this pre-
cipitate immediately with concentrated sodium carbonate solu-
tion, whereby the remainder of the uranium dissolves; it can be
precipitated by caustic soda from this solution as sodium pyro-
uranate. Dissolve the residue from the sodium carbonate treat-
ment in as little hydrochloric acid as possible, nearly neutralize
 TESTING FOR RADIOACTIVITY. 233

the solution with ammonia, and then treat it with a solution of

oxalic acid. This precipitates as oxalate any thorium that is
present. On treating the filtrate with ammonia, the hydroxides
of iron and aluminum are precipitated. The filtrate from the
first precipitation with ammonia may contain zinc and cobalt;
these metals should be precipitated with ammonium sulphide,
but they need not be separated from each other.
The filtrate from the ammonium sulphide group, on being
treated with ammonium oxalate, yields a precipitate of oxalates
of the alkaline earth metals.
That part of the ore which does not dissolve in nitric acid nor
during the subsequent treatment with aqua regia, should be fused
in a porcelain crucible with a mixture of sodium and potassium
carbohates. Extract the fusion with water, and wash the residue
until the filtrate no longer gives a test for sulphate. Dissolve
the carbonates in dilute nitric acid, and test the solution for lead
and the alkaline earth metals. The combined alkaline earths
should be separated from each other only when larger amounts of
pitchblende are worked up.

Testing for Radioactivity.

(a) Photographically. Fold a piece of black paper around a
photographic dry plate (in the dark room), so that the sensitive
side is covered with one thickness of the paper, and place the
whole in a box with the sensitive side up. Upon the plate
arrange samples of the original pitchblende and of the different
preparations obtained from it, each enveloped in a piece of paper.
Record the position of each specimen and then close the box.
Open it at the end of twenty-four hours and develop the plate in
the usual manner.1
(b) Electroscopically. An approximate measure of aetivity
can be obtained with the aid of a sensitive gold-leaf electroscope.
A scale should be placed so that the distance between the gold
leaves can be read. The top of the electroscope should consist of
a metal plate, and above this at a definite distance a second metal
1
Uranyl nitrate, when prepared as above by the ether method, does not
show its full activity at once; its maximum intensity is "recovered" very
slowly, — one-half in twenty-two days.
234 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.

plate that is connected with the earth should be supported.

Charge the electroscope, and measure the conductivity of the
layer of air between the two plates by determining the time
required for the two leaves of the electroscope to reach the zero
position. It is sufficient to observe over how many scale divi-
sions the leaves pass within a certain length of time, e.g., the
scale divisions per minute. To measure the activity, spread an
amount of the substance, weighed to an accuracy of two figures,
upon a piece of paper, and place the paper on the lower metal
plate. Adjust the second plate in position, charge the electro-
scope, and make the readings. The quotient obtained by divid-
ing the number of scale divisions traversed per minute by the
weight of the substance, gives the specific activity. The observed
rate may be corrected by subtracting from it the velocity with
which the leaves come together in a blank experiment with none
of the active preparation. If it is desired to compare the values
obtained with those that have been published in the literature,
the apparatus may be standardized by using uranyl nitrate.
Of the active radiations, the part consisting of the so-called
a-rays is held back by a sheet of paper. If, therefore, the experi-
ment is repeated exactly as above, except that the preparation is
covered with filter paper, the value then obtained corresponds to
the activity of the rays that pass through the paper, that is, of
the so-called /9-rays. The difference between the two values gives
the activity of the a-rays. Radioactive lead preparations emit
principally a-rays.
169. Uranium Compounds.
As the starting material in the preparation of uranium compounds, either
uranium nitrate prepared from pitchblende according to the following pro-
cedure, or the commercial product, may be used.
Uranyl Nitrate, UO2(NO3)2. Heat 50 g. of finely powdered
and sifted pitchblende in an evaporating dish with 150 c.c. of
30% nitric acid until the excess of acid has been expelled.
Extract the mass with hot water, and evaporate the filtered solu-
tion to dryness on the water bath. Boil the dry residue repeat-
edly with ether in a small flask, and evaporate the ethereal extract
to dryness, taking great care that the vapor does not take fire.1
Recrystallize the last residue from water. Yield, about 35 g.
1
Cf. footnote 2, p 214.
 URANIUM COMPOUNDS. 235

Uranyl Hydroxide, UO2(OH}2.

The hydroxide of hexavalent uranium is amphoteric, that is, it has
acidic as well as basic properties. With acids it forms the uranyl salts, e.g.,
UO2(NO3)2; with bases it gives the difficultly soluble salts of pyro-uranio
acid, e.g., K2U2O7. For this reason the free uranyl hydroxide cannot be
obtained by adding a solution of an alkali hydroxide to one containing a
uranyl salt; it is prepared by heating uranyl nitrate with anhydrous alcohol.

Heat 20 g. of uranyl nitrate with 50 g. of absolute alcohol on the

water bath in such a way that the alcohol evaporates slowly,
but does not boil. After some time yellow uranyl hydroxide
separates; add more alcohol and evaporate further. Finally,
extract the precipitate with water, and dry it at a moderate
temperature.
Alkali Pyro-uranates. To a solution of uranyl nitrate, add
potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, or ammonia until all of
the uranium is just precipitated. Drain the precipitate, wash it
carefully with water and dry it in the hot closet. Sodium pyro-
uranate is prepared industrially, and is used in the manufacture
of yellow-green fluorescent glass.
Ammonium Uranylcarbonate, UO2CO3 • 2 (NHi)zC03. Add a
solution of ammonium carbonate carefully to a dilute solution
containing 20 g. of uranyl nitrate until precipitation is just com-
plete; an excess of the reagent dissolves the precipitate. Filter
off the small, light-yellow crystals, and wash them successively
with water, alcohol, and ether. On standing, the preparation
loses ammonium carbonate.
Uranium Trioxide, UO3. Dry some uranyl ammonium carbon-
ate, or uranyl hydroxide, at 100°; then place it in a test-tube, and,
while shaking, heat it in an oil or paraffin bath at 250° to 300°
until the color has become brick-red.
Uranium Octo-oxide, U3OS. This oxide is obtained by ignit-
ing uranium trioxide (or any oxide of uranium), or, more con-
veniently, ammonium pyro-uranate, in a porcelain crucible; it is
a dark-green powder.
Uranous Oxalaie, U(C2O4)2.
Uranyl salts are changed by reduction into uranous salts. The latter,
however, are easily oxidized again, although the difficultly soluble uranous
oxalate is relatively stable. A satisfactory reducing agent is the sodium salt
of hyposulphurous acid, which can be procured in the form of a paste contain-
ing 50% of the salt.
236 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.

Prepare a solution containing 25 g. of the reducing agent, and

add this to a solution of 25 g. of uranyl nitrate in 100 c.c. of water
until the solution is decolorized; a precipitate is formed which is
at first brown in color but changes to a lighter shade. Dissolve
the precipitate in hydrochloric acid, filter, and treat the nitrate
with a hot solution of 15 g. of oxalic acid in 120 c.c. of water.
About 26 g. of gray, finely-crystalline uranous oxalate are pre-
cipitated.
To purify the precipitate, dissolve it in a solution of neutral
ammonium oxalate, using 6 g. of the latter salt and 100 c.c. of
water for each 10 g. of uranous oxalate. Reprecipitate the salt
from the filtered solution by adding hydrochloric acid. After
some hours filter off the precipitate, wash it with water and with
alcohol, and dry it in the hot closet. Yield, 9 g. from each 10 g.
of the impure salt.
Ammonium Urano-oxalate, (NH4)4[U\G2O4)4]. D i g e s t 10 g. of
uranous oxalate with a solution of 5 g. of neutral ammonium oxa-
late in 50 c.c. of water; filter off the excess of uranous oxalate,
and precipitate the double salt from the nitrate by adding alco-
hol a little at a time. Allow the mixture to stand for one or two
days, and then filter off the crystal meal which has by that time
become coarser. Yield, 12 g.
Uranium Tetrachloride, UClt. Uranium tetrachloride is pre-
pared in the apparatus described under No. 166 (c), by passing per-
fectly dry chlorine over a mixture of uranium oxide, U3OS, and
one-eighth of its weight of ignited wood charcoal, the whole
being heated as hot as possible in a combustion furnace. The
principle is the same as that outlined under No. 52. Uranium
tetrachloride condenses in the front part of the tube, and is freed
from admixed pentachloride by heating it in a current of carbon
dioxide at about 150°. In this way a very hygroscopic mass of
greenish-black crystals is obtained. The tetrachloride dissolves
in water with evolution of heat, and yields a green solution (cf.
Uranous Oxalate).

170. Thorium Compounds from Monazite.

Thorium was first discovered by Berzelius in the rare Scandinavian min-
erals thorite and orangite. When the oxide of thorium became of industrial
importance through its use in the Welsbach incandescent mantles, a more
 THORIUM COMPOUNDS FROM MONAZITE. 237

abundant source was sought.1 This was found in the mineral monazite, a
phosphate of the rare earths and of thorium, which contains 4 to 7% of thorium
oxide and 50 to 60% of the rare earths, about one-half of the latter being
cerium oxide. This mineral occurs frequently, although only in small
amounts, in primary rocks; but it is found in some places concentrated in
secondary deposits.

Add 100 g. of finely powdered monazite sand, a little at a time,

to 150 g. of concentrated sulphuric acid which is heated to 200°
in an evaporating dish upon a Babo funnel. Keep the mass at
this temperature for half an hour after all of the mineral is added;
then allow it to cool completely, and pour it very slowly with
constant stirring into 300 c.c. of water, whereby the temperature
must not be allowed to rise above 25° at any time. Filter off the
residue.
Separation of Thorium. To the filtrate add in small portions
a solution of 50 g. of oxalic acid in 500 c.c. of water until no further
precipitate forms. Filter off the precipitate, and wash it first with
water containing small amounts of oxalic and sulphuric acids, and
finally with a little pure water. Yield, about 75 g.
Filter off the precipitate, and wash it first with water containing
small amounts of oxalic and sulphuric acids, and finally with a
little pure water. Yield, about 75 g.
Make the filtrate approximately neutral with sodium carbon-
ate and again add oxalic acid to throw out thorium. This second
precipitate is of one-third to one-fourth the quantity of the first,
and is not entirely free from phosphates. It is well to set it
aside and to work it up together with the fresh mineral when
making the next preparation.
Boil up the moist oxalates with a solution of 230 g. of anhy-
drous sodium carbonate in one liter of water; the thorium dis-
solves as sodium thorium carbonate, while the rare earths remain
behind as carbonates. Filter the warm liquid immediately, and
acidify the filtrate with hydrochloric acid; 3 to 4 g. of thorium
oxalate are precipitated.
In order to recover the remainder of the thorium from the
mixture of insoluble carbonates, dissolve the latter in just the
necessary amount of nitric acid, evaporate the solution to dry-
1
It is interesting to note that although one kilo of thorium nitrate was
worth about S500 in 1894, the price had fallen to $4 in 1912. It is however
$7.50 in 1928. (Price of potassium iodide about $7.)
238 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.

ness on the water bath, dissolve the residue in hot water, and
precipitate thorium hydroxide from the boiling solution by add-
ing sodium thiosulphate.1
To precipitate the rare earths, add sodium carbonate to the
filtrate from the thorium hydroxide, drain and wash the pre-
cipitate, and dry it in the hot closet. This product may be
worked up according to No. 171.
Purification of the Thorium. Dissolve the thorium precipi-
tates in hydrochloric acid, adding, if necessary, a little nitric
acid; evaporate the solution to dryness, take up the residue in
water, filter if necessary, and treat the solution at 60° with a
solution of sodium thiosulphate. Collect the precipitate on a
filter, wash it with water containing some ammonium nitrate (as
it has a tendency to pass into colloidal solution), and ignite it to
thorium dioxide.
Thorium Sulphate. Heat the thorium oxide with concen-
trated sulphuric acid in a porcelain crucible until the excess of
acid has been expelled, moisten the residue with a few drops
more of sulphuric acid and heat it as before, but avoid bringing
it to a red heat. Pulverize the thorium sulphate, which should
be free from acid salt, and add it gradually, with vigorous
stirring, to five times its weight of ice-water. If, after a little
while, a considerable residue remains undissolved, remove it and
subject it again to the treatment with concentrated sulphuric
acid.
By warming the filtered solution to 30 — 35°, thorium sulphate
octohydrate, Th(SO4)2 • 8 H2O, together with a little enneahydrate,
Th(SO4)2 • 9 H2O, is caused to separate. Maintain the solution
at this temperature, and allow it to evaporate until all of the
salt has separated. Drain the crystals, wash them with a
1
The salts of quadrivalent thorium are more easily hydrolyzed than those
of the tervalent rare-earth metals. Thus thorium hydroxide is precipitated
while the salts of the trivalent metals remain unchanged. The principle of
this separation is similar to that of the basic acetate method used in analyti-
cal chemistry.
According to another method, the solution is warmed to 60 to 70° together
with an excess of a 10% hydrogen peroxide solution; the thorium and some
cerium are thrown down in the form of a flocculent precipitate which can be
easily filtered.
 SEPARATION OF THE RARE EARTHS. 239

little water, then with alcohol, and dry them at the room
temperature.
Atomic Weight Determination of Thorium. In order to illus-
trate the principle of an atomic weight determination by the sul-
phate method, prepare first some anhydrous thorium sulphate
from about 2 g. of the above hydrated salt. Heat the crystallized
salt to 400° in a weighed platinum crucible which is supported by
a platinum triangle within a larger crucible. When the weight
has become constant, the amount of the anhydrous thorium sul-
phate, a, is given by subtraction. Then ignite the crucible over the
blast lamp until the weight has again become constant. This gives
the weight of thorium dioxide, b. If the atomic weight of oxygen
is taken at 16.00 and that of sulphur as 32.06, the atomic weight
of thorium is obtained by solving for x in the expression:

x +2 '32.06 + 8 -16.00 a
' x + 2 • 16.00 ~ I"

171. Separation of the Rare Earths.

The rare earths form a group of very closely related sesquioxides, the
separation and characterization of which for a long time offered considerable
difficulties. The properties of the analogous compounds of these earths do
not differ sharply enough from each other to permit a complete separation
to be made in a single operation; but the slight gradations in the properties
may in general be used to effect a satisfactory separation if a given process
is systematically repeated again and again. When these slight gradations
are taken into account, the rare earths fall into a classification which corre-
sponds closely to their occurrence in nature.
The first distinction is made between the cerium earths and the yttrium
earths. . The latter were discovered by Gadolin at the end of the eighteenth
century in a mineral found in a feldspar quarry near Ytterby, in Sweden, and
afterwards named after him gadolinite. The cerium earths were discovered
at the beginning of the last century by Berzelius and Hisinger in the mineral
cerite which had previously been investigated by Scheele without success.
Soon afterwards lanthanum and didymium were discovered in the first half of
the nineteenth century by Mosander, a pupil and friend of Berzelius. This
same investigator found that yttrium is accompanied by terbium and erbium.
The separation of the earths was accomplished by two different processes
which in a more perfected form serve even to-day as the standard methods.
Of these processes, one rests upon differences in the basicity of the earths, as
manifested in the varying hydrolytic and thermic dissociation of their salts;
the second process rests upon differences in the solubility of the double salts.
The cerium earths are more weakly basic and form more difficultly soluble
 240 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.

potassium double sulphates than the yttrium earths. Cerium itself occu-
pies a characteristic position, as it is the only member of the group from
which two series of salts are derived: the cerous salts with tervalent cerium;
and the eerie salts containing quadrivalent cerium.
For the qualitative characterization of the earths, the color of their salts
is first of all of importance. Lanthanum and cerous salts are colorless, eerie
salts are yellowish-red, erbium salts pink, didymium salts violet. It marked
then the beginning of a new era in the history of the rare earths, when, in
1861, through the application of spectrum analysis, it became possible to
measure exactly the color of salt solutions by means of their absorption spec-
tra, and the color of glowing vapors by means of emission spectra. It was in
this epoch that the discovery of the periodic system of the elements was
made (1869), by the aid of which Mendelejeff first recognized the tervalency
of the rare-earth metals and predicted the existence of the element scandium,
which was later discovered by Nilson. Further investigation and the exami-
nation of new minerals has since that time added a number of elements to
the group. In the presence of didymium Lecoq de Boisbaudran discovered
samarium. In the group of the yttrium earths, which since the time of
Mosander was studied especially by Bahr and Bunsen, ytterbium was dis-
covered by Marignac, while Cleve added the elements holmium and thulium.
Marignac also discovered gadolinium, which together with terbium and europ-
ium occupies an intermediate position between the cerium and yttrium earths.
Finally, didymium was separated by von Welsbach in 1885 into praseodymium,
the salts of which are green, and neodymium, whose salts are violet.
The most recent epoch dates from the technical application by von Wels-
bach of thorium and cerium oxides in the incandescent gas-lighting industry.
The following table gives a summary of the rare earths and their atomic
weights:
Cerium earths. Terbium earths. Yttrium earths.

Lanthanum, La 138.90 Europium, Eu 152.0 Scandium, Sc 45.10

Cerium, Ce 140.25 Gadolinium, Gd 157.26 Yttrium, Y 88.9
Praseodymium, Pr 140.92 Terbium, Tb 159.2 Erbium, Er 167.7
Neodymium, Nd 144.27 Ytterbium, Yt 173 6
Samarium, Sm 150.43
, Further details concerning the chemistry of the rare earths can be found in
(the articles by R. J. Meyer which are published in Abegg's Handbuch der
anorganischen Chemie and in the monograph by R. J. Meyer and O. Hauser
" Die Analyse der seltenen Erden und der Erdsauren."
As raw material for the rare-earth preparations, the mixture of carbon-
ates obtained in working up monazite sand (No. 170) may be used. The
crude cerium carbonate, or cerium oxalate, that can be obtained on the market,
furnishes practically the same mixture of the earths, since it usually con-
tains 40 to 50% of cerium salt, 15 to 20% of lanthanum salt, 25 to 30% of
didymium salt, and 5 to 8% of yttrium earths.
The cerium is precipitated, according to the method of Witt and Theel, by
adding ammonium persulphate to a boiling solution of the nitrates; eerie sul-
 SEPARATION OF THE RARE EARTHS. 241

phate is thereby formed, but this is partially hydrolyzed, and an insoluble basic
salt precipitates. By neutralizing the acid set free by the hydrolysis, a com-
plete precipitation is made possible, but on the other hand, it is necessary to
keep the liquid slightly acid to prevent the other rare earths from precipi-
tating with the cerium. All of the cerium is thrown down in this way, but
it is contaminated with some lanthanum and didymium.
Lanthanum and didymium are thrown out of the nitrate as potassium
double sulphates; the yttrium earths remain in solution and can be precipi-
tated as oxalates by adding ammonium oxalate.
The products of this separation are then each further separated and
purified.

Dissolve 100 g. of the raw material by warming it on the water

bath in 200 g. of concentrated nitric acid. The crude carbonate
dissolves very quickly, but, if cerium oxalate is used, the addi-
tion of fuming nitric acid is necessary to effect solution. Evapo-
rate the solution on the water bath until it is of sirupy consis-
tency, and then take it up in 1500 c.c. of water. Add 35 g. of
ammonium persulphate to this solution and heat it to boiling in
a large evaporating dish. Stir the liquid by means of a mechan-
ical stirrer, and add powdered magnesium carbonate in small por-
tions to the boiling mixture until finally Congo paper is no longer
turned blue, although litmus is still reddened by the solution, —
toward the last the magnesium carbonate should be added very
cautiously. The reaction is complete when, even after boiling
for five minutes, the liquid does not become acid to Congo paper,
although it must still turn litmus red. About 40 g. of the mag-
nesium carbonate are required. Allow the dull-yellow precipi-
tate to settle, drain it on the suction filter while it is still warm,
and wash it with hot water.
Test the filtrate for cerium as follows: To 2 c.c. of the solution
add ammonium chloride and then ammonia; filter off and wash
the precipitate and then dissolve it in 5 to 10 c.c. of hot concen-
trated potassium carbonate solution. Treat the solution with
hydrogen peroxide and some ammonia, and warm it. A slimy
precipitate is produced, and if cerium is present both the solu-
tion and the supernatant liquid are of an orange-yellow color; if
cerium is absent the precipitate is white or a faint pink. The
test is less sensitive if the original solution is warmed directly with
hydrogen peroxide and sodium carbonate. If the above tests
show that cerium is present, add more ammonium persulphate to
242 COMPOUNDS OP THE RARE ELEMENTS.
the solution and precipitate the cerium as before by adding mag-
nesium carbonate.
Bring the cerium-free filtrate to boiling in an evaporating dish,
and, while stirring as before with the mechanical device, add
powdered potassium sulphate (about 35 g. in all) until the didy-
mium absorption bands can scarcely be detected spectroscopically
in a filtered sample of the solution. In making this test, use a
pocket spectroscope; fill a test-tube of 2 to 3 cm. diameter — or
still better a parallel-walled vessel of the same thickness — with
the solution and place it between the slit of the spectroscope and
a Welsbach light. The most easily recognized of the absorption
bands of didymium are those to the right and left of the sodium
line. If the solution is almost free from didymium, drain the pre-
cipitate of the double sulphates, M2(SO4)3 «3 K2SO4, of didymium
and lanthanum, and wash it with a dilute potassium sulphate
solution.
Add ammonium oxalate to the filtrate, and after some hours
wash the precipitate with cold water; this precipitate contains the
remainder of the rare earths that were present in the monazite —
chiefly the yttrium earths; these are not to be further separated.

(a) Cerium Compounds.

Working Up of the Cerium Precipitate.
Cerium may be readily purified from other metals by forming eerie ammo-
nium nitrate, (NH4)2Ce(NO3)6, which is difficultly soluble in nitric acid.
Weigh the dried cerium precipitate approximately, and boil it
in an evaporating dish for 30 minutes with five times its weight of
a 10% solution of sodium hydroxide. After letting the solution
settle, decant off the liquid as completely as possible, and boil
the residue with some fresh caustic soda solution. Pour off the
solution again, and wash the residue by decantation with hot
water, pouring all the liquid through a filter. Finally, collect the
entire residue on the filter, wash it until free from soluble sul-
phate, and dry it in the hot closet.
Treat the eerie hydroxide thus obtained with 2.65 parts by
weight of concentrated nitric acid (sp. gr. 1.4), filter the solu-
tion through an asbestos felt in a Gooch crucible, and add to
the filtrate a hot solution of 0.39 parts of ammonium nitrate in
 CERIUM COMPOUNDS. 243

1.1 parts of water. Evaporate the solution on the water bath

until it begins to crystallize, then, after 12 hours, drain the red
crystals of the double nitrate and wash them with a little nitric
acid. Evaporate the mother-liquor to obtain several further
fractions of crystals, and collect each fraction by itself. From
the last mother-liquor, precipitate the remaining cerium, together
with the impurities, by diluting with water and adding oxalic
acid.
Ignite a small portion from each of the crystal fractions on a
porcelain crucible cover over the blast lamp. The residue of
eerie oxide is pale yellow when the cerium preparation is pure;
if didymium is present it is of a reddish to chocolate-brown color.
Recrystallize the fractions that are shown to be impure by dissolv-
ing the double nitrate in 1.6 to 1.7 times its weight of 40% nitric
acid (3 parts HN0 3 , sp. gr. 1.4, and 2 parts H2O).
For the successful preparation of eerie ammonium nitrate it is
important to avoid reducing the tetravalent cerium. On this
account the nitric acid which is used as solvent must be boiled
for a short time in a flask in order to expel lower oxides of
nitrogen.

Cerium Sulphides.
Sulphides of cerium can be prepared by igniting cerous sulphate in a
stream of hydrogen sulphide. If the temperature remains below 720° the
dark-brown disulphide CeS2 is formed; but if it is kept at a bright red heat,
dark cinnabar-red cerous sulphide, Ce2S3, is produced.

Add hydrogen peroxide to a boiling aqueous solution, con-

taining 20 g. of eerie ammonium nitrate, until the liquid is decolor-
ized; then add 7 g. of sulphuric acid and evaporate the solution
to dryness. Place the residue in a short combustion tube and
heat it in a stream of hydrogen sulphide which has been dried
with calcium chloride. Heat the tube in a combustion furnace
first to a dull red and later to a bright red, and occasionally
revolve the tube on its long axis.
If cerous sulphide has been formed, the product dissolves in
hydrochloric acid without residue; if the product contains cerium
disulphide, free sulphur separates on this treatment. Test the
hydrochloric acid solution with barium chloride to show whether
the sulphate has been completely decomposed.
244 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.
Cerous Chloride, CeCl3.
Anhydrous cerous chloride is readily obtained from the sulphide by ignit-
ing the latter in a stream of hydrogen chloride gas.

First prepare cerium sulphide in the manner just described;

allow the tube to partly cool, and pass through it a stream of
thoroughly dry hydrogen chloride; then heat it again to dull red-
ness. The transformation is complete when the preparation has
become pure white.
Anhydrous cerous chloride forms a crystalline very hygroscopic
mass.
Anhydrous Ceric Sulphate, Ce(<SO4)2. Prepare ceric oxide by
igniting ceric ammonium nitrate strongly; pulverize the oxide,
and boil it with a large excess of concentrated sulphuric acid,
whereby it is converted into the deep-yellow crystalline sulphate
without being dissolved. Pour off the excess of acid, wash the
residue by decantation with glacial acetic acid, drain it on a
hardened filter paper, and dry it over lime in a vacuum desiccator.
Ceric sulphate dissolves to a considerable extent but never com-
pletely in water; on boiling the dilute solution an insoluble basic
salt is precipitated. This behavior is utilized, as has been shown,
in the separation of cerium from the other rare earths.

(6) Lanthanum Compounds.

Lanthanum Carbonate from the Lanthanum-Didymium Precipi-
tate. Boil up the precipitate of the potassium double sulphates
with five parts of concentrated nitric acid in a porcelain casserole,
and pour the entire mass into fifteen parts of boiling water. To
the clear solution, which is colored violet by neodymium, add
ammonium oxalate, — taking 0.7 to 0.8 g. to each 1.0 g. of the
double salt, — neutralize the solution with ammonia, and after
some time filter off the precipitate. Wash and dry the latter, and
ignite it over a Fletcher burner in a porcelain or clay crucible,
surrounded by a funnel to prevent loss of heat. Dissolve the
brown oxide thus formed by heating on the water bath with as
little concentrated nitric acid as possible, evaporate the solution
to a sirupy consistency, and dissolve the nitrates in 1 liter of
water.
 LANTHANUM COMPOUNDS. 245

To separate the didymium from the lanthanum, sift magne-

sium oxide very slowly through wire gauze into the solution of
the nitrates, while this is kept boiling in a porcelain dish and is at
the same time stirred with a mechanical stirrer. The didymium
is precipitated together with a little lanthanum, but the greater
part of the lanthanum remains in solution free from didymium.
Control the separation by means of the spectroscope, and stop
adding magnesium oxide when a filtered portion of the solution,
in a layer 3 cm. thick, shows no trace of the didymium absorp-
tion bands.
Filter off and wash the precipitate and work it up for didy-
mium as directed below under (c). Precipitate the lanthanum
from the filtrate by means of ammonium carbonate solution,
after first adding 10 g. of ammonium chloride. In order to
remove all traces of magnesium, dissolve the precipitate in hydro-
chloric acid and reprecipitate it with ammonium carbonate.
Lanthanum Sulphate, La%{SOi)3-'dH2O. The ennea-hydrate
of lanthanum sulphate is readily obtained from lanthanum oxide,
which is itself prepared by igniting the carbonate. Following
the directions given for the preparation of thorium sulphate
(No. 170) treat the oxide with concentrated sulphuric acid, dis-
solve the anhydrous sulphate in ice-water, and then warm the
solution.
Determine the atomic weight of lanthanum by the sulphate
method (cf. p. 236).
Lanthanum Acetate, La(C2H3O2)s.Z H2O. Ignite 5 g. of lan-
thanum carbonate in a platinum crucible, pulverize the oxide thus
formed, and treat it in a flask with three times its weight of gla-
cial acetic acid; a reaction takes place with strong evolution of
heat, either of itself or upon gentle heating. Dissolve the result-
ing thick paste in as little water as possible, whereby only a very
small residue remains, and evaporate the nitrate until crystalliza-
tion takes place. Drain the crystals, wash them, first with 50%
alcohol, and then with pure alcohol, and dry them in the hot
closet.
Dependent preparation: Lanthanum Blue, No. 23.
Lanthanum Sulphide and Anhydrous Lanthanum Chloride can
be prepared according to the methods given for the correspond-
ing cerium compounds.
246 COMPOUNDS OF THE RARE ELEMENTS.

(c) Didymium Compounds.

Dissolve the didymium precipitate in as little warm nitric acid
as possible, and treat the solution with magnesium oxide, as
directed in the didymium-lanthanum separation, until the didy-
mium lines are only just faintly visible. Drain and wash the
resulting precipitate, dissolve it in hydrochloric acid, and repre-
cipitate the didymium with ammonium carbonate; in order to
remove the last traces of magnesium, dissolve and again reprecipi-
tate the didymium carbonate. The preparation thus obtained
consists chiefly of the neodymium salt, and is consequently pink
in color. A separation from praseodymium is not possible on a
small scale.
Didymium Chloride voith Alcohol of CrystallizationjDiClfSCJIsOH.
Ignite 5 g. of didymium carbonate in a platinum crucible, dissolve
the powdered didymium oxide by boiling with a saturated solu-
tion of dry hydrogen chloride in anhydrous alcohol (about 50 c.c.
are necessary), and filter the yellow solution, which has the con-
sistency of thin sirup, through a felt of asbestos in a Gooch cruci-
ble. Saturate the nitrate with dry hydrogen chloride gas. Drain
the large light-red crystals which separate in the course of several
hours, and wash them with a little alcohol. Yield, 6 to 7 g.
Didymium Sulphide and Anhydrous Didymium Chloride can be
prepared according to the methods given for the corresponding
cerium compounds.
 INDEX.
PAGE
Acetoneoxime 157, 158
Acetone-semicarbazone 157, 161
Acetylene 97
Acids, bases, and salts 65
Adsorbed water 41, 190
Adsorption 41, 44
Adsorption compounds 41
curve 44
equilibrium 45
Affinity of condition 42
Aggregation, differences in the state of 21
Alcosols 39
Allotropy of cuprous mercuriiodide 37
of mercuric iodide 146
of mercuric sulphide 88
of selenium 23
of silver mercuriiodide 37
of silver sulphide 34
of sulphur 35
of sulphur trioxide 58
Alum from kaolin 130
Aluminium amalgam 16
boat 101
chloride, anhydrous 77c
heat of combustion of 17
sulphide 19
Aluminothermy 16
Amicron unit 40
Aminomethanedisulphonic acid 158, 159
Ammonia, from the atmosphere 94
from the elements 54
liquid 184
Ammonia soda process 134
Ammonium amalgam 26
chloride, dissociation of 156
copper tetrasulphide 139
cupric sulphate , 170
pentasulphide 106
phosphomolybdate 152
247
248 INDEX.
PAGE
Ammonium plumbic chloride 143
tribromide 107
Ammonium compounds 156
Amorphous state 38
Amyl nitrite 209
Antimony 22, 25
basic chloride of 22, 77i
pentachloride 77i
sulphate 129
sulphide, colloidal 43
trichloride 77H
Apparatus for the preparation of solid chlorides 77, 78, 227, 228
for the preparation of liquid chlorides 77F, 82
Aquopentamminecobaltic salts 172, 173, 177
Arsenic acid 62
Asbestos heating box .'.. .' 3
platinized 59
Assay by fire 27
Atomic nuclei 9
weight determination according to the sulphate method 239, 245
Atomic, kernels 13
sheath 12
octets 12
Autooxidation 105
Auto complex compound 148

Babo boiling funnel 3

Barium chloride from witherite 77
Barium chloride dihydrate, eutectic point of, with water 193
Barium dithionate 131
ferrate 126
hypophosphite 135
nitrate from heavy spar 129
peroxide 102
peroxide hydrate 102
trithiocarbonate 137
Becquerel rays 231
Benzene, from acetylene 98
Benzoic acid, distribution of, between two solvents , 109
Beryllium acetate, basic 222
hydroxide 221
Bismuth iodide, basic 77J
nitrate 124
nitrate, basic 124
tribromide 77J
triiodide 77i
 INDEX. 249
PAGE
Blast furnace equilibrium 56
Boiling-point determination 7
Boiling-point determination, with electrical pyrometer 78
Boron, crystallized 14
nitride 94
Bredig 36
Brownian movement 40
Bumping, methods of avoiding 4

Cadmium iodide 148

Calcium hydride 64
nitride 95
sulphate, hydrates of 195
Calibration of the pyrometer 87
of the spectroscope 220
Camphor, as catalyzer 201
Carbides 97
Carbonatotetramminecobaltic salts 172
Carbonyl groups, detection of 157
Cassius, Purple of 24, 42, 48
Catalysis 43, 58, 70, 103, 201
poisoning of 43, 59
Central atom 141
Cerium compounds 240
hydride 64
Chamber crystals 129, 204
Changes of condition 26
Chlorine, preparation of 77B
Chlorides, preparation of, from oxides 81
Chlorination 199
Chloroaquotetramminecobaltic salts 173, 182
Chloronitritotetramminecobaltic salts 183
Chloropentamminechromic salts 184
Chloropentamminecobaltic salts 172, 173, 174, 181
Chromic chloride, hydrates of 199
Chromic oxide. 63
Chromium metal 18
nitride 96
trichloride, anhydrous 71
hydrates 197
Cinnabar 25, 88
cis-Position 181
Classification of the elements 9
Clay mantle 1
Cobalt compounds free from nickel 174
Cobaltiammonia compounds 167 el seq.
250 INDEX.
PAGE
Cobaltous ammonia salts 185-188
Cobaltous salt of hydromercurithiocyanic acid 147
Colloidal solution 33
Colloidal state 33
Colloids, protective 42
Columbite 223
Columbian compounds 223
Complex cations 155, 164, 165
Complex compounds 99, 140, 155
classification of 100
Complex cyanogen compounds 139
Complexes, formation of 141
stability of 141
Compounds, simple 51
containing a complex negative component 99
containing a complex positive component 155
Concentration, anomalous change in 140
Concentration, molal 53
Condensation of very volatile substances 8, 57
Conductivity, molecular, of the metal-ammonia compounds 165
Contact process 53, 58
Convective transference 42
Cooling curve 28
Coordination number 141, 166
theory. . *. 141, 166
Copper ferrocyanide membrane 49
hydride 65
sulphate 57
Correction of melting and boiling points 22, 78
Coulomb 28
Croceocobaltic salts 167, 180
Cryohydrates 189, 194
Crystallization 4
Crystalloids 39
Crystals, growth of large at expense of small grains 174
Cupellation 21
Cupric ammonium sulphate 169
bromide 73
sulphate 57
hydrates of 190
Cuprous bromide 73
chloride 74
mercuriiodide 37
oxide 56
Curie, M. and Mme 231
Current density 116
 INDEX. 251
PAGE
Current yield 30, 116
Cyanic acid, constitution of 113
Cyanogen 93, 94
Cyanogen compounds, complex 140

Decomposition potential 67
pressure 163
Decomposition temperature 163
Density determination of solid substances 16, 30
Deville, H. St. Claire 103
Devitrification of glass 39
Dialysis 44, 46
Diazomethanedisulphonic acid 158, 159
Dibrompraseo salts '. 179
Dibromotetramminecobaltic salts 179
Dichloropraseo salts 182
Dichlorotetramminecobaltic salts 167
Didymium compounds 246
Diethyl sulphite, symmetrical 209
unsymmetrical 211
Dilution law 67
Dimercuriammonium hydroxide 162
Dinitritotetramminecobaltic salts 180
Diphenyl 217
Diphenyl lead iodide 216
Dissociation, electrolytic 65, 100
detection of 69
Dissociation of carbon dioxide 15
of complex compounds 100, 156
Dissociation, thermic 32, 52, 156
Distillation 5
fractional 205, 211, 213
Dithio-oxamide 93
Double salts 99
Drying of rinsed vessels 8

Efficiency of reactions 54
Electroaffinity 67
Electrode surface 116
Electrolysis 28
Electrolytes 65
precipitating action of, on colloids 41, 43
Electrons 9, 28, 66
Electrons, planetary 11
valence 13
Elements, periodic classification of 9
252 INDEX.
PAGE
Elements, extraction of 14
occurrence of 14
rare 219
Enantiotropy 33
Endothermic reactions 55, 91, 103
Equilibrium, state of 52
in blast furnace 56
E3ter equilibrium 208
Esters 207
of nitric acid 208
of nitrous acid 209
Esters of phosphoric acid 212
of silicic acid 213
of sulphurous acid 209, 211
Ether, compounds of complex acids with 151
Ethyl nitrate 208
Eutectic of barium-chloride-dihydrate /water 194
Eutectic point 189, 193
Evaporation 4
of inflammable liquids 216
Exothermic reactions 55

Faraday, electrochemical unit 28

Faraday's law 28
Fehling's solution 63
Ferrate 126
Ferric chloride, anhydrous 77A
Filter paper, hardened 4, 5
Filtration 4, 5
Fire-assay 27
Fixed points in thermometry 87, 198
Flavocobaltic salts 179
Fluorescein 61
Fractional distillation 205, 211, 213
Fractionating flasks 5, 6
Frankland, E 214
Freezing mixture 57, 184, 189
Freezing-point curve 189
Furnaces 1, 2, 59

Gold, colloidal solution of 47

extraction of 23
ruby glass 47
Goldschmidt process 17
Graham, T 39
Grignard's reagent 215
 INDEX. 253
PAGE
Guldberg, C M 53
Gypsum 195
Halogen compounds 73
Halogens, complex acids of 40
complex salts of 40
oxyacids 114
Heating curve 34
of crucibles 1
of dishes 4
of flasks 3
of tubes 2
with a reflux condenser 3
Hexamminechromic nitrate 184
Hexamminecobaltic salts 175
Hexamminecobaltous salts 185
Hexamminenickelous bromide 171
Hittorf, W 140, 148
Homogenepus complexes 101, 108, 109
Hot-cold tubes 103
Hydrates, theory of 188
of calcium sulphate 195
of chromium chloride 199
of sodium sulphate 196
Hydration of the ions 191
Hydrazine sulphate 158
Hydrides 63
Hydriodic acid 70
Hydrobromic acid 70
Hydrochloric acid 77c
Hydrocyanic acid 91, 92
Hydroferrocyanio acid 146
Hydrofluosilicic acid : 142
Hydrogels 41
Hydrogen chloride, preparation of 77c
Hydrogen cyanide 91, 92
Hydrogen peroxide 103-106
catalysis 43
reactions 83, 104
Hydrolysis 67, 68
Hydrosols 39
Hydroxylaminedisulphonic acid 156, 158
Hydroxylamine sulphate 156
Hyposulphurous acid 132
Ice curve 194
Ignition powder 17
254 INDEX.
PAGE
Indirect combination 169
Inner sphere 166, 181
Inoculation 36, 38, 196, 197
Iodic acid 119
anhydride 119
Iodo-starch 46
Iodine from residues 74
Iodine tetrachloride of potassium Ill
Ionization tendency 67
Iron, passive 32
Irreversible colloids 38
Isomerism, dynamic 210
spacial 167, 181, 188
Isobars 164
Isotherms 164

Kaolin 130
Kernel of an atom 13
Kuhne's dialyzing tube 43

Lakes 46
Lanthanum blue 45
compounds 244
Lead from galena 26
from lead oxide 15
Lead tetrachloride 143
Le Chatelier pyrometer 86
Lepidolite 217
Lithium 28
Lithium carbonate from minerals 219
Luteochromic salt 184
Luteocobaltic salts 167, 175

Magnesium nitrate hexahydrate 191

nitride 94
phosphide 96
Magnus, salt of 166
Manganates 124
Manganese 17
Manganese chloride 77
sulphide 89
Mangano-manganic oxide 17
Mantle, clay 1
Marignac 223
Mass action law 53, 66, 68, 109, 208
Maxima, concealed 191
 INDEX. 255
PAGE
Melting-point, correction of 22, 78
determination 21
diagram 189, 193
Mercuric cyanide 91
iodide 37, 145
oxide 162
sulphide 88
Mercury from cinnabar 25
Metal-ammonia compounds 163
Metals, base and noble 67
reduction by electrolysis 28
Metal-organic compounds 213
Methylnitrite 209
Micro-micron unit 40
Millon's base .' 162
salts of 162
Molybdenum blue 46
compounds 224
Molybdenum, metal 226
Molecules, size of 40
Molecular dispersion 40
Monazite 237
Monochlorsulphuric acid 201, 203
Monochloramine 158, 160
Monotropy 33
Mosaic gold 89

Neutralization 67
Nickel, finely divided 217
cobalt-free 174
Nickel air bath 3
carbonyl 217
oxalate 217
Nitrate method 123
Nitrates and nitrites 121
Nitric oxide-metal compounds 155
Nitrides 92
Nitrilosulphonate of sodium 156
Nitrito-acids 149
Nitrogen dioxide 61
trioxide 61
Nitrososulphonates 156
Nitrosylsulphuric acid 129, 206
Nitrous oxide 112
Non-electrolytes, complex 201
Nuclei, atomic 9;
256 INDEX.
PAGE
Octets of atoms 12
Oersted 81
Optical isomers 182
rotation 154
Organo-complexes 153
Osmotic pressure 49
Ostwald's dilution law 67
Oxide hydrogels 41
Oxides 56
Oxides, hydrated 41
Oxydimercurammonium hydroxide 162, 163
Oxycobaltammine chloride 173

Palladium-hydrogen 64
Passive condition 38
Peptonization 40
Periodic classification of the elements 9
Periods in the classification of the elements 13
Perchloric acid 118
Peroxides 101
Petalite 219
Peyrone, Salt of 168
Phosphides 96
Phosphorous acid 136
Phosphorus, constitution of acids of 135
oxychloride 77H
pentachloride 77G
as a chlorinating agent , 201, 203
pentasulphide 85
Phosphorus residues, disposal of 77o
trichloride 77G
Phosphine 97
Phthalic acid from naphthaline 60
acid anhydride 61
Pitchblende 231
Platinized asbestos 59
Platino-ammonia compounds 168
Platinotypes 153
Platinum ammonia compounds 166 et seq.
as catalyzer 43, 59, 70
colloidal 42
Platosammine chloride 168
Poisoning of catalyzers 43
Polyhalogen compounds 107
Polymerization 32
Polynitrides 112
 INDEX. 257
PAGE
Polysulphides 106
Potassium bromate 121
bromide 121
chlorate 117
eobalticyanide 146
cobaltinitrite 150
cobaltothiocyanate 147
columbium oxyfluoride 223
cyanate 113
didymium sulphate 242
ferric oxalate 153
ferric sulphide 139
iodate from potassium chlorate 120
iodide 74
iodine tetrachloride Ill
lanthanum sulphate 242, 245
lead iodide 144
mercuriiodide 145
mercurinitrite 149
nitrate from sodium nitrate 122
perchlorate 118
permanganate 124-126
persulphate, electrolytically 133
tantalum heptafluoride 223
tribromide 108, 109
triiodide 110
trithiocarbonate solution 137
Potential series 67
Praseo salts 179, 182
Precipitating colloids 47
Precipitation process 25
Protective colloids 42, 47
Protons 9
Prussic acid residues 92
Pseudo solutions 39
Pulverizing 8
Pure compounds 45, 46
Purple of Cassius 19, 35, 42
Pyrometer 86
Pyrosulphuric acid dichloride 202

Quantum theory 11

Radioactive constituents of pitchblende 231-233

Radioactivity 231, 233
detection of 233
258 INDEX.
PAGE
Rare earths 239
historical 239
separation 241 et seq.
Reactivity and degree of dissociation 52
Reduction with aluminium 16
with aqueous reducing agents 23, 24, 47
with carbon 15
with carbon monoxide 15, 48
with hydrogen 48, 84
with potassium cyanide 20, 21
Reversible colloids 39
reactions 52, 53, 66, 67, 102, 109, 208
Richards, T. W 198
Rieset, Base of 168
Roasting processes 26
Roseocobaltic salts 167, 177
Rotation, optical 154
Row burner 2
Rubidium, spectroscopic detection of 220
iodide tetrachloride Ill
triiodide Ill
Rutile 81

Salting out 41, 46

Saponification 201
of esters 207 et seq.
Saturation capacity of the metals 214
Schlippe's salt 138
Sealing flasks 8
tubes 8, 57
Secondary valences 141, 155
Selenium 23
dioxide 23
Semicarbazide hydrochloride 161
Semipermeable membranes 49
Sheath, in an atom 12
Silicates, of the heavy metals, membranes of 50
Silicic acid hydrogel 152
Silicon chloroform 81
crystallized 19
hexachloride 81
Silicon octochloride 81
tetrachloride 80
Silicotungstic acid 152
Silver from silver iodide 211
by cupellation 26
 INDEX. 259
PAGE
Silver-ammonia ion 164
sulphate 169
Silver hydrazoate 112
mercuriiodide , 37
sulphate 169
sulphide 34
sulphite 211
Simple compounds 51-97
Sodamide 112
Sodium amalgam 25
bicarbonate 134
carbonate 134
cobaltinitrite 149
hydrazoate 112
hypochlorite 114
nitrite 121
peroxide 101
tetrathionate 132
thioantimonate 138
thiosulphate 131
Solubility curve 194
Solutions, colloidal, true and dispersoids 40
supersaturated 194, 195
Solvay process 134
Spectroscopic analysis 220
Spodumene 219
Stannic chloride 79
oxide, colloidal 48
sulphide 89
Stannous sulphide 88
Substituted ammonium compounds 156
Succinic acid, distribution of, between two solvents 108
Suction 5
Sulphate method for atomic weight determinations 239, 245
Sulphides 85
Sulphur, amorphous 39
chloride, S2C12 77E
constitution of oxy-acids of 126
Sulphur dioxide 56
preparation of 56, 77D
livers of 106
monoclinic 35
rhombic 35
Sulphuric acid from pyrite 128
by the contact process 53, 58
dichloride 201
260 INDEX.
PAGE
Sulphuric acid from monochloride 201, 203
Sulphurous acid chloride 204
Sulphur trioxide 58
Sulphuryl chloride 201
Supercooling 22, 38
Supersaturated solutions 196, 197
Suspensions, colloidal solutions and true solutions 40

Tammann, G 190, 191

Tantalum compounds 223
Temperature, influence of, on equilibrium constants 55
Tension curves , 164
Tetrammine cupric sulphate 170
Tetranitrito-diammine-cobaltate of potassium 150
Tetraphenyl lead 215
Thallic oxide, hydrated 73
Thallous hydroxide 73
nitrate 72
sulphate 72
thallic chloride 73
Thermic analysis 189, 191
Thermite 17
Thermoelectric temperature measurements 86
Thermometry, fixed points in 87, 198
Thionyl chloride 204
Thorium, atomic weight determination of 239
compounds 236
Time reaction 120
Tin from cassiterite 20
sulphides of 88, 89
tetrachloride 79
Titanium dioxide 83
disulphide 90
tetrachloride from rutile 81
trichloride 84
Transition point, determination of 33, 37
of sodium sulphate 197
fraras-Position. .; 181
Trinitritotriamminecobalt 183
Tungsten compounds 229

Ultramicroscopic investigation 40
Uranium compounds 234
Uranyl lsevo-malate 154
Urea 114
 INDEX. 261
PAGE
Valence electrons 13
Valencies, principal and secondary 141
van't Hoff, J. H , 55
Vapor tension analysis 164, 190

Waage, P 53
Washing precipitates 5, 136
Water, detection of traces of 145
of constitution 189
Werner, A 141, 155, 166, 180
Williamson's violet '. 93
Winkler, Cl 58
Wohler, F , 63, 96

Yttrium earths 239

Ziervogel process 123

Zinc ethyl 214
Zircon gold purple 49
oxide, colloidal 47